CBT for Weight Management: Daily Tips for Staying on Track

Weight management is not just about the food you put into your body, it’s also about building confidence and resilience, and maintaining motivation long term. Since Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) is focused on helping people change the way they think, feel and behave, a CBT-based weight loss program can increase your chance for success now, and help you maintain a healthy lifestyle for years to come.

Whether you need a little extra motivation on a Monday or ideas for avoiding potential weekend pitfalls on a Friday, our daily weight management tips can help.

Thursday Think Tip – June 30, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – June 30, 2022

June 30, 2022/emattson

Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating and health? Is it easy feeling overly full? Is it easy worrying about the example you might be setting for your kids? None of those things are easy!

Wednesday Sabotage – June 29, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – June 29, 2022

June 29, 2022/emattson

I’m going to eat this food because I want it. I just don’t care about my goals right now.

Response: While I may not feel like I care in this moment, I definitely will care very soon. Look at my Advantages List and remind myself of the huge and profound goals I’m trying to accomplish. These things matter. I really, really do care.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 28, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – June 28, 2022

June 28, 2022/emattson

Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take ten minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of ten minutes than taking care of myself.”

Monday Motivation – June 27, 2022
Monday Motivation – June 27, 2022

June 27, 2022/emattson

Do you have a meal plan for this week? Remember that in-the-moment decisions are the hardest to make well (it uses a different part of your brain), so deciding what to eat in advance greatly increases your chances of healthy eating success.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 24, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 24, 2022

June 24, 2022/emattson

Do something fun this weekend! The more sources of fun and pleasure you have in your life, the less you’ll turn to food to feel fulfilled.

Thursday Think Tip – June 23, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – June 23, 2022

June 23, 2022/emattson

For many people, eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 22, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – June 22, 2022

June 22, 2022/emattson

I’m not able to lose weight right now, so I should just give up.

Response: Even if weight loss isn’t possible during this exact moment, weight maintenance is SO MUCH BETTER than gaining weight! At least in maintenance, I get to continue feeling in control and not worry about my health suffering or my clothes getting tight. Maintenance is so, so worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 21, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – June 21, 2022

June 21, 2022/emattson

Make sure you are getting to bed on time! Not getting enough sleep/not prioritizing sleep is the single biggest thing you can do to sabotage your healthy eating habits. Sleep matters so much!

Monday Motivation – June 20, 2022
Monday Motivation – June 20, 2022

June 20, 2022/emattson

None of this is easy, but ALL of this is worth it. As we always say, “It’s work, but it works!”

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 17, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 17, 2022

June 17, 2022/emattson

If you’re dining with other people this weekend, keep in mind that it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and wind up overeating. It can help to immediately portion off how much you are going to eat because that way, even if you do eat it while distracted, at least you won’t consume more than you had planned.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 10, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 10, 2022

June 10, 2022/emattson

Make a plan for the weekend! Keep in mind that the thought of having to make a plan is worse than the reality (in reality, you’ll probably feel better and more in control when you have a plan), and the thought of not making a plan is better than the reality (without a plan, chances are you’ll get off track and regret it).

Thursday Think Tip – June 9, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – June 9, 2022

June 9, 2022/emattson

When you go to the grocery store and are tempted to buy things like cookies or chips, ask yourself, “What is the evidence that if I bring this home, I’ll eat it in a way that I feel good about?” If the answer is, “Not much,” then consider not buying it!

Tuesday Reality Check – May 31, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – May 31, 2022

May 31, 2022/emattson

Many people only take breaks from work throughout the day to eat because they feel entitled to eat, but not do other things. If you need a break, you’re entitled to take a break! But if you’re not hungry, you’re not entitled to take a break to eat. Work on finding other things you can do during breaks to give yourself the reset that you need.

Monday Motivation – May 30, 2022
Monday Motivation – May 30, 2022

May 30, 2022/emattson

For many of us, winter weather has passed, so that’s no longer an excuse to not get outside and get fresh air. If you fell out of the habit of walking/biking/running outside during the winter, this week is a great time to restart.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 27, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 27, 2022

May 27, 2022/emattson

This weekend, work on finding joy in non-food related ways! The more alternative sources of joy you have, the less you’ll turn to food to fill that need.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 24, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – May 24, 2022

May 24, 2022/emattson

Critical reminder: Taking care of yourself is a necessity—not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take ten minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of ten minutes than taking care of myself.”

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 20, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 20, 2022

May 20, 2022/emattson

This weekend, if you think, “I don’t feel like getting to sleep on time,” remind yourself, “Oh, well! Getting enough sleep is the single most important thing I can do to support my healthy eating and exercise goals. I may not feel like getting to bed right now, but tomorrow I’ll be nothing but thankful that I did.” Weekends are hard enough without adding lack of sleep to the equation!

Thursday Think Tip – May 19, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – May 19, 2022

May 19, 2022/emattson

Make sure you continually look out for ways in which you may be engaging in all-or-nothing thinking. Do you think if you can’t exercise for 30+ minutes it’s not worth doing anything? Do you think if you can’t eat or drink EVERYTHING you want to, you won’t be able to enjoy yourself? Do you think that one mistake means you’re completely off track? Remember that, in almost every scenario, there is a lot of middle ground!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 18, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – May 18, 2022

May 18, 2022/emattson

The scale isn’t moving. This is so discouraging; maybe I’ll give up.


Response: While it’s true it’s discouraging when the scale doesn’t move, it doesn’t mean I should give up. If I give up, it will never move down (and it’s almost guaranteed to move up). If I keep doing what I’m doing, it will eventually move down, and when it does, I’ll be so glad I stuck with it. Plus, chances are other things ARE moving even if the scale isn’t (I may be losing inches, my blood pressure may be better, my sense of control may be increasing, etc.).

Tuesday Reality Check – May 17, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – May 17, 2022

May 17, 2022/emattson

Are you buying things at the grocery store “in case” you might want them over the next week? Is having those things at home taxing your on-track muscle? If so, leave the struggle at the store! Stop buying them and save yourself hours of struggle over the next weeks.

Monday Motivation – May 16, 2022
Monday Motivation – May 16, 2022

May 16, 2022/emattson

Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually, the small goals lead up to big ones!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 13, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 13, 2022

May 13, 2022/emattson

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This weekend, plan in advance!     

Thursday Think Tip – May 12, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – May 12, 2022

May 12, 2022/emattson

If every time you make a mistake you start thinking, “I can’t do this. I’ll never succeed,” remind yourself that that is just your hopeless/helpless mode talking. It’s not an accurate depiction of reality. You CAN do it and you ARE doing it, but that doesn’t mean you’ll never make mistakes!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 11, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – May 11, 2022

May 11, 2022/emattson

I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to gain control of my eating is a process, and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 10, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – May 10, 2022

May 10, 2022/emattson

While we know getting on the scale regularly doesn’t work for everyone, for many people it is a critical accountability tool long-term. Chances are, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Monday Motivation – May 9, 2022
Monday Motivation – May 9, 2022

May 9, 2022/emattson

One of the things we’re working on this week is trying to establish a daily mindfulness practice. We’re starting with three minutes a day – who wants to join us?

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 6, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 6, 2022

May 6, 2022/emattson

This weekend, you will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your on-track muscle (and simultaneously weaken your off-track muscle). If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because every time, you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

Thursday Think Tip – May 5, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – May 5, 2022

May 5, 2022/emattson

How do you feel physically after you eat a big, heavy meal? How do you feel physically after you eat a reasonable, healthy meal? Our guess is you feel very differently! Next time you’re making a decision about what to eat for a meal, ask yourself, “How do I want to feel when I finish?”

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 29, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 29, 2022

April 29, 2022/emattson

This weekend, if you think something like, “I won’t be able to resist overdoing the desserts at the party,” remind yourself that that is just negative fortune telling! Telling yourself ahead of time you won’t be able to resist overdoing it gives you an excuse to not even try. While it may be hard, it may also be doable!

Thursday Think Tip – April 28, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – April 28, 2022

April 28, 2022/emattson

Be on the lookout for self-deluded thinking, such as, “If no one is watching, [eating this] doesn’t count,” or, “If I eat it standing up, it doesn’t really count.” It all counts!

Wednesday Sabotage – April 27, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – April 27, 2022

April 27, 2022/emattson

I’ve made an eating mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day.

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan not to eat! I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 26, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – April 26, 2022

April 26, 2022/emattson

Make sure you have healthy, fast snacks readily available. If you do, chances are you’ll eat one and feel good about it. If you don’t, chances are you’ll eat something less healthy and not feel good about it.

Monday Motivation – April 25, 2022
Monday Motivation – April 25, 2022

April 25, 2022/emattson

If it doesn’t challenge you, it doesn’t change you. Working on gaining control over your eating is hard but so, so worth it.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 22, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 22, 2022

April 22, 2022/emattson

If you haven’t yet gotten in the habit of meal planning or meal prep during the weekend for the week ahead, this is the weekend to start! It’s worth it to do everything you can to maximize your chances of success, and meal planning/prep, for almost everyone, is a huge part of that.

Thursday Think Tip – April 21, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – April 21, 2022

April 21, 2022/emattson

If you’re in the habit of getting fast food often, or stopping into a pharmacy and buying a bag of candy and eating it, think about doing that makes you FEEL (not just about how it tastes). If it ultimately doesn’t make you feel good, it’s probably worth working on cutting it out, or at least cutting down on it.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 20, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – April 20, 2022

April 20, 2022/emattson

I don’t want to throw away the Easter candy because my kids are eating it.

Response: But am I eating it, too, in a way that I’m not feeling good about? Kids also don’t need a ton of sugar/candy (no one does!), so it may be worth having them pick out a few of their favorite pieces, putting them in bags with their names on it, and getting rid of the rest. While doing so may feel hard in the moment, chances are I’ll feel some relief once it’s gone.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 19, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – April 19, 2022

April 19, 2022/emattson

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like, ask yourself if you’re being all-or-nothing in your thinking. Chances are, SOME things are going well. Maybe even A LOT of things are going well, even though everything might not yet be fully in place. Make sure you give yourself credit for the great decisions and actions you are taking.

Monday Motivation – April 18, 2022
Monday Motivation – April 18, 2022

April 18, 2022/emattson

If you celebrated Easter this past weekend, take a moment to assess the candy/junk food situation in your house. If it’s excessive, remind yourself that all that will do is tax your “on track” muscle and make healthy eating a lot harder. Consider making sure your home environment is working FOR you, not against you.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 15, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 15, 2022

April 15, 2022/emattson

We know many of you are celebrating Easter this weekend. Take a moment and think about how previous Easters have gone for you and how that made you FEEL. If the answer is “not great,” then make a plan that will help you enjoy the holiday AND enjoy feeling in control. 

Thursday Think Tip – April 14, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – April 14, 2022

April 14, 2022/emattson

It’s so, so important to pay attention to non-scale victories – things like feeling great about sticking to your plan, overcoming a craving, feeling stronger at the gym, finding it easier to move around, etc. The scale is one measure of success, but it’s by no means the only one.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 13, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – April 13, 2022

April 13, 2022/emattson

I just want to eat whatever I want today with no restrictions.

Response: Eating “whatever I want” is a great fantasy. It’s so freeing and wonderful. But is it actually a great reality? In reality, when I overeat and feel out of control, it’s not actually very fun. I need to pay attention to what really feels good, not just what I think will feel good.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 12, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – April 12, 2022

April 12, 2022/emattson

The only bad workout is the one that didn’t happen. Commit to doing SOMETHING exercise-related this week.

Monday Motivation – April 11, 2022
Monday Motivation – April 11, 2022

April 11, 2022/emattson

This week, pick one habit that you currently have in place that isn’t serving you well, or pick one habit you’d like to start. Think of ONE small thing you can do to make changes in that direction and implement it, and make sure to give yourself LOTS of credit when you do!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 8, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 8, 2022

April 8, 2022/emattson

“A goal without a plan is just a wish.” What’s your plan to help you stay on track this weekend?

Thursday Think Tip – April 7, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – April 7, 2022

April 7, 2022/emattson

If you’re in the habit of getting fast food often, or stopping into a pharmacy and buying a bag of candy and eating it, think about doing that makes you FEEL (not just about how it tastes). If it ultimately doesn’t make you feel good, it’s probably worth working on cutting it out, or at least cutting down on it.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 6, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – April 6, 2022

April 6, 2022/emattson

I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight.

Response: Not seeing the number doesn’t change the number; it just lowers my ability to take control of the number. Getting back on the scale is an important sign that I’m committed to being on track and taking accountability. Whatever the number is, it’s not set in stone. I can and will make it go down.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 5, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – April 5, 2022

April 5, 2022/emattson

While it’s important to not beat yourself up every time you make a mistake, it’s also important to take a few minutes to learn from it so that you can figure out a strategy for next time you’re in a similar situation. In order to do this, ask yourself these three questions: What happened/what was the situation? What were the sabotaging thoughts that got in my way? What can I say and/or do differently next time?

Monday Motivation – April 4, 2022
Monday Motivation – April 4, 2022

April 4, 2022/emattson

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like, and you think, “I can’t even do it now; how will I ever be able to do it,” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future). It’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 1, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 1, 2022

April 1, 2022/emattson

This weekend, if you think, “Life is too short, so I’m just going to eat whatever I want,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent unhappy and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to feel in control of my eating.”

Thursday Think Tip – March 31, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – March 31, 2022

March 31, 2022/emattson

If you think, “I have to eat a lot at [this meal] or I might get too hungry,” remind yourself that there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 30, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – March 30, 2022

March 30, 2022/emattson

I’m just not an exerciser.

Response: That’s just an excuse! Even if I don’t naturally enjoy exercise, it doesn’t mean I can’t learn to enjoy the physical and psychological benefits of it. Telling myself that I’m not an exerciser will become a self-fulfilling prophesy. 

Tuesday Reality Check – March 29, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – March 29, 2022

March 29, 2022/emattson

Don’t let your end-of-the-day-self sabotage your healthy eating goals by relying on him/her to make decisions. Your morning self is a MUCH better, more reliable self to be making decisions, so let that person be your guide!

Monday Motivation – March 28, 2022
Monday Motivation – March 28, 2022

March 28, 2022/emattson

If you’re not great at self-care, you’re likely going to be vulnerable to turning to food when you get stressed or upset because you won’t have other ways of calming down or soothing yourself. This week, focus on building other means of comfort and stress relief into your life so you have other things to turn to besides food.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 25, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 25, 2022

March 25, 2022/emattson

This weekend, consider the rule of one: one serving at meals, one scoop of ice cream for dessert, one serving of chips at the restaurant, etc. Sticking to just one means you get to enjoy some food and continue making progress towards your goals.

Thursday Think Tip – March 24, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – March 24, 2022

March 24, 2022/emattson

If you think, “I just want to be free to eat whatever I want,” take some time to think about how eating in that way actually makes you feel. It’s a great fantasy, but for most people it’s not a great reality because they don’t feel good physically or psychologically as a result of overeating.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 23, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – March 23, 2022

March 23, 2022/emattson

I’m going to eat because I just need to feel better NOW.

Response: While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to EAT to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t sabotage other goals I have. Do something else that will help me feel better now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 22, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – March 22, 2022

March 22, 2022/emattson

If you’re an emotional eater, remember that you learned to eat when you were feeling bad, but you can unlearn it too. It’s not a given that food is the only way to feel better. What else are you going to do the next time you get stressed/anxious/angry/bored?

Monday Motivation – March 21, 2022
Monday Motivation – March 21, 2022

March 21, 2022/emattson

This week, focus on your home environment. It’s easier to reduce or eliminate the need for willpower than to expect yourself to exert it in any given moment. If there are certain foods in your house that continually sabotage you, get rid of them!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 18, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 18, 2022

March 18, 2022/emattson

In the moment, decisions are made by your “hot” brain, which is wired to care only about instant gratification. Future-oriented decisions use your “cool,” which cares about delayed gratification/every goal you have (not just what you want in any given moment). It’s not a guarantee that the hot brain will get it wrong, but it is a guarantee that it’s a lot less likely to get it right. If you eat out this weekend, look at menus in advance and let your cool brain make the decision about what to eat! 

Thursday Think Tip – March 17, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – March 17, 2022

March 17, 2022/emattson

A common thinking mistake people make is mind-reading – assuming they know what someone will think if they do or don’t eat something. Maybe you know, but maybe you don’t! Just because you’re hyper-aware of your food actions, doesn’t mean everyone else is.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 16, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – March 16, 2022

March 16, 2022/emattson

I need a break from work, so I’m going to have a snack.

Response: If I need a break, it’s legitimate to take a break, but if I’m not hungry, it’s not legitimate to take a break to eat. I need to feel entitled to give myself breaks that don’t have anything to do with food.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 15, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – March 15, 2022

March 15, 2022/emattson

Everyone has stress in their lives, so we can’t use feeling stressed as a reason to let go of healthy eating. Stress will be there either way. Make a list of things you can do the next time you feel stressed that will help you calm down without eating. Without a specific plan like this in place, chances are you’ll continue to turn to food to serve that purpose.

Monday Motivation – March 14, 2022
Monday Motivation – March 14, 2022

March 14, 2022/emattson

How are you doing with sugar? If you’re eating too much of it, consider focusing on adopting the plan of having one reasonable portion of dessert at night. Plan and portion out in advance what dessert you’ll have (no spontaneous decisions!). Then, decide in advance what highly distracting activity you’ll do once you finish to get your mind off of food and onto something else. 

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 11, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 11, 2022

March 11, 2022/emattson

What are you doing for fun this weekend?  As a reminder, the more sources of non-food-related fun/joy we have, the less we turn to food (or alcohol) to fill that need.

Thursday Think Tip – March 10, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – March 10, 2022

March 10, 2022/emattson

If you’re someone who eats after finishing work for the day, you might be using food to de-stress and transition from work mode to home mode. Consider putting other strategies in place to achieve this, like listening to a song, reading Response Cards, deep breathing, or going for a quick walk.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 9 ,2022
Wednesday Sabotage – March 9 ,2022

March 9, 2022/emattson

It’s so unfair that I have to work on this and other people don’t.

Response: Chances are, they’re working on it too! Many more people than I may realize are working hard to gain or maintain control over their eating. But in any case, what other people are (or aren’t) eating just isn’t relevant to the goals I have for myself.

Monday Motivation – March 7, 2022
Monday Motivation – March 7, 2022

March 7, 2022/emattson

One thing we know about habits is that when something is part of your identity, it becomes easier and easier to do it.  For example, you might have the identity, “I’m a regular exerciser,” or “I’m someone who makes healthy decisions,” or “I relieve stress in helpful ways.”  This week, think about what identities you have or ones you’d like to start putting into place!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 4, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 4, 2022

March 4, 2022/emattson

If you’ve had a hard week, you might be tempted to eat to de-stress and make yourself feel better. Remember that you’re entitled to feel better and you’re entitled to take care of yourself, but you’re also entitled to get everything on your Advantages List, so you have to find other ways to comfort/treat yourself.

Thursday Think Tip – March 3, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – March 3, 2022

March 3, 2022/emattson

If you find yourself trying to rationalize eating something: “It’s okay because I’ll just have a little; I won’t eat anything later; I had a small lunch, etc.,” consider using that as a cue to NOT eat. Remind yourself, “Once the situation has passed, I won’t be sorry I didn’t eat it.”

Wednesday Sabotage – March 2, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – March 2, 2022

March 2, 2022/emattson

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s too hard to maintain control over my eating in the evenings.

Response: While it is hard, it’s by no means impossible. With a strong plan of exactly what and when I’m going to eat, and Response Cards to help me stick to it, I know I can do it.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 1, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – March 1, 2022

March 1, 2022/emattson

Make sure you have healthy, fast snacks readily available. If you do, chances are high you’ll eat one and feel good about it. If you don’t, chances are you’ll eat something less healthy and feel less good about it.

Monday Motivation – February 28, 2022
Monday Motivation – February 28, 2022

February 28, 2022/emattson

Whenever you have an experience where you stayed in control of your eating and felt really good about it, make sure you write it down! Reading these cards will help motivate you when you’re feeling down and remind you that you CAN do it, and when you do, it feels great. 

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 25, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 25, 2022

February 25, 2022/emattson

This weekend, focus on making your home environment work in your favor, not against you. Are there some foods you should just throw out? Any treats on the counter that you should put away? Go make those changes! 

Thursday Think Tip – February 24, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022/emattson

Everyone has stress in their lives, so we can’t use feeling stressed as a reason to let go of healthy eating. Stress will be there either way. Make a list of things you can do the next time you feel stressed that will help you calm down without eating. Without a specific plan like this in place, chances are you’ll continue to turn to food to serve that purpose. 

Wednesday Sabotage – February 23, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – February 23, 2022

February 23, 2022/emattson

I always forget to drink enough water during the day. 

Response: I need to set up a reminder system! Try setting an alarm on my phone. Or putting three rubber bands on my water bottle and every time I empty it, take a rubber band off. Once I build the habit, it will get a lot easier to continue drinking water consistently. 

Tuesday Reality Check – February 22, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – February 22, 2022

February 22, 2022/emattson

When you’re eating dinner, keep the serving dishes off the table! Having more food immediately available greatly increases the chances that you’ll eat extra. 

Monday Motivation – February 21, 2022
Monday Motivation – February 21, 2022

February 21, 2022/emattson

What are some of the advantages of staying in control of your eating? Some of our biggest ones are: FEELING BETTER; not feeling like a dark cloud is hanging over us; setting a good example for our families; feeling confident; feeling proud of ourselves. 

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 18, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 18, 2022

February 18, 2022/emattson

This weekend, focus on good sleep hygiene. Getting enough sleep is one of the most important things you can do to support your weight loss efforts. 

Thursday Think Tip – February 17, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – February 17, 2022

February 17, 2022/emattson

If you’re at the supermarket trying to decide whether or not to buy something that you just know may cause you to get off track, remember to LEAVE THE STRUGGLE AT THE STORE! It’s just not worth it.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 16, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – February 16, 2022

February 16, 2022/emattson

I’m beaten down by COVID stress after two years. I just don’t care anymore. 

Response: There are still reasons to care!  I need to remember that feeling in control of my eating and my choices feels better than being out of control. There are plenty of things to stress about these days, but maintaining control of my eating can be a huge source of feeling good.  

Tuesday Reality Check – February 15, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – February 15, 2022

February 15, 2022/emattson

Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can do to start control nighttime eating.

Monday Motivation – February 14, 2022
Monday Motivation – February 14, 2022

February 14, 2022/emattson

Remember, you don’t grow on your easiest days; you grow on your hardest days. Even if you face challenges this week, they are opportunities to learn and develop. You can do this!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 11, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 11, 2022

February 11, 2022/emattson

If you’re doing some type of counting system (counting carbs/calories/points etc.) remember that your budget per day is just like any other budget. If you spend more in one area, it means you spend less in another (or if you spend less in one area, you get to spend more somewhere else). This weekend, make sure you have a plan to spend your budget where it makes the most sense!

Wednesday Sabotage – February 9, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – February 9, 2022

February 9, 2022/emattson

I start out counting calories but always end up petering out by the end of the day. 

Response: While counting SOME calories is great, chances are I won’t be able to lose weight unless I do the whole day. It’s like running 24 miles of 26.2 marathon. It’s a lot of work but unless I run the last 2.2 I don’t get my finisher’s medal. Today I’m going to do the whole thing! 

Tuesday Reality Check – February 8, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – February 8, 2022

February 8, 2022/emattson

Are you getting takeout frequently? It’s so helpful to have a list of restaurants and takeout options that work within your healthy eating guidelines so that every time you’re getting takeout, you don’t have to reinvent the wheel trying to figure out what to order.

Monday Motivation – February 7, 2022
Monday Motivation – February 7, 2022

February 7, 2022/emattson

We know we say this all the time, but it’s so important to pay attention to EVERY sign of progress! Even if the scale isn’t showing your hard work yet, we bet you can see signs of it everywhere else (making healthier choices, feeling better going to bed at night, spending less money on impulse food buys, etc.). 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 4, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 4, 2022

February 4, 2022/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember, come Monday morning, you’ll look back at your weekend and feel PROUD of the times you stayed in control, not regretful. You likely won’t think, “I should have had an extra slice of chocolate cake,” or “I should have had a second glass of wine.” It just will not happen!

Wednesday Sabotage – February 2, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – February 2, 2022

February 2, 2022/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay because just this one time doesn’t matter.

Response: Every time matters because every time I’m either strengthening my on-track habit or my off-track habit. Which one do I want to strengthen?

Tuesday Reality Check – February 1, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – February 1, 2022

February 1, 2022/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s not about having time, it’s about making time. You CAN find time to prepare healthy food, meal plan, exercise, etc., if you make it a top priority. Maybe you don’t have time to exercise 60 minutes a day or meal prep two hours on the weekend, but ANYTHING is better than nothing.

Monday Motivation – January 31, 2022
Monday Motivation – January 31, 2022

January 31, 2022/Other

Monday Motivation: If you’ve made a resolution to eat healthier this year, remember that learning to do this is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn’t do it or that you should give up; you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Healthy eating is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 28, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 28, 2022

January 28, 2022/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You might be able to get away with not reading Response Cards regularly during the week, but don’t fool yourself into thinking it will work on the weekend. For most people, weekends are a lot tougher, so make sure you use every tool in your arsenal and give yourself the best shot at staying on track. 

Wednesday Sabotage – January 26, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – January 26, 2022

January 26, 2022/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences, but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 25, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – January 25, 2022

January 25, 2022/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make an eating mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are, you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. When working on changing your eating habits, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you’re able to learn from them and move on.

Monday Motivation – January 24, 2022
Monday Motivation – January 24, 2022

January 24, 2022/Other

Monday Motivation: Working on healthy eating is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high, but at some point (whether in three weeks or three months), it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL, and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, it will get easier again. But, if you’re still riding the new year, new you high – keep the streak going! Make that motivation last as long as possible.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 21, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 21, 2022

January 21, 2022/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It’s much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

Thursday Think Tip – January 20, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – January 20, 2022

January 20, 2022/Other

Thursday Think Tip: It’s critically important to be tuned in to your thoughts, so you can learn what your common sabotaging thoughts are and come up with responses to them. The next time you eat something unplanned or that you know you probably shouldn’t, ask yourself, “What was just going through my head? What did I say to myself? ‘I know I shouldn’t eat this, but it’s okay because…?’”

Wednesday Sabotage – January 19, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – January 19, 2022

January 19, 2022/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t like working on healthy eating because the food is so boring.

Response: First, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. Second, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s okay! Food isn’t my only source of excitement; besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 18, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – January 18, 2022

January 18, 2022/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Focus on the process, not on the goal. If the goal is to see the scale come down, focus on the things that will make that happen (your healthy eating skills). Just focusing on the goal doesn’t get you there – it’s the process that does.

Monday Motivation – January 17, 2022
Monday Motivation – January 17, 2022

January 17, 2022/Other

Monday Motivation: “I really regret eating healthy today,” said NO ONE EVER! This week, focus on healthy eating. You won’t regret it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 14, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 14, 2022

January 14, 2022/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you get off track at any point this weekend, IMMEDIATELY RECOVER! You’ll be so proud of your ability to get back on track, instead of mad at yourself for slipping up.

Thursday Think Tip – January 13, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – January 13, 2022

January 13, 2022/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Are you reading your Advantages List and Response Cards? If you’ve let those things drop off, restart today. They’re critical tools for motivation and will help you remember why all this effort is worth it.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 12, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – January 12, 2022

January 12, 2022/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.

Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 11, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – January 11, 2022

January 11, 2022/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s important to remember that you need to make eating decisions based on what works for you, not what everyone around you is doing. Remind yourself that what everyone around you is eating is irrelevant, and that if you eat extra, you’ll gain weight, regardless of whether others are overeating, too.

Monday Motivation – January 10, 2022
Monday Motivation – January 10, 2022

January 10, 2022/Other

Monday Motivation: If you think, “I can’t believe how much I overate this weekend,” remind yourself: “I can’t change what I ate in the past, only what I eat today and in the future. So, instead of ruminating on past mistakes, I need to focus on making today a great day!”

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 7, 2022
Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 7, 2022

January 7, 2022/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Make sure you eat regular meals this weekend. Don’t allow yourself to just graze throughout the day. Grazing is the absolute best way to take in the most calories with the least amount of satisfaction. Sit down, eat real meals, and you’ll feel much more satisfied while taking in less food overall.

Thursday Think Tip – January 6, 2022
Thursday Think Tip – January 6, 2022

January 6, 2022/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Did you get off track with things like drinking water, meditation, or meal planning during the busy holiday season? If so, TODAY IS THE DAY to restart!

Wednesday Sabotage – January 5, 2022
Wednesday Sabotage – January 5, 2022

January 5, 2022/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m just not an exerciser.

Response: Just because I haven’t been able to institute a consistent exercise routine in the past, doesn’t mean this can’t be the time I finally make it a habit. January is a great time to recommit to a REASONABLE exercise plan. I need to start somewhere – a 10-minute walk three times this week – and work up from there.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 4, 2022
Tuesday Reality Check – January 4, 2022

January 4, 2022/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: We know that much like 2020, 2021 was a weird and often hard year. We can’t know what 2022 brings because so much is out of our control. Instead of focusing on what you can’t control, focus on what you CAN control – your eating and your exercise. Those things will make you feel good!

Monday Motivation – January 3, 2022
Monday Motivation – January 3, 2022

January 3, 2022/Other

Monday Motivation: This week, start the year off right. Instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can have – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 31, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 31, 2021

December 31, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re making a goal to lose weight/get healthier in 2021, get on the scale! See where you’re starting from! Avoiding the scale makes it easier to avoid other healthy habits. Just remember, if you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Thursday Think Tip – December 30, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – December 30, 2021

December 30, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: While staying in control of your eating is harder during the holidays, the good news is that when you manage to do so, it feels extra great! The harder it is to stay on track, the more positive feelings you get as a result. Remind yourself that staying on track during a normal day feels good, but staying on track during a holiday feels AMAZING!

Wednesday Sabotage – December 29, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – December 29, 2021

December 29, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m in that weird zone between Christmas and New Years when everything feels a bit off, so I’m just going to go with it and let my eating be unstructured, too.

Response: Just because my time is unstructured, doesn’t mean my eating should be! Continuing to eat regular meals and giving myself food that my body can use feels great, regardless of whether I’m in my regular routine right now.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 28, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – December 28, 2021

December 28, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Repeat after me: I CAN DO IT!

Monday Motivation – December 27, 2021
Monday Motivation – December 27, 2021

December 27, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Another Monday reminder to take stock of the food in your kitchen and see if there’s anything that’s just not working for you to have in the house. We want to remind you after a holiday that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 24, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 24, 2021

December 24, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, keep in mind: “I won’t regret the extra food I don’t eat, but I definitely will regret overeating. I never regret skipping extra food once the temptation has passed!”

Thursday Think Tip – December 23, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – December 23, 2021

December 23, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re going to be preparing holiday food this week, make sure you don’t fall into the trap of eating while standing up in the kitchen. Your body processes all calories the same, whether or you’re eating standing up or not.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 22, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – December 22, 2021

December 22, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m off track anyway. I’ll just worry about my eating once the new year hits.

Response: Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating. It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good. When I do, then I’ll start the new year in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 21, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – December 21, 2021

December 21, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’ve received gifted holiday food and feel guilty about not eating it, remember that not eating it doesn’t take away the nice gesture. Make sure you keep your home environment one that works in your favor, not against you. There are enough treats tempting you almost everywhere you look this time of year; your home doesn’t need to add to that.

Monday Motivation – December 20, 2021
Monday Motivation – December 20, 2021

December 20, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: How has your eating been going so far this holiday season? If you need some extra motivation (or if things haven’t been going well), take a moment to regroup and think about the reasons why it’s worth it to you to stay on track. Then, write them down in a special Holidays Advantages List and start reading it every day, at least once a day.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 17, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 17, 2021

December 17, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What are your fun plans for this weekend? What is your plan FOR those plans? If you’re not in habit of asking yourself these questions every Friday, it’s time to start now!

Thursday Think Tip – December 16, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – December 16, 2021

December 16, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Are you drinking enough water? This is important year-round. Consider setting a water goal for yourself, like refilling a big 20 oz cup three times a day. Start out the day with three rubber bands on your cup and every time you finish it, take one off.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 15, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – December 15, 2021

December 15, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to have to work on healthy eating during the holidays.

Response: It’s true that I don’t want to think about healthy eating, but I also don’t want to: not fit into my pants, avoid being in pictures, feel out of control of my eating, etc. While maintaining healthy eating this time of year is hard, it’s still much better than the alternative!

Tuesday Reality Check – December 14, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – December 14, 2021

December 14, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember – unfortunately, your body doesn’t know or care what you don’t eat. It only knows what you do. So, just because you passed up treats four times, doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to have the fifth.

Monday Motivation – December 13, 2021
Monday Motivation – December 13, 2021

December 13, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: It’s important that the IDEA of having to work on healthy eating this week might not seem appealing, but the REALITY of eating in an unrestricted way often doesn’t actually feel that great. Feeling in control and making choices that you know are good for your health are what actually feel good.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 10, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 10, 2021

December 10, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight during the holiday season, and my goal is the opposite.”

Thursday Think Tip – December 9, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – December 9, 2021

December 9, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season, but decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this, so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it. 

Wednesday Sabotage – December 8, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – December 8, 2021

December 8, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true that I don’t care right at this moment, I’m going to care A LOT a few minutes from now if I jeopardize my weight management. I can’t let this one moment of not caring influence how I act because I know I will care again, and when I do, I’ll be SO happy and proud I didn’t give in.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 7, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – December 7, 2021

December 7, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re at the time of year when some people who have been struggling to stay in control of their eating decide to just “let it slide” until January and work on refocusing then. We know that can feel like the easy way out, but it’s really NOT easy! It’s not easy to feel out of control and feel like food has power over us. It’s not easy to notice our clothes getting tighter and worrying about our heath. Focusing on healthy eating is hard, too – but at least it comes with the potential of great consequences.

Monday Motivation – December 6, 2021
Monday Motivation – December 6, 2021

December 6, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This week, focus on planning in advance and you’ll save yourself a lot of struggle. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 3, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 3, 2021

December 3, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You might be able to get away with not reading Response Cards regularly during the week, but don’t fool yourself into thinking it will work on the weekend. For most people, weekends are a lot tougher, so make sure you use every tool in your arsenal and give yourself the best shot at staying on track. 

Thursday Think Tip – December 2, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – December 2, 2021

December 2, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Instead of a tip, we have a question for you: What are you giving yourself credit for today? If the answer isn’t easily accessible, it most likely means you’re not focusing enough on credit.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 1, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – December 1, 2021

December 1, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I have to eat extra of this food because I never get to have it. 

Response: There is almost no food that I can’t buy, make, or order 365 days a year. Just because I don’t normally come in contact with a specific food, doesn’t mean I can’t make the effort to do so.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 30, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – November 30, 2021

November 30, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re now in the busy holiday time of year when people are more likely to drop healthy habits like exercise and meditation, simply because they have so much going on. Don’t fall into that trap! Especially during the holidays, exercise and meditation are extra important to provide healthy outlets and stress relief. 

Monday Motivation – November 29, 2021
Monday Motivation – November 29, 2021

November 29, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: We want to remind you that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for when and how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 26, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 26, 2021

November 26, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: How did everyone fare yesterday? If you stayed in control – GREAT! Give yourself lots and lots of credit and keep doing what you’re doing. If you got off track – move on! Make the commitment to getting back on track THIS MINUTE and give yourself lots of credit for doing so. 

Thursday Thanksgiving Tip – November 25, 2021
Thursday Thanksgiving Tip – November 25, 2021

November 25, 2021/Other

Thursday Thanksgiving Tip: Happy Thanksgiving! Remember, today is ultimately a day for giving thanks for the blessings in your life. What food you do or don’t eat will not take away from that.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 24, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – November 24, 2021

November 24, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t need to make a plan for Thanksgiving this year. 

Response: Of course I do! Just because Thanksgiving may look different (again!) this year doesn’t mean I should rely on spontaneous eating decisions! Plan in advance what I’m going to eat, and I’ll hugely increase my likelihood of staying on track. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 23, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – November 23, 2021

November 23, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: The time and energy for healthy eating and exercise will NEVER just magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that you’ll likely need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when you will make the time and energy; but absolutely, 100%, it’s worth it! 

Monday Motivation – November 22, 2021
Monday Motivation – November 22, 2021

November 22, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: When you’re working on losing weight, there are a lot of hard moments. Moments when you’re having a craving, when you’re tired, when you’re feeling stressed or anxious and want to eat. But there are also so, so many great moments. When you feel great at the end of the day. When you get on the scale stress-free. When you overcome a craving and feel really proud. Make sure you pay attention to the great moments! What are some of yours?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 19, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 19, 2021

November 19, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things – losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more. Focus on what you’re saying YES to! 

Thursday Think Tip – November 18, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – November 18, 2021

November 18, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Recently, one of our clients didn’t buy candy at the supermarket. Instead of feeling proud of herself (as we did for her!), she felt some sense of shame, thinking, “I shouldn’t have bought it anyway.” What a huge shame it was that she was “shoulding” on herself and instead of feeling triumphant, she felt something negative. Make sure you’re not interfering with giving yourself credits by telling yourself you “should” or “shouldn’t” be doing something anyway.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 17, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – November 17, 2021

November 17, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I only deserve credit once I reach my goals.

Response: NOPE! I deserve credit every step of the way. When my kid was learning to read, did she deserve credit only when she could read chapter books? No! She deserved credit for every word she learned along the way. THIS IS THE SAME!

Tuesday Reality Check – November 16, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – November 16, 2021

November 16, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you want to feel good in your head and your body, you likely won’t be able to eat all of the holiday food you want, in whatever quantities you want. HOWEVER, this doesn’t mean that you can’t have a plan for when and how you will enjoy certain treats, and in doing so you will be able to enjoy holiday food, enjoy staying in control, AND enjoy not feeling stuffed.

Monday Motivation – November 15, 2021
Monday Motivation – November 15, 2021

November 15, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Once you have healthy habits established, eating healthfully will get so much easier because your habits will carry you to where you want to go. It can be hard to get them in place, but it’s worth the effort because the payoff is enormous!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 12, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 12, 2021

November 12, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: How is eating sitting down, slowly, and mindfully going? If you’ve lost sight of those healthy habits, take this weekend to refocus and put them back into place. 

Thursday Think Tip – November 11, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – November 11, 2021

November 11, 2021/Other

Thursday Thanksgiving Tip: Thanksgiving is only two weeks away! If you think, “I’ll feel really deprived if I don’t get to eat everything on the table,” remind yourself, “If I keep telling myself that I’m going to feel deprived, I definitely will. Instead of concentrating on the things I’m not eating, I need to focus on enjoying what I am eating and spending time with my loved ones (if I’m able to do that this year).” 

Wednesday Sabotage – November 10, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – November 10, 2021

November 10, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve made an eating mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day. 

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan to not eat! I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 9, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – November 9, 2021

November 9, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you don’t feel like doing what you need to eat healthfully this week, do it anyway! Remember that you don’t base other decisions on whether you feel like it in the moment (doing things for your kids, putting on your seatbelt, meeting work deadlines, etc.). Put these things in the same category.

Monday Motivation – November 8, 2021
Monday Motivation – November 8, 2021

November 8, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Staying on track, while it can feel very difficult in the moment, is actually a stress-reducer overall because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control. This week, focus on giving yourself credit for all the positive decisions you’re making. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 5, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 5, 2021

November 5, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you haven’t been meal planning, this weekend is a great time to start. It will make the week go so much more smoothly – and maximize your chances of staying on track – if you have food decisions figured out in advance.

Thursday Think Tip – November 4, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – November 4, 2021

November 4, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: You can’t stop your brain from producing sabotaging thoughts. It isn’t about not having them at all, it’s about learning to respond to them effectively. The part you can control is whether you give in to them.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 3, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – November 3, 2021

November 3, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t get rid of all the leftover Halloween candy; that’s not fair to my kids. 

Response: Do my kids really need to be eating all of this, anyway? There is a big middle ground between letting them have no candy and letting them have way too much. Maybe they’ll be willing to keep some and can feel good about donating the rest. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 2, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – November 2, 2021

November 2, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: While we do believe that getting on the scale is a helpful accountability tool, we also believe that it’s just a number! It doesn’t define you or say anything about your character. You are more than that number.

Monday Motivation – November 1, 2021
Monday Motivation – November 1, 2021

November 1, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: What’s the candy situation in your house right now? Too much? If you think, “I can’t get rid of it because it’s a waste of money,” remind yourself that the money is already gone! Eating all the candy won’t bring the money back, it will just sabotage your goals. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 29, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 29, 2021

October 29, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Important Halloween Reminder: Overeating candy will not make you feel good. Remember that with a reasonable plan, you can enjoy some Halloween candy and still enjoy feeling on track, feeling in control, and not feeling sick from over-indulging. If you haven’t already done so, make a plan right now. 

Thursday Think Tip – October 28, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – October 28, 2021

October 28, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Are you reading Response Cards every day? If you’re not, it’s time to start! Your brain will make plenty of sabotaging thoughts all on its own. You need every bit of ammunition to respond to them.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 27, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – October 27, 2021

October 27, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to snack all evening long.

Response: If I get the urge to snack all evening long (especially if I’ve had a reasonable dinner), then it’s NOT about hunger! It’s about boredom, or being tired, or needing some pleasure. There are many other ways to achieve these ends without sabotaging my weight loss goals, so I’m going to find something else to do.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 26, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – October 26, 2021

October 26, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Did you buy Halloween candy already? Is it tempting you? If so, get rid of it. Hide it. Give it away. Do something so that it’s not hanging around and taxing your resistance muscle the rest of the week.

Monday Motivation – October 25, 2021
Monday Motivation – October 25, 2021

October 25, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: We are heading into the holiday season. If you haven’t been on track lately, now is the time to start. Even if other holiday seasons have gotten the best of you in the past, this can be the year that you make a change. This can be the year that you get it right. And it starts TODAY!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 22, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 22, 2021

October 22, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Don’t go out this weekend and buy Halloween candy! It’s early, and chances are high that you might get into it before next weekend (and if you don’t, having it in the house might tax your resistance muscle).

Thursday Think Tip – October 21, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – October 21, 2021

October 21, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Whenever you have a big success (you overcome a craving, you don’t give in to the urge to emotionally eat, you order a healthy takeout meal, you stay on track at an event), ask yourself, “How did I do it? What was I saying to myself?” Then, write it down! If it worked once, it’s likely to work again.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 20, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – October 20, 2021

October 20, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat, and I never get to have it. 

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now because I can ALWAYS get it again.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 19, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – October 19, 2021

October 19, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If healthy eating feels really depriving to you, you may be giving food a bigger role than it deserves. Food is a pleasure in life, but it’s not the only one. Try building other sources of pleasure and excitement. You’ll rely less on food to be “fun,” and healthy eating will be easier. 

Monday Motivation – October 18, 2021
Monday Motivation – October 18, 2021

October 18, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 15, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 15, 2021

October 15, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Your “hot brain” is the brain that makes in-the-moment decisions. It is only wired to care about instant gratification and not those things on your Advantages List. Your “cool brain,” by contrast, cares about delayed gratification and all the goals you have. This weekend, harness the power of the cool brain by making decisions IN ADVANCE!

Thursday Think Tip – October 14, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – October 14, 2021

October 14, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If “healthy” eating feels very depriving to you, it may be that you actually ARE depriving yourself! If you think that being on track means never having desserts/carbs/alcohol, remember that being all-or-nothing about these things helps with weight loss but doesn’t help with long-term maintenance. Push back against your restrictive thinking and start figuring out where and when these foods have a place.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 13, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – October 13, 2021

October 13, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I can still eat like I used to and look the way I used to. 

Response: What’s the evidence for that? In the past, factors were likely different. I was younger, had more time to exercise, didn’t have kids, etc. I have to accept that now circumstances have changed and if I want results, I have to do things differently.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 12, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – October 12, 2021

October 12, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: You don’t “cure” emotional eating by removing all comfort foods. You do it by learning to comfort yourself without food. What are some ways you comfort yourself that don’t involve eating?

Monday Motivation – October 11, 2021
Monday Motivation – October 11, 2021

October 11, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: To our friends up North: Happy Canadian Thanksgiving! If you’re celebrating today, think about how you want to feel when you go to bed tonight (pleasantly full and satisfied? Overly full and bloated?) Then, make a plan based on that!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 8, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 8, 2021

October 8, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, get out there and move! The weather has cooled down, so now is the perfect time to get some exercise outside.

Thursday Think Tip – October 7, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – October 7, 2021

October 7, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you get the COVID scaries and start thinking, “The world is too crazy and chaotic right now. I can’t worry about my eating,” remind yourself, “I must continue to prioritize healthy eating because that means I’m prioritizing self-care. Getting off track, feeling out of control, watching the scale go up, feeling my clothes get tighter: these things will make me feel so much worse. It’s not worth it.”

Wednesday Sabotage – October 6, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – October 6, 2021

October 6, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: Gaining control of my eating/losing weight shouldn’t be this hard.

Response: It’s supposed to get hard from time to time. It gets (temporarily) harder for everyone. Remember how hard it used to be? It’s easier today than it was a year ago, and it will be a lot easier a year from today, as long as I keep practicing my skills and don’t give up. 

Tuesday Reality Check – October 5, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – October 5, 2021

October 5, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: The next time you know you have a stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s appointment for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety so you don’t end up turning to food. 

Monday Motivation – October 4, 2021
Monday Motivation – October 4, 2021

October 4, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: There’s a difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills. It’s hard, but it’s so worth it! What’s one thing you’re doing this week to support your efforts?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 1, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 1, 2021

October 1, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Reaching our goals does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t. 

Thursday Think Tip – September 30, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – September 30, 2021

September 30, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: For most people, all-or-nothing simply doesn’t work. When people are all-or-nothing about their eating plan – believing they are either totally perfect or totally off of it – it makes it much more likely that one mistake will spiral into more. When they are all-or-nothing about food – believing that there are some foods they should cut out entirely when they’re “being good” – it makes it much more likely that once they start eating a “bad” food, they won’t be able to stop, because they’ll have the thought, “I don’t know when I’ll allow myself to eat this food again, so I better eat as much of it as I can right now.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 29, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – September 29, 2021

September 29, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to stick to my restaurant plan right now; I’m too hungry. 

Response: Even if I think I’m really hungry and won’t be satisfied, that’s not true! I’m always satisfied when I leave a restaurant.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 28, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – September 28, 2021

September 28, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: When you impulsively eat standing up, you’re telling yourself that it doesn’t really matter and that there won’t be any consequences – but there always are because you’re strengthening your giving-in muscle. Besides, even if you’re “only” eating vegetables standing up today, tomorrow it might be chocolate. 

Monday Motivation – September 27, 2021
Monday Motivation – September 27, 2021

September 27, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Even professional tennis players miss balls. You don’t have to be “perfect” on your eating plan (because no one is perfect!) to achieve your goals. You CAN and WILL make mistakes, but just pick up the very next ball and get right back in the game.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 24, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 24, 2021

September 24, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: We’ve been asking this a lot lately, but we’ll ask it again: what are you doing for FUN this weekend? We know that many of our old possibilities are not always an option anymore, but there is still fun to be had besides eating.

Thursday Think Tip – September 23, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – September 23, 2021

September 23, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “It’s not really that important to go to bed on time,” remind yourself, “It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day, because I have less mental and physical energy. Staying on track is hard enough as it is – it’s worth doing everything I can to make it easier.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 22, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – September 22, 2021

September 22, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it. 

Response: Either way, I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as not thinking about it. 

Tuesday Reality Check – September 21, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – September 21, 2021

September 21, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: One of our clients recently learned the following crucial fact: “I can do hard things.” YOU can do hard things. It doesn’t have to be easy for you to do it.

Monday Motivation – September 20, 2021
Monday Motivation – September 20, 2021

September 20, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: If you’ve gotten off track with your eating, don’t expect yourself to immediately be able to put everything back into place. You need to build your resistance muscle back up first! Think about what feels doable this week. Recommit to it, do it (giving yourself credit!), and then add one or more steps next week. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 17, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 17, 2021

September 17, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home, don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Feeling in control and achieving your goals are the best treat! 

Thursday Think Tip – September 16, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – September 16, 2021

September 16, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 15, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – September 15, 2021

September 15, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m exhausted, but I have work to do, so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy. 

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 14, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – September 14, 2021

September 14, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: When clients tell us, “I had a really hard week,” we ask them, “Was it hard for every single hour of every single day?” The answer is (virtually always) no. Letting the memory of the hard times influence your perception of the week as a whole can be very demoralizing and unmotivating. Keeping the hard times in perspective will help you recognize that you CAN and ARE doing it, despite some hard times.

Monday Motivation – September 13, 2021
Monday Motivation – September 13, 2021

September 13, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Remember, it’s a combination of all the “little” things – like resisting an unplanned snack, making it a priority to eat sitting down, going for a walk when you feel stressed – that will enable you to reach your goals. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG changes! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 10, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 10, 2021

September 10, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you come in contact with food pushers this weekend, remember that in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this! 

Thursday Think Tip – September 9, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – September 9, 2021

September 9, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Staying on track – while it can feel very difficult in the moment – is actually a stress-reducer overall, because it gives you something to feel proud of and makes you feel in control. 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 8, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – September 8, 2021

September 8, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day. 

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra, because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel bad and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating, it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse. 

Tuesday Reality Check – September 7, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – September 7, 2021

September 7, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make mistake, it’s important to label it as such. It’s a mistake, not a catastrophe. The worse you make it seem in your head, the harder it will be to recover from. If you recognize that it’s just a small mistake and everyone makes mistakes, it won’t be such a hard leap to get right back on track. 

Monday Motivation – September 6, 2021
Monday Motivation – September 6, 2021

September 6, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Today is Labor Day in the US. If you’ve got some extra time today, a great way to use it might be to get done some of the things you’ve been meaning to do – set up your garage gym, make a meal plan for the week, go through your old Response Cards. Make a commitment to doing SOMETHING today that will help advance these efforts!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 3, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 3, 2021

September 3, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Important reminder: staying on track and having a fun time are not mutually exclusive. In fact, they often go hand in hand! Often when people are off track and eating whatever/whenever, they don’t feel great. Either they’re feeling bad about it even as they’re eating, or they know in the back of their minds they’re going to feel bad when they face the consequences. Feeling good about the choices you’re making (and fueling your body with good food) feels great and leads to a VERY fun time.

Thursday Think Tip – September 2, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – September 2, 2021

September 2, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: Whenever you stay on track during a challenging food situation (you have a night with a lot of cravings but manage to stick to your plan), it’s so important to ask yourself, “How did I do it? What did I say to myself to help me stay on track?” If it was effective once, it’s helpful to remember because likely it will be effective again.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 1, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – September 1, 2021

September 1, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to track what I’m eating because I know I’m going to be over.

Response: My body doesn’t care whether or not I track what I’m eating. It’s keeping accurate accounting even if I’m not. Not tracking it just means I’m not holding myself accountable. If I track it, at least I’ll know what I’m doing and be in a better position to stay on track next time.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 31, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – August 31, 2021

August 31, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: While we rarely work with clients on cutting out any foods altogether, we definitely work on helping them reduce some foods. If you’re currently drinking four sodas a day, consider cutting it down to three for a week or two. Then, slowly cut down from there until you’re at a level that feels more reasonable.

Monday Motivation – August 30, 2021
Monday Motivation – August 30, 2021

August 30, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment this week to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 27, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 27, 2021

August 27, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Is your eating environment a nice place to be? If you routinely eat at a cluttered table, it can cause a more stressful eating experience (and take away from being able to eat slowly and mindfully). This weekend, make sure you have a peaceful place to eat!

Thursday Think Tip – August 26, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – August 26, 2021

August 26, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight,” remind yourself that not seeing the number doesn’t change the number! The only thing it does is send your brain the message that you won’t hold yourself accountable and makes it more likely you’ll get off track the next time you’re tempted to do so.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 25, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – August 25, 2021

August 25, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m bored with the things I’m eating, but they’re convenient. I’ll just keep eating them.

Response: It’s worth putting in the time and energy to find new foods that I enjoy. If I force myself to keep eating foods that I’m bored of, eventually I’ll start to rebel and will get off track.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 24, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – August 24, 2021

August 24, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Do you have any food pushers in your life? Remember that if you had a severe peanut allergy and a food pusher offered you peanut butter cookies, you would never dream of caving in. Working on your health and happiness is just as legitimate a reason to say no. Stand firm!

Monday Motivation – August 23, 2021
Monday Motivation – August 23, 2021

August 23, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: People often say, “Three months from now, you’ll thank yourself for being on track today.” But guess what? TOMORROW you’ll thank yourself. TONIGHT, when you go to bed, you’ll thank yourself. The good feelings from being in control/being on track start almost immediately! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 20, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 20, 2021

August 20, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Commit to doing at least one thing for exercise this weekend! Remember – you’ll never regret a workout.

Thursday Think Tip – August 19, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – August 19, 2021

August 19, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “I don’t deserve credit for my healthy eating behaviors because I should already be doing them,” remind yourself that, no, you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things because before you didn’t know how. If this was easy, nobody would gain weight back after they lost it. It’s imperative to give yourself credit and recognize your accomplishments so that you can build your confidence and sense of self-efficacy.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 18, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – August 18, 2021

August 18, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s taking so long for me to lose weight.

Response: That’s okay! The time will pass anyway, and at least I’m making good use of it. It doesn’t matter how slow I go, just as long as I keep going.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 17, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – August 17, 2021

August 17, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: This is your life at stake! Feeling in control of your eating and having integrity with yourself is WORTH WORKING ON! These are big goals, and they take time and patience, but they’re worth it. Keep pushing forward.

Monday Motivation – August 16, 2021
Monday Motivation – August 16, 2021

August 16, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: We heard the quote recently, “Mistakes are proof that you are trying,” and we love it so much! Mistakes aren’t an indication that you can’t do it, they’re an indication that you’re not giving up.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 13, 2021
Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 13, 2021

August 13, 2021/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it,” and keep driving? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake this weekend, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track. 

Thursday Think Tip – August 12, 2021
Thursday Think Tip – August 12, 2021

August 12, 2021/Other

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “This food tastes really good. Even though I’ve had enough, it’s okay to eat more,” remind yourself, “It’s not okay because eating more will mean strengthening my giving-in muscle AND taking in extra calories. Besides, at the end of the day my mouth won’t remember if I had 10 more bites, but my body definitely will.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – August 11, 2021
Wednesday Sabotage – August 11, 2021

August 11, 2021/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences, but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 10, 2021
Tuesday Reality Check – August 10, 2021

August 10, 2021/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you drinking enough water? Thirst can mask itself as hunger, so make sure your water consumption is where it needs to be.

Monday Motivation – August 9, 2021
Monday Motivation – August 9, 2021

August 9, 2021/Other

Monday Motivation: The more you work on healthy habits, the easier they will get over time. It’s like playing a complicated piano piece. The first time you play it, you have to concentrate on every note and finger stroke. By the time you’ve played it 100 times, your fingers know what to do without much thought. Keep working on it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 6, 2021

August 6, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You’ll likely have opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters. Every time, you’re strengthening one of those two muscles. 

Thursday Think Tip – August 5, 2021

August 5, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Losing weight and gaining control over your eating is not going to happen overnight. It will happen incrementally, step by step. Don’t worry about the big picture, just focus on the step in front of you. Consider setting small goals and celebrate when you reach them!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 4, 2021

August 4, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to gain control over my eating is a process, and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 3, 2021

August 3, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Losing weight may be a slow process (especially if you’re not doing anything drastic), but quitting won’t speed it up.

Monday Motivation – August 2, 2021

August 2, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you have the goals of gaining control over your eating, losing weight, and keeping it off, keep in mind that whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) isn’t relevant. Do it anyway!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 30, 2021

July 30, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Do you have any (socially distant) trips planned this summer? Remember that the same thing that makes you feel good at home – feeling in control of your eating – is the same thing that will feel good on vacation.

Thursday Think Tip – July 29, 2021

July 29, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: We work with people on getting rid of weight, not losing it. By learning to change their thinking, they won’t find it again!

Wednesday Sabotage – July 28, 2021

July 28, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: When I’m losing weight, the scale should go down quickly.

Response: When has seeing the scale go down quickly ever helped me to keep it down? If I want different results, it means I have to do things differently.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 27, 2021

July 27, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Important reminder: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

Monday Motivation – July 26, 2021

July 26, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you feel alone in your struggles to limit your eating and lose weight, remember that so many other people are working at it, too. Few people who can eat whatever they want and be at the weight they want. While it stinks that you have to work at it, you’re in VERY good company! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 23, 2021

July 23, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Now that the country is opening back up, many people are having trouble staying on track in social situations. Our biggest piece of advice: MAKE A PLAN! For any (and all!) events you have this weekend, think them through, write down exactly what you plan to do, and read the plan right before you go. Even better? Bring it with you so you can read it and refocus if things start to go awry.

Thursday Think Tip – July 22, 2021

July 22, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: It’s easy to conflate boredom with hunger. The next time you want to eat, take a moment to ask yourself if you have an empty rumbling in your stomach. If not, chances are you’re not hungry. Instead of going to the kitchen, find a different fun activity to do.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 21, 2021

July 21, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat [this extra food] because it’s healthy. 
Response:  I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy, doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat, healthy or not, fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 20, 2021

July 20, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Our constant question to our clients: How is your sleep going? Are you sticking to a consistent bedtime? Getting enough sleep and practicing good sleep hygiene are some of the most important things you can do for yourself right now.

Monday Motivation – July 19, 2021

July 19, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Many people gained many pounds during the pandemic. If this is you, please know that you’re in very good company. But this is reversible! You can take control, feel better, and get healthier again. Figure out ONE or TWO small changes you can realistically follow through with this week and start putting them into place today!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 16, 2021

July 16, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What brings you joy? This weekend, do at least one (non-food related) thing to bring more JOY into your life.

Thursday Think Tip – July 15, 2021

July 15, 2021/admin

Thursday Think Tip: Have you checked in lately with ways in which all-or-nothing thinking might be impacting you? It’s always good to look for and check this type of thinking so you don’t buy into the notion that either it’s a 60-minute walk or no walk, or that it’s either a “perfect” eating day or a failure, or that it’s either zero desserts a day or way too many. There is (almost always) a HUGE middle ground.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 14, 2021

July 14, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I had a bad day, so I deserve to order takeout from my favorite restaurant and just veg out.

Response: I can veg out without food! Lying on the couch and watching a favorite TV show is a great way to relax, even without eating. I need to remember that treating myself after a bad day with (extra, unplanned) food is ultimately just a trick, because I’ll wake up tomorrow feeling regretful about my choices.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 13, 2021

July 13, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Let’s check in with how much alcohol you’re consuming. We know that many people lapsed into drinking more at the beginning of quarantine, and that extra became a habit. If this is you, now is a great time to work on cutting it back to a more reasonable level. If for no other reason than alcohol has a lot of calories!

Monday Motivation – July 12, 2021

July 12, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Are you stopping yourself from doing things this summer because you don’t have your “summer body?” Guess what? You do! Whatever body you have is your summer body. Appreciate what it can do.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 9, 2021

July 9, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: So many gyms are now back open (and there are still many amazing virtual options). If your exercise level hasn’t been where you want it to be, commit to doing at least ONE new exercise-related activity this weekend. You won’t be sorry!

Thursday Think Tip – July 8, 2021

July 8, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: When it seems unfair that you can’t eat something (or as much of something as you’d ideally like), remind yourself this may be true. But ask yourself, is it more important not being able to eat this or not losing weight? Then, work on accepting it and moving on!

Wednesday Sabotage – July 7, 2021

July 7, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I do eat. Just because I turned down treats four times, doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to give in the fifth time.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 6, 2021

July 6, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s never a great strategy to keep a big variety of desserts in your house. The more you have, the more you’re going to want to eat. If you have three kinds of cookies, you’ll want all three. If you only have one kind, chances are it’ll still be satisfying.

Monday Motivation – July 5, 2021

July 5, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: We’re just over halfway through the year, so now is a great time to check in with goals you made in January. If you’re not making as much progress as you’d hoped, now is the perfect time to recommit and restart. There’s still another half a year to go!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 2, 2021

July 2, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: July 4th is this weekend! Plan to eat some delicious food, the key word being PLAN!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 2, 2021

July 2, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: July 4th is this weekend! Plan to eat some delicious food, the key word being PLAN!

Thursday Think Tip – July 1, 2021

July 1, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re using food or alcohol in the evening to help de-stress from the day, that’s a good indication that you need to build in other positive coping mechanisms. Meditate, go for walks, listen to music, do some journaling, read helpful texts. Any of those things will help bring you stress relief without sabotaging other goals.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 30, 2021

June 30, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t have time to do all my weight loss/healthy eating tasks.

Response: It doesn’t take that much time to actually do everything. What does take time is how long I spend struggling beforehand over whether or not I’m going to do it. I need to make the decision to definitively do these things, which will reduce the time significantly.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 29, 2021

June 29, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: How much water are you drinking? Now that it’s gotten warm again, it may be time to step up your hydration.

Monday Motivation – June 28, 2021

June 28, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Have you (like many people) lapsed into eating most of your meals in front of the TV? Doing so can really deprive you of eating mindfully and getting physical and psychological satisfaction from your food. A great goal for this week may be to eat some meals with no distractions.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 25, 2021

June 25, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Our constant reminder: If you start to get off track this weekend, remember that there is no such thing as “blowing it for the day,” or “blowing it for the weekend.” There is such a thing, however, as making a mistake on Saturday and continuing to make mistakes on Sunday. But there is also the possibility of making a mistake on Saturday, getting right back on track and having a GREAT rest of the weekend.

Thursday Think Tip – June 24, 2021

June 24, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating, weight and health? Is it easy feeling overstuffed? Is it easy not fitting into your clothes? None of those things are easy!

Wednesday Sabotage – June 23, 2021

June 23, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m going to eat this food because I want it. I just don’t care about my goals right now.

Response: While I may not feel like I care in this moment, I definitely will care very soon. Look at my Advantages List and remind myself of the huge and profound goals I’m trying to accomplish. These things matter. I really, really do care.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 22, 2021

June 22, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Monday Motivation – June 21, 2021

June 21, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Do you have a meal plan for this week? Remember that in-the-moment decisions are the hardest to make well (it uses a different part of your brain!), so deciding what to eat in advance greatly increases your chances of healthy eating success.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 18, 2021

June 18, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, get out and get moving! Even taking a short walk is way better than no movement, so commit to at least one big or small exercise activity this weekend.

Thursday Think Tip – June 17, 2021

June 17, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 16, 2021

June 16, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m not able to lose weight right now, so I should just give up.

Response: Even if weight loss isn’t possible during this exact moment, weight maintenance is SO MUCH BETTER than gaining weight! At least in maintenance, I get to continue feeling in control and not worry about my health suffering or my clothes getting tight. Maintenance is so, so worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 15, 2021

June 15, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Get to bed on time! Not getting enough sleep/not prioritizing sleep is the single biggest thing you can do to sabotage your healthy eating habits. Sleep matters so much!

Monday Motivation – June 14, 2021

June 14, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Don’t do it for them, do it for yourself. While others might be a motivator in your quest to lose weight/maintain a healthy weight, ultimately do it for YOURSELF. You deserve it.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 11, 2021

June 11, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Do something fun this weekend! The more sources of fun and pleasure you have in your life, the less you’ll turn to food to feel fulfilled.

Thursday Think Tip – June 10, 2021

June 10, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Eating more dessert in the evening than you’d planned might taste good, but it doesn’t FEEL good. Keep reminding yourself that staying in control and sticking to your plan is what really feels good.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 9, 2021

June 9, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m bored, so I’m going to eat.

Response: If hunger is not the problem, food is not the solution. If I’m bored, I should find something to do that doesn’t sabotage my weight loss/weight maintenance goals.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 8, 2021

June 8, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When you go to the grocery store, are you buying things that overly tempt you and tax your resistance muscle? If so, leave the struggle at the store! Stop buying them and save yourself hours of struggle over the next weeks.

Monday Motivation – June 7, 2021

June 7, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Now that life is starting to look somewhat normal again in the US, it’s time to reassess your pre-COVID habits. Were there things you were doing then (like eating out several nights a week) that you stopped doing? Was it helpful to stop doing that? Even though you likely can resume some activities, it’s time to be deliberate and what you do and don’t want to put back into place.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 4, 2021

June 4, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re dining with other people this weekend, keep in mind that it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and wind up overeating. It can help to immediately portion off how much you are going to eat because that way, even if you do eat it while distracted, at least you won’t consume more than you had planned.

Thursday Think Tip – June 3, 2021

June 3, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Healthy eating takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 2, 2021

June 2, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat normally like everyone else.

Response: I am eating 100 percent normally for someone with my goals.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 1, 2021

June 1, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When you’re upset, eating is ONE way to (temporarily) feel better, but it’s not the only way. It’s not a problem to be seeking comfort, it’s just a problem to use food to achieve comfort. It’s important to build up your roster with other comfort-giving alternatives.

Monday Motivation – May 31, 2021

May 31, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Today is Memorial Day in the US, which is an excellent time to think about what kind of life you want to lead. If it’s not currently looking the way you’d like it to, now is the time to start making changes.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 28, 2021

May 28, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re (safely, FINALLY!) going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there that I won’t be able to resist,” remind yourself, “If I were a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Thursday Think Tip – May 27, 2021

May 27, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn’t a negative!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 26, 2021

May 26, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t feel like getting to sleep on time.

Response: Oh, well! Getting enough sleep is the single most important thing I can do to support my healthy eating and exercise goals. I may not feel like getting to bed right now, but tomorrow I’ll be nothing but thankful that I did.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 25, 2021

May 25, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating/weight/health? Is it easy feeling overstuffed? Is it easy not fitting into your clothes? None of those things are easy!

Monday Motivation – May 24, 2021

May 24, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Falling off the healthy eating wagon can be discouraging, but it doesn’t need to be if you have the right mindset. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life, but keep practicing and you’ll continue improving.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 21, 2021

May 21, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent unhappy and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.”

Thursday Think Tip – May 20, 2021

May 20, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: A common thinking error people make is mind-reading – assuming they know what someone else is thinking. Are you worried about turning down food someone is offering you because you think they’ll be disappointed? Are you worried about ordering food or eating a certain amount because you’re worried about what others may think of you? Don’t make the mistake of thinking you can know exactly what someone else is thinking until you actually find out!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 19, 2021

May 19, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel regretful and overstuffed, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating, it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 18, 2021

May 18, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: For many of us, winter weather has passed so that’s no longer an excuse to not get outside and get fresh air. If you fell out of the habit of walking/biking/running outside during the winter, now is a great time to restart.

Monday Motivation – May 17, 2021

May 17, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Today is a new day. Yesterday is gone. It starts RIGHT NOW!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 14, 2021

May 14, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

Thursday Think Tip – May 13, 2021

May 13, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 12, 2021

May 12, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: The scale isn’t moving. This is so discouraging; maybe I’ll give up.
Response: While it’s true it’s discouraging when the scale doesn’t move, it doesn’t mean I should give up. If I give up, it will never move down (and it’s almost guaranteed to move up). If I keep doing what I’m doing, it will eventually move down, and when it does, I’ll be so glad I stuck with it.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 11, 2021

May 11, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g., resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

Monday Motivation – May 10, 2021

May 10, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually, the small goals lead up to big ones!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 7, 2021

May 7, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This weekend, plan in advance!

Thursday Think Tip – May 6, 2021

May 6, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Make sure you continually look out for ways in which you may be engaging in all-or-nothing thinking. Do you think if you can’t exercise for 30+ minutes it’s not worth doing anything? Do you think if you can’t eat or drink EVERYTHING you want to, you won’t be able to enjoy yourself? Do you think that one mistake means you’re completely off track? Remember that, in almost every scenario, there is a lot of middle ground!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 5, 2021

May 5, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process, and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 4, 2021

May 4, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you buying things at the grocery store in case you might want them over the next week? Is having those things at home taxing your resistance muscle? If so, leave the struggle at the store! Stop buying them and save yourself hours of struggle over the next weeks.

Monday Motivation – May 3, 2021

May 3, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Even if you’re “only” losing half a pound a week, you’ll still be 26 pounds down by this time next year. Just keep going, the time will pass anyway!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 30, 2021

April 30, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What we THINK will lead to a great weekend is eating whatever we want, in whatever quantity we want, but when we do the opposite – control our eating and stay on track – that’s truly what feels so great.

Thursday Think Tip – April 29, 2021

April 29, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “I’m alone so it’s okay to eat [this unplanned food],” remember that your body processes all calories the same whether you’re with 100 people or no people.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 28, 2021

April 28, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 27, 2021

April 27, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 23, 2021

April 23, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and simultaneously weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because every time, you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

Thursday Think Tip – April 22, 2021

April 22, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Make sure you have a healthy, fast snacks readily available. If you do, chances are high you’ll eat one and feel good about it. If you don’t, chances are you’ll eat something unhealthy and not feel good about it.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 21, 2021

April 21, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences, but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 20, 2021

April 20, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: How do you feel physically after you eat a big, heavy meal? How do you feel physically after you eat a reasonable, healthy meal? Our guess is you feel very differently! Next time you’re making a decision about what to eat for a meal, ask yourself, “How do I want to feel when I finish?”

Monday Motivation – April 19, 2021

April 19, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If it doesn’t challenge you, it doesn’t change you. Gaining control over your eating and eating in a (mostly) healthy way is hard but so, so worth it.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 16, 2021

April 16, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you haven’t yet gotten in the habit of meal planning or meal prep during the weekend for the week ahead, this is the weekend to start! It’s worth it to do everything you can to maximize your chances of success, and meal planning/prep, for almost everyone, is a huge part of that.

Thursday Think Tip – April 15, 2021

April 15, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re in the habit of getting fast food often, think about how that food makes you FEEL (not just about how it tastes). If it ultimately doesn’t make you feel good, it’s probably worth working on cutting it out, or at least cutting down on it.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 14, 2021

April 14, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve made an eating mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day.

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan not to eat! I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 13, 2021

April 13, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: The only bad workout is the one that didn’t happen. Commit to doing SOMETHING exercise-related this week.

Monday Motivation – April 12, 2021

April 12, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’ve fallen into any bad habits (COVID-related or not), today is your day to start fresh and begin working on your goals!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 9, 2021

April 9, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: “A goal without a plan is just a wish.” What’s your plan to help you stay on track this weekend?

Thursday Think Tip – April 8, 2021

April 8, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: It’s important to pay attention to non-scale victories – things like feeling great about sticking to your plan, overcoming a craving, feeling stronger at the gym, finding it easier to move around, etc. The scale is one measure of success but it’s by no means the only one.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 7, 2021

April 7, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight.

Response: Not seeing the number doesn’t change the number, it just lowers my ability to take control of the number. Getting back on the scale is an important sign that I’m committed to being on track and taking accountability. Whatever the number is, it’s not set in stone. I can and will make it go down.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 6, 2021

April 6, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you celebrated Easter this past weekend, take a moment to assess the candy/junk food situation in your house. If it’s excessive, remind yourself that all that will do is tax your Resistance Muscle and make on track, healthy, in control eating a lot harder. Consider making sure your home environment is working FOR you, not against you.

Monday Motivation – April 5, 2021

April 5, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: It’s a new month, so it may be time to set some new goals. By the end of April, would you like to feel more in control of your eating, or not feel in control? Would you like to be making healthier choices, or not? While hard, these things are within your control. Start small and work up from there. Make a commitment to yourself NOW!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 2, 2021

April 2, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home, make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good; now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

 

Thursday Think Tip – April 1, 2021

April 1, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future. Next time you make a mistake, take few moments and answer these three questions: What happened/what was the situation? What were the sabotaging thoughts that got in my way? What can I say and/or do differently next time?

Wednesday Sabotage – March 31, 2021

March 31, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m just not an exerciser.

Response: That’s just an excuse! Even if you don’t naturally enjoy exercise, it doesn’t mean you can’t learn to enjoy the physical and psychological benefits of it.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 30, 2021

March 30, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Similar to yesterday’s tip, if you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like, ask yourself if you’re being all-or-nothing in your thinking. Chances are, SOME things are going well. Maybe even A LOT of things are going well, even though everything might not yet be fully in place. Make sure you give yourself credit for the great decisions and actions you are taking.

Monday Motivation – March 29, 2021

March 29, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now; how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future); it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 26, 2021

March 26, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “I’ll start working on healthy eating on Monday,” remind yourself, “How many times have I ‘started my eating plan’ on Monday? I could have lost weight and kept it off for years if I didn’t use that excuse.” Start TODAY!

Thursday Think Tip – March 25, 2021

March 25, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “Eating this [unhealthy, unplanned food] will make me feel better,” remind yourself, “Nope! Eat better, feel better. Period.”

Wednesday Sabotage – March 24, 2021

March 24, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m exhausted, but I have to work, so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

Tuesday Reality Check – March 23, 2021

March 23, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food.

Monday Motivation – March 22, 2021

March 22, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’re not great at self-care, you’re likely going to be vulnerable to turning to food when you get stressed or upset because you won’t have other ways of calming down or soothing yourself. This week, focus on building other means of comfort and stress relief into your life so you have other things to turn to besides food.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 19, 2021

March 19, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “Life is too short, so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent unhappy and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to feel in control of my eating.”

Thursday Think Tip – March 18, 2021

March 18, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re an emotional eater, remember that you learned to eat when you were feeling bad, but you can unlearn it, too. It’s not a given that food is the only way to feel better. What else are you going to do the next time you get stressed/anxious/angry/bored?

Wednesday Sabotage – March 17, 2021

March 17, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I want to be free to eat whatever I want.

Response: I can be free to eat whatever I want, or I can stop fooling myself and finally lose weight for good. Every time matters. Being free to eat whatever I want means gaining weight and feeling out of control. It’s not worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 16, 2021

March 16, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Don’t let your end of the day self sabotage your healthy eating goals by relying on him/her to make decisions. Your morning self is a MUCH better, more reliable self to be making decisions, so let that person be your guide!

Monday Motivation – March 15, 2021

March 15, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: How are you doing with sugar? If you’re eating too much of it, consider focusing on adopting the plan of having one reasonable portion of dessert at night. Plan and portion out IN ADVANCE what dessert you’ll have (no spontaneous decisions!). Then, decide in advance what highly distracting activity you’ll do once you finish to get your mind off of food and onto something else.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 12, 2021

March 12, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, consider the rule of one: One serving at meals, one scoop of ice cream for dessert, one serving of chips at the restaurant, etc. Sticking to just one means you get to enjoy some food and continue making progress towards your goals.

Thursday Think Tip – March 11, 2021

March 11, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Another common thinking mistake people make is mind-reading – assuming they know what someone will think if they do or don’t eat something. Maybe you know, but maybe you don’t! Just because you’re hyper aware of your food actions, doesn’t mean everyone else is.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 10, 2021

March 10, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat because I just need to feel better NOW.

Response: While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to EAT to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t cause me to take in extra calories and feel out of control. Do something else that will help me feel better now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 9, 2021

March 9, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re someone who eats after finishing work for the day, you might be using food to de-stress and transition from work mode to home mode. Consider putting other strategies in place to achieve this, like listening to a song, reading Response Cards, deep breathing, or going for a quick walk.

Monday Motivation – March 8, 2021

March 8, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: This week, focus on your home environment. It’s easier to eliminate the need for willpower than to exert it in the moment. If there are certain foods in your house that continually sabotage you, get rid of them! Yes, your spouse or kids might grumble initially, but chances are these are unhealthy foods that they don’t need to be eating, either.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 5, 2021

March 5, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend, decide in advance what to have! In-the-moment decisions are the hardest to make well, so maximize your chances of success by not having to rely on spontaneous decisions.

Thursday Think Tip – March 4, 2021

March 4, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Everyone has stress in their lives, so we can’t use feeling stressed as a reason to let go of healthy eating. Stress will be there either way. Make a list of things you can do the next time you feel stressed that will help you calm down without eating. Without a specific plan like this in place, chances are you’ll continue to turn to food to serve that purpose.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 3, 2021

March 3, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s so unfair that I have to work on this and other people don’t.

Response: Chances are, they’re working on it, too! Many more people than I may realize are working hard to lose weight and/or maintain their weight. But in any case, what other people are eating just isn’t relevant to the goal I have for myself and losing weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 2, 2021

March 2, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Make sure you have healthy, fast snacks readily available. If you do, chances are high you’ll eat one and feel good about it. If you don’t, chances are you’ll eat something unhealthy and not feel good about it.

Monday Motivation – March 1, 2021

March 1, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: It’s the first day of March, so now is a great time to set some small, achievable goals for the month! What is one goal you’re going to start working on TODAY? Drinking more water? Getting in a 10-minute walk? Meditation for five minutes?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 26, 2021

February 26, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’ve had a hard week, you might be tempted to eat to de-stress and make yourself feel better. Remember that you’re entitled to feel better and you’re entitled to take care of yourself, but you’re also entitled to get everything on your Advantages List, so you have to find other ways to comfort yourself.

Thursday Think Tip – February 25, 2021

February 25, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you find yourself trying to rationalize eating something: “It’s okay because I’ll just have a little; I won’t eat anything later; I had a small lunch, etc.,” consider using that as a cue to NOT eat. Remind yourself, “Once the situation has passed, I won’t be sorry I didn’t eat it.”

Wednesday Sabotage – February 24, 2021

February 24, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I always forget to drink enough water during the day.

Response: I need to set up a reminder system! Try setting an alarm on my phone. Or putting three rubber bands on my water bottle and every time I empty it, take a rubber band off. Once I build the habit, it will get a lot easier to continue drinking water consistently.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 23, 2021

February 23, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When you’re eating dinner, keep the serving dishes off the table! Having more food immediately available greatly increases the chances that you’ll eat extra.

Monday Motivation – February 22, 2021

February 22, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Whenever you have an experience where you stayed in control of your eating and felt really good about it, make sure you write it down! Reading these cards will help motivate you when you’re feeling down and remind you that you CAN do it, and when you do, it feels great.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 19, 2021

February 19, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, focus on good sleep hygiene. Getting enough sleep is one of the most important things you can do to support your weight loss efforts.

Thursday Think Tip – February 18, 2021

February 18, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Negative emotions are a part of life. They’re not bad; they’re a part of being human. Often people think, “If I’m upset, I have to do something about it.” The reality is that you don’t need to do anything to make them go away. They always crest, like a wave, and then start to come down. You don’t have to be afraid of your feelings.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 17, 2021

February 17, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I start out counting calories but always end up petering out by the end of the day.

Response: While counting SOME calories is great, chances are I won’t be able to lose weight unless I do the whole day. It’s like running 24 miles of 26.2 marathon. It’s a lot of work but unless I run the last 2.2 I don’t get my finisher’s medal. Today I’m going to do the whole thing!

Tuesday Reality Check – February 16, 2021

February 16, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Monday Motivation – February 15, 2021

February 15, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: What are some of the advantages of staying in control of your eating? Some of the biggest ones are: FEELING BETTER! not feeling like a dark cloud is hanging over us; setting a good example for our families; feeling confident; feeling proud of ourselves.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 12, 2021

February 12, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Your calorie budget per day is just like any other budget. If you spend more in one area, it means you spend less in another (or if you spend less in one area, you get to spend more somewhere else). This weekend, make sure you have a plan to spend your calories where they make the most sense!

Wednesday Sabotage – February 10, 2021

February 10, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s too hard to maintain control over my eating in the evenings.

Response: While it is hard, it’s by no means impossible. With a strong plan of exactly what and when I’m going to eat, and Response Cards to help me stick to it, I know I can do it.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 9, 2021

February 9, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: These days, many of us are eating in restaurants a lot less but getting takeout a lot more. It’s so helpful to have a list of restaurants and takeout options that work within your healthy eating guidelines so that every time you’re getting takeout, you don’t have to reinvent the wheel trying to figure out what to order.

Monday Motivation – February 8, 2021

February 8, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Remember, you don’t grow on your easiest days; you grow on your hardest days. Even if you face challenges this week, they are opportunities to learn and develop. You can do this!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 5, 2021

February 5, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, focus on making your home environment work in your favor, not against you. Are there some foods you should just throw out? Any treats on the counter that you should put away? Go make those changes!

Thursday Think Tip – February 4, 2021

February 4, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: There is a difference between what your mind finds significant and what your body finds significant. Although your mind may find it significant that everyone around you is eating something (so it feels okay to eat extra, too), or that it’s a special occasion, or that you’re feeling upset, your body doesn’t know or care. It processes all calories the same.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 2, 2021

February 2, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you exercising this week? Remember, you don’t have to go fast. You just have to GO.

Monday Motivation – February 1, 2021

February 1, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: It’s not about having time, it’s about making time. You CAN find time to prepare healthy food, meal plan, exercise, etc., if you make it a top priority. Maybe you don’t have time to exercise 60 minutes a day or meal prep two hours on the weekend, but ANYTHING is better than nothing. This week, focus on SOMETHING!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 29, 2021

January 29, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember, come Monday morning, you’ll look back at your weekend and feel PROUD of the times you stayed in control, not regretful. You likely won’t think, “I should have had an extra slice of chocolate cake,” or “I should have had a second glass of wine.” It just will not happen!

Thursday Think Tip – January 28, 2021

January 28, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “If I can’t stay on track now, how will I ever be able to do it in the future?” remind yourself, “Being off track is NOT an indication that I can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that I need more practice. Like any skill, the more I practice, the better I’ll get. This is no different!”

Wednesday Sabotage – January 27, 2021

January 27, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 26, 2021

January 26, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make an eating mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. When working on changing your eating habits, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you’re able to learn from them and move on.

Monday Motivation – January 25, 2021

January 25, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Working on healthy eating is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high, but at some point (whether in three weeks or three months), it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL, and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, it will get easier again. But, if you’re still riding the new year, new you high – keep the streak going! Make that motivation last as long as possible.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 22, 2021

January 22, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: “I really regret eating healthy today,” said NO ONE EVER! This weekend, focus on healthy eating. You won’t regret it!

Thursday Think Tip – January 21, 2021

January 21, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: It’s critically important to be tuned in to your thoughts, so you can learn what your common sabotaging thoughts are and come up with responses to them. The next time you eat something unplanned or that you know you probably shouldn’t, ask yourself, “What was just going through my head? What did I say to myself? ‘I know I shouldn’t eat this but it’s okay because…?’”

Wednesday Sabotage – January 20, 2021

January 20, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.

Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 19, 2021

January 19, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Did you get off track with things like exercise, meditation, or meal planning during the busy holiday season? If so, TODAY IS THE DAY to restart!

Monday Motivation – January 18, 2021

January 18, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’ve made a resolution to lose weight, remember that learning to eat healthfully is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn’t do it or that you should give up; you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Losing weight is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 15, 2021

January 15, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you get off track at any point this weekend, IMMEDIATELY RECOVER! You’ll be so proud of your ability to get back on track, instead of mad at yourself for slipping up.

Thursday Think Tip – January 14, 2021

January 14, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Are you reading your Advantages List and Response Cards? If you’ve let those things drop off, restart today. They’re critical tools for motivation and will help you remember why all this effort is worth it.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 13, 2021

January 13, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: Working on healthy eating stinks because the food is so boring.

Response: First, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. Second, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s okay! Food isn’t my only source of excitement; besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 12, 2021

January 12, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s important to remember that you need to make eating decisions based on what works for you, not what everyone around you is doing. Remind yourself that what everyone around you is eating is irrelevant, and that if you eat extra, you’ll gain weight, regardless of whether others are overeating, too.

Monday Motivation – January 11, 2021

January 11, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Make a commitment this week to focus on the things you’re doing well, NOT the mistakes you may make. Doing so will help you feel better and more motivated daily, which will make it easier to keep moving forward. If you’ve never been someone who can focus on the positives, make 2021 the year that you start. We could all use more positivity in our lives!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 8, 2021

January 8, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It’s much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

Thursday Think Tip – January 7, 2021

January 7, 2021/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Did you get off track with things like drinking water, meditation, or meal planning during the busy holiday season? If so, TODAY IS THE DAY to restart!

Wednesday Sabotage – January 6, 2021

January 6, 2021/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m just not an exerciser.

Response: Just because I haven’t been able to institute a consistent exercise routine in the past, doesn’t mean this can’t be the time I finally make it a habit. January is a great time to recommit to a REASONABLE exercise plan. I need to start somewhere – a 10-minute walk three times this week – and work up from there.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 5, 2021

January 5, 2021/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We know 2020 was a weird and often hard year. We can’t know what 2021 brings because so much is out of out of our control. Instead of focusing on what you can’t control, focus on what you CAN control – your eating and your exercise. Those things will make you feel good!

Monday Motivation – January 4, 2021

January 4, 2021/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you think, “I can’t believe how much I overate this weekend,” remind yourself: “I can’t change what I ate in the past, only what I eat today and in the future. So, instead of ruminating on past mistakes, I need to focus on making today a great day!”

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 1, 2021

January 1, 2021/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Happy New Year’s Day! This weekend, start the year off right. Instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can have – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Thursday Think Tip – December 31, 2020

December 31, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you’re making a goal to lose weight in 2021, get on the scale! See where you’re starting from! Avoiding the scale makes it easier to avoid other healthy habits. Just remember, if you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 30, 2020

December 30, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m in that weird zone between Christmas and New Years when everything feels a bit off, so I’m just going to go with it and let my eating be unstructured, too.

Response: Just because my time is unstructured, doesn’t mean my eating should be! Continuing to eat regular meals and giving myself food that my body can use feels great, regardless of whether or not I’m in the regular life routine right now.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 29, 2020

December 29, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We want to remind you after a holiday that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Monday Motivation – December 28, 2020

December 28, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: While staying in control of your eating is harder during the holidays, the good news is that when you manage to do so, it feels extra great! The harder it is to stay on track, the more positive feelings you get as a result. Remind yourself that staying on track during a normal day feels good, but staying on track during a holiday feels AMAZING!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 25, 2020

December 25, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Merry Christmas to those who celebrate! We hope you have a day planned with fun things and good food (that you’ll eat in reasonable portions and feel really good about once the day has passed).

Thursday Think Tip – December 24, 2020

December 24, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: This whole week, keep in mind: “I won’t regret the extra food I don’t eat, but I definitely will regret overeating. I never regret skipping extra food once the temptation has passed!”

Wednesday Sabotage – December 23, 2020

December 23, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m off track anyway. I’ll just worry about my eating once the new year hits.

Response: Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating. It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good. When I do, then I’ll start the new year in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 22, 2020

December 22, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re going to be preparing holiday food this week, make sure you don’t fall into the trap of eating while standing up in the kitchen. Your body processes all calories the same, whether or you’re eating standing up or not.

Monday Motivation – December 21, 2020

December 21, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’ve received gifted holiday food and feel guilty about not eating it, remember that not eating it doesn’t take away the nice gesture. Make sure you keep your home environment one that works in your favor, not against you. There are enough treats tempting you almost everywhere you look this time of year; your home doesn’t need to add to that.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 18, 2020

December 18, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Make sure you eat regular meals this weekend. Don’t allow yourself to just graze throughout the day. Grazing is the absolute best way to take in the most calories with the least amount of satisfaction. Sit down, eat real meals, and you’ll feel much more satisfied while taking in less food overall.

Thursday Think Tip – December 17, 2020

December 17, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season, but decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 16, 2020

December 16, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to have to work on healthy eating during the holidays.

Response: It’s true that I don’t want to think about healthy eating, but I also don’t want to: not fit into my pants, not like the way I look, avoid being in pictures, feel out of control of my eating, etc. While maintaining healthy eating this time of year is hard, it’s still much better than the alternative!

Tuesday Reality Check – December 15, 2020

December 15, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember – unfortunately, your body doesn’t know or care what you don’t eat. It only knows what you do. So, just because you passed up treats four times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to have the fifth.

Monday Motivation – December 14, 2020

December 14, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: While many of us are working from home these days and don’t have office kitchen treats tempting us, make sure that your home environment is working for you, not against you. This week, think about whether there’s food in your house that’s just not helpful to your goals. Instead of eating it to “get rid of it,” just get rid of it in the trashcan!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 11, 2020

December 11, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight during the holiday season, and my goal is the opposite.”

Thursday Think Tip – December 10, 2020

December 10, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Are you drinking enough water? This is important year-round. Consider setting a water goal for yourself, like refilling a big 20 oz cup three times a day. Start out the day with three rubber bands on your cup and every time you finish it, take one off.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 9, 2020

December 9, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true that I don’t care right at this moment, I’m going to care A LOT a few minutes from now if I jeopardize my weight management. I can’t let this one moment of not caring influence how I act because I know I will care again, and when I do, I’ll be SO happy and proud I didn’t give in.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 8, 2020

December 8, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re now in the busy holiday time of year when people are more likely to drop healthy habits like exercise and meditation. Don’t fall into that trap! Especially during the holidays, exercise and meditation are extra important to provide healthy outlets and stress relief.

Monday Motivation – December 7, 2020

December 7, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: How has your eating been going so far this holiday season? If you need some extra motivation (or if things haven’t been going well), take a moment to regroup and really think about the reasons why it’s worth it to you to stay on track. Then, write them down in a special Holidays Advantages List and start reading it every day, at least once a day.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 4, 2020

December 4, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You might be able to get away with not reading Response Cards regularly during the week, but don’t fool yourself into thinking it will work on the weekend. For most people, weekends are a lot tougher, so make sure you use every tool in your arsenal and give yourself the best shot at staying on track. 

Thursday Think Tip – December 3, 2020

December 3, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season, but decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this, so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it. 

Wednesday Sabotage – December 2, 2020

December 2, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I have to eat extra of this food because I never get to have it. 

Response: There is almost no food that I can’t buy, make, or order 365 days a year. Just because I don’t normally come in contact with a specific food, doesn’t mean I can’t make the effort to do so.  

Tuesday Reality Check – December 1, 2020

December 1, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re now in the busy holiday time of year when people are more likely to drop healthy habits like exercise and meditation, simply because they have so much going on. Don’t fall into that trap! Especially during the holidays, exercise and meditation are extra important to provide healthy outlets and stress relief. 

Monday Motivation – November 30, 2020

November 30, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This week, focus on planning in advance and you’ll save yourself a lot of struggle. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 27, 2020

November 27, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: How did everyone fare yesterday? If you stayed in control – GREAT! Give yourself lots and lots of credit and keep doing what you’re doing. If you got off track – move on! Make the commitment to getting back on track THIS MINUTE and give yourself lots of credit for doing so. 

Thursday Think Tip – November 26, 2020

November 26, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Happy Thanksgiving! Remember, today is ultimately a day for giving thanks for the blessings in your life. What food you do or don’t eat will not take away from that. 

Wednesday Sabotage – November 25, 2020

November 25, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t need to make a plan for Thanksgiving this year. 

Response: Of course I do! Just because Thanksgiving looks different this year doesn’t mean I should rely on spontaneous eating decisions! Plan in advance what I’m going to eat and I’ll hugely increase my likelihood of staying on track. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 24, 2020

November 24, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you undoubtedly won’t be able to eat all of the holiday food you want, in whatever quantities you want. HOWEVER, this doesn’t mean that you can’t have a plan for when and how you will enjoy certain treats, and in doing so you will be able to enjoy holiday food, enjoy staying in control, AND enjoy all the advantages of losing weight (or at least not gaining right now). 

Monday Motivation – November 23, 2020

November 23, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: This week, focus on giving yourself credit! Really point out to yourself and notice the things that are going well (not just the things that may still need more work). We ask you to do this several times throughout the year because it’s so incredibly important.  

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 20, 2020

November 20, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: With the holidays right around the corner, it might be time to start brushing up on some of your skills. Have you been eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully? Reading your Advantages List? Responding to sabotaging thinking? Giving yourself credit? Making time and energy for dieting? If not, make a commitment to work on your basic skills this weekend to help get you in the right mindset. 

Thursday Think Tip – November 19, 2020

November 19, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Thanksgiving is only a week away! If you think, “I’ll feel really deprived if I don’t get to eat everything on the table,” remind yourself, “If I keep telling myself that I’m going to feel deprived, I definitely will. Instead of concentrating on the things I’m not eating, I need to focus on enjoying what I am eating and spending time with my loved ones (if I’m able to do that this year).” 

Wednesday Sabotage – November 18, 2020

November 18, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve made an eating mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day. 

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan not to eat! I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 17, 2020

November 17, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: The time and energy for dieting and exercise will NEVER just magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that dieters may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when they will make the time and energy; but absolutely, 100%, it’s worth it! 

Monday Motivation – November 16, 2020

November 16, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: When you’re working on losing weight, there are a lot of hard moments. Moments when you’re having a craving, when you’re tired, when you’re feeling stressed or anxious and want to eat. But there are also so, so many great moments. When you feel great at the end of the day. When you get on the scale stress-free. When you overcome a craving and feel really proud. Make sure you pay attention to the great moments! What are some of yours? 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 13, 2020

November 13, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you slip-up, recover right away. Don’t let a bad moment turn into a bad day, or a bad day turn into a bad weekend. Get right back on track! 

Thursday Think Tip – November 12, 2020

November 12, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: The next time you know you have a really stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s visit for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety so you don’t end up turning to food. 

Wednesday Sabotage – November 11, 2020

November 11, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: Losing weight shouldn’t be this hard.  

Response: Losing weight is supposed to get hard from time to time. It gets harder for everyone. Remember how hard it used to be? It’s easier today than it was a year ago, and it will be a lot easier a year from today as long as I keep practicing my skills and don’t give up. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 10, 2020

November 10, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: You don’t cure emotional eating by removing all comfort foods. You do it by learning to comfort yourself without food. 

Monday Motivation – November 9, 2020

November 9, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Staying on track, while it can feel very difficult in the moment, is actually a stress-reducer overall because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control. This week, focus on giving yourself credit for all the positive decisions you’re making. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 6, 2020

November 6, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: How is eating sitting down, slowly, and mindfully going? If you’ve lost sight of those healthy habits, take this weekend to refocus and put them back into place. 

Thursday Think Tip – November 5, 2020

November 5, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: You can’t control your brain from producing sabotaging thoughts. It isn’t about not having them at all, it’s about learning to respond to them effectively. The part you can control is whether or not you give in to them.  

Wednesday Sabotage – November 4, 2020

November 4, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t get rid of all the leftover Halloween candy; that’s not fair to my kids. 

Response: Do my kids really need to be eating all of this, anyway? There is a big middle ground between letting them have no candy and letting them have way too much. Maybe they’ll be willing to keep some and can feel good about donating the rest. 

Tuesday Reality Check – November 3, 2020

November 3, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If healthy eating feels really painful to you, you may be giving food a bigger role than it deserves. Food is a pleasure in life, but it’s not the only one. Try building other sources of pleasure and excitement in your life. You’ll rely less on food to be “fun, and healthy eating will be easier. 

Monday Motivation – November 2, 2020

November 2, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: What’s the candy situation in your house right now? Too much? If you think, “I can’t get rid of it because it’s a waste of money,” remind yourself that the money is already gone! Eating all the candy won’t bring the money back, it will just sabotage your goals. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 30, 2020

October 30, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Halloween will likely look different this year, but overeating candy will still not make you feel good. Remember that, with a reasonable plan, you can enjoy some Halloween candy and still enjoy feeling on track, feeling in control, and not feeling sick from over-indulging. If you haven’t already done so, make a plan right now. 

Thursday Think Tip – October 29, 2020

October 29, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Whenever you have a big success (you overcome a craving, you don’t give in to the urge to emotionally eat, you order a healthy takeout meal, you stay on track at an event), ask yourself, “How did I do it? What was I saying to myself?” Then write it down! If it worked once, it’s likely to work again. 

Wednesday Sabotage – October 28, 2020

October 28, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I can still eat like I used to and look the way I used to. 

Response: What’s the evidence for that? In the past, factors were likely different. I was younger, had more time to exercise, didn’t have kids, etc. I have to accept that now things are different and if I want results, I have to do things differently.  

Tuesday Reality Check – October 27, 2020

October 27, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Did you buy Halloween candy already? Is it tempting you? If so, get rid of it. Hide it. Give it away. Do something so that it’s not hanging around and taxing your resistance muscle the rest of the week.  

Monday Motivation – October 26, 2020

October 26, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: We are heading into the holiday season. If you haven’t been on track lately, now is the time to start. Even if other holiday seasons have gotten the best of you in the past, this can be the year that you make a change. This can be the year that you get it right. And it starts TODAY!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 23, 2020

October 23, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, get out there and move! The weather has cooled down, so now is the perfect time to get some exercise outside.

Thursday Think Tip – October 22, 2020

October 22, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Are you reading Response Cards every day? If you’re not, it’s time to start! Your brain will make plenty of sabotaging thoughts all on its own. You need every bit of ammunition to respond to them.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 21, 2020

October 21, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to snack all evening long.

Response: If I get the urge to snack all evening long (especially if I’ve had a reasonable dinner), then it’s NOT about hunger! It’s about boredom, or being tired, or needing some pleasure. There are many other ways to achieve these ends without sabotaging my weight loss goals, so I’m going to find something else to do.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 20, 2020

October 20, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: While we do believe that getting on the scale is a helpful accountability tool, we also believe that it’s just a number! It doesn’t define you or say anything about your character. You are more than that number.

Monday Motivation – October 19, 2020

October 19, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Once you have healthy habits established, eating healthfully will get so much easier because your habits will carry you to where you want to go. It can be hard to get them in place, but it’s worth the effort because the payoff is enormous!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 16, 2020

October 16, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you haven’t been meal planning, this Sunday is a great time to start. It will make the week go so much more smoothly, and maximize your chances of staying on track, if you have food decisions figured out in advance.

Thursday Think Tip – October 15, 2020

October 15, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: The next time you know you have a really stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s visit for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety so you don’t end up turning to food.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 14, 2020

October 14, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: The world is too crazy and chaotic right now. I can’t worry about my eating.

Response: I must continue to prioritize healthy eating because that means I’m prioritizing self-care. Getting off track, feeling out of control, watching the scale go up, feeling my clothes get tighter: these things will make me feel so much worse. It’s not worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 13, 2020

October 13, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you don’t feel like doing what you need to do to eat healthfully this week, do it anyway! Remember that you don’t base other decisions on whether or not you feel like it in the moment (doing things for your kids, putting on your seatbelt, meeting work deadlines, etc.). Put these things in the same category.

Monday Motivation – October 12, 2020

October 12, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Eat better, feel better. Period.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 9, 2020

October 9, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things – losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more. Focus on what you’re saying YES to! 

Thursday Think Tip – October 8, 2020

October 8, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: We always want to remind you that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for when and how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle. 

Wednesday Sabotage – October 7, 2020

October 7, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat and I never get to have it. 

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now, because I can ALWAYS get it again. Besides, if I overeat, it will ruin the pleasure of having it because I’ll feel guilty. 

Tuesday Reality Check – October 6, 2020

October 6, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat. Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward. 

Monday Motivation – October 5, 2020

October 5, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 2, 2020

October 2, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This weekend, increase your chances of success by planning in advance. 

 

Thursday Think Tip – October 1, 2020

October 1, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: All-or-nothing simply doesn’t work. When people are all-or-nothing about being on a diet – believing they are either totally perfect on their diet or totally off of it – it makes it much more likely that one mistake will spiral into more. When they are all-or-nothing about food – believing that there are some foods they should cut out entirely when they’re dieting – it makes it much more likely that once they start eating a “bad” food, they won’t be able to stop, because they’ll have the thought, “I don’t know when I’ll allow myself to eat this food again, so I better eat as much of it as I can right now.” 

 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 30, 2020

September 30, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to stick to my restaurant plan right now; I’m too hungry. 

Response: Even if I think I’m really hungry and won’t be satisfied, that’s not true! I’m always satisfied when I leave a restaurant. 

Tuesday Reality Check – September 29, 2020

September 29, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: At the end of the day, most people forget some (or all) of the food they ate standing up because food eaten standing up just doesn’t seem to register in the mind or body the same way as food eaten while deliberately sitting down. Working on eating every bite sitting down (and slowly and mindfully) is a comfortable way of cutting many calories from your diet because, ultimately, you likely won’t miss that food or feel any less satisfied. 

Monday Motivation – September 28, 2020

September 28, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you feel daunted by how long it will take to lose the weight you want to, remember that the time will pass anyway! A year from now, you’ll be a year older regardless, but do you want to be a year older and stuck at a heavier weight, or a year older and feeling SO MUCH BETTER? Either way, the time will pass. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 25, 2020

September 25, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Losing weight does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t. 

Thursday Think Tip – September 24, 2020

September 24, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “It’s not really that important to go to bed on time,” remind yourself, “It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day, because I have less mental and physical energy. Staying on track is hard enough as it is – it’s worth doing everything I can to make it easier.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 23, 2020

September 23, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it right now. 

Response: Either way, I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as not thinking about it. 

Tuesday Reality Check – September 22, 2020

September 22, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When you impulsively eat standing up, you’re telling yourself that it doesn’t really matter and that there won’t be any consequences – but there will be, because EVERY bite of food you eat has calories. Even if you’re only eating vegetables standing up today, tomorrow it might be chocolate. 

Monday Motivation – September 21, 2020

September 21, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you’ve gotten off track with your eating, don’t expect yourself to immediately be able to put everything back into place. You need to build your resistance muscle back up first! Think about what feels doable this week. Recommit to it, do it (giving yourself credit!), and then add one or more steps next week. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 18, 2020

September 18, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home, don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat! 

Thursday Think Tip – September 17, 2020

September 17, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: Staying on track – while it can feel very difficult in the moment – is actually a stress-reducer overall, because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control. 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 16, 2020

September 16, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m exhausted, but I have work to do, so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy. 

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight.  

Tuesday Reality Check – September 15, 2020

September 15, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to label it as such. It’s a mistake, not a catastrophe. The worse you make it seem in your head, the harder it will be to recover from. If you recognize that it’s just a small mistake and everyone makes mistakes, it won’t be such a hard leap to get right back on track. 

Monday Motivation – September 14, 2020

September 14, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Remember, it’s a combination of all the “little” things – like resisting an unplanned snack, making it a priority to eat sitting down, going for a walk when you feel stressed – that will make you lose weight. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG weight loss! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 11, 2020

September 11, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you come in contact with food pushers this weekend, remember that in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this! 

Thursday Think Tip – September 10, 2020

September 10, 2020/hgrossman

Thursday Think Tip: If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly. 

Wednesday Sabotage – September 9, 2020

September 9, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day. 

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra, because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating, it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse. 

Tuesday Reality Check – September 8, 2020

September 8, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When clients tell us, “I had a really hard week,” we ask them, “Was it hard for every single hour of every single day?” The answer is always no. Don’t let the memory of several hard times influence your perception of the week as a whole. 

Monday Motivation – September 7, 2020

September 7, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: This week, think about things you can ADD to your life, not subtract. More water? More vegetables? More healthy ways to release stress?   

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 4, 2020

September 4, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember that staying on track and having a fun time are not mutually exclusive. In fact, they often go hand in hand! When dieters are off track and eating whatever/whenever, they often don’t feel great. Either they’re feeling bad about it even as they’re eating, or they know in the back of their minds they’re going to feel bad when they face the consequences. Feeling good about the choices you’re making (and fueling your body with good food) feels great and leads to a VERY fun time.

Think Thin Thursday – September 3, 2020

September 3, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Whenever you stay on track during a challenging food situation (you have a night with a lot of cravings but manage to stick to your plan), it’s so important to ask yourself, “How did I do it? What did I say to myself to help me stay on track?” If it was effective once, it’s helpful to remember because likely it will be effective again.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 2, 2020

September 2, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to track what I’m eating because I know I’m going to be over.
Response: My body doesn’t care whether or not I track what I’m eating. It’s keeping accurate accounting even if I’m not. Not tracking it just means I’m not holding myself accountable. If I track it, at least I’ll know what I’m doing and be in a better position to stay on track next time.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 1, 2020

September 1, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Losing weight may be a slow process (especially if you’re not doing anything drastic), but quitting won’t speed it up.

Monday Motivation – August 31, 2020

August 31, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment this week to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 28, 2020

August 28, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Often, people face food pushers on weekends. If you have a particular food pusher who causes you problems, remember that if you had a severe peanut allergy and that person offered you peanut butter cookies, you would never dream of caving in. Working on your health and happiness is just as legitimate a reason to say no. Stand firm!

Think Thin Thursday – August 27, 2020

August 27, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Are you drinking enough water? Thirst can mask itself as hunger so make sure your water consumption is where it needs to be.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 26, 2020

August 26, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process, and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 25, 2020

August 25, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “I don’t deserve credit for my dieting tasks because I should already be doing them,” remind yourself that, no, you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things because you didn’t know how. If this was easy, nobody would be overweight (or gain weight back after they lost it). It’s imperative to give yourself credit and recognize your accomplishments so that you can build your confidence and sense of self-efficacy.

Monday Motivation – August 24, 2020

August 24, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: This is your life at stake! Feeling in control of your eating and having integrity with yourself is WORTH WORKING ON! These are big goals, and they take time and patience, but they’re worth it. Keep pushing forward.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 21, 2020

August 21, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Is your eating environment a nice place to be? If you routinely eat at a cluttered table, it can cause a more stressful eating experience (and take away from being able to eat slowly and mindfully). This weekend, make sure you have a peaceful place to eat!

Think Thin Thursday – August 20, 2020

August 20, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday Tip: The more you work on healthy habits, the easier they will get over time. It’s like playing a complicated piano piece. The first time you play it, you have to concentrate on every note and finger stroke. By the time you’ve played it 100 times, your fingers know what to do without much thought. Keep working on it!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 19, 2020

August 19, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences, but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 18, 2020

August 18, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re continuing to check in with everyone about their sleep habits. Have you started going to bed too late again? If so, now is the time to work on that! Getting enough sleep is one of the best things you can do to support your weight loss efforts, so don’t let it slide.

Monday Motivation – August 17, 2020

August 17, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Losing weight and gaining control over your eating is not going to happen overnight. It will happen incrementally, step by step. Don’t worry about the big picture, just focus on the step in front of you.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 14, 2020

August 14, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Do yo have any (socially distant) trips planned this summer? Remember that the same thing that makes you feel good at home – feeling in control of your eating – is the same thing that will feel good on vacation.

Think Thin Thursday – August 13, 2020

August 13, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday Tip: It doesn’t matter how slowly you go, as long as you don’t stop!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 12, 2020

August 12, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I do eat, so just because I turned down treats four times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to give in the fifth time. If I take in more calories than I had planned, I’ll gain weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 11, 2020

August 11, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: While we rarely work with clients on cutting out any foods altogether, we definitely work on helping them reduce some foods. If you’re currently drinking four sodas a day, consider cutting it down to three for a week or two. Then, slowly cut down from there until you’re at a level that feels more reasonable.

Monday Motivation – August 10, 2020

August 10, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: We heard the quote recently, “Mistakes are proof that you are trying,” and we love it so much! Mistakes aren’t an indication that you can’t do it, they’re an indication that you’re not giving up.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 7, 2020

August 7, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Commit to doing at least one thing for exercise this weekend! Remember – you’ll never regret a workout.

Think Thin Thursday – August 6, 2020

August 6, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: We work with people on getting rid of weight, not losing it. By learning to change their thinking, they won’t find it again!

Wednesday Sabotage: August 5, 2020

August 5, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: When I’m losing weight, the scale should go down quickly.

Response: When has seeing the scale go down quickly ever helped me to keep it down? If I want different results it means I have to do things differently.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 4, 2020

August 4, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s easy to conflate boredom with hunger. The next time you want to eat, really take a moment and ask yourself if you have an empty rumbling in your stomach. If not, chances are you’re not hungry. Instead of going to the kitchen, find a different fun activity to do.

Monday Motivation – August 3, 2020

August 3, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Are you stopping yourself from doing things this summer because you don’t have your “summer body?” Guess what? You do! Whatever body you have is your summer body. Appreciate what it can do.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 31, 2020

July 31, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it,” and keep driving? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake this weekend, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track. 

Think Thin Thursday – July 30, 2020

July 30, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: When it seems unfair that you can’t eat something, remind yourself this may be true. But ask yourself, is it more important not being able to eat this or not losing weight? Then work on accepting it and move on! 

Wednesday Sabotage – July 29, 2020

July 29, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t feel like planning and measuring my food. I know what and how much I’m going to eat. I don’t need to go to so much effort. 

Response: If I only do what I feel like doing, I won’t lose weight and keep it off. Even if I don’t need these crucial skills to lose weight initially, I must learn how to make myself implement them. In the future, my motivation may not be as high as it is today. 

Tuesday Reality Check – July 28, 2020

July 28, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision.Plan in advance!

Monday Motivation – July 27, 2020

July 27, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Do I feel like avoiding healthy eating or working on meeting my goals?” 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 24, 2020

July 24, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You’ll likely have opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters. Every time, you’re strengthening one of those two muscles. 

Think Thin Thursday – July 23, 2020

July 23, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: If you think, “This food tastes really good. Even though I’ve had enough, it’s okay to eat more,” remind yourself, “It’s not okay because eating more will mean strengthening my giving-in muscle AND taking in extra calories. Besides, at the end of the day my mouth won’t remember if I had 10 more bites, but my body definitely will.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – July 22, 2020

July 22, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy. 
Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy, doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 21, 2020

July 21, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you drinking too much alcohol? We know that many people lapsed into drinking more at the beginning of quarantine. Now might be the time to work on cutting it back to a more reasonable level. If for no other reason than alcohol has a lot of calories! 

Monday Motivation – July 20, 2020

July 20, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: If you feel alone in your struggles to limit your eating and lose weight, remember that so many other people are working at it, too. It’s a very, very small number of people who can eat whatever they want and be at a healthy weight. While it stinks that you have to work at it, you’re in VERY good company! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 17, 2020

July 17, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What brings you joy? This weekend, do at least one (non-food related) thing to bring more JOY into your life.  

Think Thin Thursday – July 16, 2020

July 16, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: Don’t keep a big variety of desserts in your house. The more you have, the more you’re going to want to eat. If you have three kinds of cookies, you’ll want all three. If you only have one kind, chances are it’ll still be satisfying. Variety can really work against weight loss goals. 

Wednesday Sabotage – July 15, 2020

July 15, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I might want chips this week, and I’m not going to the grocery store very often, so I’d better get them now. 

Response: Keeping highly tempting food in the house is never a great strategy when I’m trying to lose or maintain my weight. Even if I want chips later, I ultimately won’t be sorry for not eating them. Buy delicious, healthy food. Then what I eat will taste good AND feel good. 

Tuesday Reality Check – July 14, 2020

July 14, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: We’ve heard so many people worry about gaining the COVID-19 pounds. If you’ve gained weight during quarantine, you can stop it right here! You can gain control today and either lose weight or stop the gain. Your weight doesn’t have to keep going up! 

 

Monday Motivation – July 13, 2020

July 13, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: People often say, “Three months from now, you’ll thank yourself” for being on track today. But guess what? TOMORROW you’ll thank yourself. TONIGHT, when you go to bed, you’ll thank yourself. The good feelings from being in control/being on track start almost immediately! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 10, 2020

July 10, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: So many gyms and instructors are offering free online workouts. If your exercise level hasn’t been where you want it to be, commit to doing at least ONE new exercise-related activity this weekend. You won’t be sorry! 

Think Thin Thursday – July 9, 2020

July 9, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: How is your sleep going? Are you sticking to a consistent bedtime? Getting enough sleep and practicing good sleep hygiene are some of the most important things you can do for yourself right now.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 8, 2020

July 8, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I had a bad day, so I deserve to order takeout from my favorite restaurant and just veg out.  

Response: I can veg out without food! Lying on the couch and watching a favorite TV show is a great way to relax, even without eating.  I need to remember that treating myself after a bad day with (extra, unplanned) food is ultimately just a trick, because I’ll wake up tomorrow feeling regretful about my choices.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 7, 2020

July 7, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “No one is seeing me right now, so why should I care about my weight?” Remind yourself that there are still SO MANY reasons to work on healthy eating and/or weight loss: good health, feeling in control, feeling good about the food you’re eating, etc. Other people seeing what you look like is only a tiny fraction of why this is worth it.

Monday Motivation – July 6, 2020

July 6, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: We’re just over halfway through the year, so now is a great time to check in with goals you made in January. If you’re not making as much progress as you’d hoped to, now is the perfect time to recommit and restart. There’s still another half a year to go! 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 3, 2020

July 3, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: July 4th is tomorrow! We know it might look different from other years, but that doesn’t mean it can’t still be fun. Plan to eat some delicious food – just make sure it fits in with your day as a whole 

Think Thin Thursday – July 2, 2020

July 2, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: How much water are you drinking? Now that it’s gotten warm again, it may be time to step up your hydration.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 1, 2020

July 1, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t have time to do all my weight loss/healthy eating tasks.

Response: It doesn’t take that much time to actually do everything. What does take time is how long I spend struggling beforehand over whether or not I’m going to do it. I need to make the decision to definitively do these things, which will reduce the time significantly.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 30, 2020

June 30, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Have you (like many people) lapsed into eating most of your meals in front of the TV? Doing so can really deprive you of eating mindfully and getting physical and psychological satisfaction from your food. This week, consider eating some meals with no distractions.  

Monday Motivation – June 29, 2020

June 29, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Don’t do it for them, do it for yourself. While others might be a motivator in your quest to lose weight/maintain a healthy weight, ultimately do it for YOURSELF. You deserve it. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 26, 2020

June 26, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, get out and get moving! Even taking a short walk is way better than no movement, so commit to at least one big or small exercise activity this weekend.   

Think Thin Thursday – June 25, 2020

June 25, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: Are you getting to bed on time? We’ve been hearing that many people are struggling to get to bed at a reasonable hour because they don’t have to be in their office early the next morning. But getting enough sleep is so important, and maintaining a consistent bedtime is big part of that. If you’ve been lax at getting to bed recently, now is the time to tighten up.   

Wednesday Sabotage – June 24, 2020

June 24, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m going to eat this food because I want it. I just don’t care about my goals right now. 

Response: While I may not feel like I care in this moment, I definitely will care very soon. Look at my Advantages List and remind myself of the huge and profound goals I’m trying to accomplish. These things matter. I really, really do care.  

Tuesday Reality Check – June 23, 2020

June 23, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Eating more dessert in the evening than you’d planned might taste good, but it doesn’t FEEL good. Staying in control and sticking to your plan is what really feels good.  

Monday Motivation – June 22, 2020

June 22, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Even though you’re probably home more right now and don’t need to plan to bring lunch into the office, meal planning is still just as critical! Too few options is sabotaging, and too many options can be just as problematic. Consider making a meal plan this week so you go into each meal knowing what you’re going to eat (and so you don’t have to make inthemoment decisions). 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 19, 2020

June 19, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Our constant reminder: If you start to get off track this weekend, remember that there is no such thing as “blowing it for the day,” or “blowing it for the weekend.” There is such a thing, however, as making a mistake on Saturday and continuing to make mistakes on Sunday. But there is also the possibility of making a mistake on Saturday, getting right back on track and having a GREAT rest of the weekend. 

Think Thin Thursday – June 18, 2020

June 18, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating. 

Wednesday Sabotage – June 17, 2020

June 17, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m bored, so I’m going to eat. 

Response: If hunger is not the problem, food is not the solution. If I’m bored, I should find something to do that doesn’t sabotage my weight loss/weight maintenance goals.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 16, 2020

June 16, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating, weight and health? Is it easy feeling overstuffed? Is it easy not fitting into your clothes? None of those things are easy! 

Monday Motivation – June 15, 2020

June 15, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 12, 2020

June 12, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Wouldn’t it be so great to go to bed Sunday night, and wake up Monday morning, and know you had an on-track and in control weekend?  You can make it happen! Staying on track can be hard, but it’s worth it.

Think Thin Thursday – June 11, 2020

June 11, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: Are you getting in enough steps per day? Now that you’re home more and likely not walking around an office, it’s important to make sure you’re still making a deliberate effort to move throughout the day. It’s critical for physical and mental health! 

Wednesday Sabotage – June 10, 2020

June 10, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t need feel like planning and measuring my food. I know what and how much I’m going to eat. I don’t need to go to so much effort. 

Response: If I only do the things I feel like doing, I won’t be able to lose weight and keep it off. Even if I don’t need to do these things to lose weight initially, I have to learn how to make myself implement these crucial skills for the future, when my motivation isn’t as high as it is today. 

Tuesday Reality Check – June 9, 2020

June 9, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future. It’s not about making yourself feel bad for making mistakes, it’s about learning from them to help you keep moving forward.  Next time you make a mistake, take few moments and answer these three questions: 

  1. What happened/what was the situation? 
  2. Which sabotaging thoughts got in my way? 
  3. What can I say and/or do differently the next time? 

Monday Motivation – June 8, 2020

June 8, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: What are some things you’re doing for self-care this week? Taking care of yourself in healthy ways (not extra food ways) is critical right now. Make sure you commit to at least one or two concrete self-care activities this week.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 5, 2020

June 5, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Do something fun this weekend! Even though you likely can’t eat at restaurant with a friend, go to a museum or attend a party, there are still fun experiences to be had. Work on finding at least one this weekend.  

Think Thin Thursday – June 4, 2020

June 4, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.” 

Wednesday Sabotage – June 3, 2020

June 3, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m not able to lose weight right now, so I should just give up. 

Response: Even if weight loss isn’t possible during this pandemic, weight maintenance is SO MUCH BETTER than gaining weight! At least in maintenance I get to continue feeling in control and not worry about my health suffering or my clothes getting tight. Maintenance is so, so worth it. 

Tuesday Reality Check – June 2, 2020

June 2, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you buying things at the grocery store in case you might want them over the next week? Is having those things at home taxing your resistance muscle? If so, leave the struggle at the store! Stop buying them and save yourself hours of struggle over the next weeks.  

Monday Motivation – June 1, 2020

June 1, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: This is undeniably a hard and strange time. If you’re having thoughts like, “I can’t focus on healthy eating right now,” remind yourself that healthy eating is important now more than ever! Being healthy and feeling in control is extra important when life is hard and there are so many factors out of our control. 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 29, 2020

May 29, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You can eat a slice of cake in 5 bites or 20 bites. Either way it’s the same amount of food, but you get to enjoy it 15 more times when you eat slowly and in smaller bites, which can greatly increase your satisfaction. This weekend: focus on eating more slowly, more mindfully, and taking smaller bites! 

Think Thin Thursday – May 28, 2020

May 28, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn’t a negative! 

Wednesday Sabotage – May 27, 2020

May 27, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: The scale isn’t moving. This is so discouraging, maybe I’ll give up.
Response: While it’s true it’s discouraging when the scale doesn’t move, it doesn’t mean I should give up. If I give up, it will never move down (and it’s almost guaranteed to move up). If I keep doing what I’m doing, it will eventually move down, and when it does, I’ll be so glad I stuck with it. 

Tuesday Reality Check – May 26, 2020

May 26, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen. 

Monday Motivation – May 25, 2020

May 25, 2020/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: It’s undeniably true that there are disadvantages to losing weight – not eating as much as you want, whenever you want, having to watch portions, not eating or drinking the same things as other people may be, but it’s important to compare those to the advantages of losing weight – better health, improved self-confidence, increased mobility, better quality of life (in so many ways), etc. Ask yourself: which is more important to me? 

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 22, 2020

May 22, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, make sure you have reasonable expectations! If you expect to be able to eat like everyone around you, then you’ll wind up feeling deprived. Keep in mind that you are eating in a completely normal way – for someone who is trying to lose weight and/or keep it off. 

Think Thin Thursday – May 21, 2020

May 21, 2020/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 20, 2020

May 20, 2020/hgrossman

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day. 

Response:It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel bad and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating, it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 19, 2020

May 19, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: You don’t cure emotional eating by removing all comfort foods. You do it by learning to comfort yourself.

Monday Motivation – May 18, 2020

May 18, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Reminder: Getting on track with dieting can be discouraging, but it doesn’t need to be, if you have the right mindset. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you’ll continue improving.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 15, 2020

May 15, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there I won’t be able to resist,” remind yourself, “If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Think Thin Thursday – May 14, 2020

May 14, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 13, 2020

May 13, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t feel like planning and measuring my food. I know what and how much I’m going to eat. I don’t need to go to so much effort.

Response: If I only do the things I feel like doing, I won’t be able to lose weight and keep it off. Even if I don’t need to do these things to lose weight initially, I have to learn how to make myself implement these crucial skills for the future, when my motivation isn’t as high as it is today.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 12, 2020

May 12, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

Monday Motivation – May 11, 2020

May 11, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Today is a new day. Yesterday is gone. It starts RIGHT NOW!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 8, 2020

May 8, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re dining with other people this weekend, keep in mind that it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and wind up overeating. It can help to immediately portion off how much you are going to eat because that way, even if you do eat it while distracted, at least you won’t consume more than you had planned.

Think Thin Thursday – May 7, 2020

May 7, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 6, 2020

May 6, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

 

Tuesday Reality Check – May 5, 2020

May 5, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually the small goals lead up to big ones!

Monday Motivation – May 4, 2020

May 4, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Even if you’re “only” losing ½ a pound a week, you’ll still be 26 pounds down by this time next year. Just keep going!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 1, 2020

May 1, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think,Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.”

Think Thin Thursday – April 30, 2020

April 30, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating/weight/health? Is it easy feeling overstuffed? Is it easy not fitting into your clothes? None of those things are easy!

Wednesday Sabotage – April 29, 2020

April 29, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 28, 2020

April 28, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 24, 2020

April 24, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What we THINK will lead to a great weekend is eating whatever we want, in whatever quantity we want, but when we do the opposite – control our eating and stay on track – that’s truly what feels so great.

Think Thin Thursday – April 23, 2020

April 23, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: It’s important to pay attention to non-scale victories – things like feeling great about sticking to your plan, overcoming a craving, feeling stronger at the gym, finding it easier to move around, etc. The scale is one measure of success but it’s by no means the only one.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 22, 2020

April 22, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t turn down food someone is offering me because s/he will be disappointed. Response: It’s okay to disappoint people sometimes! Your weight loss goals are more important than any very small, very fleeting disappointment someone else might have.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 21, 2020

April 21, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Monday Motivation – April 20, 2020

April 20, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’ve fallen into any bad habits, today is your day to start fresh and begin working on your goals!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 17, 2020

April 17, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: “A goal without a plan is just a wish.” What’s your plan to help you stay on track this weekend?

Think Thin Thursday – April 16, 2020

April 16, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: A common thinking error that people make is mindreading – assuming they know what someone will think. Believing that you can’t turn down food someone is offering you because they will be terribly disappointed is mindreading. Maybe they will be disappointed or maybe they won’t be, but you don’t actually know unless you have evidence.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 15, 2020

April 15, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m exhausted but I’m at work so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

Tuesday Reality Check – April 14, 2020

April 14, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: The only bad workout is the one that didn’t happen. Commit to doing SOMETHING exercise-related this week.

Monday Motivation – April 13, 2020

April 13, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If it doesn’t challenge you, it doesn’t change you. Losing weight is hard but so, so worth it.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 10, 2020

April 10, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and simultaneously weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because every time you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

Think Thin Thursday – April 9, 2020

April 9, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future. It’s not about making yourself feel bad for making mistakes, it’s about learning from them to help you keep moving forward. Next time you make a mistake, take few moments and answer these three questions: What happened/what was the situation? What were the sabotaging thoughts that got in my way? What can I say and/or do differently the next time?

Wednesday Sabotage – April 8, 2020

April 8, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 7, 2020

April 7, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: How do you feel physically after you eat a big, fattening meal? How do you feel physically after you eat a reasonable, healthy meal? Our guess is you feel very differently! Next time you’re making a decision about what to eat for a meal, ask yourself, “How do I want to feel when I finish?”

Monday Motivation – April 6, 2020

April 6, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: It’s a new month, so it may be time to set some new goals. By the end of April would you like to have lost weight, gained weight, or stayed the same? The number you see reflected on the scale at the end of the month is ultimately up to you, so make a commitment to yourself NOW!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 3, 2020

April 3, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, consider the rule of one: One serving at meals, one scoop of ice cream for dessert, one serving of chips at the restaurant, etc. Sticking to just one means you get to enjoy some food, and continue making progress towards your goals.

Think Thin Thursday – April 2, 2020

April 2, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday: Make sure you have a healthy, fast snacks readily available. If you do, chances are high you’ll eat one and feel good about it. If you don’t, chances are you’ll eat something unhealthy and not feel good about it.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 1, 2020

April 1, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Eating this [unhealthy food] will help me feel better. Response: Nope! Eat better, feel better. Period.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 31, 2020

March 31, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Just because you’re alone/nobody is watching you eat something doesn’t mean the calories don’t count. Whether you’re with 100 people or no people, your body processes all calories the same.

Monday Motivation – March 30, 2020

March 30, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you haven’t checked in recently with exactly why you want to lose weight, spend some time really thinking about it today. Losing weight/maintaining weight loss is really hard, so it’s important to keep in mind exactly why you’re doing it.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 27, 2020

March 27, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “I’ll start working on my eating on Monday,” remind yourself, “How many times have I ‘started my diet’ on Monday? I could have lost weight and kept it off for years now, if I didn’t use that excuse.”

Think Thin Thursday – March 26, 2020

March 26, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 25, 2020

March 25, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s so unfair that I have to work on this and other people don’t.

Response: Chances are, they’re working on it, too! Many more people than I may realize are working hard to lose weight and/or maintain their weight. But in any case, what other people are eating just isn’t relevant to the goal I have for myself and losing weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 24, 2020

March 24, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: When you go on vacation, remember that you want to carry the good feelings of the vacation home with you. If you eat with abandon, you’ll feel out of control and discouraged. But if you stay in control, you’ll feel proud and optimistic. It’s so worth it to stay in control!

Monday Motivation – March 23, 2020

March 23, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’re not great at self-care, you’re likely going to be vulnerable to turning to food when you get stressed or upset because you won’t have other ways of calming down or soothing yourself. This week, focus on building other means of comfort and stress-relief into your life so you have other things to turn to besides food.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 20, 2020

March 20, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

Think Thin Thursday – March 19, 2020

March 19, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you’re an emotional eater, remember that you learned to eat when you were feeling bad, but you can unlearn it, too. It’s not a given that food is the only way to feel better.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 18, 2020

March 18, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve paid for this meal, so I have to get my money’s worth by eating it all.

Response: Eating it all won’t bring the money back, it will just make me take in too many calories and jeopardize my weight loss.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 17, 2020

March 17, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Everyone has stress in their lives, so we can’t use feeling stressed as a reason to let go of healthy eating. Stress will be there either way. Do you want to feel stressed and bad about yourself, or stressed and better about yourself?

Monday Motivation – March 16, 2020

March 16, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Every time you go to bed after having a good eating day, you will feel great – and every morning you wake up after having had a good eating day the day before, you will feel great. This week, make a commitment to yourself to FEEL GREAT by committing to having a good eating week!

Friday Weekend-Warm Up – March 13, 2020

March 13, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you come in contact with free food this weekend and think, “It’s okay to have some because it’s free,” remind yourself that just because it’s free in terms of cost doesn’t mean it’s free in terms of calories! Your body doesn’t know or care how much money you spent on something, it processes all calories the same.

Think Thin Thursday – March 12, 2020

March 12, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If there are certain foods in your house that continually sabotage you, consider getting rid of them! Yes, your spouse or kids might grumble initially but chances are these are not nutrition-laden foods that they need to be eating, either.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 11, 2020

March 11, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat because I just need to feel better NOW.

Response: While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to EAT to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t cause me to take in extra calories and gain weight. Besides, if I eat to feel better now, the only thing I’ll be doing is signing myself up to feel badly later – when I feel guilty about what I’ve eaten, when I’ve reinforced bad habits, and when I’ve gain weight. Do something else that will help me feel better now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 10, 2020

March 10, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re in the habit of getting fast food often, think about how that food makes you FEEL (not just about how it tastes). If it ultimately doesn’t make you feel good, it’s probably worth working on cutting it out, or at least cutting down on it.

Monday Motivation – March 9, 2020

March 9, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future); it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 6, 2020

March 6, 2020/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think,Life is too short, so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.”

Think Thin Thursday – March 5, 2020

March 5, 2020/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you’re someone who eats when you get home from work, you might be using food as means to de-stress from the day and transition from work mode to home mode. Consider putting other strategies in place to achieve this, like listening to a song in your car before going in the house, or reading some response cards, or doing some deep breathing, or going for a quick walk.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 4, 2020

March 4, 2020/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I want to be free to eat whatever I want.

Response: I can be free to eat whatever I want, or I can stop fooling myself and finally lose weight for good. Every time matters. Being free to eat whatever I want means gaining weight and feeling out of control. It’s not worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 3, 2020

March 3, 2020/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: When you travel, make sure you plan for how you’ll handle food while on your trip, but also during transit! If you’re driving, will you bring food with you? If you’re flying, will you have enough time to seek out healthy food in the airport? Figure these things out in advance.

Monday Motivation – March 2, 2020

March 2, 2020/mhayes

Monday Motivation: How are you doing with sugar? If you’re eating too much of it, this week consider focusing on adopting the plan of having one reasonable portion of dessert at night. Plan and portion out IN ADVANCE what dessert you’ll have (no spontaneous decisions!). It’s fine if you ultimately want to eat less than that, but work on one dessert a day first. Once your dessert resistance muscle is stronger, you’ll be in a better position to cut down from there.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 28, 2020

February 28, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend, decide in advance what to have! In-the-moment decisions are the hardest to make well, so maximize your chances of success by not having to rely on spontaneous decisions.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – February 27, 2020

February 27, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – February 26, 2020

February 26, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.

Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 25, 2020

February 25, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Negative emotions are a part of life. They’re not bad; they’re a part of being human. You don’t need to do anything to make them go away. They always crest, like a wave, and then start to come down. You don’t have to be afraid of your feelings.

Monday Motivation – February 24, 2020

February 24, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: Your calorie budget per day is just like any other budget. If you spend more in one area, it means you spend less in another (or if you spend less in one area, you get to spend more somewhere else). This week, make sure you have a plan to spend your calories where they make the most sense!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 21, 2020

February 21, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’ve had a hard week, you might be tempted to eat to destress and make yourself feel better. Remember that you’re entitled to feel better and you’re entitled to take care of yourself, but you’re also entitled to get everything on your Advantages List, so you have to find other ways to comfort yourself.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – February 20, 2020

February 20, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you find yourself trying to rationalize eating something: “It’s okay because I’ll just have a little; I won’t eat anything later; I had a small lunch, etc.,” consider using that as a cue to NOT eat. Remind yourself, “Once the situation has passed, I won’t be sorry I didn’t eat it.”

Wednesday Sabotage – February 19, 2020

February 19, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m too stressed to worry about my eating right now.

Response: Even though I think maintaining control over my eating will make me feel more stressed, it actually makes me feel less stressed because I feel more in control in general.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 18, 2020

February 18, 2020/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: When you’re eating dinner, keep the serving dishes off the table! Having more food immediately available greatly increases the chances that you’ll eat extra.

Monday Motivation – February 17, 2020

February 17, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: Whenever you have an experience where you stayed in control of your eating and felt really good about it, make sure you write it down! Reading these cards will help motivate you when you’re feeling down and remind you that you CAN do it, and when you do, it feels great.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 14, 2020

February 14, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “I want to just enjoy myself and not think about my eating,” remind yourself, “There’s no such thing as not thinking about it! If I think about it before (and while I’m there), I can plan to incorporate a special treat and feel really good afterwards. If I don’t have a plan, I’ll be thinking a lot about it when the party is over – in a negative way — and I’ll feel really mad that I didn’t control my eating. So either way I’ll be thinking about it.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – February 13, 2020

February 13, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day, it’s okay to eat extra right now.” Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 12, 2020

February 12, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t have time to exercise.

Response: It may be hard to find the time to exercise but it’s not impossible.  Anything is better than nothing, so start small and work up from there.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 11, 2020

February 11, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you want to “eat like everyone else,” remind yourself that what other people eat is completely irrelevant to what you eat.  No one else is your exact age/weight/body type with your exact weight loss goals. You have to eat in a way that works for you, not for anybody else.

Monday Motivation – February 10, 2020

February 10, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: Are you someone who tends to take on most household responsibilities yourself? Learning to diet takes a lot of time and energy initially so if your life is already full, you’ll need to find ways to make more time.  Try delegating some tasks to other members of your family. Remember, it’s actually good for your kids. They deserve the opportunity to feel like important members of the household and learn the value of responsibility.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 7, 2020

February 7, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re entertaining at your house this weekend, remember that you need a plan for what you’ll do while people are there, but also what you’ll do once you’re alone with leftovers! Sometimes that can be the more dangerous time, so make sure you plan for this in advance.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – February 6, 2020

February 6, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you walk into the office kitchen and see something that looks good, walk right back out!  Remind yourself that if you hadn’t seen it, you wouldn’t have wanted it so you’re really not missing out on anything.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 5, 2020

February 5, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I won’t be able to enjoy eating out if I can’t order “special” foods.

Response: Food is just one aspect of eating out. Even if what I get doesn’t feel as exciting every time, it’s still good food that I like. And every other part of eating out is still special (spending time with my family, not having to cook/serve/cleanup, the décor, people watching, etc.).

Tuesday Reality Check – February 4, 2020

February 4, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Even if you don’t always have control over what food is served to you (like when you’re at someone’s house), you always have control over what and how much you put in your mouth.

Monday Motivation – February 3, 2019

February 3, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: What are some of the advantages of staying in control of your eating? Some of the biggest ones are: FEELING BETTER! not feeling like a dark cloud is hanging over us; setting a good example for our families; feeling confident; feeling proud of ourselves.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 31, 2020

January 31, 2020/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – January 30, 2020

January 30, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 29, 2020

January 29, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.

Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 28, 2020

January 28, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: There is a difference between what your mind finds significant and what your body finds significant. Although your mind may find it significant that everyone around you is eating something (so it feels okay to eat extra, too), or that it’s a special occasion, or that you’re feeling upset, your body doesn’t know or care. It processes all calories the same.

Monday Motivation – January 27, 2020

January 27, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: Remember, you don’t grow on your easiest days; you grow on your hardest days. Even if you face challenges this week, they are opportunities to learn and develop. You can do this!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 24, 2020

January 24, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember, come Monday morning, you’ll look back at your weekend and feel PROUD of the times you stayed in control, not regretful. You likely won’t think, “I should have had an extra slice of chocolate cake,” or “I should have had a second glass of wine.” It just will not happen!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – January 23, 2020

January 23, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: It’s critically important to be tuned in to your thoughts, so you can learn what your common sabotaging thoughts are and come up with responses to them. The next time you eat something unplanned or that you know you probably shouldn’t, ask yourself, “What was just going through my head? What did I say to myself? ‘I know I shouldn’t eat this but it’s okay because….?’”

Wednesday Sabotage – January 22, 2020

January 22, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 21, 2020

January 21, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Are you exercising this week? Remember, you don’t have to go fast. You just have to GO.

Monday Motivation – January 20, 2020

January 20, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation: Dieting is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high, but at some point (whether in three weeks or three months) it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL, and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, dieting will get easier again. But, if you’re still riding the new year, new you high – keep the streak going! Make that motivation last as long as possible.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 17, 2020

January 17, 2020/Other

“I really regret eating healthy today,” said NO ONE EVER! This weekend, focus on healthy eating. You won’t regret it!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – January 16, 2020

January 16, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you make a dieting mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. In dieting, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you’re able to learn from them and move on.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 15, 2020

January 15, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: If I can’t stay on track now, how will I ever be able to do it in the future?

Response: Being off track is NOT an indication that I can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that I need more practice. Like any skill, the more I practice, the better I’ll get. This is no different!

Tuesday Reality Check – January 14, 2020

January 14, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s not about having time, it’s about making time. You CAN find time to prepare healthy food, meal plan, exercise, etc., if you make it a top priority.  Maybe you don’t have time to exercise 60 minutes a day or meal prep 2 hours on the weekend, but ANYTHING is better than nothing.

Monday Motivation – January 13, 2020

January 13, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation:  If you’ve made a resolution to lose weight, remember that learning to diet is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn’t do it or that you should give up; you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Dieting is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 10, 2020

January 10, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you think, “I’ve never been able to keep weight off before so why should I even try this year?” remind yourself, “If I never try, there is a 0% chance I will reach my goals. I’ve tried so many times in the past because it’s so important to me!” Don’t give up on an important goal. Figure out what you can do differently this time so that you’ll have different results.  Pick one thing and start working on it right away – this weekend!

Think Thin Thursday – January 9, 2020

January 9, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Did you get off track with things like exercise, meditation, or meal planning during the busy holiday season? If so, TODAY IS THE DAY to restart!

Wednesday Sabotage – January 8, 2020

January 8, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: Dieting stinks because the food is so boring.

Response: First, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. Second, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s okay! Food isn’t my only source of excitement; besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 7, 2020

January 7, 2020/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: January is a great time to institute a new exercise routine.  Even if you’ve never been an “exerciser” before – it’s never too late to start.

Monday Motivation – January 6, 2020

January 6, 2020/Other

Monday Motivation:  Make a commitment this week to focus on the things you’re doing well, NOT the mistakes you may make. Doing so will help you feel better and more motivated daily, which will make it easier to keep moving forward.  If you’ve never been someone who can focus on the positives, make 2020 the year that you start.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – January 3, 2020

January 3, 2020/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It’s much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – January 2, 2020

January 2, 2020/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: It’s important to remember that you need to make eating decisions based on what works for you, not what everyone around you is doing. Remind yourself that what everyone around you is eating is irrelevant, and that if you eat extra, you’ll gain weight regardless of whether others are overeating, too.

Wednesday Sabotage: January 1, 2020

January 1, 2020/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: Happy New Year’s Day! This week start the year off right. Instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 31, 2019

December 31, 2019/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re making a goal to lose weight in 2020, GET ON THE SCALE! See where you’re starting from! Avoiding the scale makes it easier to avoid other healthy habits. Just remember, if you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Monday Motivation – December 30, 2019

December 30, 2019/Other

Monday Motivation: It’s important to both give yourself credit for the good choices you make and not berate yourself when you make a mistake. When you beat yourself up, the only thing it does is demoralize you further, making it harder to get back on track. When you give yourself credit, it makes you feel great, makes it easier to keep doing what you’re doing, helps raise your confidence, and gives you motivation to stay on track. No matter what your eating has been like lately, it’s never too late to turn things around and start giving yourself credit for small, positive changes.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 27, 2019

December 27, 2019/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you think, “I just want to enjoy myself at holiday events this weekend and not have to think about it,” remind yourself, “there’s no such thing as not thinking about my eating! If I think about it before I go to the party (and when I’m there), I can plan to have a special treat and feel really good afterwards. If I don’t have a plan, I’ll be thinking about it a lot when the party is over (in a negative way), and I won’t be happy I didn’t control my eating. But either way I’ll think about it.”

Think Thin Thursday Tip – December 26, 2019

December 26, 2019/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: We want to remind you after a holiday that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 25, 2019

December 25, 2019/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: To those who celebrate it, Merry Christmas! We hope you have a day planned with fun things and good food (that you’ll eat in reasonable portions and feel really good about once the day has passed).

Tuesday Reality Check – December 24, 2019

December 24, 2019/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: This whole week, keep in mind, “I won’t regret the extra food I don’t eat, but I definitely will regret overeating. I never regret not eating something once the temptation has passed!”

Monday Motivation – December 23, 2019

December 23, 2019/Other

Monday Motivation: If you are given gifts of holiday food and feel guilty about not eating it, remember that whether you actually eat the gift in no way takes away from the nice gesture of receiving it. Make sure you keep your home environment one that works in your favor, not against you. There’s enough treats tempting you almost everywhere you look this time of year, your home doesn’t need to add to that.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 20, 2019

December 20, 2019/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight during the holiday season, and my goal is the opposite.”

Think Thin Thursday Tip – December 19, 2019

December 19, 2019/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you think, “There’s just so much junk food at work, I can’t resist it,” remind yourself that it’s worth it not to eat junk food at work. You don’t want to be plagued by cravings. You don’t want to gain weight, and you don’t want to feel guilty afterwards. If you see treats in the office that you want, tell yourself: “I CAN have them, just not right now. I’ll enjoy the treat so much more at home when I’ve planned to have it because I’ll eat it guilt free (and I won’t have to worry about overeating because I will only have one portion with me).”

Wednesday Sabotage – December 18, 2019

December 18, 2019/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m off track anyway. I’ll just worry about my eating once the new year hits.

Response: Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating. It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good. When I do, then I’ll start the new year in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 17, 2019

December 17, 2019/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember – unfortunately, your body doesn’t know or care what you don’t eat. It only knows what you do. So just because you passed up treats four times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to have the fifth.

Monday Motivation – December 16, 2019

December 16, 2019/Other

Monday Motivation: While staying in control of your eating is harder during the holidays, the good news is that when you manage to do so, it feels extra great! The harder it is to stay on track, the more positive feelings you get as a result of doing so. Remind yourself that staying on track during a normal day feels good, but staying on track during a holiday feels AMAZING!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 13, 2019

December 13, 2019/Other

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Make sure you eat regular meals this weekend. Don’t allow yourself to just graze throughout the day. Grazing is the absolute best way to take in the most calories with the least amount of satisfaction. Sit down, eat real meals, and you’ll feel much more satisfied while taking in less food overall.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – December 12, 2019

December 12, 2019/Other

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Are you drinking enough water? This is important year-round. Consider setting a water goal for yourself, like refilling a big 20 oz cup three times a day. Start out the day with three rubber bands on your cup and every time you finish it, take one off.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 11, 2019

December 11, 2019/Other

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to have to work on healthy eating during the holidays.

Response: It’s true that I don’t want to think about healthy eating, but I so much more don’t want to: not fit into my pants, not like the way I look, avoid being in pictures, feel out of control of my eating, etc.

While maintaining healthy eating this time of year is hard, it’s still much better than the alternative!

Tuesday Reality Check – December 10, 2019

December 10, 2019/Other

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember that you can’t take in extra calories at every holiday event and still maintain your weight. Remind yourself that there’s a huge difference between eating no treats you want and eating every treat you want, then work on finding the middle ground.

Monday Motivation – December 9, 2019

December 9, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you think, “I can’t believe how much I overate at the holiday parties this weekend. That was so bad,” remind yourself, “I can’t change what I ate in the past, only what I eat today and in the future. So instead of ruminating on past mistakes, I need to focus on making today a great day!”

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 6, 2019

December 6, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you get off track at any point this weekend, IMMEDIATELY RECOVER! You’ll be so proud of your ability to get back on track, instead of mad at yourself for slipping up.

Think Thin Thursday – December 5, 2019

December 5, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season, but decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 4, 2019

December 4, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true that I don’t care right at this moment, I’m going to care A LOT a few minutes from now if I jeopardize my diet and weight loss. I can’t let this one moment of not caring influence how I act because I know I will care again, and when I do, I’ll be SO happy and proud I didn’t give in.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 3, 2019

December 3, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: We’re now in the busy holiday time of year and people are more likely to drop healthy habits like exercise and meditation, simply because they have so much going on. Don’t fall into that trap! Especially during the holidays, exercise and meditation are extra important to provide healthy outlets and stress relief.

Monday Motivation – December 2, 2019

December 2, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: How has your eating been going so far this holiday season? If you need some extra motivation (or if things haven’t been going well), take a moment to regroup and really think about the reasons why it’s worth it to you to stay on track. Then write them down in a special Holidays Advantages List and start reading it every day, at least once a day.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 29, 2019

November 29, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: How did everyone fare yesterday? If you stayed in control – GREAT! Give yourself lots and lots of credit and keep doing what you’re doing. If you got off track – move on! Make the commitment to getting back on track THIS MINUTE and give yourself lots of credit for doing so.

Think Thin Thursday – November 28, 2019

November 28, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Happy Thanksgiving! Remember, today is ultimately a day for giving thanks for the blessings in your life. What food you do or don’t eat will not take away from that.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 27, 2019

November 27, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Since Thanksgiving is tomorrow, it’s okay to eat whatever I want. Everybody else will be doing that, too.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care what day of the year it is, it processes calories the same NO MATTER WHAT. My body also doesn’t know or care what anybody else around me is eating, it only cares about what food I eat MYSELF.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 26, 2019

November 26, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: The time and energy for dieting and exercise will NEVER just magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that dieters may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when they will make the time and energy; but absolutely, 100%, it’s worth it!

Monday Motivation – November 25, 2019

November 25, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. This week, focus on planning in advance and you’ll save yourself a lot of struggle.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 22, 2019

November 22, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember, there is almost no food that you can’t buy/make/order 365 days a year. Just because you don’t normally come in contact with a specific food doesn’t mean you can’t if you make the effort. Don’t buy into the thought, “I need to eat extra because I never get this food.”  Chances are you can get it again another time!

Think Thin Thursday – November 21, 2019

November 21, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Thanksgiving is only a week away! If you think, “I’ll feel really deprived if I don’t get to eat everything on the table,” remind yourself, “If I keep telling myself that I’m going to feel deprived, I definitely will. Instead of concentrating on the things I’m not eating, I need to focus on enjoying what I am eating and spending time with my loved ones.”

Wednesday Sabotage – November 20, 2019

November 20, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve made a dieting mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day.

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan not to eat! It just doesn’t work and I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 19, 2019

November 19, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you undoubtedly won’t be able to eat all of the holiday food you want, in whatever quantities you want. HOWEVER, this doesn’t mean that you can’t have a plan for when and how you will enjoy certain treats, and in doing so you will be able to enjoy holiday food, enjoy staying in control, AND enjoy all the advantages of losing weight.

Monday Motivation – November 18, 2019

November 18, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: When you’re working on losing weight, there are a lot of hard moments. Moments at parties, at events, when you’re having a craving, when you’re feeling stressed or anxious and want to eat. But there are also so, so many great moments. When you bend over and your stomach doesn’t get in the way. When you get a compliment. When you feel great at the end of the day. When you get on the scale stress-free. When you overcome a craving and feel really proud. Make sure you pay attention to the great moments! What are some of yours?

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 15, 2019

November 15, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: With the holidays right around the corner, it might be time to start brushing up on some of your skills. Have you been eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully? Reading your Advantages List? Responding to sabotaging thinking? Giving yourself credit? Making time and energy for dieting? If not, make a commitment to work on your basic skills this weekend to help get you in the right mindset.

Think Thin Thursday – November 14, 2019

November 14, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you get busy, it may also mean that you get stressed. If this happens, even though you’re busy it’s essential that you keep up with self-care activities (like exercising and talking to friends) so that you don’t turn to food to help you unwind.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 13, 2019

November 13, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s not really that important to go to bed on time.

Response: It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day. Besides, on the days I do go to bed, I feel so much better the next day – rested and alert. I’ll be so happy tomorrow morning I made myself get in bed.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 12, 2019

November 12, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: You’re an adult. It’s your responsibility to make decisions that are in line with goals that are important to you. It’s not your responsibility to make decisions that make others feel good about what they’re eating or drinking.

Monday Motivation – November 11, 2019

November 11, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: It may not be realistic to lose weight between now and January 1st (although it may be!) but that doesn’t mean gaining is inevitable. It might be helpful to set more of a maintenance goal for the time being – so you can feel good about staying the same weight instead of frustrated for not going down. But regardless of your goal, make sure to keep getting on the scale consistently!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 8, 2019

November 8, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You might be able to get away with not reading Response Cards regularly during the week, but don’t fool yourself into thinking it will work on the weekend. For most dieters, weekends are a lot tougher, so make sure you use every tool in your arsenal and give yourself the best shot at staying on track.

Think Thin Thursday – November 7, 2019

November 7, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: The next time you know you have a really stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s visit for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety so you don’t end up turning to food.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 6, 2019

November 6, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Since it’s almost the holidays, I can’t possibly work on healthy eating at this time.

Response: That’s just a sabotaging thought. While it may be more difficult at this time of year with all of the extra treats around, I’m ultimately in charge of every bite of food I eat so the holidays don’t have to derail my healthy efforts.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 5, 2019

November 5, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “I can’t get rid of all the leftover Halloween candy; that’s not fair to my kids,” ask yourself, “Do my kids really need to be eating all of this, anyway?” There is a big middle ground between letting them have no candy and letting them have way too much. Maybe they’ll be willing to keep some and can feel good about donating the rest.

Monday Motivation – November 4, 2019

November 4, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Consistency is the only way to build your resistance muscle! When you’re on track some of the time but off track other times, you’ll just end up spinning your wheels and not really getting anywhere. This week, focus on goals you can be 100% consistent with (even if that means backing on some things you think you “should” be doing but just can’t get yourself to do right now) and make progress towards strengthening your resistance muscle.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 1, 2019

November 1, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you think, “I just don’t want the burden of thinking about dieting this weekend,” remind yourself: Eating right is a burden, but being overweight is a burden too (physically, psychologically, financially, etc.) EITHER WAY I’M BURDENED, but at least in one way I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel good about myself.

Think Thin Thursday – October 31, 2019

October 31, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Happy Halloween! Remember that with a reasonable plan you can enjoy some Halloween candy and still enjoy feeling on track, feeling in control, and not feeling sick from over-indulging. If you haven’t already done so, make a plan right now.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 30, 2019

October 30, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Dieting shouldn’t be this hard. Response: Dieting is supposed to get hard from time to time. It gets harder for everyone. Remember how hard it used to be? It’s easier today than it was a year ago, and it will be a lot easier a year from today as long as I keep practicing my skills and don’t give up.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 29, 2019

October 29, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s always a good strategy to NOT BUY the Halloween candy that you like best. Just because it’s your favorite, doesn’t mean it’s everybody else’s. It’s usually just not worth it to have the most tempting food (in large quantities) hanging around the house. Don’t do that to yourself!

Monday Motivation – October 28, 2019

October 28, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: This time of year we always start reminding you that the holidays are right around the corner (in fact, Halloween is almost here!). Check in with yourself: How are you doing with practicing your skills? If some have gotten loose, NOW is the time to tighten up. Make sure you go into the holiday season with a really strong resistance muscle.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – October 25, 2019

October 25, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Halloween is on Thursday, but maybe you shouldn’t buy Halloween candy this weekend! It may be too early, and having it around the house all weekend may make it hard to resist. If you’ve ever gotten off track with early Halloween candy before, commit to buying it on Wednesday night or sometime on Thursday; there will still be plenty left in stores.

Think Thin Thursday – October 24, 2019

October 24, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If healthy eating feels really painful to you, you may be giving food a bigger role than it deserves. Food is a pleasure in life, but it’s not the only one. Try building other sources of pleasure and excitement in your life, and in doing so, you’ll rely less on food to be “fun” and healthy eating will be easier.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 23, 2019

October 23, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I just don’t have time to exercise right now.

Response: I may not have an hour a day to exercise, but there’s a huge range between doing 60 minutes and 0 minutes of exercise.  Even if I only have 5 minutes, 5 is better than nothing! At least it will reactivate my exercise habit and chances are I’ll be able to work up from there.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 22, 2019

October 22, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: You don’t cure emotional eating by removing all comfort foods. You do it by learning to comfort yourself without food.

Monday Motivation – October 21, 2019

October 21, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: One of the most important aspects of healthy eating and weight loss is improved quality of life. Our dieters find that once they gain control of their eating they feel SO MUCH BETTER both mentally and physically, in ways they hadn’t even conceived of when they initially started out.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – October 18, 2019

October 18, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re eating out at restaurants, decide in advance what you’re going to have and then don’t even look at the menu when you get to the restaurant! Remind yourself, “I’ve already decided what to order so I don’t even need to look at the menu or consider what else I might want. The decision has been made, and sticking to this decision will make me feel so much better. It’s worth it.”

Think Thin Thursday – October 17, 2019

October 17, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Staying on track, while it can feel very difficult in the moment, is actually a stress-reducer overall because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 16, 2019

October 16, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I have to eat when I feel negative things.

Response: Negative emotions are uncomfortable but not dangerous. I don’t have to “fix” them. I’ve had lots of times when I’ve felt very upset but I haven’t eaten. I’ve never exploded or lost control. The worst thing that will happen if I don’t eat is that my distress will peak and then the intensity of my emotions will go down.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 15, 2019

October 15, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make a dieting mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. In dieting, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you’re able to learn from them and move on.

Monday Motivation – October 14, 2019

October 14, 2019/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Dieting is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high but at some point (whether it’s in three weeks or three months) it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, it will get easier again.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – October 11, 2019

October 11, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you encounter food pushers this weekend, remember that it’s not their job to stop pushing food on you. They’re food pushers, that’s what they do. It IS your job to start saying no!

Think Thin Thursday – October 10, 2019

October 10, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip:  If you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 9, 2019

October 9, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to stick to my restaurant plan right now; I’m too hungry.

Response: Even if I think I’m really hungry and won’t be satisfied, that’s not true! I’m always satisfied when I leave a restaurant.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 8, 2019

October 8, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s not always reasonable in every situation to lose weight, or even to maintain weight. If the scale goes up, it doesn’t mean you didn’t do well; it just means it wasn’t reasonable not to gain a little.

Monday Motivation – October 7, 2019

October 7, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’ve been off track, take some time to reflect on just how good being on track and in control feels. It’s not always easy, but it always, always feels good at the end of the day. It’s worth it and you can do it!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – October 4, 2019

October 4, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you get off track, don’t get discouraged. Remind yourself that mistakes are part of the process, and get right back on track.

Think Thin Thursday – October 3, 2019

October 3, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If, for example, you’re drinking soda 7 days a week and want to cut it out, remember that there’s a huge difference between drinking it every day and never drinking. For many people, it’s too hard to go from all to none. Instead, start small. Go from 7 days to 5 or 6. Do that for a week or two, and slowly cut down from there. Eventually you’ll get to where you want to be, but you’ll do it in a more reasonable and manageable way.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 2, 2019

October 2, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.
Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat – healthy or not – fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 1, 2019

October 1, 2019/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “I don’t deserve credit for my dieting tasks because I should already be doing them,” remind yourself that no, you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things, because you didn’t know how. If this was easy, nobody would be overweight (or gain weight back after they lost it). It’s imperative to give yourself credit and recognize your accomplishments, so that you can build your confidence and sense of self-efficacy.

Monday Motivation – September 30, 2019

September 30, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Is your eating environment a nice place to be? If you routinely eat at a table that is cluttered with other things, it can cause a more stressful eating experience (and take away from being able to eat slowly and mindfully). This week, take the time to make sure you have a peaceful place to eat!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – September 27, 2019

September 27, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Remember, your body does not know or care that it’s a weekend; it processes calories the same regardless of the day of the week. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then weekends are a break from work, NOT a break from healthy eating.

Think Thin Thursday – September 26, 2019

September 26, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you’re feeling discouraged by getting off track, remind yourself that you ARE capable of major change. You can do this. It’s not always easy, but the most important thing is that you persevere. You will get there!

Wednesday Sabotage – September 25, 2019

September 25, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Getting off track from time to time is okay because at least I get to eat my favorite foods.
Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. As long as I keep thinking that there are foods I can’t eat when I’m on track, I’ll constantly be tempted to get off track. And remember, when I eat on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

Tuesday Reality Check – September 24, 2019

September 24, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “I’ll start my diet tomorrow,” remember that putting it off strengthens that resistance muscle because you’re allowing yourself not to do what you know you need to. Starting RIGHT THIS MOMENT strengthens your resistance muscle and increases the chances that tomorrow you’ll be able to keep it going!

Monday Motivation – September 23, 2019

September 23, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: We’ve said it before, and we’ll say it again – losing weight initially takes a LOT of time and energy. If you want it to happen, it means you have to put it FIRST. Remember – you deserve to put yourself first.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – September 20, 2019

September 20, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: While “going with the flow” might be a great attitude to have toward many things in life, it just doesn’t work with food when you’re trying to lose weight. Doing so means you have to make too many “in the moment” decisions, which are the ones most likely to get you into trouble. This weekend, commit to planning in advance and NOT going with the flow, food-wise.

Think Thin Thursday – September 19, 2019

September 19, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: A great skill to work on is not taking seconds. If you portioned yourself a reasonable amount the first time, then eating seconds will be purely because your mouth wants more, not because your body needs more food. Work on eating your food slowly and mindfully and remind yourself that when you’re done, you’re done.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 18, 2019

September 18, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences, but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 17, 2019

September 17, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re tracking something (calories, points, carbs, etc.), it’s really important to track AS YOU EAT, not at the end of the day. If you wait, you’re telling yourself it’s okay not to do something that you know you should do, which exercises your giving-in muscle. Plus, if you wait, it’s likely you may end up forgetting something you ate and/or realize at the end of the day that you’re over calories/points/carbs because you didn’t know where you stood before dinner.

Monday Motivation – September 16, 2019

September 16, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Initially, dieters often feel a sense of unfairness about what they’re not eating. However, along the way as they learn new skills and start to feel in control of their eating, they start to feel proud of what they don’t eat – not deprived. If you feel deprived, keep in mind that it’s HIGHLY likely this won’t always be the case. Stick with it!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – Semptember 13, 2019

September 13, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Dieters are over prone to grazing a lot on the weekend. It’s helpful to remember that you’re always better off if you sit down with a defined snack and eat it mindfully. Doing so is ultimately so much more satisfying (physically and psychologically) than grabbing little things here and there – and it also means you’ll probably take in fewer calories.

Think Thin Thursday – September 12, 2019

September 12, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: It’s important to eliminate the words, “I’ve blown it for the day,” from your vocabulary. Telling yourself that just gives you an excuse to continue overeating. Instead of thinking, “I’ve blown it,” remind yourself that you made a MISTAKE, but you’ll recover right away and have a great rest of the day.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 11, 2019

September 11, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 10, 2019

September 10, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you’re following a diet plan that has some “free” foods on it, remember that all food has calories and if you eat too much of it (even if it’s “free”), you won’t be able to lose weight.

Monday Motivation – September 9, 2019

September 9, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Consistency is the only way to build your resistance muscle! When you’re on track some of the time but off track other times, you’ll just end up spinning your wheels and not really getting anywhere. This week, focus on goals you can be one-hundred percent consistent with and make progress toward strengthening your resistance muscle.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – September 6, 2019

September 6, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: What are you doing this weekend to enhance your weight loss or maintenance efforts? Here are some examples: exercising; catching up on sleep; planning for the week; food shopping; food prep; de-stressing in healthy ways; reading Response Cards, etc.

Think Thin Thursday – September 5, 2019

September 5, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Whenever dieters make an alcohol plan (like “maximum two beers”) and they end up not sticking to it, they almost never come back and say, “that was so worth it! The extra beer made my night!” Usually it’s just the opposite. They find out that the extra alcohol didn’t give them much more fun, but it did give them more calories both from the beer and the food they ended up eating after consuming a third beer. It’s not worth it!

Wednesday Sabotage – September 4, 2019

September 4, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I feel sorry for myself that I can’t eat whatever I want, whenever I want.

Response: I’d feel so much sorrier for myself if I overate and didn’t fit into my clothes. I’d feel so much sorrier for myself if my blood pressure went back up and I had to go back on medication. I’d feel so much sorrier for myself when I looked in the mirror and saw myself in pictures.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 3, 2019

September 3, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Were you busy having fun this weekend and forgot to meal plan/prep for the week? If so, take five minutes RIGHT NOW and figure out what you’re going to eat today, and how you’re going to find the time to plan for the rest of the week.

Monday Motivation – September 2, 2019

September 2, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Today is a holiday for many people in US. If you have the day off work, enjoy it! But don’t make the mistake of thinking that enjoying the day means you have to get off track. If you stay on track and control your food, you get to go to bed at night feeling GREAT about the day.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – August 30, 2019

August 30, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you’re going to a barbeque or a party this long weekend, consider adopting this guideline: Only eat it if it’s on your plate. Grabbing handfuls here and there from big bowls makes it extremely difficult to keep track of how much you’re eating. If you’re deliberate about putting everything on a plate and then sitting down to have it, you’ll be much more accountable and aware of everything you eat. It helps!

Think Thin Thursday – August 29, 2019

August 29, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you feel like you’ve had a hard week, remember that likely not every minute of every hour of every day was hard. There definitely were SOME hard minutes but many, many, MANY minutes were likely easy or neutral. Keep a realistic perspective!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 28, 2019

August 28, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this without counting it because I don’t know how many calories are in it.

Response:Even if I don’t know the calories, it still HAS calories, so of course it counts. Estimating the calories is so much better than not counting at all, because at least I’m still being accountable for everything I eat.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 27, 2019

August 27, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: You’re an adult. It’s your responsibility to make decisions that are in line with goals that are important to you. It’s not your responsibility to make decisions that make others feel good about what they’re eating or drinking.

Monday Motivation – August 26, 2019

August 26, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Dieters often think, “I wish I could eat whatever I want and as much as I want.” However, when they eat in this unrestricted way, they ultimately feel bad and out of control (and worry about gaining weight). By contrast, when they control and limit their eating, they feel GREAT. Remember – what you may think you want in terms of eating may not be what actually feels good.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – August 23, 2019

August 23, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight every year and my goal is the opposite.”

Think Thin Thursday – August 22, 2019

August 22, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Just because you feel a sensation in your body, it doesn’t mean you’re hungry! It could be stress, boredom, tiredness, thirst, a craving, or something else. It can be helpful to ask yourself, “Where am I feeling it?” If it’s in your stomach, that may be hunger. If it’s anywhere else in your body, it’s likely not.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 21, 2019

August 21, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve never been able to keep weight off before so why should I even try?
Response:If I never try, there is a zero percent chance I will reach my goals. I’ve tried so many times in the past because it’s so important to me! Don’t give up on an important goal. I need to figure out what I can do differently this time, so that I have different results.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 20, 2019

August 20, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: The next time you know you have a really stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s visit for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety, so you don’t end up turning to food.

Monday Motivation – August 19, 2019

August 19, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Whatever you did or didn’t eat over the past weekend is irrelevant now. What is relevant is what you eat from this point moving forward. No matter what, today is an new opportunity to have a great eating day.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – August 16, 2019

August 16, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, if you think, “I’m off track anyway, I’ll just worry about my eating on Monday,” remind yourself, “Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating. It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good. When I do, I’ll start the new week in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes.”

Think Thin Thursday – August 15, 2019

August 15, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Staying on track – while it can feel very difficult in the moment – is actually a stress-reducer overall, because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 14, 2019

August 14, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s not really that important to go to bed on time.
Response: It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day, because I have less mental and physical energy. Staying on track is hard enough as it is – it’s worth doing everything I can to make it easier.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 13, 2019

August 13, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “There’s so much junk food at work right now, I just can’t resist it,” remind yourself, “It’s worth it not to eat junk food at work. I don’t want to be plagued by cravings, I don’t want to gain weight, and I don’t want to feel guilty afterwards. IF I see a treat in the office that I want, remember: I CAN have it, just not right now. I’ll enjoy the treat so much more at home when I’ve planned to have it, because I’ll eat it guilt free (and I won’t have to worry about overeating, because I will only have one portion with me).”

Monday Motivation – August 12, 2019

August 12, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Remember – how hard or easy dieting feels today is NOT how hard it will feel tomorrow and in the future. The more you practice your skills and the more habitual they get, the easier it becomes to keep doing them.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – August 9, 2019

August 9, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: You will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and simultaneously weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters, because every time you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

Think Thin Thursday – August 8, 2019

August 8, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: We always want to remind you that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for when and how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 7, 2019

August 7, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to stick to my restaurant plan right now; I’m too hungry.

Response: Even if I think I’m really hungry and won’t be satisfied, that’s not true! I’m always satisfied when I leave a restaurant.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 6, 2019

August 6, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember that you can’t take in extra calories at every summer event and still maintain your weight (let alone lose weight). Remind yourself that there’s a huge difference between eating no treats you want and eating every one you want. Work on finding the middle ground.

Monday Motivation – August 5, 2019

August 5, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you had the thought today, “I can’t believe how much I overate this weekend. That was so bad,” remind yourself that you can’t change what you ate in the past, only what you eat from this point forward. Instead of ruminating on past mistakes, focus on making today a great day!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – August 2, 2019

August 2, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision.  This weekend, increase your chances of success by planning in advance.

Think Thin Thursday – August 1, 2019

August 1, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: All-or-nothing simply doesn’t work. When dieters are all-or-nothing about being on a diet – believing they are either totally perfect on their diet or totally off of it – it makes it much more likely that one mistake will spiral into more. When dieters are all-or-nothing about food – believing that there are some foods they should cut out entirely when they’re dieting – it makes it much more likely that once they start eating a “bad” food, they won’t be able to stop, because they’ll have the thought, “I don’t know when I’ll allow myself to eat this food again, so I better eat as much of it as I can right now.”

Wednesday Sabotage – July 31, 2019

July 31, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ll never be able to get to the weight I was when I was younger. I should stay where I am, it’s good enough.

Response: If I’m at a healthy weight then maybe I SHOULD stay where I am and work on acceptance. If I’m not at a healthy weight, then it’s NOT good enough because my health is suffering. Yes, it’s true that I may never return to my younger weight, but that doesn’t mean I can’t still be healthy, feel good about myself, and achieve everything on my Advantages List. Having unreasonable expectations gives me an excuse to not even try, when I can still improve my life so much by working hard and losing weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 30, 2019

July 30, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat. Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward.

Monday Motivation – July 29, 2019

July 29, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn’t a negative!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – July 26, 2019

July 26, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

Wednesday Sabotage – July 24, 2019

July 24, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat and I never get to have it.

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now, because I can ALWAYS get it again. Besides, if I overeat, it will ruin the pleasure of having it because I’ll feel guilty.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 23, 2019

July 23, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future.  It’s not about making yourself feel bad for making mistakes, it’s about learning from them to help you keep moving forward.

Monday Motivation – July 22, 2019

July 22, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – July 19, 2019

July 19, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things – losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more.  Focus on what you’re saying YES to!

Think Thin Thursday – July 18, 2019

July 18, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 17, 2019

July 17, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it this summer.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it,’ summer or otherwise.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 16, 2019

July 16, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: A common thinking error that people make is “mindreading” – assuming they know what someone will think.  Believing that you can’t turn down food someone is offering you because they will be terribly disappointed is mindreading.  Maybe they will be disappointed or maybe they won’t be, but you don’t actually know unless you have evidence.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – July 12, 2019

July 12, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you come in contact with free food this weekend and think, “It’s okay to have some because it’s free,” remind yourself that just because it’s free in terms of cost doesn’t mean it’s free in terms of calories! Your body doesn’t know or care how much money you spent on something – it processes all calories the same.

Think Thin Thursday – July 11, 2019

July 11, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: At the end of the day, most people forget some (or all) of the food they ate standing up because food eaten standing up just doesn’t seem to register in the mind or body the same way as food eaten while deliberately sitting down. Working on eating every bite sitting down (and slowly and mindfully) is a comfortable way of cutting many calories from your diet because, ultimately, you likely won’t miss that food or feel any less satisfied.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 10, 2019

July 10, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that, while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 9, 2019

July 9, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: There’s a difference between physical satisfaction and psychological satisfaction.  If you’ve eaten a reasonable portion of food and you want more, remind yourself that while you may be experiencing a lack of psychological satisfaction, physically you’ve had enough so it’s time to stop eating.

Monday Motivation – July 8, 2019

July 8, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you feel daunted by how long it will take to lose the weight you want to, remember that the time will pass anyway! A year from now you’ll be a year older regardless, but do you want to be a year older and stuck at a heavier weight, or a year older and feeling SO MUCH BETTER? Either way, the time will pass.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – July 5, 2019

July 5, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-Up: If you come in contact with food pushers this weekend, remember that in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

Think Thin Thursday – July 4, 2019

July 4, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Happy 4th of July! If you think, “It’s the Fourth of July, I should be able to eat whatever I want,” remind yourself, “I can eat whatever I want – if I’m okay with getting off track, reinforcing bad habits, jeopardizing weight loss, possibly feeling uncomfortably full, etc. Remember that the things that ultimately make me feel good on a normal day (eating reasonable portions and staying in control) are the same things that will make me feel good on a holiday.”

Wednesday Sabotage – July 3, 2019

July 3, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra, because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating, it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 2, 2019

July 2, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to label it as such. It’s a mistake, not a catastrophe. The worse you make it seem in your head, the harder it will be to recover from. If you recognize that it’s just a small mistake and everyone makes mistakes, it won’t be such a hard leap to get right back on track.

Monday Motivation – July 1, 2019

July 1, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Let’s check in – we’re halfway through the year.  How are your weight loss/weight maintenance/healthy eating goals going?  Whether you’ve achieved what you want to, are on the road to achieving it, or have veered off onto another road entirely, there’s still an entire HALF YEAR to get to where you want to be!  By January 1 you could be a healthier, happier version of yourself and it starts TODAY. Right this moment!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 28, 2019

June 28, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-Up: We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again: If you want to lose or maintain your weight loss, you can’t use weekends as an excuse to overeat because you will continually undo all your hard work from the workweek. Make a commitment to staying on track this weekend!

Think Thin Thursday – June 27, 2019

June 27, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – June 26, 2019

June 26, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Getting off track from time to time is okay because at least I get to eat my favorite foods.

Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. As long as I keep thinking that there are foods I can’t eat when I’m on track, I’ll constantly be tempted to get off track. And remember, when I eat on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

Tuesday Reality Check – June 25, 2019

June 25, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember, it’s a combination of all the “little” things – like not eating a cookie from the cafeteria, making it a priority to eat sitting down, walking by the candy dish and not dipping in – that will make you lose weight. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG weight loss!

Monday Motivation – June 24, 2019

June 24, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’ve gotten off track with your eating, don’t expect yourself to immediately be able to put everything back into place. You need to build back up your resistance muscle first! Think about what feels doable this week. Recommit to it, do it (and give yourself so much credit for doing so!), and then add one or more things next week.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 21, 2019

June 21, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-Up: If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there I won’t be able to resist,” remind yourself, “If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Think Thin Thursday – June 20, 2019

June 20, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: When dieters tell us, “I had a really hard week,” we ask them, “was it hard for every single hour of every single day?” The answer is always, “no.” Don’t let the memory of several hard times influence your perception of the week as a whole.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 19, 2019

June 19, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m exhausted, but I’m at work so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

Tuesday Reality Check – June 18, 2019

June 18, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet correctly,” remind yourself, “I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning, I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning, so I have to make it a top priority or it will not happen. As it gets easier, it will take less and less time – it’s all a matter of priorities.”

Monday Motivation – June 17, 2019

June 17, 2019/hgrossman

Monday Motivation: Often dieters say they’ll start doing more things once they lose weight. We say DON’T WAIT! Start working on improving your life NOW because doing so will enable you to enrich your life and feel happier, which will bolster your weight-loss efforts. What new things are you going to try this summer?

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 14, 2019

June 14, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home, don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

Think Thin Thursday – June 13, 2019

June 13, 2019/hgrossman

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Sometimes dieters fear what their lives will be like once they lose a lot of weight, and have thoughts like, “I’m afraid I won’t know who I am after losing so much weight.” If this comes up for you, remind yourself, “It’s true, things will look and feel very differently. It may require some renegotiation on my part to figure out where I fit in, and renegotiations with others to figure out our relationships, but that doesn’t mean it can’t be done.  It’s better than the alternative of staying overweight and continuing to be stuck in an unhappy and unhealthy place.”

Wednesday Sabotage – June 12, 2019

June 12, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.

Response:It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to find something healthy and satisfying to do that will make me feel good now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 11, 2019

June 11, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: When you impulsively eat standing up, you’re telling yourself that it doesn’t really matter and that there won’t be any consequences – but there will be, because EVERY bite of food you eat has calories. Even if you’re only eating vegetables standing up today, tomorrow it might be chocolate.

Monday Motivation – June 10, 2019

June 10, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: There’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting (the summer’s not a great time, but neither is the holidays, and the fall is when my kids start school, so that’s too crazy, etc. etc. etc.), so why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – June 7, 2019

June 7, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Losing weight does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t.

Think Thin Thursday – June 6, 2019

June 6, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you’re traveling this summer, MAKE A PLAN! Figure out what you’ll eat, when you’ll eat it, what food you need to bring with you (and what food you don’t need to bring with you! Who needs all those extra treats hanging around the hotel room? NO ONE!). Just “winging it” rarely, if ever, works out.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 5, 2019

June 5, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m going to eat this because I just don’t care.
Response: While it’s true I may not care right in this moment, I absolutely will care later on – so I can’t let this one moment of not caring dictate my actions.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 4, 2019

June 4, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable, because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Monday Motivation – June 3, 2019

June 3, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’re questioning whether or not the effort to stick to a diet is really worth it, chances are you’re not 100% on track. When dieters are fully on track, feeling great about their eating, feeling very in control, and reaping the benefits, there’s no question whatsoever that it’s worth it. So instead of spending energy deciding whether or not it’s worth it, spend the energy to get completely on track, and the question will go away.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 31, 2019

May 31, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you want to be able to lose weight (or maintain your weight), it’s critical to watch your alcohol consumption on weekends. Don’t fool yourself – alcohol has a lot of calories and can really sabotage weight loss efforts in a number of ways. Just as you would have a plan for what you would eat at an event, it’s important to also have a plan for how much (if any) you’ll drink.

Think Thin Thursday – May 30, 2019

May 30, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you have the incredibly common sabotaging thought, “I’ll start my diet tomorrow,“ remind yourself, “Waiting for tomorrow just doesn’t work! The longer I put it off, the harder it will be because I’ll only strengthen my giving-in habit. If I wait for the ‘right time’ to start dieting, or if I wait for ‘tomorrow,’ I may never start! Besides, today is yesterday’s tomorrow, which means I should start RIGHT NOW!”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 29, 2019

May 29, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t (or shouldn’t have to) control my eating on vacations.
Response: When I let my eating get out of control on vacation, it makes the vacation worse, not better, because I end up feeling guilty and bad. Staying in control of my eating on vacation makes the whole trip better because I feel so much better – and then I won’t have to worry about getting back on track when the vacation is over, because I will have been on track the whole time.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 28, 2019

May 28, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: If your kids are ending school for the year, be prepared to handle the transition between school year and summer. It may take some renegotiation and new planning to make sure your healthy food and exercise stays in place.

Monday Motivation – May 27, 2019

May 27, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: If you’re going to a barbeque today with lots of food, remember that at such events you have two options: You can eat smaller portions of more things, or bigger portions of fewer things. Most people psychologically find it more satisfying to eat bigger portions of fewer things, but whatever you decide, be deliberate with your choices.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 24, 2019

May 24, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: For those of us in the US, this weekend is Memorial Day weekend. If you have parties and events planned for this weekend, MAKE A PLAN! Don’t leave it up to chance, because chances are it won’t go well (or as well as you’d like). You can enjoy yourself AND feel in control of your eating!

Think Thin Thursday – May 23, 2019

May 23, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: If you have the urge to just eat and eat and eat, remember – while doing that might feel (somewhat) pleasurable in the moment, it never feels good physically to feel overly stuffed. Remind yourself before you start how you’ll feel when you finish.

Wednesday Sabotage – May 22, 2019

May 22, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: Life is too short, so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t.
Response: Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 21, 2019

May 21, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again: there’s no such thing as “blowing it” for the day. Every bite of food you continue to eat has extra calories, and the more calories you eat, the more weight you’ll gain. Getting back on track at any point puts you in a better position than if you wait even one moment longer.

Monday Motivation – May 20, 2019

May 20, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: You might not always have control over what food is served to you, but you always, always have the ability to control what food you put in your mouth. Even very difficult dieting circumstances can be managed, because there is always at least that degree of control you can exert. You’re never powerless!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 17, 2019

May 17, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, make sure you continue to read your Advantages List and your Response Cards. Continually remind yourself why you’re doing this and what you’ll get in return. Doing so will hopefully motivate you to stay on track!

Think Thin Thursday – May 16, 2019

May 16, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: Sometimes dieters give in to the sabotaging thought, “I just don’t care.” If this is you, remember, “Even when I tell myself I don’t care about losing weight, I really do. There’s NEVER a time when I wouldn’t choose weight loss over anything I was about to eat.”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 15, 2019

May 15, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.
Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 14, 2019

May 14, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: Don’t compare your eating to anybody else’s. No one else is exactly your height/weight/activity level WITH your exact same weight loss goals. Just because someone can eat something (or can’t), doesn’t mean you can (or can’t!). Make decisions based on what you need to do for YOU, not on what anyone else is eating or not eating.

Monday Motivation – May 13, 2019

May 13, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: It’s important to keep in mind that dieting and losing weight is SUPPOSED to get hard from time to time. It’s not easy (or even neutral) all the time. It gets harder for everyone, and then it gets easier again. These are life-changing goals you’re working toward; it’s worth putting up with some “hard” in order to achieve them.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 10, 2019

May 10, 2019/mhayes

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Old habits are hard to break and easy to slip back into. This is why in dieting every single time DOES matter because every single time you’re either reinforcing the old, adverse habit or the new, helpful habit. This is especially true on weekends when bad habits tend to be most rampant. This weekend don’t be fooled – this time matters!

Think Thin Thursday – May 9, 2019

May 9, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: There’s a difference between physical satisfaction and psychological satisfaction. If you’ve eaten a reasonable portion of food and you want more, remind yourself that while you may be experiencing a lack of psychological satisfaction, physically you’ve had enough so it’s time to stop eating.

Wednesday Sabotage – May 8, 2019

May 8, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.
Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 7, 2019

May 7, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: It’s important to separate eating from exercise. Exercise to be physically and mentally healthy, not so that you can take in extra calories.

Monday Motivation – May 6, 2019

May 6, 2019/mhayes

Monday Motivation: Remember, it’s a give and take. In giving up some food, some of the time, you’re getting all the benefits of losing weight. It’s not as if you’re limiting your food for nothing or to punish yourself – it’s just the opposite. It’s important to continually remind yourself of everything you get in return!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – May 3, 2019

May 3, 2019/hgrossman

Friday Weekend Warm-up: Don’t let a big variety of food fool you into thinking you should eat more. If you’re at a party this weekend and there are 10 kinds of dessert, that doesn’t necessarily mean you should eat all 10. Keep in mind that if there were only one kind, you would have some and be satisfied.

Think Thin Thursday – May 2, 2019

May 2, 2019/mhayes

Think Thin Thursday Tip: There are so many good (free!) apps and websites out there to help you work on mindfulness meditation, which has been proven to be enormously effective in getting through cravings of all kinds. If you’re not using this powerful tool, now is the time to start!

Wednesday Sabotage – May 1, 2019

May 1, 2019/mhayes

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m so angry; I’m going to eat to make this feeling go away.
Response: While eating might temporarily distract me from feeling angry, ultimately the only thing it will do is INCREASE my anger because I’ll compound it by being angry about going off of my plan. I need to find another coping mechanism – like going for a walk or doing some mindfulness meditation – that will be effective and won’t sabotage other goals.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 30, 2019

April 30, 2019/mhayes

Tuesday Reality Check: We find that for most dieters, motivation is cyclical. Sometimes they feel very motivated, and other times much less so. Harness those motivated periods to really get some weight off, and if you’re in a period of lower motivation, it might be reasonable to have the goal of maintaining for a few weeks. Your higher motivation will return – it always does!

Monday Motivation – April 29, 2019

April 29, 2019/mhayes

Most dieters get to the point where they leave events and feel good about what they didn’t eat, not deprived. Because of this, it’s important to remind yourself that you don’t have to worry about feeling deprived in the future because it’s very likely that you won’t.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 26, 2019

April 26, 2019/mhagner

If you think, “I’m discouraged by the weight I’ve gained so far this year,” (or by the weight you’ve failed to yet lose) remind yourself that this weekend is a GREAT time to get back on track and recommit yourself to healthy eating. It doesn’t matter what you did or didn’t eat over the past few weeks. What matters now is what you eat today and every day going forward.

Think Thin Thursday – April 25, 2019

April 25, 2019/mhagner

Sometimes when dieters go through a stressful situation (like a family member’s illness or a demanding work situation), they do extraordinarily well because they are extra vigilant, knowing it’s 100% necessary. When the stressful time passes, they relax and can stray off track because their guard has gone down. Remember, successful weight loss and maintenance isn’t only a matter of how well you do during hard times, it’s also about every day in between.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 24, 2019

April 24, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m too stressed right now to work on healthy eating.

Response: Even during times of stress, I brush my teeth, put on my seatbelt, take care of my kids, etc. Since I don’t let stress be an excuse to stop doing these things, I also can’t let it be an excuse to stop practicing my dieting skills.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 23, 2019

April 23, 2019/mhagner

Do you have extra candy (Easter or otherwise) hanging around your house? Remember, your home environment can work in your favor if there’s nothing that’s going to overly tempt you or it can work really against you if you’re constantly having to fight cravings.  Make it work for you!

Monday Motivation – April 22, 2019

April 22, 2019/mhagner

Remember – eating extra one day won’t necessarily make you gain weight, but continuing to eat extra definitely will. If you ate extra on Easter, make sure to return to normal eating today to ensure you stay on track and feel great.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 19, 2019

April 19, 2019/mhagner

This is a Holiday weekend for some of you.  PLAN IN ADVANCE how you’re going to handle any food events you have on the schedule!  Leaving decisions up to chance greatly increases the changes things go south, and making decisions in advance exponentially increases the chances of things going well.

Think Thin Thursday – April 18, 2019

April 18, 2019/mhagner

In terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

Wednesday Sabotage – April 17, 2019

April 17, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 16, 2019

April 16, 2019/mhagner

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

Monday Motivation – April 15, 2019

April 15, 2019/mhagner

This week, consider the strategy of deciding in advance to not take seconds. This way, you won’t have to struggle after you finish eating about whether or not to get more, and you’ll likely avoid the very uncomfortable sensation of feeling overly full.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 12, 2019

April 12, 2019/mhagner

If you’re dining with other people this weekend, keep in mind that it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and wind up overeating.  It can help to immediately portion off how much you are going to eat because that way, even if you do eat it while distracted, at least you won’t consume more than you had planned.

Think Thin Thursday – April 11, 2019

April 11, 2019/mhagner

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

Wednesday Sabotage – April 10, 2019

April 10, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: The scale isn’t moving. This is so discouraging, maybe I’ll give up.
Response: While it’s true it’s discouraging when the scale doesn’t move, it doesn’t mean I should give up. If I give up, it will never move down (and it’s almost guaranteed to move up).  If I keep doing what I’m doing, it will eventually move down, and when it does, I’ll be so glad I stuck with it.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 9, 2019

April 9, 2019/mhagner

A common thinking error that people make is mindreading – assuming they know what someone will think.  Believing that you can’t turn down food someone is offering you because they will be terribly disappointed is mindreading.  Maybe they will be disappointed or maybe they won’t be, but you don’t actually know unless you have evidence.

Monday Motivation – April 8, 2019

April 8, 2019/mhagner

If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn’t a negative!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – April 5, 2019

April 5, 2019/mhagner

You can eat a slice of cake in 5 bites or 20 bites. Either way it’s the same amount of food, but you get to enjoy it 15 more times when you eat slowly and in smaller bites, which can greatly increase your satisfaction. This weekend: focus on eating more slowly, more mindfully, and taking smaller bites!

Think Think Thursday – April 4, 2019

April 4, 2019/mhagner

If you have the urge to just eat and eat and eat, remember that while doing that might feel (somewhat) pleasurable in the moment, it never feels good physically to feel overly stuffed. Remind yourself before you start how you’ll feel when you finish.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 3, 2019

April 3, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m exhausted but I’m at work so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

Tuesday Reality Check – April 2, 2019

April 2, 2019/mhagner

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Monday Motivation – April 1, 2019

April 1, 2019/mhagner

It’s a new month, so it may be time to set some new goals. By the end of April would you like to have lost weight, gained weight, or stayed the same? The number you see reflected on the scale at the end of the month is ultimately up to you, so make a commitment to yourself NOW!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 29, 2019

March 29, 2019/mhagner

If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

Think Thin Thursday – March 28, 2019

March 28, 2019/mhagner

Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

Wednesday Sabotage – March 27, 2019

March 27, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 26, 2019

March 26, 2019/mhagner

Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Motivation Monday – March 25, 2019

March 25, 2019/mhagner

Reminder: Getting on track with dieting can be discouraging, but it doesn’t need to be, if you have the right mindset. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you’ll continue improving.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 22, 2019

March 22, 2019/mhagner

This weekend, make sure you have reasonable expectations! If expect to be able to eat like everyone around you, then you’ll wind up feeling deprived. Keep in mind that you are eating in a completely normal way – for someone who is trying to lose weight and/or keep it off.

Think Thin Thursday – March 21, 2019

March 21, 2019/mhagner

It’s undeniably true that there are disadvantages to losing weight – not eating as much as you want, whenever you want, having to watch portions, not eating or drinking the same things as other people may be, but it’s important to compare those to the advantages of losing weight – better health, improved self-confidence, increased mobility, better quality of life (in so many ways), etc. Ask yourself: which is more important to me?

Wednesday Sabotage – March 20, 2019

March 20, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I know I already had enough, but I want just one more [cookie].

Response: If I have one more, I’ll want another one. And another one after that. The craving won’t go away just because I have “one more.” It’s true I’m unsatisfied now, but I’m still going to be unsatisfied after one more, two more, etc., so I might as well just stop now.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 19, 2019

March 19, 2019/mhagner

Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Monday Motivation – March 18, 2019

March 18, 2019/mhagner

Good reminder: Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually the small goals lead up to big ones!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 15, 2019

March 15, 2019/mhagner

If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there I won’t be able to resist remind yourself, “If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Think Thin Thursday – March 13, 2019

March 14, 2019/mhagner

Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – March 13, 2019

March 13, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t need feel like planning and measuring my food. I know what and how much I’m going to eat. I don’t need to go to so much effort.

Response: If I only do the things I feel like doing, I won’t be able to lose weight and keep it off.  Even if I don’t need to do these things to lose weight initially, I have to learn how to make myself implement these crucial skills for the future, when my motivation isn’t as high as it is today.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 12, 2019

March 12, 2019/mhagner

Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future.  It’s not about making yourself feel bad for making mistakes, it’s about learning from them to help you keep moving forward.  Next time you make a mistake, take few moments and answer these three questions:

  1. What happened/what was the situation?
  2. What were the sabotaging thoughts that got in my way?
  3. What can I say and/or do differently the next time?

Monday Motivation – March 11, 2019

March 11, 2019/mhagner

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 8, 2019

March 8, 2019/mhagner

If you start to get off track this weekend, remember that there is no such thing as “blowing it for the day,” or, “blowing it for the weekend.” There is such a thing, however, as making a mistake on Saturday and continuing to make mistakes on Sunday. But there is also the possibility of making a mistake on Saturday, getting right back on track, and having a GREAT rest of the weekend.

Think Thin Thursday – March 7, 2019

March 7, 2019/mhagner

If you think, “When I’m upset I have to eat,” remind yourself that if you became upset in a situation where no food was available, you would survive. You may really WANT to eat when you’re upset, but you never need to.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 6, 2019

March 6, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 5, 2019

March 5, 2019/mhagner

Don’t fool yourself into thinking that not working on healthy eating is the “easy way out.” Is it easy feeling out of control? Is it easy worrying about your eating/weight/health? Is it easy feeling overstuffed? Is it easy not fitting into your clothes?  None of those things are easy!

Monday Motivation – March 4, 2019

March 4, 2019/mhagner

When people ask us, “What’s the single most important quality for a successful dieter to have?” The answer is undeniably: PERSISTENCE!  The ability to not give up, even when the going gets hard. Because, in the journey of weight loss and maintenance, the journey WILL get hard, and then it will get easier, and then it will get harder again, and then easier. That’s just the process. The trick it sticking with it during the hard times, knowing that there’s a better time around the corner.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – March 1, 2019

March 1, 2019/mhagner

This weekend, if you think, “Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.”

Think Thin Thursday – February 28, 2019

February 28, 2019/mhagner

Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day it’s okay to eat extra right now.”  Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 27, 2019

February 27, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: Getting off track from time to time is okay because at least I get to eat my favorite foods.

Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. As long as I keep thinking that there are foods I can’t eat when I’m on track, I’ll constantly be tempted to get off track. And remember, when I eat on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

Tuesday Reality Check – February 26, 2019

February 26, 2019/mhagner

What we THINK will lead to a great day is eating whatever we want, in whatever quantity we want, but when we do the opposite – control our eating and stay on track – that’s truly what feels so great.

Monday Motivation – February 25, 2019

February 25, 2019/mhagner

Don’t do it for them, do it for yourself. While others might be a motivator in your quest to lose weight/maintain a healthy weight, ultimately do it for YOURSELF. You deserve it.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 22, 2019

February 22, 2019/mhagner

Are you meal planning/prepping this weekend to help you prepare for next week? If that’s not something you’ve started doing yet, this weekend may be the perfect time to start!

Think Thin Thursday – February 21, 2019

February 21, 2019/mhagner

Often people say, “three months from now, you’ll thank yourself” for being on track today. But guess what? TOMORROW you’ll thank yourself.  TONIGHT when you go to bed you’ll thank yourself. The good feelings from being in control/being on track start almost immediately!

Wednesday Sabotage – February 20, 2019

February 20, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: Dieting stinks because the food is so boring.

Response: First, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. Second, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s ok! Food isn’t my only source of excitement and besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 19, 2019

February 19, 2019/mhagner

It’s critically important to be tuned in to your thoughts, so you can learn what your common sabotaging thoughts are and come up with responses to them. The next time you eat something unplanned, or that you know you probably shouldn’t, ask yourself, “What was just going through my head? What did I say to myself? ‘I know I shouldn’t’ eat this but it’s okay because….?’”

Monday Motivation – February 18, 2019

February 18, 2019/mhagner

Remember, you don’t grow on your easiest day; you grow on your hardest days. Even if you face challenges this week, they are opportunities to learn and grow.  You can do this!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 15, 2019

February 15, 2019/mhagner

“I really regret eating healthy today,” said NO ONE EVER!! This weekend, focus on healthy eating. You won’t’ regret it!

Think Think Thursday – February 14, 2019

February 14, 2019/mhagner

Are you exercising this week? Remember, you don’t have to go fast. You just have to GO.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 13, 2019

February 13, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I can’t even stay on track now, how will I ever be able to do it in the future?”

Response: Being off track is NOT an indication that I can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that I need more practice. Like any skill, the more I practice, the better I’ll get. This is no different!

Tuesday Reality Check – February 12, 2019

February 12, 2019/hgrossman

Remember, if hunger is not the problem, food is not the answer.

Monday Motivation – February 11, 2019

February 11, 2019/mhagner

This week, work on striving for PROGRESS, not perfection. Notice and appreciate small signs of progress and go from there. They eventually add up to big changes.

Think Thin Thursday – February 7, 2019

February 7, 2019/mhagner

It’s not about having time, it’s about making time. You CAN find time to prepare healthy food, meal plan, exercise, etc. if you make it a top priority.  Maybe you don’t have time to exercise 60 minutes a day, or meal prep 2 hours on the weekend, but ANYTHING is better than nothing.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 6, 2019

February 6, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 5, 2019

February 5, 2019/hgrossman

Tuesday Reality Check: “You don’t cure emotional eating by removing all comfort foods. You do it by learning to comfort yourself.”

Monday Motivation – February 4, 2019

February 4, 2019/mhagner

Eat better, feel better. PERIOD!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 1, 2019

February 1, 2019/mhagner

Just as you’ll likely never leave an event and think, “I wish I had eaten more dessert,” you’ll probably also never leave a party and think, “I wish I had had more to drink.” In fact, just the opposite is true: Once the situation has passed, you’ll feel so great what you didn’t eat and drink, not regretful.

Think Thin Thursday – January 31, 2019

January 31, 2019/mhagner

If you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 30, 2019

January 30, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I had such a hard day, I deserve to reward myself with food.
Response: If I reward myself with food and overeat, I’ll end up feeling terrible – physically and mentally, which will be the exact opposite of a reward. If I stay on track and control my eating, I will feel great. Food rewards just don’t work once the food is gone!

Tuesday Reality Check – January 29, 2019

January 29, 2019/hgrossman

Dieting is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high but at some point (whether it’s in three weeks or three months) it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, it will get easier again.

Monday Motivation – January 28, 2019

January 28, 2019/mhagner

If you feel alone in your struggles to limit your eating and lose weight, remember that so many other people are working at it, too. It’s a very, very small number of people who can eat whatever they want and be at a healthy weight. While it stinks that you have to work at it, you’re in VERY good company!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 25, 2019

January 25, 2019/mhagner

If you think, “I’m going to a party tonight but I don’t feel like making a plan. I’ll just do my best,” remind yourself, “Making a plan doesn’t take long at all. It’s not a big to make a plan, but it IS a big deal to not make one. Not having a plan exponentially increases the risk of eating too much, getting off track, and then having to struggle to get back in control.”

Think Thin Thursday – January 24, 2019

January 24, 2019/mhagner

So often we hear from dieters, “I felt so good when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really bad when I ate way too much.” We know this is hard to remember in the moment, which is why you need to write it down on a card and read it EVERY DAY!

Wednesday Sabotage – January 23, 2019

January 23, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.
Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 22, 2019

January 22, 2019/mhagner

If you think, “I was so good today and there so much food I didn’t eat, so it’s okay to eat this now,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know what you don’t eat, it only knows what you do eat. Extra is extra, regardless of how much extra you didn’t eat.

Monday Motivation – January 21, 2019

January 21, 2019/mhagner

This week, instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 18, 2019

January 18, 2019/mhagner

Remember, come Monday morning, you’ll look back at your weekend and feel PROUD of the times you stayed in control, not regretful. You likely won’t think, “I should have had an extra slice of chocolate cake,” or, “I should have had a second glass of wine.” It just doesn’t happen!

Think Thin Thursday – January 17, 2019

January 17, 2019/mhagner

If you think, “I’m really stressed out, I need to eat,” remind yourself that WANT and NEED are two different things. If you were stressed and in a situation where no food was available, you’d get through it. This proves that you may want to eat when stressed, but you don’t ever need to.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 16, 2019

January 16, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ll never get good enough at my dieting skills so I might as well give up.
Response: I’m better at them now than I was two months ago, and two months from now I’ll be better than I am today. As long as I keep working, I will keep getting better!

Tuesday Reality Check – January 15, 2019

January 15, 2019/mhagner

There is a difference between what your mind finds significant and what your body finds significant. Although your mind may find it significant that everyone around you is eating something (so it’s feels okay to eat extra, too), or that it’s a special occasion, or that you’re feeling upset, your body doesn’t know or care and processes all calories the same.

Monday Motivation – January 14, 2019

January 14, 2019/hgrossman

Make a commitment this week to focus on the things you’re doing well, NOT the mistakes you may make. Doing so will help you feel better and more motivated on a daily basis – which will make it easier to keep moving forward.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 11, 2019

January 11, 2019/hgrossman

It is so much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

Think Thin Thursday – January 10, 2019

January 10, 2019/mhagner

If you make a dieting mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. In dieting, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you’re able to learn from them and move on.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 9, 2019

January 9, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.
Response: It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to go find something healthy and satisfying that will make me feel good now AND later.

Monday Motivation – January 7, 2019

January 7, 2019/mhagner

If you’ve made a resolution to lose weight, remember that learning to diet is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn’t do it or that you should give up, you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Dieting is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 4, 2018

January 4, 2019/mhagner

You will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and simultaneously weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend. If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because every time you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

Think Thin Thursday – January 3, 2019

January 3, 2019/mhagner

Did you get off track with things like exercise or daily motivation during the busy holiday season? If so, TODAY IS THE DAY to restart!

Wednesday Sabotage – January 2, 2019

January 2, 2019/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ve never been able to keep weight off before so why should I even try this year?
Response: If I never try, there is a 0% chance I will reach my goals. I’ve tried so many times in the past because it’s so important to me! Don’t give up on an important goal. I need to figure out what I can do differently this time so that I have different results.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 1, 2019

January 1, 2019/mhagner

Happy New Year’s Day! This week start the year off right and instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Monday Motivation – December 31, 2018

December 31, 2018/mhagner

Today is the last day of 2018. Do everything you can today to end it on a high note. If nothing else, at least you’ll be able to look back and say, “I pulled it together at the end!”

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 28, 2018

December 28, 2018/hgrossman

If you’re going to a party this weekend, remind yourself, “I won’t regret the food I don’t eat, but I definitely will regret the extra, unplanned food I do eat. I never regret not eating something once the temptation has passed!”

Think Thin Thursday – December 27, 2018

December 27, 2018/hgrossman

We always want to remind you after a holiday that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for when and how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 26, 2018

December 26, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m off track anyway, I’ll just worry about my eating once the new year hits.
Response: Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating. It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good. When I do, then I’ll start the new year in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes

Tuesday Reality Check – December 25, 2018

December 25, 2018/mhagner

To those who celebrate it, Merry Christmas! We hope you have a day planned with fun things and good food (that you’ll eat in reasonable portions and feel really good about once the day has passed).

Monday Motivation – December 24, 2018

December 24, 2018/mhagner

If you had the thought today, “I can’t believe how much I overate at the holiday parties this weekend. That was so bad,” remind yourself that you can’t change what you ate in the past, only what you eat from this point moving forward. Instead of ruminating on past mistakes, focus on making today a great day!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 21, 2018

December 21, 2018/mhagner

If you’re going to holiday events this weekend, make sure you plan IN ADVANCE how many treats you’re going to have (if any). Don’t wait until you’re there to make decisions because in the moment decisions are the hardest ones to make well.

Think Thin Thursday – December 20, 2018

December 20, 2018/mhagner

Remember that you can’t take in extra calories at every holiday event and still maintain your weight (let alone lose weight). Remind yourself that there’s a huge difference between eating no treats you want and eating every one you want. Then work on finding the middle ground.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 19, 2018

December 19, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s not really that important to go to bed on time.
Response:It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day because I have less mental and physical energy. Remember, I need all the help I can get this time of year to combat office holiday treats!

Tuesday Reality Check – December 18, 2018

December 18, 2018/mhagner

Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season. But decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it.

Monday Motivation – December 17, 2018

December 17, 2018/mhagner

How has your eating been going so far this holiday season? If you need some extra motivation (or if things haven’t been going well), take a moment to regroup and really think about the reasons why it’s worth it to you to stay on track. Then write them down in a special Holidays Advantages List and start reading it every day, at least once a day.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 14, 2018

December 14, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight during the holiday season and my goal is the opposite.”

Think Thin Thursday – December 13, 2018

December 13, 2018/mhagner

It’s important to both give yourself credit for the good choices you make and not berate yourself when you make a mistake. When you beat yourself up, the only thing it does is demoralize you further and makes it harder to get back on track. When you give yourself credit, it makes you feel great, helps raise your confidence, makes it easier to keep doing what you’re doing, and gives you motivation to stay on track.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 12, 2018

December 12, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to have to think about healthy eating right now so I’m just going to give in and have this treat.
Response: There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’ If I decide to ‘not think about it’ and eat the treat now, I’ll definitely think about it a lot later when I’m feeling guilty and badly about my eating. On the other hand, if I do put in the effort to think about it now and resist, I’ll feel so great and proud later that I did.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 11, 2018

December 11, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “There’s so much junk food at work right now, I just can’t resist it,” remind yourself, “It’s worth it not to eat junk food at work. I don’t want to be plagued by cravings and I don’t want to gain weight and I don’t want to feel guilty afterwards. IF I see treats in the office that I want, remember: I CAN have them, just not right now. I’ll enjoy the treats so much more at home when I’ve planned to have it because I’ll eat it guilt free (and I won’t have to worry about overeating because I will only have one portion with me).”

Monday Motivation – December 10, 2018

December 10, 2018/mhagner

Right around now is when many dieters start thinking, “I’m already off track. I’ll wait until the New Year to recommit.” If this is you – DON’T WAIT!! Recommit right now. Right this moment! You may not have all great days from now until January, but as long as you keep working at it, guaranteed you’ll be in a better place come January 1 than you would be if you threw in the towel altogether.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 7, 2018

December 7, 2018/mhagner

Remember, your body does not know or care that it’s a weekend; it processes calories the same regardless of the day of the week. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then weekends are a break from work, NOT a break from healthy eating.

Think Thin Thursday – December 6, 2018

December 6, 2018/mhagner

Holiday treats hanging around your office? It can be helpful to make the decision to not have any while at work, but bring home a portion of whatever looks best to you. That way you won’t have to struggle about whether or not to have some each time you see the treats, and you’ll still be able to enjoy a portion later and not have to worry about eating more than you planned.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 5, 2018

December 5, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this without counting it because I don’t know how many calories are in it.

Response: Even if I don’t know the calories, it still HAS calories, so of course it counts. Estimating the calories is so much better than not counting at all because at least I’m still being accountable for everything I eat.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 4, 2018

December 4, 2018/mhagner

A very common sabotaging thought is, “Just this one time won’t matter,” but regardless of the situation, every time DOES matter. Every SINGLE time you withstand a craving, resist emotional eating, and say no to unplanned food, you increase the chances you will the next time. Each time you give in, you increase the chances you will give in the next time, too.

Monday Motivation – December 3, 2018

December 3, 2018/mhagner

Dieters often think, “I wish I could eat whatever I want and as much as I want.” However, when they eat in this unrestricted way, they ultimately feel bad and out of control (and worry about gaining weight). By contrast, when they control and limit their eating, they feel GREAT. Remember – what you may think you want in terms of eating may not be what actually feels good.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 30, 2018

November 30, 2018/mhagner

What are you doing this weekend to enhance your weight loss/weight maintenance efforts? Here are some examples: exercising; catch up on sleep; planning for the week; food shopping; food prep; de-stressing in healthy ways; reading Response Cards, etc.

Think Thin Thursday – November 29, 2018

November 29, 2018/mhagner

If you get busy, it may also mean that you get stressed. If this happens, even though you’re busy it’s essential that you keep up with self-care activities (like exercising and talking to friends) so that you don’t turn to food to help you unwind.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 28, 2018

November 28, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m really stressed out, I need to eat!

Response: I may WANT to eat, but I don’t NEED to. There are many people who feel stressed without turning to food and if I had been in a stressful situation where food wasn’t available, I’d deal with it without eating, too.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 27, 2018

November 27, 2018/mhagner

If you have the thought, “It’s okay to eat this because I just don’t care right now,” remind yourself that you definitely WILL care later, once the situation has passed and you’re feeling guilty and worried about jeopardizing your weight loss. Don’t let temporary moments of not caring be an excuse to eat off track.

Monday Motivation – November 26, 2018

November 26, 2018/mhagner

Whatever you did or didn’t eat over the past weekend is irrelevant now. What is relevant is what you eat from this point moving forward. No matter what, today is an new opportunity to have a great eating day.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 23, 2018

November 23, 2018/mhagner

How did everyone fare yesterday? If you stayed in control – GREAT! Give yourself lots and lots of credit and keep doing what you’re doing. If you got off track – move on! Make the commitment to getting back on track THIS MINUTE and give yourself lots of credit for doing so.

Thanksgiving Thursday – November 22, 2018

November 22, 2018/mhagner

Happy Thanksgiving! Remember, today is ultimately a day for giving thanks for the blessings in your life. What food you do or don’t eat will not take away from that.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 21, 2018

November 21, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Since Thanksgiving is tomorrow, it’s okay to eat whatever I want. Everybody else will be doing that, too.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care what day of the year it is, it processes calories the same NO MATTER WHAT. My body also doesn’t know or care what anybody else around me is eating, it only cares about what food I eat MYSELF.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 20, 2018

November 20, 2018/mhagner

The time and energy for dieting and exercise will NEVER just magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that dieters may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when they will make the time and energy, but absolutely, 100%, it’s worth it!

Motivation Monday – November 19, 2018

November 19, 2018/mhagner

When our dieters lack motivation, we have them pull out their Advantages List and really think about how important each item is to them and how their lives will be improved when they achieve them. This helps dieters remember why it’s worth it to them to push through this MOMENTARY lack of motivation and not let it stand in the way of reaching their goals.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 16, 2018

November 16, 2018/mhagner

With the holidays right around the corner, it might be time to start brushing up on some of your skills. Have you been eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully? Reading your Advantages List? Responding to sabotaging thinking? Giving yourself credit? Making time and energy for dieting? If not, make a commitment to work on your basic skills this weekend to help get you in the right mindset.

Think Thin Thursday – November 15, 2018

November 15, 2018/mhagner

Thanksgiving is only a week away! If you think, “I’ll feel really deprived if I don’t get to eat everything on the table,” remind yourself, “If I keep telling myself that I’m going to feel deprived, I definitely will. Instead of concentrating on the things I’m not eating, I need to focus on enjoying what I am eating and spending time with my loved ones.”

Wednesday Sabotage – November 14, 2018

November 14, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ll never be able to get to the weight I was when I was younger. I should stay where I am, it’s good enough.

Response: If I’m at a healthy weight then maybe I SHOULD stay where I am and work on acceptance. If I’m not at a healthy weight then it’s NOT good enough because my health is suffering. Yes, it’s true I may never return to my younger weight but that doesn’t mean I can’t still be healthy, feel good about myself, and achieve everything on my Advantages List. Having unreasonable expectations gives me an excuse to not even try, when I can still improve my life so much by working hard and losing weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 13, 2018

November 13, 2018/mhagner

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you undoubtedly won’t be able to eat all of the holiday food you want, in whatever quantities you want. HOWEVER, this doesn’t mean that you can’t have a plan for when and how you will enjoy certain treats, and in doing so you will be able to enjoy holiday food, enjoy staying in control, AND enjoy all the advantages of losing weight.

Monday Motivation – November 12, 2018

November 12, 2018/mhagner

One of the most important aspects of healthy eating and weight loss is improved quality of life. Our dieters find that once they gain control of their eating they feel SO MUCH BETTER both mentally and physically, in ways they hadn’t even conceived of when they initially started out.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 9, 2018

November 9, 2018/mhagner

You might be able to get away with not reading Response Cards regularly during the week, but don’t fool yourself into thinking it will work on the weekend. For most dieters, weekends are a lot tougher, so make sure you use every tool in your arsenal and give yourself the best shot at staying on track.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – November 8, 2018

November 8, 2018/mhagner

If healthy eating feels really painful to you, you may be giving food a bigger role than it deserves. Food is a pleasure in life, but it’s not the only one. Try building other sources of pleasure and excitement in your life, and in doing so, you’ll rely less on food to be “fun” and healthy eating will be easier.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 7, 2018

November 7, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to stick to my restaurant plan right now; I’m too hungry.

Response: Even if I think I’m really hungry and won’t be satisfied, that’s not true! I’m always satisfied when I leave a restaurant.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 6, 2018

November 6, 2018/mhagner

Important check in: Are you getting enough sleep? Remember that nothing good happens when you stay up too late. Chances are you’ll just end up eating more to stay awake and then be sleep-deprived the next day, which makes hunger and cravings feel worse. It’s a double whammy!

Monday Motivation – November 5, 2018

November 5, 2018/mhagner

If you’ve been off track, take some time to reflect on just how good being on track/being in control feels. It’s not always easy but it always, always feels good at the end of the day. It’s not easy, but it’s worth it and you can do it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 2, 2018

November 2, 2018/mhagner

Remember, great eating days are GREAT days, period. No matter how many tempting eating situations you find yourself in this weekend, if you stay in control, you’ll only feel happy about it at the end of the day. This weekend, treat yourself to feeling great – which means on-track eating.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – November 1, 2018

November 1, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I can’t get rid of all the leftover Halloween candy; that’s not fair to my kids,” ask yourself, “Do my kids really need to be eating all of this, anyway?” There is a big middle ground between letting them have no candy and letting them have way too much. Maybe they’ll be willing to keep some and can feel good about donating the rest.

Halloween Wednesday – October 31, 2018

October 31, 2018/mhagner

Happy Halloween! Remember that with a reasonable plan you can enjoy some Halloween candy and still enjoy feeling on track, feeling in control, and not feeling sick from over-indulging. If you haven’t already done so, many a plan right now.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 30, 2018

October 30, 2018/mhagner

It’s always a good strategy to NOT BUY the Halloween candy that you like best. Just because it’s your favorite, doesn’t mean it’s everybody else’s. It’s usually just not worth it to have the most tempting food (in large quantities) hanging around the house. Don’t do that to yourself!

Monday Motivation – October 29, 2018

October 29, 2018/mhagner

If you’ve been off track, take some time to reflect on just how good being on track/being in control feels. It’s not always easy but it always, always feels good at the end of the day. It’s not easy, but it’s worth it and you can do it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 26, 2018

October 26, 2018/mhagner

Halloween is on Wednesday but maybe you shouldn’t buy Halloween candy this weekend! It may too early and having it around the house all weekend may make it hard to resist. If you’ve ever gotten off track with early Halloween candy before, commit to buying it on Tuesday night or sometime on Wednesday. There will still be plenty left in stores.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – October 25, 2018

October 25, 2018/mhagner

Staying on track, while it can feel very difficult in the moment, is actually a stress-reducer overall because it gives you something to feel really proud about and makes you feel in control.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 24, 2018

October 24, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ve been so good all do so I deserve to have some extra dessert now.

Response: No, I don’t! I deserve to stick to my plan and feel good about myself and feel in control and make progress towards my goals.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 23, 2018

October 23, 2018/mhagner

You’re an adult. It’s your responsibility to make decisions that are in line with goals that are important to you. It’s not your responsibility to make decisions that make others feel good about what they’re eating or drinking.

Monday Motivation – October 22, 2018

October 22, 2018/mhagner

This time of year we always start reminding you that the holidays are right around the corner (in fact, Halloween is almost here!).  Check in with yourself: How are you doing with practicing your skills? If some have gotten loose, NOW is the time to tighten up. Make sure you go into holiday season with a really strong resistance muscle.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 19, 2018

October 19, 2018/mhagner

Dieters are over prone to grazing a lot on the weekend. It’s helpful to remember that you’re always better off if you sit down with a defined snack and eat it mindfully. Doing so is ultimately so much more satisfying (physically and psychologically) then grabbing little things here and there – and it also means you’ll probably take in fewer calories.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – October 18, 2018

October 18, 2018/mhagner

If you feel like you’ve had a hard week, remember that likely not every minute of every hour of every day was hard. There definitely were SOME hard minutes but many, many, MANY minutes were likely easy or neutral. Keep a realistic perspective!

Wednesday Sabotage – October 17, 2018

October 17, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I feel sorry for myself that I can’t eat whatever I want, whenever I want.

Response: I’d feel so much sorrier for myself if I overate and didn’t fit into my clothes. I’d feel so much sorrier for myself if my blood pressure went back up and I had to go back on medication. I’d feel so much sorrier for myself when I look in the mirror and see myself in pictures.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 16, 2018

October 16, 2018/mhagner

If you’re tracking calories and you’re eating a new food, make sure you look up the calories BEFORE you eat it. So often dieters make what they think is a good decision, only to find out later it was a calorie bomb. This is an entirely avoidable mistake!

Monday Motivation – October 15, 2018

October 15, 2018/mhagner

Remember – no matter how hard or easy dieting feels today is NOT how hard it will feel tomorrow and in the future. The more you practice your skills and the more habitual they get, the easier and easier it becomes to keep doing them.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 12, 2018

October 12, 2018/mhagner

While “going with the flow” might be a great attitude to have towards many things in life, it just doesn’t work with food when you’re trying to lose weight.  Doing so means you have to make too many in the moment decisions, which are the ones most likely to get you into trouble. This weekend, commit to planning in advance and NOT going with the flow, food-wise.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – October 11, 2018

October 11, 2018/mhagner

It’s helpful to view your eating day as a whole, and not just as individual meals. That way, if you don’t have bread at one meal, you’re less likely to feel deprived because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “Yes, I’m not having bread at lunch now, but that’s because I had toast for breakfast and I’m having a roll with dinner.”

Wednesday Sabotage – October 10, 2018

October 10, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I can’t lose weight because I just like eating and I don’t want to give that up.

Response: The good news is that I’ll NEVER give up eating! If I want to lose weight, I will have to stop overeating, but that’s entirely different. Besides, overeating ultimately makes me feel terrible (physically and psychologically), so it’s not so bad to give it up anyway.

Monday Motivation – October 8, 2018

October 8, 2018/mhagner

Consistency is the only way to build your resistance muscle! When you’re on track some of the time but off track other times, you’ll just end up spinning your wheels and not really getting anywhere.  This week, focus on goals you can be 100% consistent with and make progress towards strengthening your resistance muscle.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 9, 2018

October 8, 2018/mhagner

The next time you know you have a really stressful situation coming up (like a doctor’s visit for yourself or a loved one), ask yourself: how will I get through this without eating? Make a plan in advance for the ways you will deal with stress and anxiety so you don’t end up turning to food.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 5, 2018

October 5, 2018/mhagner

We’ve said this before, but it’s always good to think about whether a rule like, “no dessert before dinner” might be helpful, especially if you’re going to come in contact with dessert multiple times over the course of the weekend. If you do decide to institute a similar rule, remind yourself that you are ALLERGIC to dessert before dinner! If you were severely allergic to peanuts, you would never have them, no matter the situation.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – October 4, 2018

October 4, 2018/mhagner

If you’re feeling discouraged by getting off track, remind yourself that you ARE capable of major change. You can do this. It’s not always easy but the most important thing is that you persevere. You will get there!

Wednesday Sabotage – October 3, 2018

October 3, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s hard for me to lose weight because I have a really big appetite.

Response: Is it true that I have a really big appetite, or is it more accurate that I have a really big urge to eat?  It’s important to know the difference because when I realize that I’m not giving up eating that I’m actually hungry for, psychologically it will be easier to do so.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 2, 2018

October 2, 2018/mhagner

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

Monday Motivation – October 1, 2018

October 1, 2018/mhagner

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again – losing weight initially takes a LOT of time and energy. If you want it to happen, it means you have to put it FIRST. Remember – you deserve to put yourself first.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 28, 2018

September 28, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, if you get off track, don’t get discouraged. Remind yourself that mistakes are part of the process and get right back on track.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – September 27, 2018

September 27, 2018/mhagner

If you’re following a diet plan that has some “free” foods on it, remember that all food has calories and if you eat too much of it (even if it’s “free”), you won’t be able to lose weight.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 26. 2018

September 26, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ve made a dieting mistake, so I shouldn’t eat anything for the rest of the day.

Response: When I make a mistake, don’t plan not to eat! It just doesn’t work and I don’t deserve punishment. It was only a mistake.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 25, 2018

September 25, 2018/mhagner

Old habits are hard to break and easy to slip back into. This is why in dieting every single time DOES matter because every single time you’re either reinforcing the old, adverse habit or the new, helpful habit. Don’t be fooled – this time matters!

Monday Motivation – September 24, 2018

September 24, 2018/mhagner

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting RIGHT NOW, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 21, 2018

September 21, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, if you eat out and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit.  If you then get home and think, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” remind yourself that doing so will undo all your hard work and cause you to feel guilty and badly – which is the exact OPPOSITE of a treat.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – September 20, 2018

September 20, 2018/mhagner

Whenever dieters make an alcohol plan (like “maximum two beers”) and they end up not sticking to it, they almost never come back and say “that was so worth it! The extra beer made my night!” Usually it’s just the opposite. The find out that the extra alcohol didn’t give them much more fun, but it did give them much more calories both from the beer and the food they ended up eating after consuming a third beer. It’s not worth it!

Wednesday Sabotage – September 19, 2018

September 19, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s too hard to get back on track.

Response: Getting back on track is hard but it’s doable. I’ve done it before and I can do it again.  Getting back on track is hard but that’s only temporary. Once I’m on track, things will feel much easier again.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 18, 2018

September 18, 2018/mhagner

There is a fine line between losing and maintaining. It’s not that many extra calories in a day or week someone takes in that stops her from being able to lose. This week – make sure you’re on the RIGHT side of that line by being consistent each and every day.

Monday Motivation – September 17, 2018

September 17, 2018/mhagner

Important Reminder: Unfortunately, even if you’re 100% “perfect” on your diet, it’s not a guarantee that the scale will go down on any given day or week (but, if you overeat, it’s a guarantee that the scale will eventually go up). While you can’t rely on the scale going down as a reliable reward for your hard work, what you can rely on is the great feeling you get from being in control! Being on track feels SO MUCH BETTER than being off track.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 14, 2018

September 14, 2018/mhagner

If you come in contact with free food this weekend and think, “It’s okay to have some because it’s free,” remind yourself that just because it’s free in terms of cost doesn’t mean it’s free in terms of calories! Your body doesn’t know or care how much money you spent on something, it processes all calories the same.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – September 13, 2018

September 13, 2018/mhagner

It’s important to eliminate the words, “I’ve blown it for the day,” from your vocabulary. Telling yourself that just gives you an excuse to continue overeating. Instead of thinking, “I’ve blown it,” remind yourself that you made a MISTAKE, but you’ll recover right away and have a great rest of the day.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 12, 2018

September 12, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 11, 2018

September 11, 2018/mhagner

If you’re tracking something (calories, points, carbs, etc.) it’s really important to track AS YOU EAT, not at the end of the day. If you wait, you’re telling yourself it’s okay not to do something that you know you should do, which exercises your giving-in muscle. Plus, if you wait it’s likely you may end up forgetting somethings you ate and/or realize at the end of the day that you’re over calories/points/carbs because you didn’t know where you stood before dinner.

Monday Motivation – September 10, 2018

September 10, 2018/mhagner

For most dieters, the fantasy of eating with no restrictions is better than the reality of doing so. The reality of completely out of control eating is feeling bad, physically and psychologically.  It’s true you have to give up the good FANTASY of untethered eating but keep in mind that you’re not actually giving up a good reality.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 7, 2018

September 7, 2018/mhagner

Have you lapsed recently into eating standing up? Eating in the car? Not reading your Response Cards? Take this weekend to really think about what skills you’ve loosened up on a make a commitment to getting them back on track.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – September 6, 2018

September 6, 2018/mhagner

If, for example, you’re drinking soda 7 days a week and want cut it out, remember that there’s a huge difference between drinking it every day and never drinking. For many people, it’s too hard to go from all to none. Instead, start small. Go from 7 days to 5 or 6. Do that for a week or two, and slowly cut down from there. Eventually you’ll get to where you want to be, but you’ll do it in a more reasonable and manageable way.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 5, 2018

September 5, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I wish I was losing weight more quickly.

Response: When has losing weight quickly EVER helped me to keep it off? The faster I’ve lost it in the past, the faster I’ve gained it back. Besides, what does it matter if it takes an extra month or two to lose the weight in the course of the rest of my life?

Tuesday Reality Check – September 4, 2018

September 4, 2018/mhagner

Were you busy having fun this weekend and forgot to take to meal plan/prep for the week? If so, take five minutes RIGHT NOW and figure out what you’re going to eat today, and how you’re going to find the time to plan for the rest of the week.

Monday Motivation – September 3, 2018

September 3, 2018/mhagner

Today is holiday for many people in US.  If you have the day off work – enjoy it! But don’t make the mistake of thinking that enjoying the day means you have to get off track. If you stay on track and control your food, you get to go to bed at night feeling GREAT about the day.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 31, 2018

August 31, 2018/mhagner

If you’re going to a barbeque or a party this weekend, consider adopting this guideline: Only eat it if it’s on your plate. Grabbing handfuls here and there from big bowls makes it extremely difficult to keep track of how much you’re eating. If you’re deliberate about putting everything on a plate and then (sitting down to) have it, you’ll be much more accountable and aware of everything you eat. It helps!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – August 30, 2018

August 30, 2018/mhagner

Just because you feel a sensation in your body, it doesn’t mean you’re hungry! It could be stress, boredom, tiredness, thirst, a craving, or more. It can be helpful to ask yourself, “Where am I feeling it?” If it’s in your stomach, that may be hunger. If it’s anywhere else in your body, that’s likely not.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 29, 2018

August 29, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 28, 2018

August 28, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I’ll start my diet tomorrow,” remember that putting it off to tomorrow strengthens that resistance muscle because you’re allowing yourself not to do what you know you need to.  Starting RIGHT THIS MOMENT strengthens your resistance muscle and increases the chances that tomorrow you’ll be able to keep it going!

Monday Motivation – August 27, 2018

August 27, 2018/mhagner

Remember that staying on track and having a fun time are not mutually exclusive. In fact, they often go hand in hand! When dieters are off track and eating whatever/whenever they often don’t feel great. Either they’re feeling bad about it even as they’re eating, or they know in the back of their minds they’re going to feel bad when they face the consequences. Feeling good about the choices you’re making (and fueling your body with good food) feels great and leads to a VERY fun time.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 24, 2018

August 24, 2018/mhagner

Is your eating environment a nice place to be? If you routinely eat a table that is cluttered with other things, it can cause a more stressful eating experience (and take away from being able to eat slowly and mindfully). This weekend, make sure you have a peaceful place to eat!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – August 23, 2018

August 23, 2018/mhagner

Whenever you’re to stay on track during a challenging food situation (you’re at a party and are able to stick to one dessert), it’s so important to ask yourself, “How did I do it? What did I say to myself to help me stay on track?” If it was effective once, it’s helpful to remember because likely it will be effective again.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 22, 2018

August 22, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to track what I’m eating because I know I’m going to be over.
Response: My body doesn’t care whether or not I track what I’m eating. It’s keeping accurate accounting even if I’m not. Not tracking it just means I’m not holding myself accountable. If I track it, at least I’ll know what I’m doing and be in a better position to stay on track next time.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 21, 2018

August 21, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I don’t deserve credit for my dieting tasks because I should already be doing them,” remind yourself that no you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things because you didn’t know how. If this was easy, nobody would be overweight (or gain weight back after they lost it). It’s imperative to give yourself credit and recognize your accomplishments so that you can build your confidence and sense of self-efficacy.

Monday Motivation – August 20, 2018

August 20, 2018/mhagner

If you feel daunted by how long it will take to lose the weight you want to, remember that the time will pass anyway! A year from now you’ll be a year older regardless, but do you want to be a year older and stuck at a heavier weight, or a year older and feeling SO MUCH BETTER? Either way, though, the time will pass.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 17, 2018

August 17, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, think about working on the skill of not taking seconds. If you’ve portioned yourself a reasonable amount the first time, then eating seconds will be purely because your mouth wants more, not because you body needs more food.  Work on eating your food slowly and mindfully and remind yourself that when you’re doing, you’re done.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – August 16, 2018

August 16, 2018/mhagner

If you’re at a point where you can’t easily exercise and worry about that impacting your ability to lose weight, keep in mind that studies show (and we have found this to be true clinically, as well) that exercise is essential for good health and for weight management, but it’s not essential for weight loss. So, regardless of how much you can or can’t exercise, you can still absolutely lose weight.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 15, 2018

August 15, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I do eat, so just because I turned down holiday treats 4 times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to give in the 5th time. If I take in more calories than I had planned, I’ll gain weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 14, 2018

August 14, 2018/mhagner

Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Monday Motivation – August 13, 2018

August 13, 2018/mhagner

Initially dieters often feel a sense of unfairness about what they’re not eating. However, along the way as they learn new skills and start to feel in control of their eating, they start to feel proud of what they don’t eat – not deprived. If you feel deprived, keep in mind that it’s HIGHLY likely this won’t always be the case. Stick with it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 10, 2018

August 10, 2018/mhagner

Often people face food pushers on weekends. If you have a particular food pusher that causes you problems, remember that if you had a severe peanut allergy and that person offered you peanut butter cookies, you would never dream of caving in.  Working on your health and happiness is just as legitimate a reason to say no. Stand firm!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – August 9, 2018

August 9, 2018/mhagner

Cravings are like itches; the more you pay attention to them, the worse they get. The moment you get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away. Make a list of a few short, distracting activities (play a game on your phone, call a friend, check news headlines, etc.). Next time you have a craving, do something from the list. If that doesn’t work, do the next thing. Eventually the craving WILL go away. Stand firm!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 8, 2018

August 8, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 7, 2018

August 7, 2018/mhagner

What we THINK will lead to a great day is eating whatever we want, in whatever quantity we want, but when we do the opposite – control our eating and stay on track – that’s truly what feels so great.

Monday Motivation – August 6, 2018

August 6, 2018/mhagner

This week, don’t worry about the big picture. Don’t worry about how many more pounds you have to lose or how much longer you have to do this. Worry about what you need to do TODAY and do it. The future will take care of itself.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 3, 2018

August 3, 2018/mhagner

If you want to be able to lose weight (or maintain your weight), it’s critical to watch your alcohol consumption on weekends. Don’t fool yourself – alcohol has a lot of calories and can really sabotage weight loss efforts in a number of ways. Just as you would have a plan for what you would eat at an event, it’s important to also have a plan for how much (if any) you’ll drink.

Think Thin Thursday Tip – August 2, 2018

August 2, 2018/mhagner

Accountability to someone other than yourself can make a huge difference. If you’re not working with a professional, think about whether there’s someone in your life (a friend or family member) that you can be accountable to each day for the skills you’re working on.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 1, 2018

August 1, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.
Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 31, 2018

July 31, 2018/mhagner

Eating too little during the day and too much at night go hand in hand. Not only are you likely overly hungry, but you may also be telling yourself, “Since I didn’t eat much all day it’s okay to eat extra right now.”  Eating reasonably throughout the day is one major thing you can start doing to control nighttime eating.

Monday Motivation – July 30, 2018

July 30, 2018/mhagner

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 27, 2018

July 27, 2018/mhagner

Your calorie budget per day is just like any other budget. If you spend more in one area, it means you spend less in another (or if you spend less in one area, you get to spend more somewhere else). This weekend, make sure you have a plan to spend your calories where they make the most sense!

Think Thin Thursday Tip – July 26, 2018

July 26, 2018/mhagner

How are you doing with sugar? If you’re eating too much of it, consider adopting the plan of having one reasonable portion of dessert at night.  Plan out and portion out IN ADVANCE what dessert you’ll have (no spontaneous decisions!).  If you ultimately want to eat less than that, that’s fine, but work on one dessert a day first. Once your dessert resistance muscle is stronger, you’ll be in a better position to cut down from there.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 25, 2018

July 25, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat because I just need to feel better NOW.

Response: While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to EAT to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t cause me to take in extra calories and gain weight. Besides, if I eat to feel better now, the only thing I’ll be doing is signing myself up to feel badly later – when I feel guilty about what I’ve eaten, when I’ve reinforced bad habits, and when I’ve gain weight. Do something else that will help me feel better now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 24, 2018

July 24, 2018/mhagner

We find that for many of our dieters, intuitive eating is difficult because it is far too easy to confuse hunger with other sensations – craving, thirst, boredom, stress, or simply the desire to eat. Because of this, we work with our dieters on the skill of “eating according to a schedule” so that they don’t have to rely on potentially faulty cues to know whether or not to eat.

Monday Motivation – July 23, 2018

July 23, 2018/mhagner

Yesterday you said you’d to it tomorrow, so TODAY IS THE DAY! What are you committing to today that will move you forward on your health and weight loss goals?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 20, 2018

July 20, 2018/mhagner

If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

Think Thin Thursday – July 19, 2018

July 19, 2018/mhagner

It’s important to make sure that you don’t have an all-or-nothing mentality about sweets and desserts.  If you say to yourself, “Since I have trouble controlling myself around desserts/sweets, I’m just not going to have any,” remind yourself that likely this has led you to overeat sweets in the past (because when you do come in contact with them, you’re likely to overeat, not knowing when you’ll allow yourself to have them again).  Make a reasonable plan for when, what, and how much you’re going to have.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 18, 2018

July 18, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet correctly.

Response: I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning so I have to make it a top priority it or will not happen, but as it gets easier it will take less and less time. It’s all a matter of priorities.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 17, 2018

July 17, 2018/mhagner

Dieting is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high but some point (whether it’s in three weeks or three months) it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL and it happens to everyone, and as long as you keep at it, it will get easier again.

Monday Motivation – July 16, 2018

July 16, 2018/mhagner

So often we hear from dieters, “I felt so good when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really bad when I ate way too much.” When dieters finally learn to gain control over their thinking and eating, dieting feels GREAT, not terrible.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 13, 2018

July 13, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, if you think, “Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t,” remind yourself, “Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.”

Think Thin Thursday – July 12, 2018

July 12, 2018/mhagner

If you find yourself trying to rationalize eating something, “It’s okay because I’ll just have a little; I won’t eat anything later; I had a small lunch, etc.” consider using that as a cue to NOT eat. Remind yourself, “Once the situation has passed, I won’t be sorry I didn’t eat it.”

Wednesday Sabotage – July 11, 2018

July 11, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Getting off track from time to time is okay because at least I get to eat my favorite foods.

Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. As long as I keep thinking that there are foods I can’t eat when I’m on track, I’ll constantly be tempted to get off track. And remember, when I eat on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

Tuesday Reality Check – July 10, 2018

July 10, 2018/mhagner

There’s a difference between physical satisfaction and psychological satisfaction.  If you’ve eaten a reasonable portion of food and you want more, remind yourself that while you may be experiencing a lack of psychological satisfaction, physically you’ve had enough so it’s time to stop eating.

Monday Motivation – July 9, 2018

July 9, 2018/mhagner

It’s undeniably true that there are disadvantages to losing weight – not eating as much as you want, whenever you want, having to watch portions, not eating or drinking the same things as other people may be, but it’s important to compare those to the advantages of losing weight – better health, improved self-confidence, increased mobility, better quality of life (in so many ways), etc. This week, focus on the advantages, not the disadvantages.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – July 6, 2018

July 6, 2018/mhagner

If you come in contact with free food this weekend and think, “It’s okay to have some because it’s free,” remind yourself that just because it’s free in terms of cost doesn’t mean it’s free in terms of calories! Your body doesn’t know or care how much money you spent on something, it processes all calories the same.

Think Thin Thursday – July 5. 2018

July 5, 2018/mhagner

If you’re not great at self-care, you’re likely going to be vulnerable to turning to food when you get stressed or upset because you won’t have other ways of calming down or soothing yourself. It’s important to build other means of comfort and stress-relief into your life so you have other things to turn to besides food.

Wednesday Sabotage – July 4, 2018

July 4, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s the fourth of July, I should be able to eat whatever I want.

Response: I can eat whatever I want – if I’m okay with getting off track, reinforcing bad habits, jeopardizing weight loss, possibly feeling uncomfortably full, etc.  Remember that the same things that ultimately make me feel good on a normal day (eating reasonable portions and staying in control) are the same things that will make me feel good on a holiday.

Tuesday Reality Check – July 3, 2018

July 3, 2018/mhagner

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food

Monday Motivation – July 2, 2018

July 2, 2018/mhagner

Every time you go to bed after having a good eating day, you will feel great. And every morning you wake up after having had a good eating day the day before, you will feel great. This week, make a commitment to yourself to FEEL GREAT by committing to having a good eating week!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 29, 2018

June 29, 2018/mhagner

If you start to get off track this weekend, remember that there is no such thing as “blowing it for the day,” or, “blowing it for the weekend.” There is such a thing, however, as making a mistake on Saturday and continuing to make mistakes on Sunday. But there is also the possibility of making a mistake on Saturday, getting right back on track, and having a GREAT rest of the weekend.

Think Thin Thursday – June 28, 2018

June 28, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “When I’m upset I have to eat,” remind yourself that if you became upset in a situation where no food was available, you would survive. You may really WANT to eat when you’re upset, but you never need to.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 25, 2018

June 27, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 26, 2018

June 26, 2018/mhagner

Unfortunately, even if you’re 100% “perfect” on your diet, it’s not a guarantee that the scale will go down on any given day or week (but, if you overeat, it’s a guarantee that the scale will eventually go up). While you can’t rely on the scale going down as a reliable reward for your hard work, what you can rely on is the great feeling you get from being in control! Being on track feels SO MUCH BETTER than being off track.

Monday Motivation – June 25, 2018

June 25, 2018/mhagner

There’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting (the summer’s not a great time, but neither is the holidays, and the fall is when my kids start school, so that’s too crazy, etc. etc. etc.), so why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 22, 2018

June 22, 2018/mhagner

If you’re going to any events this weekend, remember that once you leave you’ll be so happy about the things you didn’t eat, not regretful.  You won’t be thinking, “Darn, I really wish I had a second piece of cake,” or, “I really should have had a third beer.” It just doesn’t happen!

Think Thin Thursday – June 21, 2018

June 21, 2018/mhagner

Remember that taking care of yourself is a necessity, not a luxury. If you think, “I can’t take 10 minutes to sit down and de-stress in a healthy way,” remind yourself, “Yes I can! There is no better use of 10 minutes than taking care of myself.”

Wednesday Sabotage – June 20, 2018

June 20, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Nothing I do will make a difference.

Response: That’s not true! EVERYTHING I do makes a difference. Every time I overcome a craving, make a plan and stick to it, resist the urge to eat for emotional reasons, etc., I make it easier and more likely I’ll be able to do it again the next time. I need to remember that losing weight is not one big change I make, rather it’s the sum total of all the small changes.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 19, 2018

June 19, 2018/mhagner

If you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to label it as such. It’s a mistake, not a catastrophe. The worse you make it seem in your head, the harder it will be to recover from. If you recognize that it’s just a small mistake and everyone makes mistakes, it won’t be such a hard leap to get right back on track.

Monday Motivation – June 18, 2018

June 18, 2018/mhagner

If losing weight is feeling hard right now, take some time to think about past experiences where you stayed on track in a difficult situation.  Doing so will help remind you that being in control feels good and that you CAN do it.  It’s not always easy but it’s also not always hard. It’s worth it.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 15, 2018

June 15, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, remember that it’s not all-or-nothing! It’s not as if you can eat every bite of food you want or nothing you want. When you’re losing weight, you will still be eating!  Work on finding the middle ground and enjoy every bite that you eat.

Think Thin Thursday – June 14, 2018

June 14, 2018/mhagner

My client just made this great Response Card about emotional eating!: “Negative emotions are uncomfortable but not dangerous. I don’t have to “fix” them. I’ve had lots of times when I’ve felt very upset but I haven’t eaten. I’ve never exploded or lost control. The worst thing that will happen if I don’t eat is that my distress will peak and then the intensity of my emotions will go down.”

Wednesday Sabotage – June 13, 2018

June 13, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to pack my lunch even though I know I should.

Response: It’s 100% worth it to me to take the time to pack and bring lunch every day because it will save me calories AND money.  When I don’t bring lunch and end up buying something unhealthy, I feel guilty about both what I ate and unnecessarily spending money. 

Tuesday Reality Check – June 12, 2018

June 12, 2018/mhagner

Often dieters are hesitant to bring their own food or make special requests because they don’t want to draw attention to themselves and feel uncomfortable. We remind dieters that the reality is that never feeling discomfort and losing weight are likely mutually exclusive goals. It’s okay to feel a bit of discomfort when it’s in the service of goals that are hugely important and life changing! It’s not easy but it’s worth it.

Monday Motivation – June 11, 2018

June 11, 2018/mhagner

This week, focus on self-care and making decisions that support your weight loss goals! Remind yourself, “I’m entitled to do what I need to do to reach my goals, as long as I’m not purposely hurting anyone else. I’m entitled to turn down food, request that food be prepared the way that I want it, and put my own needs first.  Remember, if I’m not good to myself, I can’t be good to anyone else.”

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 8, 2018

June 8, 2018/mhagner

If you’re eating out at restaurants, decide in advance what you’re going to have and then don’t even look at the menu when you get to the restaurant! Remind yourself, “I’ve already decided what to order so I don’t even need to look at the menu or consider what else I might want. The decision has been made, and sticking to this decision will make me feel so much better. It’s worth it.”

Think Thin Thursday – June 7, 2018

June 7, 2018/mhagner

It’s not always reasonable in every situation to lose weight, or even to maintain weight. If the scale goes up, it doesn’t mean you didn’t do well; it just means it wasn’t reasonable not to gain a little.

Wednesday Sabotage – June 6, 2018

June 6, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s not really that important to go to bed on time.

Response: It really is that important.  Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day.  Besides, on the days I do go to bed, I feel so much better the next day – rested and alert.  I’ll be so happy tomorrow morning I made myself get in bed.

Tuesday Reality Check – June 5, 2018

June 5, 2018/mhagner

Reminder: there is almost no food that you can’t buy/make/order 365 days a year. Just because you don’t normally come in contact with a specific food doesn’t mean you can’t if you make the effort. Don’t buy into the thought “I need to eat extra because I never get this food.”  Chances are you can get it again another time!

Monday Motivation – June 4, 2018

June 4, 2018/mhagner

If you’ve gotten off track with your eating, don’t expect yourself to immediately be able to put everything back into place. You need to build back up your resistance muscle first! Think about what feels doable this week. Recommit to it, do it (and give yourself so much credit for doing so!), and then add one or more things next week.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – June 1, 2018

June 1, 2018/mhagner

If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there I won’t be able to resist remind yourself, “If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Think Thin Thursday – May 31, 2018

May 31, 2018/mhagner

It’s undeniably true that there are disadvantages to losing weight – not eating as much as you want, whenever you want, having to watch portions, not eating or drinking the same things as other people may be, but it’s important to compare those to the advantages of losing weight – better health, improved self-confidence, increased mobility, better quality of life (in so many ways), etc. Ask yourself: which is more important to me?

Wednesday Sabotage – May 30, 2018

May 30, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 29, 2018

May 29, 2018/mhagner

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

Monday Motivation – May 28, 2018

May 28, 2018/mhagner

If you’re going to a barbeque today with lots of food, remember that at such events you have two options: You can eat smaller portions of more things, or bigger portions of fewer things. Most people psychologically find it more satisfying to eat bigger portions of fewer things, but whatever you decide, be deliberate with your choices.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 25, 2018

May 25, 2018/mhagner

For those of us in the US, this weekend is Memorial Day weekend.  If you have parties and events planned for this weekend, MAKE A PLAN! Don’t leave it up to chance, because chances are it won’t go well (or as well as you’d like). You can enjoy yourself AND feel in control of your eating!

Think Thin Thursday – May 24, 2018

May 24, 2018/mhagner

If you have the urge to just eat and eat and eat, remember that while doing that might feel (somewhat) pleasurable in the moment, it never feels good physically to feel overly stuffed. Remind yourself before you start how you’ll feel when you finish.

Wednesday Sabotage – May 23, 2018

May 23, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I know I already had enough, but I want just one more [cookie].
Response: If I have one more, I’ll want another one. And another one after that. The craving won’t go away just because I have “one more.” It’s true I’m unsatisfied now, but I’m still going to be unsatisfied after one more, two more, etc., so I might as well just stop now.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 22, 2018

May 22, 2018/mhagner

If you’re questioning whether or not the effort to stick to a diet is really worth it, chances are you’re not 100% on track. When dieters are fully on track, feeling great about their eating, feeling very in control, and reaping the benefits, there’s no question whatsoever that it’s worth it. So instead of spending energy deciding whether or not it’s worth it, spend the energy to get completely on track, and the question will go away.

Monday Motivation – May 21, 2018

May 21, 2018/mhagner

Reminder: Getting on track with dieting can be discouraging, but it doesn’t need to be, if you have the right mindset. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you’ll continue improving.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 18, 2018

May 18, 2018/mhagner

If you want to be able to lose weight (or maintain your weight), it’s critical to watch your alcohol consumption on weekends. Don’t fool yourself – alcohol has a lot of calories and can really sabotage weight loss efforts in a number of ways. Just as you would have a plan for what you would eat an event, it’s important to also have a plan for how much (if any) you’ll drink.

Think Thin Thursday – May 17, 2018

May 17, 2018/mhagner

If you have the incredibly common sabotaging thought, “I’ll start my diet tomorrow, “ remind yourself, “Waiting for tomorrow just doesn’t work! The longer I put it off, the harder it will be because I’ll only strengthen my giving-in habit. If I wait for the the “right time” to start dieting, or if I wait for “tomorrow,” to start, I may never start! Besides, today is yesterday’s tomorrow, which means I should start RIGHT NOW!”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 16, 2018

May 16, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t.

Response: Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 15, 2018

May 15, 2018/mhagner

Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

Monday Motivation – May 14, 2018

May 14, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “Nothing I do will make a difference,” remind yourself, “That’s not true! EVERYTHING I do makes a difference. Every time I overcome a craving, make a plan and stick to it, resist the urge to eat for emotional reasons, etc., I make it easier and more likely I’ll be able to do it again the next time. I need to remember that losing weight is not one big change I make, rather it’s the sum total of all the small changes.”

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 11, 2018

May 11, 2018/mhagner

Losing weight does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t.

Think Thin Thursday – May 10, 2018

May 10, 2018/mhagner

Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

Wednesday Sabotage – May 9, 2018

May 9, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Dieting stinks because the food is so boring.

Response: First, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. Second, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s ok! Food isn’t my only source of excitement and besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 8, 2018

May 8, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I have to finish this (extra) food because I’ve paid for it,” remind yourself that the money is already gone. Eating the food won’t bring it back, it will only cause you to take in extra calories. It’s not worth it!

Monday Motivation – May 7, 2018

May 7, 2018/mhagner

If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn’t a negative!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – May 4, 2018

May 4, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “Weekends should be about fun, not about dieting,” remind yourself that eating healthfully and having fun are not mutually exclusive. Just because you may not eat everything you want doesn’t mean you can’t enjoy what you do eat (and every other non-eating activity you do). Besides, being on track feel so much better than feeling out of control.

Think Thin Thursday – May 3, 2018

May 3, 2018/mhagner

All-or-nothing simply doesn’t work. When dieters are all-or-nothing about being on a diet, believing they are either totally perfect on their diet, or totally off of it, it makes it much more likely that one mistake will spiral into more. When dieters are all-or-nothing about food, believing that there are some foods they should cut out entirely when they’re dieting, it makes it much more likely that once they start eating a “bad” food, they won’t be able to stop, because they’ll have the thought, “I don’t know when I’ll allow myself to eat this food again, so I better eat as much of it as I can right now.”

Wednesday Sabotage – May 2, 2018

May 2, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat and I never get to have it.

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now because I can ALWAYS get it again. Besides, if I overeat, it will ruin the pleasure of having it because I’ll feel guilty.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 1, 2018

May 1, 2018/mhagner

It’s a new month, so it may be time to set some new goals. By the end of May would you like to have lost weight, gained weight, or stayed the same? The number you see reflected on the scale at the end of the month is ultimately up to you, so make a commitment to yourself NOW!

Monday Motivation – April 30, 2018

April 30, 2018/mhagner

If you feel daunted by how long it will take to lose the weight you want to, remember that the time will pass anyway! A year from now you’ll be a year older regardless, but do you want to be a year older and stuck at a heavier weight, or a year older and feeling SO MUCH BETTER? Either way, though, the time will pass.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 27, 2018

April 27, 2018/mhagner

If your goal is to lose weight, then your eating on weekends is just as important as during the week. It simply doesn’t work to be careful all week and then overindulge on weekends. Doing so will likely mean you’ll maintain your weight, but it won’t enable you to lose. Like our status today if you’re committing to making this a great eating weekend!

Think Thin Thursday – April 26, 2018

April 26, 2018/mhagner

Often when dieters are stressed and need a break, they eat because eating feels legitimate and sitting down with a magazine for ten minutes does not feel like a legitimate use of their time. But it is! Taking time to de-stress in healthier ways is a great use of your time because it’s helping you reach critical goals.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 25, 2018

April 25, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m exhausted but I’m at work so I can’t sleep. I’ll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

Tuesday Reality Check – April 24, 2018

April 24, 2018/mhagner

A common thinking error that people make is mindreading – assuming they know what someone will think.  Believing that you can’t turn down food someone is offering you because they will be terribly disappointed is mindreading.  Maybe they will be disappointed or maybe they won’t be, but you don’t actually know unless you have evidence.

Monday Motivation – April 23, 2018

April 23, 2018/mhagner

Often dieters say they’ll start doing more things once they lose weight. We say DON’T WAIT! Start working on improving your life NOW because doing so will enable you to enrich your life and feel happier, which will bolster your weight-loss efforts. What are you going to try this week?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 20, 2018

April 20, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I’ll wait until Monday to start my diet,” remind yourself that waiting until Monday has NEVER gotten you where you want to be. Instead, break that bad habit and get started RIGHT NOW! By Monday morning you’ll be so glad to already have experienced a few days of healthy eating and feeling better.

Think Thin Thursday – April 19, 2018

April 19, 2018/mhagner

At the end of the day, most people forget some (or all) of the food they ate standing up because food eaten standing up just doesn’t seem to register in the mind or body the same way as food eaten while deliberately sitting down. Working on eating every bite sitting down (and slowly and mindfully) is a comfortable way of cutting many calories from your diet because, at the end of the day, you likely won’t miss that food or feel any less satisfied.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 18, 2018

April 18, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Dieting is so hard! Why am I doing this?

Response: Good question! Why AM I doing this? It’s important for me to keep in mind at all times exactly why I’m working on losing weight and what I hope to get out of it. Reading a list, every day, of all these reasons will help me remember that dieting is hard, but the advantages make it worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 17, 2018

April 17, 2018/mhagner

The more preplanning you do (which means the fewer decisions you’ll have to make on the fly), the easier and better your day will be. It is so much easier to make good decisions ahead of time, rather than have to struggle to use willpower in the moment to make healthy choices.

Monday Motivation – April 16, 2018

April 16, 2018/mhagner

Good reminder: Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually the small goals lead up to big ones!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 13, 2018

April 13, 2018/mhagner

This weekend, remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things: losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more.  Focus on what you’re saying YES to!

Think Thin Thursday – April 12, 2018

April 12, 2018/mhagner

Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

Wednesday Sabotage – April 11, 2018

April 11, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I need to eat to make this craving go away.

Response: I NEVER need to eat to make a craving go away. Cravings are like itches – the more I focus on them, the worse they get. The moment I start to get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 10, 2018

April 10, 2018/mhagner

Because humans can go days without eating (barring any medical issues!), at any given time you never actually NEED to eat something. At that moment you may really WANT to eat, but that’s not the same as needing to eat.

Monday Motivation – April 9, 2018

April 9, 2018/mhagner

There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat. Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – April 6, 2018

April 6, 2018/mhagner

Not getting enough sleep makes everything seem harder, including (or maybe especially) sticking to healthy eating. This weekend, catch up on your sleep! You’ll have more mental and physical energy to do what you need to do.

Think Thin Thursday – April 5, 2018

April 5, 2018/mhagner

Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future.  It’s not about making yourself feel bad for making mistakes, it’s about learning from them to help you keep moving forward.

Wednesday Sabotage – April 4, 2018

April 4, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I did lose a little weight this week, but I’m disappointed it’s not more.

Response: Real life weight loss has NOTHING to do with weight loss TV shows. In real life, losing between ½ a pound and 2 pounds a week is exactly in the right range. Although I wish I was losing weight more quickly, I must remember that doing so has never enabled me to keep it off. Every pound lost is a victory and ultimately adds up to major weight loss.

Tuesday Reality Check – April 3, 2018

April 3, 2018/mhagner

Do you have extra candy (Easter or otherwise) hanging around your house? Remember, your home environment can work in your favor if there’s nothing that’s going to overly tempt you or it can work really against you if you’re constantly having to fight cravings.  Make it work for you!

Monday Motivation – April 2, 2018

April 2, 2018/mhagner

Remember – eating extra one day won’t necessarily make you gain weight, but continuing to eat extra definitely will. If you ate extra on Easter, make sure to return to normal eating today to ensure you stay on track and feel great.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 30, 2018

March 30, 2018/mhagner

Easter is this weekend for those of you who celebrate it.  Make a plan in advance for what you’re going to eat and when! And make sure that the plan is REASONABLE (if your plan is too restrictive likely you won’t be able to stick to it)!  Doing so will enable you to stay on track and enjoy what you are eating without any guilt.

Think Thin Thursday – March 29, 2018

March 29, 2018/mhagner

Remember, in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

Wednesday Sabotage – March 28, 2018

March 28, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’

Tuesday Reality Check – March 27, 2018

March 27, 2018/mhagner

Sometimes when dieters go through a stressful situation (like a family member’s illness or a demanding work situation), they do extraordinarily well because they are extra vigilant, knowing it’s 100% necessary. When the stressful time passes, they relax and can stray off track because their guard has gone down. Remember, successful weight loss and maintenance isn’t only a matter of how well you do during hard times, it’s also about every day in between.

Monday Motivation – March 26, 2018

March 26, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “It’s better to just not have any treats this week,” remind yourself, “I need to get away from all-or-nothing thinking and remember to look for the middle ground. Cutting out all treats never works because I eventually end up eating them, and then usually go overboard. While it’s likely not reasonable to eat as many treats as I want every day, it’s important plan to have reasonable amounts all throughout the week.”

Monday Motivation – March 19, 2018

March 23, 2018/mhagner

This week, consider the strategy of deciding in advance to not take seconds. This way, you won’t have to struggle after you finish eating about whether or not to get more, and you’ll likely avoid the very uncomfortable sensation of feeling overly full.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 23, 2018

March 23, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I’m discouraged by the weight I’ve gained so far this year,” remind yourself that this weekend is a GREAT time to get back on track and recommit yourself to healthy eating. It doesn’t matter what you did or didn’t eat over the past few weeks. What matters now is what you eat today and every day going forward.

Think Thin Thursday – March 22, 2018

March 22, 2018/mhagner

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

Wednesday Sabotage – March 21, 2018

March 21, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m too stressed right now to work on healthy eating.

Response: Even during times of stress, I brush my teeth, put on my seatbelt, take care of my kids, etc. Since I don’t let stress be an excuse to stop doing these things, I also can’t let it be an excuse to stop practicing my dieting skills.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 20, 2018

March 20, 2018/mhagner

Remember, it’s a combination of all the “little” things – like not eating a cookie from the cafeteria, making it a priority to eat sitting down, walking by the candy dish and not dipping in– that will make you lose weight. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG weight loss!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 16, 2018

March 16, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “It’s the weekend and I want to have fun” remind yourself of two things: 1. Having an on track weekend and having a fun weekend are not mutually exclusive. There are many, many sources of fun that do not come from food. 2.There is a huge difference between having no fun with food and having all fun with food. This weekend, work on finding the middle ground and work on finding other ways to have fun!

Think Thin Thursday – March 15, 2018

March 15, 2018/mhagner

If you feel discouraged when the scale either doesn’t go down or doesn’t go down as much as you think it should, remember that the scale is like a 3 year-old. It’s unpredictable, it’s not always rational, and it rarely does what we think it should or want it to. Over time the scale shows your hard work, but it won’t do so every day or every week. Just as you wouldn’t put your sense of wellbeing in a toddler’s hands, don’t put your sense of wellbeing in the hands of the scale! It’s just as unreliable.

Wednesday Sabotage – March 14, 2018

March 14, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Dieting is too hard, it’s just not worth it.

Response: Yes, dieting is hard SOME of the time, but not all the time. Looking back, it’s not hard every single minute of every single day. Besides, it IS worth it because my goals are MUCH MORE important to me than never working hard at it. Giving up isn’t worth it!

Tuesday Reality Check – March 13, 2018

March 13, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly.

Monday Motivation – March 12, 2018

March 12, 2018/mhagner

When you feel like quitting, think about why you started. Keep yourself motivated this week by really taking to think reflect on what you’re hoping to get out of working on healthy eating/weight loss and how important those things are to you. They’re worth working for!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 9, 2018

March 9, 2018/mhagner

If you make an eating mistake and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories NEVER stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain. Getting yourself back in control right away will stop you from gaining weight AND help you feel good about your eating for the rest of the weekend.

Think Thin Thursday – March 8, 2018

March 8, 2018/mhagner

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is always another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food!

Wednesday Sabotage – March 7, 2018

March 7, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’ll never be able to get to the weight I was when I was younger. I should stay where I am, it’s good enough.

Response: If I’m at a healthy weight then maybe I SHOULD stay where I am and work on acceptance. If I’m not at a healthy weight, then it’s NOT good enough because my health is suffering. Yes, it’s true I may never return to my younger weight but that doesn’t mean I can’t still be healthy, feel good about myself, and achieve everything on my Advantages List. Having unreasonable expectations gives me an excuse to not even try, when I can still improve my life so much by working hard and losing weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – March 6, 2018

March 6, 2018/mhagner

If you think, “I don’t have time to eat everything slowly and mindfully. That’s just too inefficient,” ask yourself: Which would be the greater inefficiency? Taking time (but not that much time) to sit and eat meals or all the inefficiencies that come from being overweight (time spent worrying about weight and feeling guilty about my eating, money and time spent on weight-related illnesses, how much longer it takes me to move around and walk places, etc.)?

Monday Motivation – March 5, 2018

March 5, 2018/mhagner

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – March 2, 2018

March 2, 2018/mhagner

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again: If you want to lose or maintain your weight loss, you can’t use weekends as an excuse to overeat because you will continually undo all your hard work from the workweek. Make a commitment to staying on track this weekend!

Think Thin Thursday – March 1, 2018

March 1, 2018/mhagner

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you’ve made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

Wednesday Sabotage – February 28, 2018

February 28, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.

Response: It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to go find something healthy and satisfying to do that will make me feel good now AND later.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 27, 2018

February 27, 2018/mhagner

When you impulsively eat standing up, you’re telling yourself that it doesn’t really matter and that there won’t be any consequences. But there will be because EVERY bite of food you eat has calories. Even if you’re only eating vegetables standing up today, tomorrow it might be chocolate.

Monday Motivation – February 26, 2018

February 26, 2018/mhagner

Once you stop giving in to cravings, cravings lose power over you because you know with absolute certainty you can withstand them and that when you do, cravings go away. There is so much hope that things will get easier!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – February 23, 2018

February 23, 2018/mhagner

If you’re dining with other people this weekend, keep in mind that it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and wind up overeating.  It can help to immediately portion off how much you are going to eat because that way, even if you do eat it while distracted, at least you won’t consume more than you had planned.

Think Thin Thursday – February 22, 2018

February 22, 2018/mhagner

If you think, Now that I’ve lost weight I can stop being so careful,” remind yourself, “While I may be able to loosen up a little, I have to remember that I lost weight because of the different ways I am now doing things. The moment I return to my old habits is the moment I start to gain weight back.”

Wednesday Sabotage – February 21, 2018

February 21, 2018/mhagner

Sabotage: Either I’m totally perfect on my diet or I’m not on it at all.

Response: Dieting is NOT all-or-nothing and treating it this way has NEVER helped me reach my goals. I have to stop allowing a mistake be an excuse for giving up because, like everyone else, I’m not perfect and am definitely going to slip up sometimes.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 20, 2018

February 20, 2018/mhagner

Being healthy and maintaining weight loss is a combination of a healthy diet AND exercise. Since 5 minutes of exercise a day is better than 0 minutes, there is no excuse for not finding at least a few minutes each day to get moving.

Monday Motivation – February 19, 2018

February 19, 2018/mhagner

One of the greatest advantages of being in control of your eating is the peace of mind it gives you. When dieters are out of control, they often have a lot of negative talk going on inside their heads, and when they’re on track, they feel at peace with their decisions.  Work on staying in control this week, if only so that your head is a nice place to be!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 16, 2018

February 16, 2018/beckadmin

If you feel deprived on weekends, remind yourself, “Either way I’m deprived. Either I’m deprived of EVERYTHING on my Advantages List, or I’m deprived of some food, some of the time. Which would be the bigger deprivation?”

Think Thin Thursday – February 15, 2018

February 15, 2018/beckadmin

It’s important to make sure that you don’t have an all-or-nothing mentality about sweets and desserts.  If you say to yourself, “Since I have trouble controlling myself around desserts/sweets, I’m just not going to have any,” remind yourself that likely this has led you to overeat sweets in the past (because when you do come in contact with them, you’re likely to overeat, not knowing when you’ll allow yourself to have them again).  Make a reasonable plan for when, what, and how much you’re going to have.

Wednesday Sabotage – February 14, 2018

February 14, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true that I don’t care right at this moment, I’m going to care A LOT a few minutes from now if I jeopardize my diet and weight loss. I can’t let this one moment of not caring influence how I act because I know I will care again, and when I do, I’ll be SO happy and proud I didn’t give in.

Tuesday Reality Check- February 13, 2018

February 13, 2018/beckadmin

You can eat a slice of cake in 5 bites or 20 bites. Either way it’s the same amount of food, but you get to enjoy it 15 more times when you eat slowly and in smaller bites, which can greatly increase your satisfaction.

Monday Motivation – February 12, 2018

February 12, 2018/beckadmin

Often dieters make the mistake of paying attention to what they feel like doing (or don’t feel like doing) and let that guide their actions. This week, focus on just doing what you need to do, whether or not you feel like it in the moment. When you see the scale go down, you will be glad you did.

Friday Weekend End Warm-Up – February 9, 2018

February 9, 2018/beckadmin

Weekends, with their numerous opportunities for treats, can be difficult. Having a rule for yourself like, “No dessert until after dinner can help you limit your intake because it makes it makes it easier to turn down treats offered during the day, knowing you can have one later.

Think Thin Thursday – February 8, 2018

February 8, 2018/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters fear what their lives will be like once they lose a lot of weight, and have thoughts like, “I’m afraid I won’t know who I am after losing so much weight.” If this comes up for you, remind yourself, “It’s true, things will look and feel very differently. It may require some renegotiation on my part to figure out where I fit in, and renegotiations with others to figure out our relationships, but that doesn’t mean it can’t be done.  It’s better than the alternative of staying overweight and continuing to be stuck in an unhappy and unhealthy place.”

Wednesday Sabotage – February 7, 2018

February 7, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet correctly.

Response: I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning so I have to make it a top priority it or will not happen, but as it gets easier it will take less and less time. It’s all a matter of priorities.

Tuesday Reality Check – February 6, 2018

February 6, 2018/beckadmin

When dieters tell us “I had a really hard week,” we ask them, “was it hard for every single hour of every single day?” The answer is always “no.” Don’t let the memory of several harder times influence your perception of the week as a whole.

Monday Motivation – February 5, 2018

February 5, 2018/beckadmin

There is no magic bullet or magical combination of food that will enable dieters to achieve lasting weight loss. But because dieting is not magic, it means that anyone can succeed once they acquire and PRACTICE, PRACTICE essential skills.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – February 2, 2018

February 2, 2018/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. When you get home make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Losing weight is the best treat!

Think Thin Thursday – February 1, 2018

February 1, 2018/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake, continue to eat normally for the rest of the day. Telling yourself, “I won’t eat anything else today,” might trigger feelings of anxiety or panic when you get hungry, which could then cause you to eat much more than you would have normally.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 31, 2018

January 31, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: I know I didn’t plan to have dessert until after dinner, but it’s okay to have it now (before dinner) because I just won’t have it later.

Response: Actually it’s NOT okay to have dessert now because if I do, I send myself the message that it’s okay to not do what I say I’m going to do; it’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every single time I give in to a craving and have dessert before dinner, I increase the likelihood that I will the next time, and the time after that. Every single time I resist, I make it easier to do so the next time.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 30, 2018

January 30, 2018/beckadmin

Make sure you have reasonable expectations! If expect to be able to eat like everyone around you, then you’ll wind up feeling deprived. Keep in mind that you are eating in a completely normal way – for someone who is trying to lose weight and/or keep it off

Monday Motivation – January 29, 2018

January 29, 2018/beckadmin

When dieting feels harder, it can be easy to forget how good it feels when you’re in control of your eating. If you need some extra motivation this week, take some time to think about a recent experience when you stayed on track and how good that felt (and that you were able to do it!).  If need be, then think about a time when you didn’t stay in control and what that felt like. Which would you rather recreate?  

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 26, 2018

January 26, 2018/beckadmin

This weekend pay attention to the “Just this one time” thought. If you have it, remind yourself, “It’s not okay to do it this one time because every single time matters. Every time I give in, I make it more likely I will the next time, too. I need to exercise my resistance muscle, not my giving in muscle.”

Think Thin Thursday – January 25, 2018

January 25, 2018/beckadmin

Dieting, like any other skill, gets easier the more you practice it. If you think, “this is so hard, there is no way I can keep it up forever,” remind yourself that it won’t be this hard forever. Even though it’s hard now, in 2 months it will be easier and in 2 years it will be MUCH easier.  Concentrate on what you need to do today.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 24, 2018

January 24, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: I don’t need feel like planning and measuring my food. I know what and how much I’m going to eat. I don’t need to go to so much effort.

Response: If I only do the things I feel like doing, I won’t be able to lose weight and keep it off.  Even if I don’t need to do these things to lose weight initially, I have to learn how to make myself implement these crucial skills for the future, when my motivation isn’t as high as it is today.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 23, 2018

January 23, 2018/beckadmin

If you’re prone to stress eating, remind yourself, “Eating when I’m feeling stressed is effective – but ONLY IN THE SHORT TERM. It has 100% negative consequences in the long term – I’ll gain weight, I’ll stay overweight, I’ll reinforce the tendency to give in, I’ll feel bad about myself, I’ll feel guilty about what I ate, it may cause me to continue having a bad eating day, etc.”

Monday Motivation – January 22, 2018

January 22, 2018/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters, “I felt so good when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really bad when I ate way too much.” When dieters finally learn to gain control over their thinking and eating, dieting feels GREAT, not terrible.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 19, 2018

January 19, 2018/beckadmin

If you’re going to a party or event this weekend and think, “There’ll be so much good food there I won’t be able to resist remind yourself, “If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can.”

Think Thin Thursday – January 18, 2018

January 18, 2018/beckadmin

If you think, “I was so good today and there so much food I didn’t eat, so it’s okay to eat this now,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know what you don’t eat, it only knows what you do eat. Extra is extra, regardless of how much extra you didn’t eat.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 17, 2018

January 17, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because no one is watching.

Response: Although it may feel okay to eat extra because I’m alone, the reality is that my body doesn’t know if 100 people are watching me eat or if no one is watching me eat, it processes all calories the same. So it’s absolutely irrelevant whether or not I’m alone when I overeat – overeating is overeating.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 16, 2018

January 16, 2018/beckadmin

Dieting is generally easy in the beginning because motivation is high but at some point (whether it’s in three weeks or three months) it gets harder. This is completely NORMAL and it happens to everyone. As long as you keep at it, it will get easier again.

Monday Motivation – January 15, 2018

January 15, 2018/beckadmin

If you feel alone in your struggles to limit your eating and lose weight, remember that so many other people are working at it, too. It’s a very, very small number of people who can eat whatever they want and be at a healthy weight.  While it stinks that you have to work at it, you’re in VERY good company!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up- January 12, 2018

January 12, 2018/beckadmin

This weekend, if it seems unfair that you can’t eat something, remind yourself, “It’s true that it’s not fair. But I need to ask myself: which unfairness would I rather have – not being able to eat this or not losing weight?” Then work on accepting it and move on.

Think Thin Thursday – January 11, 2018

January 11, 2018/beckadmin

When dieters say, “I just can’t stick to a diet, I have no discipline,” we remind them that they actually DO have a lot of discipline because they are able to get up with their kids, get to work on time, pay bills, etc. While they may lack consistent dieting discipline, they are clearly capable of great feats of discipline in other areas, so this is not a valid reason to not try.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 10, 2018

January 10, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: Losing weight is just so hard.

Response: Being overweight is HARD!! Physically, mentally, financially, it takes a big toll. Working on healthy eating and losing weight can be hard, too, but at least it comes with amazing outcomes.

Tuesday Reality Check – January 9, 2018

January 9, 2018/beckadmin

It’s important to remember that you need to make eating decisions based on what works for you, not what everyone around you is doing.  Remind yourself that what everyone around you is eating is irrelevant, and that if you eat extra, you’ll gain weight regardless of whether others are overeating, too.

Monday Motivation – January 8, 2018

January 8, 2018/beckadmin

If you’ve made a resolution to lose weight, remember that learning to diet is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn’t do it or that you should give up, you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Dieting is no different!

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – January 5, 2018

January 5, 2018/beckadmin

It is so much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

Think Thin Thursday – January 4, 2018

January 4, 2018/beckadmin

If you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

Wednesday Sabotage – January 3, 2018

January 3, 2018/beckadmin

Sabotage: There’s still so much junk food at work, I just can’t resist it.

Response: It’s worth it not to eat junk food at work. I don’t want to be plagued by cravings and I don’t want to gain weight and I don’t want to feel guilty afterwards.  IF I see treats in the office that I want, remember: I CAN have them, just not right now. I’ll enjoy the treats so much more at home when I’ve planned to have it because I’ll eat it guilt free (and I won’t have to worry about overeating because I will only have one portion with me).

Tuesday Reality Check – January 2, 2018

January 2, 2018/beckadmin

It’s important to both give yourself credit for the good choices you make and not berate yourself when you make a mistake. When you beat yourself up, the only thing it does is demoralize you further and makes it harder to get back on track. When you give yourself credit, it makes you feel great, helps raise your confidence, makes it easier to keep doing what you’re doing, and gives you motivation to stay on track.

Monday Motivation – January 1, 2018

January 1, 2018/beckadmin

Happy New Year’s Day! This week start the year off right and instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 29, 2017

December 29, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to a party this weekend, remind yourself, “I won’t regret the food I don’t eat, but I definitely will regret the extra, unplanned food I do eat.  I never regret not eating something once the temptation has passed!”

Think Thin Thursday – December 28, 2017

December 28, 2017/beckadmin

Remember that you can’t take in extra calories at every holiday event and still maintain your weight.  Remind yourself that there’s a huge difference between eating no treats you want and eating every one you want. Then work on finding the middle ground.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 27, 2017

December 27, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I’m off track anyway, I’ll just worry about my eating once the new year hits.

Response: Don’t wait! Every day I stay off track is another day I ultimately don’t feel good about myself or my eating.  It’s worth it to recover RIGHT NOW and start feeling good.  When I do, then I’ll start the new year in a good place, instead of in a place where I need to make lots of changes.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 26, 2017

December 26, 2017/beckadmin

We always want to remind you after a holiday that it’s okay to get rid of leftovers! If you have highly tempting food in your house, either make a plan for when and how much you’ll have, and/or make a plan to get it out of the house so that it doesn’t tempt you and tax your resistance muscle.

Monday Motivation – December 25, 2017

December 25, 2017/beckadmin

To those who celebrate it, Merry Christmas!  We hope you have a day planned with fun things and good food (that you’ll eat in reasonable portions and feel really good about once the day has passed).

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 22, 2017

December 22, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just want to enjoy myself at holiday events this weekend and not have to think about it,” remind yourself, “there’s no such thing as not thinking about my eating! If I think about it before I go to the party (and when I’m there), I can plan to incorporate a special treat and feel really good afterwards. If I don’t have a plan, I’ll be thinking about it a lot when the party is over – in a negative way – and I won’t be happy I didn’t control my eating.  But either way I’ll think about it.

Think Thin Thursday – December 21, 2017

December 21, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to holiday events this week, make sure you plan IN ADVANCE how many treats you’re going to have (if any). Don’t wait until you’re there to make decisions because in the moment decisions are the hardest ones to make well.

Wedneday Sabotage – December 20, 2017

December 20, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe how much I overate at the holiday parties this weekend. That was so bad.

 

Response: I must keep in mind that I can’t change what I ate in the past, only what I eat today and in the future. So instead of ruminating on past mistakes, I need to focus on making today a great day!

Tuesday Reality Check – December 19, 2017

December 19, 2017/beckadmin

If you are given gifts of holiday food and feel guilty about not eating it, remember that whether you actually eat the gift in no way takes away from the nice gesture of receiving it and the meaning behind it.

Monday Motivation – December 18, 2017

December 18, 2017/beckadmin

How has your eating been going so far this holiday season?  If you need some extra motivation (or if things haven’t been going well), take a moment to regroup and really think about the reasons why it’s worth it to you to stay on track.  Then write them down in a special Holidays Advantages List and start reading it every day, at least once a day.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – December 15, 2017

December 15, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else,” remind yourself, “Thank goodness I’m not eating like everyone else! Most people gain weight during the holiday season and my goal is the opposite.”

Think Thin Thursday – December 14, 2017

December 14, 2017/beckadmin

Make sure you plan to have your favorite foods this holiday season. But decide in advance when and how much! That way, if you come in contact with a food you love, you won’t have the sabotaging thought, “I never get to have this so it’s okay,” because you’ll know exactly when you get to have it.

Wednesday Sabotage – December 13, 2017

December 13, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true that I don’t care right at this moment, I’m going to care A LOT a few minutes from now if I jeopardize my diet and weight loss. I can’t let this one moment of not caring influence how I act because I know I will care again, and when I do, I’ll be SO happy and proud I didn’t give in.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 12, 2018

December 12, 2017/beckadmin

If you have the thought [about practicing a diet skill], “Is this really going to make a difference?” remind yourself that the answer is YES, it does make a difference because every time has consequences for the next time and the time after that. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then it DOES make a difference. You don’t even need to engage with that thought because it will only undermine your efforts. Remind yourself that it does make a difference and then move on.

Monday Motivation – December 11, 2017

December 11, 2017/beckadmin

While staying in control of your eating is harder during the holidays, the good news is that when you manage to do so, it feels extra great! The harder it is to stay on track, the more positive feelings you get as a result of doing so. Remind yourself that staying on track during a normal day feels good, but staying on track during a holiday feels AMAZING!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 8, 2017

December 8, 2017/beckadmin

If you get off track at any point this weekend, IMMEDIATELY RECOVER!! You can wind up feeling so proud of your ability to get back on track instead of mad at yourself for slipping up.

Think Thin Thursday – December 7, 2017

December 7, 2017/beckadmin

Remember that treating yourself after a long day with extra food is ultimately a trick, not a treat, because it gets in the way of you reaching important goals. That being said, there are many other ways to treat yourself if you’ve had a hard day! What are some nonfood ways that you treat yourself?

Wednesday Sabotage – December 6, 2017

December 6, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I just want to eat everything I want in whatever quantity I want.

Response:  When I eat like crap, I feel like crap!  Eating with abandon sounds good in theory but feels terrible in reality.

Tuesday Reality Check – December 5, 2018

December 5, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, unfortunately your body doesn’t know or care what you don’t eat, it only knows what you do. So just because you passed up treats four times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to have it the fifth.

Monday Motivation – December 4, 2017

December 4, 2017/beckadmin

Credit check in!  Recognizing all the things you’re doing well is critical to help you stay motivated and feel proud of your on-track decisions.   What are some things from the past week you’re giving yourself credit for?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – December 1, 2017

December 1, 2017/beckadmin

Make sure you eat regular meals this weekend and don’t allow yourself to just graze throughout the day. Grazing is the absolute best way to take in the most amount of calories with the least amount of satisfaction.  Sit down, eat real meals, and you’ll feel so much more satisfied while actually taking in less food overall.

Think Thin Thursday – November 30, 2017

November 30, 2017/beckadmin

Are you drinking enough water? This is important year round.  Consider setting a water goal for yourself, like refilling your big 20 oz cup three times a day. Start out the day with three rubber bands on your cup and every time you finish it, you get to take one off.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 29, 2017

November 29, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I don’t want to have to work on healthy eating during the holidays.

Response: While it’s true I don’t want to have to think about healthy eating, I so much more don’t want to not fit into my pants, not like the way I look, avoid being in pictures, feel out of control of my eating, etc.  While maintaining healthy eating this time of year is hard, it’s still so much better than the alternative!

Tuesday Reality Check : November 28, 2017

November 28, 2017/beckadmin

We’re now in the busy holiday time of year and people are more likely to drop healthy habits like exercise and meditation, simply because they have so much going on. Don’t fall into that trap! Especially during the holidays, exercise and meditation are extra important to provide healthy outlets and stress relief.

Monday Motivation – November 27, 2017

November 27, 2017/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, there are a lot of hard moments. Moments at parties, at events, when you’re having a craving, when you’re feeling stressed or anxious and want to eat. But there are also so, so many great moments. When you bend over and your stomach doesn’t get in the way. When you get a compliment. When you feel great at the end of the day. When you get on the scale stress-free. When you overcome a craving and feel really proud. Make sure you pay attention to the great moments! What are some of yours?

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 24, 2017

November 24, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just don’t want the burden of thinking about dieting this weekend,” remind yourself: Eating right is a burden, but being overweight is a burden too (physically, psychologically, financially, etc.) EITHER WAY I’M BURDENED, but at least in one way I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel good about myself.

Think Thin Thursday – November 23, 2017

November 23, 2017/beckadmin

You don’t need to overeat your favorite Thanksgiving food, because it’s not your last opportunity to have it. Most foods you can get, make, or buy 365 days a year and if it’s something you really like, then plan to have it more often. If it’s something you really can’t get at other times, remember that the holidays occur every single year so, no matter what, this isn’t your last opportunity to have this food.

Get Ready for Thanksgiving – November 22, 2018

November 22, 2017/beckadmin

This Thanksgiving, make a plan for portion control. You’re not giving up eating, you’re only giving up OVEReating and the uncomfortable sensation of having eaten too much.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – November 17, 2017

November 17, 2017/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you encounter food pushers this weekend, remember that it’s not their job to stop pushing food on you. They’re food pushers, that’s what they do. It IS your job to start saying no!

Think Thin Thursday – November 16, 2017

November 16, 2017/beckadmin

A friendly reminder than 5 or 10 minutes of exercise is better than 0 minutes. If you think you’re too busy to exercise, chances are you’re being all-or-nothing about it. You might be too busy for an hour or even half an hour, but likely you’re not too busy for at least 5 minutes.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 15, 2017

November 15, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: Dieting shouldn’t be this hard.
Response: Dieting is supposed to get hard from time to time. It gets harder for everyone. Remember how hard it used to be? It’s easier today than it was a year ago, and it will be a lot easier a year from today as long as I keep practicing my skills and don’t give up.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 14, 2017

November 14, 2017/beckadmin

We’re entering into the busy holiday season. Just a reminder: time for diet and exercise won’t magically appear so if your life is busy, it’s critical that you deliberately plan these things into your week or they won’t happen. Start now so you’ll be able to continue the habit as things get even crazier.

Monday Motivation – November 13, 2017

November 13, 2017/beckadmin

Monday Motivation: One of our dieters recently said to us, “For the first time in 40 years I ate a dessert in front of my husband and didn’t feel self-conscious!” Even though she still has more weight she wants to lose, because she’s learned how to be on track and knows what she’s doing is working, she feels good about what she eats and is able to eat even dessert without a shred of guilt or self-consciousness.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 10, 2017

November 10, 2017/beckadmin

With the holidays right around the corner, it might be time to start brushing up on some of your skills. Have you been eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully? Reading your Advantages List? Responding to sabotaging thinking? Giving yourself credit? Making time and energy for dieting? If not, make a commitment this weekend to work on your basic skills to help get you in the right mindset

Think Thin Thursday – November 9, 2017

November 9, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight,” remind yourself, “This is when it’s MOST important to get on the scale so I hold myself accountable. I need to find out if I have gained weight so I can figure out what mistakes I’ve made and correct them. I’m NOT a bad person for making mistakes, but it would be bad if I let the fear of them ruin my chance for success.”

Wednesday Sabotage – November 8, 2017

November 8, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: “Since it’s almost the holidays, I can’t possibly lose weight at this time.”

Response Card: That’s just a sabotaging thought. While it may be more difficult at this time of year with all of the extra treats around, I’m ultimately in charge of every bite of food I eat so the holidays don’t have to derail me.

Tuesday Reality Check – November 7, 2017

November 7, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to accept the things I have to do for dieting” remind yourself, “I have a choice: I can struggle with what I have to do and feel bad, or I can accept that this is the way it is. It doesn’t mean I have to like it but continuing to fight against acceptance will do NOTHING but make it harder for me to reach my tremendously important goals.”

Monday Motivation – November 6, 2017

November 6, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes when dieters have been eating off track, they actually forget how GREAT it feels to be in control of their eating. We remind them of the multitude of positive experiences and feelings they have had as a result of maintaining control and this helps them to immediately get back on track. If you’ve been off track since Halloween (and are considering giving yourself a pass until the New Year), take a few moments to really think about how it feels to be on track vs. how it feels to be off track.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – November 3, 2017

November 3, 2017/beckadmin

If you eat at restaurants and feel bad about asking for special requests, remind yourself, “People make special requests all the time and I’m entitled to do so, too. If I were on a very strict medical diet I wouldn’t even think twice about making requests. Eating differently to lose weight and be healthier is just as legitimate.”

Think Thin Thursday – November 2, 2017

November 2, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake, continue to eat normally for the rest of the day. Telling yourself, “I won’t eat anything else today,” might trigger feelings of anxiety or panic when you get hungry, which could then cause you to eat much more than you would have normally.

Wednesday Sabotage – November 1, 2017

November 1, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: Throwing away leftover Halloween candy would be a waste of money.

Response: The money is already gone. Eating all of these treats and gaining weight will not bring it back. Now that Halloween is over, consider throwing away or donating leftover candy and treats.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 31, 2017

October 31, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re thinking you should be able to eat as much candy on Halloween as you want, remember it just doesn’t work that way! But, you can enjoy a reasonable and planned amount and still stay on track. And, doing it that will is almost a guarantee that you’ll enjoy the candy more because you won’t be feeling guilty about it even as you’re eating it.

Monday Motivation – October 30, 2017

October 30, 2017/beckadmin

Halloween is tomorrow! Remember: you can eat all the Halloween candy you want OR you can be thinner, healthier, more confident, etc. You can’t have it both ways. Take a look at your goals and make a decision for how you will handle the influx of treats at this time.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 27, 2017

October 27, 2017/beckadmin

Halloween is just around the corner. Were you planning on buying Halloween candy this weekend? We advise our dieters to wait until the last minute to buy candy so they don’t have to put forth the effort to resist it every day unnecessarily and to buy candy that they don’t particularly like. Anything you can do to reduce the struggle is worth it!

Think Thin Thursday – October 26, 2017

October 26, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters tell us “I had a really hard week,” we ask them, “was it hard for every single hour of every single day?” The answer is always “no.” Don’t let the memory of several harder times influence your perception of the week as a whole.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 25, 2017

October 25, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: “It’s okay to have this extra food because I’ve been so good.”

Response Card: Unfortunately, it doesn’t work that way. My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I AM eating. It’s not saying to me, “You were so good! Here’s 500 free calories, I promise I won’t process them.” If I eat extra calories, regardless of how many I didn’t eat, I’ll gain weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 24, 2017

October 24, 2017/beckadmin

A good reminder: Most thin people do NOT eat whatever they want, whenever they want. When dieting feels unfair, remind yourself that likely most people around you are also restricting their eating to some degree. If you’re working on dieting, you’re in very good company.

Monday Motivation – October 23, 2017

October 23, 2017/beckadmin

EVERY SINGLE dieting mistake can be turned into a valuable learning opportunity if you take the time to figure out why it happened and what specifically you can do in the future to change the outcome of a similar situation. If you made any mistakes over the weekend, ask yourself: Why did it happen? What sabotaging thoughts did I have? What can I do or say differently the next time? Then write your helpful response on a Response Card.

Monday Motivation – October 16, 2017

October 22, 2017/beckadmin

All dieters and maintainers go through periods when dieting feels more difficult. The good news: this is completely normal and happens to EVERYONE. Keep doing what you’re doing and dieting WILL get easier again.

Friday Weekend Warm-up -October 20, 2017

October 20, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake this weekend, don’t wait to get back on track – get back on track that exact MINUTE. You’ll be glad you did ten minutes later, and you’ll be SO glad you did Monday morning when you can start the week off feeling good.

Think Thin Thursday – October 19, 2017

October 19, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat this unplanned food because I’ll eat less and make up for it later,” remind yourself, “Looking back, when has ‘making up for it later’ EVER helped me to lose weight and keep it off? I’ve already proven to myself that this idea just doesn’t work and that spontaneous food decisions have negative consequences. Just stick to my plan and as soon as this food is out of my sight, I’ll be SO GLAD I didn’t have any.”

Wednesday Sabotage – October 18, 2017

October 18, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: “Now that I’ve lost weight I can stop being so careful.”

Response Card: While I may be able to loosen up a little, I have to remember that I lost weight because of the different ways I am now doing things. The moment I return to my old habits is the moment I start to gain weight back.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 17, 2017

October 17, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake, continue to eat normally for the rest of the day. Telling yourself, “I won’t eat anything else today,” might trigger feelings of anxiety or panic when you get hungry, which could then cause you to eat much more than you would have normally.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – October 13, 2017

October 13, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “Weekends should be about fun, not about dieting,” remind yourself, “Eating healthfully and having fun are not mutually exclusive. Just because I may not eat EVERYTHING I want doesn’t mean I can’t enjoy what I do eat. And besides, staying in control of my eating ALWAYS feels so much better than being out of control.”

Think Thin Thursday – October 12, 2017

October 12, 2017/beckadmin

We find that for many of our dieters, intuitive eating is difficult because it is far too easy to confuse hunger with other sensations – craving, thirst, boredom, stress, or simply the desire to eat. Because of this, we work with our dieters on the skill of “eating according to a schedule” so that they don’t have to rely on potentially faulty cues to know whether or not to eat.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 11, 2017

October 11, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: “Dieting is too hard, it’s not worth it.”

Response Card: Dieting IS but it also IS worth it. Telling myself “it’s not worth it” is just an excuse to give up. Pay no attention to that thought! The advantages of losing weight and the positive impact it will have on every area of your life makes it unquestionably worth it.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 10, 2017

October 10, 2017/beckadmin

Often when dieters have strong ideas like, “I can’t disappoint others,” or “my needs must always come last,” these are traps of their own making. Since dieters are the ones forcing these mandates on themselves, they also then have the power to change their thinking and free themselves.

Monday Motivation – October 9, 2017

October 9, 2017/beckadmin

We asked a long-time maintainer what keeps him motivated and he said, “I don’t wait for motivation, I just do it because I owe it to my daughter, my wife, and MYSELF.” Losing weight and being healthier positively impacts you AND everyone else around you. Do it for them, but most importantly, do it for yourself.

Friday Weekend Warm-up -October 6, 2017

October 6, 2017/beckadmin

If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it” and keep driving? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake this weekend, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track.

Think Thin Thursday – October 5, 2017

October 5, 2017/beckadmin

A very common sabotaging thought is, “Just this one time won’t matter,” but regardless of the situation, every time DOES matter. Every SINGLE time you withstand a craving, resist emotional eating, and say no to unplanned food, you increase the chances you will the next time. Each time you give in, you increase the chances you will give in the next time, too.

Wednesday Sabotage – October 4, 2017

October 4, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought:  “I don’t have time to do all my dieting tasks.”

Response Card: It doesn’t take that much time to actually do everything. What does take time is how long I spend struggling beforehand over whether or not I’m going to do it. I need to make the decision to definitively do these things and the time I spend will be reduced significantly.

Tuesday Reality Check – October 3, 2017

October 3, 2017/beckadmin

When it seems unfair that you can’t eat something, remind yourself, “It’s true that it’s not fair. But ask yourself: which unfairness would you rather have – not being able to eat this or not losing weight?” Then work on accepting it and move on!

Monday Motivation – October 2, 2017

October 2, 2017/beckadmin

Today (well, yesterday!) marks the beginning of a new month. Don’t wait until the New Year to start making resolutions. Make them NOW and think about how much better you’ll feel, physically and psychologically, come January.

Friday Weekend Warm-Up – September 29, 2017

September 29, 2017/beckadmin

If you have trouble fitting in necessary tasks during the weekend, like exercising, food shopping, or meal prep, then before the weekend begins make sure you schedule them in and write it down. Doing so will increase your commitment and exponentially increase the chances that it’ll actually happen.

Think Thin Thursday – September 28, 2017

September 28, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “This food tastes really good. Even though I’ve had enough, it’s okay to eat more,” remind yourself, “It’s not okay because eating more will mean strengthening my giving-in muscle AND taking in extra calories. Besides, at the end of the day my mouth won’t remember if I had 10 more bites, but my body definitely will.”

Wednesday Sabotage – September 27, 2017

September 27, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I can’t ask my family to make changes just because I need to lose weight.

Response: My needs are more important than my family’s wants. I’m entitled to institute changes so that I can reach important goals. Not making changes hasn’t worked.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 26, 2017

September 26, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re having a hard time throwing something away because you think it will be a waste of money, remind yourself that the money is already gone. Eating the extra food won’t bring it back; the only thing it will do is cause you to take in too many calories and exercise your giving-in muscle.

Monday Motivation – September 25, 2017

September 25, 2017/beckadmin

We know it’s not here yet, but holiday season is right around the corner. It’s imperative that you get your eating in a good place now, so that you have some positive momentum built up before things get harder. Now is the time to take control!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 22, 2017

September 22, 2017/beckadmin

If you have trouble with grazing during on weekends, remember that likely a lot of that extraneous eating is about being bored or at loose ends, not about hunger, so eating is not the answer. Go find something else to do!

Think Think Thursday – September 21, 2017

September 21, 2017/beckadmin

When you encounter food pushers, remind yourself, “It’s not my responsibility to make others feel good about what they eat and drink, but it IS my responsibility to make healthy choices that make me feel good.” Turning down food doesn’t mean you’re telling food pushers not to eat or drink something, so it’s not your responsibility if they then ultimately decide to change their eating as a result of you saying no.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 20, 2017

September 20, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet correctly.

Response: I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning so I have to make it a top priority it or will not happen, but as it gets easier it will take less and less time. It’s all a matter of priorities.

Tuesday Reality Check- September 19, 2017

September 19, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re looking at your plate of food and think, “This isn’t going to fill me up,” make sure you let your STOMACH be the judge, not your eyes. Eat what’s on your plate slowly and mindfully and then think about whether or not you still really feel hungry. Chances are it was enough food because our stomachs often need less than our eyes/mouths want to eat.

Monday Motivation – September 18, 2017

September 18, 2017/beckadmin

We’ve asked you to do it before and we’re going to ask you to do it again. This week, focus on giving yourself credit. Give yourself credit for each diet skill you practice, every sabotaging thought you respond to, every craving you overcome, every good eating decisions you make, and every bit of exercise you do. You’re doing so much good stuff, it’s time to start paying attention to it.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 15, 2017

September 15, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, being on track does not necessarily mean you’re perfect. It means that if you make mistakes, you recover right away and don’t let yourself keep making more. This weekend, instead of thinking you need to be perfect (and then getting off track and deciding to wait until Monday to recover), focus first and foremost on recovering immediately from mistakes and on continuing to stay on track and move forward. Guaranteed this approach will help you have a much better weekend overall!

Think Thin Thursday – September 14, 2017

September 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care what anybody around you is eating. When others are eating a lot, it normalizes overeating and makes it feel like it’s okay but it’s not! It’s irrelevant to your body how much others are eating so make sure what you’re eating is the right amount for YOU.

Wednesday Sabotage – September 13, 2017

September 13, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I’ve messed up with eating and exercise today. Maybe I can’t do this.

Response: So, I messed up. So what?! I haven’t ruined everything. One day is just one day. There are thousands of other days that can go exceptionally well. Just get back on track and this one day won’t mean anything.

Tuesday Reality Check – September 12, 2017

September 12, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to keep reminding yourself that if your weight is up one day or one week, it’s not a catastrophe and it doesn’t mean you did anything wrong. It happens to everyone. Keep doing what you’re doing and the scale will go down again.

Monday Motivation – September 11, 2017

September 11, 2017/beckadmin

If you don’t want to work on losing weight forever, then do what you need to do NOW! Make this the day/week/month/year that you finally achieve your goals and spend the next decades enjoying being at a lower weight, instead of struggling to get there. Do it now!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 8, 2017

September 8, 2017/beckadmin

Often dieters think, “I wish I could eat whatever I want and as much as I want – especially on weekends.” However, when dieters eat in an unrestricted way, while they may enjoy the food while they’re eating it, usually the rest of the time (especially Monday morning!) they feel bad, out of control, worried about their weight, at the mercy of their cravings, etc. When they have a great eating weekend, how do they feel?  They feel awesome! Keep in mind this weekend that what you may think you want in terms of eating may not be what actually feels good.

Think Thin Thursday – September 7, 2017

September 7, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been good all day so I can eat this extra food now,” remind yourself, “Just because I’ve been good all day DOESN’T mean I can eat extra now. It’s the ‘extra’ that will stop me from losing weight.”

Wednesday Sabotage – September 6, 2017

September 6, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I won’t be able to resist the desserts at the party.

Response: No one will force me to eat. If I prepare myself in advance and use the skills I’ve learned, I’ll be able to stay on track. Telling myself I won’t be able to resist is giving myself an excuse not to try. That’s not okay!

Tuesday Reality Check – September 5, 2017

September 5, 2017/beckadmin

Some dieters tend to consistently eat until they’re overly full – often saying something like, “I just like to eat.” We remind them that if they work on portion control, they’re not giving up eating, they’re only giving up OVEReating and the uncomfortable sensation of having eaten too much.

Monday Motivation – September 4, 2017

September 4, 2017/beckadmin

For many people, today is a day off from work, NOT a day off from practicing good eating behaviors. Labor Day, along with 20 other holidays, happens every year so it’s not a reasonable excuse to overeat. Stay in control and guaranteed Tuesday morning you’ll be so happy you did.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – September 1, 2017

September 1, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, spend time focusing on eating slowly and mindfully. Really taste the food you’re eating and enjoy every bite. Doing this will help you be satisfied with less because it enables you to reach physical AND psychological satisfaction at the same time, which is impossible to do when eating too quickly or mindlessly.

Think Thin Thursday – August 31, 2017

August 31, 2017/beckadmin

When you want to eat something that’s not on your plan, tell yourself, “Oh, well.” Oh, well means: I don’t like this situation that I can’t at this moment eat this food I want, but there’s nothing I can do to change it, not if I want to reach my goals. So I have to accept it, stop struggling against it, and move on.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 30, 2017

August 30, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I want to get off track so I can eat the foods I really want to eat.

Response: There is no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also plan to eat when I’m on track. And, when I eat it on track, I enjoy it much more because I don’t feel guilty about eating it.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 29, 2017

August 29, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re feeling deprived about what you’re eating (or not eating) because you’re comparing yourself to what others are doing, remember that your needs are unique and different from everyone else’s. No one else is exactly your age, your weight, with your metabolism and your weight loss goals. You have to eat what’s right for YOU, not what’s right for anyone else.

Monday Motivation – August 28, 2017

August 28, 2017/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, keep in mind that the number on the scale is not the only thing that counts; it’s also about how you feel about yourself and your eating. When you gain control over your eating and know that you’re no longer at the mercy of your hunger, cravings, and emotions, you’ll feel GREAT, regardless of whether the number on the scale is what you ultimately hope to see

Friday Weekend Warm-up : August 25, 2017

August 25, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a mistake this weekend and think, “How could I have eaten that? I can’t do this, I should just give up,” remind yourself that one mistake in no way ruins your diet, but falling back into old patterns definitely will. Then recommit yourself and get right back on track.

Think Thin Thursday – August 24, 2017

August 24, 2017/beckadmin

Many dieters have trouble savoring a beer or a glass of wine in the summer because they’re thirsty and looking for hydration (and therefore drink it too quickly). Before you have an alcoholic drink, consider drinking a glass of water first so you’re able to fully enjoy your drink.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 23, 2017

August 23, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.
Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 22, 2017

August 22, 2017/beckadmin

Important reminder: Losing weight is a combination of every small food decision you make in a day. If you think, “This one time doesn’t matter,” remind yourself that it ALL matters because it all is part of the bigger picture. One bad decision leads to another, while one positive decision leads to another.

Monday Motivation – August 21, 2017

August 21, 2017/beckadmin

Initially dieters often feel a sense of unfairness about what they’re not eating. However, along the way as they learn new skills and start to feel in control of their eating, they start to feel proud of what they don’t eat – not deprived. If you feel deprived, keep in mind that it’s HIGHLY likely this won’t always be the case. Stick with it!

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 18, 2017

August 18, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to a party or event this weekend but don’t feel like making a plan for how you’ll handle your eating, remind yourself: “Making a plan doesn’t take long at all. It’s not a big deal to do it, but it IS a big deal to not make one. Not having a plan exponentially increases the risk of eating too much, getting off track, and then having to struggle to get back in control.”

Think Thin Thursday – August 17, 2017

August 17, 2017/beckadmin

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 16, 2017

August 16, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn’t. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 15, 2017

August 15, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been working on these dieting skills for a while now and they still don’t really feel like habits. Maybe I should give up,” remind yourself, “I’m better at these skills than I was 2 months ago, and in 2 more months I’ll be even better than I am right now. There’s no reason to give because, even though it may seem slow, I AM moving forward and making progress.”

Monday Motivation – August 14, 2017

August 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting RIGHT NOW, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 11, 2017

August 11, 2017/beckadmin

It can definitely be harder to stay on track on weekends, often because dieters have different (looser) rules for themselves, but unfortunately weight loss doesn’t happen when dieters undo their hard work every weekend. This weekend, when you’re contemplating eating something, ask yourself: Would I eat this during the week? If the answer is no, then perhaps you should think twice about eating it.

Think Thin Thursday – August 10, 2017

August 10, 2017/beckadmin

One dieter told us that in the afternoons she gets off track because keeps hearing a voice in her head telling that all these different types of sweet foods sound good and she should eat them. It turns out that she didn’t have a strong plan to combat that sabotaging voice so no wonder she kept giving in. We helped her make Response Cards for every thought she might have and came up with the plan of reading them once an hour every hour during the hard time. She decided she would also call her mom, take a walk, or do a crossword puzzle if she needed additional distraction. These voices can be overcome, but not without a plan!

Wednesday Sabotage – August 9, 2017

August 9, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I do eat, so just because I turned down holiday treats 4 times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to give in the 5th time. If I take in more calories than I had planned, I’ll gain weight.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 8, 2017

August 8, 2017/beckadmin

If you always crave something sweet after you eat, try this:  First make a response card that reminds you why it’s worth it to you to overcome this craving. Then, after you eat, set a timer for 10 minutes, with the knowledge that you’re not going to eat anything sweet until the timer goes off.  During those 10 minutes, read your Response Card and engage in a preplanned distracting activity.  Chances are VERY high that by the time the timer goes off, the craving will have either gone way down in intensity or passed entirely.

Monday Motivation – August 7, 2017

August 7, 2017/beckadmin

Getting off track with dieting can be very discouraging, but it doesn’t need to be. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you’ll continue improving.

Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 4, 2017/beckadmin

One of our dieters recently told us that she was going to a happy hour with friends over the weekend and she felt awkward not having an alcoholic drink when everybody else would be drinking (even though she doesn’t really like alcohol). We reminded her that if she was dangerously allergic to alcohol, or a recovering alcoholic, she would never dream of having a drink, regardless of how she might feel. Trying to lose weight and be healthier and just as legitimate reasons to abstain.

Friday Weekend Warm-up – August 4, 2017

August 4, 2017/beckadmin

One of our dieters recently told us that she was going to a happy hour with friends over the weekend and she felt awkward not having an alcoholic drink when everybody else would be drinking (even though she doesn’t really like alcohol). We reminded her that if she was dangerously allergic to alcohol, or a recovering alcoholic, she would never dream of having a drink, regardless of how she might feel. Trying to lose weight and be healthier and just as legitimate reasons to abstain.

Think Thin Thursday

August 3, 2017/beckadmin

Often dieters have a window during the day in which staying on track feels the hardest. Sometimes it’s late afternoon, sometimes in the evening. Regardless, it’s important to identify when you’re likely to struggle the most and come up with a plan for how to handle it. Read your Advantages List and Response Cards again (and again!). Plan in distraction techniques. Remind yourself that you’ve gotten through it before and you can do it again! It’s time-limited and the hard time will pass!

Think Thin Thursday – August 3, 2017

August 3, 2017/beckadmin

Often dieters have a window during the day in which staying on track feels the hardest. Sometimes it’s late afternoon, sometimes in the evening. Regardless, it’s important to identify when you’re likely to struggle the most and come up with a plan for how to handle it. Read your Advantages List and Response Cards again (and again!). Plan in distraction techniques. Remind yourself that you’ve gotten through it before and you can do it again! It’s time-limited and the hard time will pass!

Wednesday Sabotage

August 2, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just want to eat without consequence.

Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Wednesday Sabotage – August 2, 2017

August 2, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotage: I just want to eat without consequence.
Response: Oh, well! I don’t like that I can’t eat without consequences but I can’t change that fact (not if I want to lose weight and keep it off). I need to stop struggling against it, accept that this is the way it is, and move on.

Tuesday Reality Check – August 1, 2017

August 1, 2017/beckadmin

The time and energy for dieting and exercise will never magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that dieters may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when they will make the time and energy for these things. But remember – it’s 100% it’s worth it!

Monday Motivation – July 31, 2017

July 31, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just can’t stick to a diet, I have no discipline,” it’s important to remember that chances are you actually DO have a lot of discipline. Do you: get up with your kids? Get to work? Pay your bills? While right now you may lack consistent dieting discipline, you are clearly capable of great feats of discipline in other areas. It takes work and practice but you can do it!

July 14, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have trouble fitting in necessary tasks during the weekend, like exercising, food shopping, or meal prep, then before the weekend begins make sure you schedule them in and write it down. Doing so will increase your commitment and exponentially increase the chances that it’ll actually happen.

August 27, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Work on making your eating environment pleasant and peaceful. Sit at a table. Put out real plates and cutlery. Eat on a placemat. If eating feels like more of an event, you’ll be more likely to take your time with it and appreciate what you’re eating.

August 26, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I made a mistake. I’ve blown it for the vacation and I’ll get back on track when I get home.

Response: Don’t wait! Get right back on track this minute. Doing so will ensure I have a great rest of the vacation and won’t spend another minute feeling mad at myself or guilty about my eating. And it will mean I get to come home feeling happy and proud of myself.

August 25, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

In order to lose and maintain weight, just knowing what to do is not enough. It’s knowing how to get yourself to do it consistently that is the key. If you’ve struggled with this in the past, remember that there are specific cognitive and behavior skills that will provide this missing link. It’s not your fault you haven’t been successful, it’s just because you didn’t know how!

July 15, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to have to think about healthy eating right now so I’m just going to give in and have [this extra treat].

Response: There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’ If I decide to ‘not think about it’ and eat the treat now, I’ll definitely think about it a lot later when I’m feeling guilty about my eating. On the other hand, if I do put in the effort to think about it now and resist, I’ll feel so great and proud later that I did.

July 14, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If hunger is not the problem, food is not the solution!

July 13, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again – you can’t change what has happened in the past, you can only change what happens today and in the future. No matter what happened with your eating over the weekend, today is a new day so make it a good eating day and start the week off feeling great!

July 10, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Think about a weekend night when you went to bed after having stayed on track all day and felt really good about your eating. Then think about a weekend night when you went to bed after having gotten off track and overeaten. Which felt better? While staying on track on the weekends can be hard, it ALWAYS feels worth it once the day is over.

July 9, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Are you sleeping enough? It’s important to remember that adequate sleep is critical for so many things, including keeping hunger and cravings under control. For weight loss AND for good health, sleep is just as important as healthy eating and exercise. Make it a priority!

July 8, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight.

Response: This is when it’s MOST important to get on the scale so I hold myself accountable. Not getting on the scale will prolong being off track; getting on it will help me start moving forward again. What I want in this moment is to be back on track and getting on the scale will enable that.

July 7, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re feeling deprived in regards to your eating, one of two things is happening. Either you are legitimately being too restrictive (in which case you need to work in more variety) or you’re putting your focus on what you’re not getting (extra food) instead of what you are getting (all the benefits of weight loss).

July 6, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good reminder – if you were walking down a flight of stairs and stumbled down a few, would you then say “Well, I’ve blown it” and throw yourself down the rest? No! You would get back up and resume walking. If you stumbled this holiday weekend, immediately pick yourself back up and start eating healthy again.

July 3, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

To those of us celebrating it, Happy (almost) 4th of July! If you go to barbecues, remember – you can still eat reasonable portions of food AND lose weight and keep it off. You just can’t overeat and lose weight. It’s not all-or-nothing!

July 2, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Do you have a plan for this upcoming holiday weekend? Remember, it is much easier to make good decisions ahead of time than it is in the moment. Save yourself the burden of having to make spontaneous decisions by planning your weekend in advance.  

July 1, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m really stressed out, I need to eat!

Response: I may WANT to eat, but I don’t NEED to. There are many people who feel stressed without turning to food and if I had been in a stressful situation where food wasn’t available, I’d deal with it without eating, too.

May 30, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You can’t exercise off a bad diet. Even if you exercise a lot, if you’re diet isn’t healthy, you won’t be able to lose weight (and may even gain).

June 29, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This difference between your body this week and next week is what you do during the next seven days to reach your goals. 

June 26, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If your eating gets off track every weekend, you may be able to maintain your weight but it's highly unlikely you'll be able to lose. If weight loss is your goal, then weekend healthy eating is the way to achieve it!

June 25, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When things feel hard, focus on the skills you can do and consider making the rest optional for the time being. That way, you won’t constantly have the feeling that you’re not doing what you’re supposed to be doing. Repeat after me: I can do this!

June 24, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: My eating has been so bad lately, I’ll just wait until [Monday/next month/the fall/when things calm down/when my kids go to camp…] to get back on track.

Response: Absolutely not! I will get back on track right now because every minute I eat off track is another minute I don’t feel good. Getting back on track is hard, but being off track (and all the negativity that comes with it) is hard, too. It’s worth it to work on it now!

June 23, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tired of starting over, stop giving up.

June 22, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This week, focus on gratitude. Be grateful for the healthy food you have to eat. Be grateful for the body you have that can push through workouts. Be grateful for the support you have and the tools that will help you get healthy.  Be grateful for what you do have and you’ll be much happier than if you focus on what you don’t. 

June 19, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Borrowing a line from Marianne Lloyd today: It’s work but it works.  This weekend, keep working it!!

June 18, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you don’t feel like exercising, remind yourself how incredibly fortunate you are that you are capable of exercise. Appreciate what your body can do, and then do what you can for it.

June 17, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t have time for exercise.

Response: Actually, I’m not making the time for exercise. If I had to get dialysis for an hour every morning or I would die, I would make time for it no matter what. I can always find the time for my top priorities, and exercising/good health is worth being a top priority.

June 16, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don't give up what you want most for what you want in the moment.

June 15, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Whenever you feel like quitting, remember why you started. Those things are worth fighting for.

June 12, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up:

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, after a long week you do deserve to treat yourself but you also deserve to lose weight and be healthier and happier, so that treat just can’t come in the form of [extra, unplanned] food. What are some non-food ways you’re going to treat yourself this weekend?

June 11, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The more you act/make decisions like a fit, healthy person, the more you will BECOME that person. If you fake it until you make it, you’ll get there!

June 10, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just want to be free to eat whatever I want, whenever I want.

Response: When I’m “free” with my eating, it traps me in a body I don’t feel comfortable in. When I put restrictions on my eating (although not ones that are unreasonable), it means I’m free from extra weight. I’m free from the nagging negative thoughts about needing to lose weight. I’m free from more health concerns. I’m free from joint pain. I’m free from feeling self-conscious all the time. There is a LOT of freedom that comes from being less free with food choices.

June 9, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This time matters! Right here, right now, this food decision you’re about to make matters because every decision you make impacts the next one. Once you start resisting, you’ll be much more likely to continue resisting. Once you start giving in, you’ll be more likely to continue giving in. THIS MATTERS!!

June 8, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good reminder – Most thin people do NOT eat whatever they want, whenever they want. When dieting feels unfair, remind yourself that likely most people around you are also restricting their eating to some degree. If you’re working on dieting/healthy eating, you’re in very good company.

June 5, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Being careful with your eating during the week and then getting off track during weekend may allow you to maintain your weight but it likely won’t enable you to lose. If weight loss is your goal, then weekend eating needs to be just as focused and deliberate as week day eating.

June 4, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

“There are only two days in the year that nothing can be done. One is called Yesterday and the other is called Tomorrow. Today is the right day to Love, Believe, Do and mostly Live.”
― Dalai Lama XIV

June 3, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s been such a hard week with trying to eat healthy. Maybe I can’t do this.

Response: When I get discouraged, count up the hard hours. Remember that every hour of every day isn’t difficult. In fact, there are many more easy or neutral hours than hard ones. I need to keep the hard times in perspective. I CAN DO THIS!

June 2, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a dieting mistake during the day, remind yourself, “I haven’t blown it. It’s not the end of the world. Start following my plan again RIGHT NOW and stop it at one mistake. Whatever I ate likely won't show up on the scale, but if I keep eating, it definitely will.”

June 1, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Some dieters think, “I don’t deserve credit until I reach my weight loss goals.” This is 100% NOT TRUE because all the small steps along the way are what add up to the big changes. If you’re not already, right this moment start giving yourself credit for all the progress you’ve made and all the good things you’re doing.

May 29, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Have you ever told yourself, “I’ll start my diet tomorrow”? If so, remember that today is yesterday’s tomorrow. So don’t wait until tomorrow to start working on healthy eating, don’t wait until Monday, start right now! If you do, it's guaranteed that Monday morning you’ll be SO HAPPY you did.

May 28, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If there is a new kind of cookie you’d like to try but don’t want to eat the whole bag – buy it, take two, and put the rest in the office kitchen. (Then make sure you don’t go back into the kitchen and take more!)

– from Beck Institute intern Adam

May 26, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you got off track during the weekend and think, “It's too much of a burden to get back on track,” remind yourself, “When I was doing my dieting tasks before it really didn’t feel all that burdensome because I was in control of my eating and it felt GREAT. Once I make myself start doing them again, I’ll be reminded of how much better I feel.”

May 22, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This holiday weekend, go into whatever events you have with a PLAN! Spontaneous decisions are invariably what get dieters into trouble, so take away the need to use spur-of-the-moment willpower by making decisions in advance. Once the events are over, you’ll never regret that you did!

May 21, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to eat something unplanned and tell yourself, “It’s okay, it doesn’t have that many calories,” remind yourself that it’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. It doesn’t matter if the unplanned food has 20 calories, 200 calories, or 2,000 calories, it still reinforces the habit of giving in.

May 20, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: People should love me for what I am and not for how I look.

Response: This is absolutely true, but it doesn't mean I shouldn't work on losing weight. Maintaining a healthy weight is ESSENTIAL for good health and being in control of my eating feels so much better than being out of control. I'm not losing weight to make people love me, I'm doing it to make MYSELF healthy and happy.

May 19, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re eating the same things every day and getting bored with it, you’re much more likely to get off track and eat unhealthy, unplanned food. Making sure to build enough variety into your daily diet is essential in helping you enjoy meals while sticking to your plan.

May 18, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters sabotaging thoughts like, “I don’t deserve credit [for my weight loss efforts] because I should already be doing these things.” Here’s what we want them (and you!) to know: No you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things. If it was easy, nobody would be overweight. If it was easy, nobody who ever lost weight on a diet would gain it back. It’s really hard, but you’re learning and making progress, and you deserve credit EVERY step of the way.

May 15, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose or maintain your weight loss, you can’t use weekends as an excuse to overeat because you will continually undo all your hard work from the workweek. Make a commitment to staying on track this weekend!

May 14, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Be on the lookout for diet sabotaging thoughts that start with the phrase, “I’m entitled to eat this because…” (I'm sad, stressed, bored, upset, etc.). Remind yourself that the reason you want to eat isn’t because you’re hungry, so it’s worth working on finding on other ways of achieving what you really need (stress relief, entertainment, soothing, etc.).

May 13, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can't throw out this extra food because it would be a waste of money.

Response: I’ve already paid it so the money is already gone. Eating the food won’t bring the money back, it will just cause me to take in extra calories and gain weight. Just get rid of it!

May 12, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieters who go straight to the kitchen when they get home from work often end up overeating because they’re using food as a means to calm down from a busy day. In order to combat this, don’t allow yourself to go straight to the kitchen. Change your clothes and do something else to calm down – then eat if need be.

May 11, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter what you did or didn’t eat over the weekend, today is the start of a new week and a fresh chance to have a great eating week!

May 8, 2015 – Friday Weeekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just don’t want the burden of thinking about dieting this weekend,” remind yourself: Eating right is a burden, but being overweight is a burden too (physically, psychologically, financially, etc.) EITHER WAY I’M BURDENED, but at least in one way I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel good about myself.

May 7, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you know you have a long and stressful day ahead of you, consider making dinner in advance. That way, when you get home exhausted and hungry, you don’t have to make any food decisions. All you have to do is pull out your premade dinner, which exponentially increases the chances of having a successful evening.

May 6, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It's okay to eat extra because I’ll make up for it later by eating less during the week.

Response: “Making up for it later” just doesn’t work because there’s no guarantee that I’ll actually be able to get myself to eat less later on. It also doesn’t work because if I overeat, I reinforce my giving-in muscle and make it more likely I’ll overeat the next time, and the time after that. It’s important to continually reinforce the habit of eating consistently.

May 5, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It is not reasonable to expect that in dieting you'll never make mistakes and it’s extremely important to prove to yourself that you can slip up and recover from it right away. This way you don’t have to live in fear of making a mistake, especially since being 100% perfect can only be maintained for so long.

May 4, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you ever have the thought, "It’s so hard to lose weight because I just like eating. I don’t want to give that up,” it's so important to remember that there's a huge difference between eating and overeating. You'll NEVER give up eating – but in ending overeating, you get to enjoy food and lose weight.

May 1, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you tend to splurge on weekends because of sabotaging thoughts like, “I worked so hard during the week, I deserve to kick back and relax on the weekend,” then find non-food-related ways reward yourself for all your hard efforts. Remind yourself that you do deserve to relax but you also deserve to get all the benefits of losing weight, so you just can’t use (overeating) food as a means to relax.   

April 30, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The hard part of dieting is the struggle – the trying to decide whether or not to do something or eat something. When we don’t give ourselves a choice and just do what we need to do, dieting gets so much easier because there is no struggle. Don’t make yourself have to decide, just do it!

April 29, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: When I’m dieting, if the scale doesn’t go down every day/week it means it’s not working.

Response: It doesn’t work that way. When dieting, I’ll always have weeks when the scale goes down, weeks when the scale stays the same, and weeks when the scale goes up. Just because the scale doesn’t go down one day/week doesn’t mean I’m not on track and it doesn’t mean it’s not working. Keep doing what I’m doing and the scale will go down again.

April 28, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat this because I’ve been good all day and turned down so much other food,” remind yourself that your body has no idea how many things you DIDN’T eat, it only knows what you do eat. Saying ‘no’ before doesn’t necessarily mean you can say ‘yes’ now.

April 27, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

All dieters and maintainers go through periods when dieting feels more difficult. The good news: this is completely normal and happens to EVERYONE. Keep doing what you’re doing and dieting WILL get easier again. Just stick with it!

April 24, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re home more on the weekends, make a point to stay out of the kitchen except during meal times. The more you’re around food, the more you’ll have to resist eating and the less food is in plain sight, the easier it will be to stay on track. Hang out in other rooms instead!

April 23, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, often the hardest part of exercising is just making the decision to do it. Once you get started, it won’t be so bad. And once you finish, you’ll be so glad you did it! Just decide “yes” and the rest will work out.

April 22, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It's okay to eat extra because I’ll make it for it later by eating less.

Response: “Making up for it later” just doesn’t work because there’s no guarantee that I’ll actually be able to get myself to eat less later on. It also doesn’t work because if I overeat, I make it more likely I’ll overeat the next time I'm tempted to, and the time after that. It’s important to continually reinforce the habit of eating consistently. It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit.

April 21, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don’t fool yourself! Remember, your body doesn’t know or care if the food you’re eating is free, if it’s your birthday, if you’re tired, if everyone around you is eating it, if you’ve had a bad day, if no one is watching – your body processes all calories the same regardless of the circumstances.

April 20, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter what you did or didn’t eat over the weekend, today is the start of a new week and a fresh chance to have a great eating week!
What are you doing to make today and this week great?

April 17, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to eat this because everyone else is,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what everyone around you is eating. It ONLY knows what you eat, so that is not a reasonable excuse.

April 16, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you take the time to really savor each bite you’re eating, it will make even smaller quantities of food very satisfying.

April 15, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s not really that important to go to bed on time.

Response: It really is that important. Staying up too late makes me overeat both at night and the next day. Besides, on the days I do go to bed, I feel so much better the next day – rested and alert. I’ll be so happy tomorrow morning I made myself get in bed.

April 14, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you get off track in the middle of the day, don’t tell yourself, “I just won’t eat anything else for the rest of the day.” That never works. First, because that's punishing yourself and if you get off track you don't deserve punishment. Second, if you think, "I shouldn't eat anything else," and then feel hungry later, you may get anxious and then think, “This is just too hard. I’ll keep eating whatever and get back on track tomorrow,” and then wind up overeating and taking in way more calories than you would have if you had decided to just have a reasonable dinner.

April 13, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight will likely affect so many different areas of your life for the better and, as you start losing, you’ll undoubtedly discover additional benefits along the way. While dieting/losing weight can feel hard at times, there’s no end to what you’ll get in return for doing so.

April 10, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you slip up this weekend, get immediately back on track. Doing so means you’ll get to go to bed feeling PROUD of yourself for your ability to recover, instead of MAD at yourself for getting off track.

April 9, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s hard to keep track of how much you’re eating when you’re taking handfuls from a big bag or a communal bowl. To keep yourself accountable, put whatever serving you intend to eat in your own bowl before you start eating. That way, you’ll be able to enjoy each bite more because you’ll know exactly how much you’ve had and exactly how much you have left.

April 8, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve blown my diet for the day so I might as well keep eating and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: It’s not as if, at a certain point, the calories stop adding up. If I go on to eat 2,000 more calories, my body will count them. If I go on to eat 4,000 more calories, my body will count those, too. It makes NO SENSE to continue eating off track because the more I eat, the more weight I may gain. Get back on track RIGHT NOW!

April 7, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Now that holiday weekend is over, consider throwing away or donating leftover candy and treats. If you think, “But that would be a waste of money,” remind yourself that the money is already gone; eating the treats won’t bring it back. The only thing it will do is knock you off track and make you gain weight. Just get rid of it!

April 6, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Did you get off track this weekend? Here’s the good news: It doesn’t matter! No matter what you did or didn’t eat this weekend, it doesn’t mean you can’t have a FANTASTIC day today and go on to have a great eating week.

April 2, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

IMPORTANT REMINDER: On any given day, the number on the scale is exactly what it should be, given what you ate the day before, how much energy you expended, various biological factors, and so much more. Even if you were perfect on your diet, the scale may not go down due to 100 different reasons.

April 1, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting is too hard, it’s just not worth it.

Response: Yes, dieting is hard SOME of the time, but not all the time. Looking back, it’s not hard every single minute of every single day. Besides, it IS worth it because my goals are MUCH MORE important to me than never working hard at it. Giving up isn't worth it!

 

March 31, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It's important to not undermine your commitment to weight loss by telling yourself, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” or “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things.” If you do, you will have a much, much harder time getting yourself to just do what you need to do.

March 30, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This week – no excuses! Do everything in your power to make this week a great eating week. Don’t wait even one more moment to start getting on track. Do what you can do RIGHT NOW and you’ll start feeling great that much sooner.

March 27, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It can be helpful to read your Advantages List (a list of all the reasons why you want to lose weight) several times a day throughout the weekend. This will help remind you that while staying on track can be more difficult on the weekend, it’s so worth it! Continually remind yourself why you’re doing this and your motivation will stay high.

March 26, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Satiety is more than just a matter of just putting food in your mouth. Really getting satisfaction from your eating is a combination of physical and psychological satisfaction – so how you eat is just as important as what you eat. Eating sitting down, slowly, and mindfully really can help you feel so much more satisfied, even when you’re eating less food.

March 25, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It's okay to eat this [unplanned food] because I'm stressed.

Response: It's not okay to eat this just because I'm stressed. Eating won't solve the problem of what made me stressed in the first place. At most, it will temporarily distract me from it, but then it will just leave me with two problems: the initial one plus now the problem of getting off track and feeling badly about my eating. It's not worth it.

March 24, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don't be overly influenced by the number on the scale. If you see a higher number, you may get demoralized and overeat. If you see a lower number, you may think that it’s okay to loosen up and eat more. Remember – the number on the scale is just one point of information and shouldn’t impact how you eat on any given day.

March 23, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters tell us something like, “It’s so hard for me to lose weight because I just like eating,” we remind them that there’s a huge difference between eating and overeating. They will never give up eating, but in stopping overeating, they get to enjoy food and lose weight.

March 20, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Reminder: If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it” and keep driving? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake this weekend, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track.

March 19, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I can’t say no when [my friend] offers me food because I’ll disappoint her,” remind yourself that if you had a peanut allergy and she offered you something with nuts in it, you would never consider giving in. Losing weight/being healthier is just as legitimate a reason to say no!

March 18, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve finished my portion [of dinner], but I want more.

Response: Even though I feel like eating more, it’s worth it to stop now because it will help me lose weight, stay on track, and reach my goals which are so important to me. Besides, the desire will go away once I get involved in something else.

March 17, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’ve been feeling off track and are waiting to have a good eating week before getting on the scale, remind yourself that it usually doesn’t work out that way. Avoiding the scale begets more avoiding the scale, and chances are you’ll still be avoiding it next week. Just get on it today and you’ll increase your chances of actually having a good eating week.

March 16, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieting can be hard but the benefits that come as a result of gaining control and losing weight are totally and completely worth it. If you’re having a hard time, make a list of all the reasons you want to lose weight and read it at least once a day. Doing so will remind you exactly why you’re doing this and give you motivation to keep going.

March 13, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It is so nice to go to bed Sunday night feeling good about your weekend eating instead of beating yourself up about it. And it is so nice to wake up Monday morning and feel proud of how the weekend went instead of thinking, “Ok, now I need to recover.” This weekend, keep in mind that no matter how hard it may feel to stay on track in the moment, you will be so glad you did come Sunday night/Monday morning.

March 12, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieters really can be satisfied with less food if they take the time to savor what they are eating. If they eat without paying attention, they often feel like they haven't eaten enough and want more. So, it may not be that you need to eat more food, it may just be that you need to eat more mindfully.

March 11, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Losing weight is so hard. Is it really worth it?

Response: I only question whether or not it’s ‘worth it’ when I’m in an off-track period. When I’m on track, in control, and feeling great, I never question whether or not it’s worth it. So is it worth it? 100% yes!

March 10, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, people can and do gain weight eating all healthy food, so just because it's healthy doesn't mean you can overeat it. If you take in too many calories, regardless of whether or not they're nutritious calories, it will stop you from losing weight.

March 9, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter what you did or didn’t eat over the weekend, today is a new day and a fresh chance to have a great eating week!

 

March 6, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake this weekend and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories never stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain. Getting back on track right away will stop you from gaining weight and help you feel good about your eating for the rest of the weekend (and make Monday morning more pleasant).

 

March 5, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

At the end of the day, most people don't remember the bits and bites they ate standing up throughout the day. Working on cutting out all eating standing up can be a relatively painless way of cutting out a few hundred calories (or more).

March 4, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I have to finish [this food] because it will be a waste of money if I don’t.

Response: The money is spent whether I eat the food or not. Finishing it won’t bring it back, and the only thing it will do is cause me to take in extra calories that I don’t need.

March 3, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s never your job to eat something just because someone wants you to. It is ALWAYS your job to make good decisions for you that support your health and happiness.

 

March 2, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, you can’t undo any eating from the past, you can only control what you do eat in the future so there’s no point in berating yourself for past mistakes. Instead, focus on what you can do to make today's eating a success and you'll feel so much better.

February 26, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes people confuse not knowing how to diet with not wanting it enough. What we have found with our clients is that it’s rarely, if ever, a question of them not wanting it. It’s all a matter of them lacking the knowledge to get there. So if you’ve had trouble in the past, stop blaming yourself! Instead, focus your energy on learning what you need to be successful.

February 25, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I might as well just eat this food I’m craving because I’m going to give in eventually anyway.

Response: That’s not true! That’s my old way of thinking. Now I know that cravings always pass, and that if I get distracted, they go away more quickly. I have proven to myself that I can withstand cravings, so it’s no longer a foregone conclusion that I’ll give in. I need to think about all the other cravings I’ve overcome and how good that felt. I can do it now, too!

February 24, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Tuesday Reality Check: If you think, “It’s okay to give in just this one time,” remind yourself that EVERY TIME matters. Losing weight is not one big thing that you do, and as long as you’re doing it, it doesn’t matter about all the rest. No, losing weight is a combination of all the small decisions you make in a day. So this time, and every time, matters.

February 23, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieters so often say, “I felt so good when I stayed on track,” and “I felt really bad when I ate way too much.” When you learn to gain control over your thinking and eating, dieting really does feel great, not terrible.

February 20, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you had a long week, you do deserve to relax on the weekends, but you ALSO deserve to achieve all the advantages of losing weight, so you can’t use (extra) food as a means to relax. This weekend, work on incorporating other types of self-care into your life. The more ways you have to recharge your batteries, the less you’ll turn to food to do so.

February 19, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you secretly eat food at night, in your car, or at times when no one is around, remind yourself that body doesn’t know or care how many people are watching you eat – it processes all calories the same whether 1 person is with you, 100 people are with you, or you’re alone.

February 18, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to order something like a salad at a restaurant because it’s not special and I could make it at home.

Response: Especially if I eat out a lot, I likely can’t have something that feels particularly “special” every time – not if I want to lose weight and/or keep it off. But just because the food might not feel special, it doesn’t mean the other aspects of the experience won’t be (people watching, being in a new environment, not having to prepare, serve, or clean up from the meal, etc.).

February 17, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

There are so many reasons people feel the urge to eat – and hunger is just one of them. It can also be driven by feeling tired, anxious, stressed, bored, or overwhelmed; being thirsty; wanting to procrastinate; having a craving, and so much more. Next time you want to eat, ask yourself, “What is this really about?”

 

February 16, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

A dieter recently told us, “I put on a pair of pants that I haven’t fit into for at least ten years – and they zipped right up! It was the best feeling ever!” No matter how hard dieting may feel at any given time, moments like these unquestionably make it worth it. What are some of your “worth it” moments?

February 13, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Being careful with your eating during the week and then overeating on weekends might enable you to maintain your weight, but it likely won’t enable you to lose. If your goal is to lose weight, then it’s necessary to be focused on healthy eating every day.

February 12, 2015 – Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to not weigh yourself because you think you overate, don’t let yourself off the hook! The times when you most don’t want to weigh in are the times when it’s most important to do so. Prove to yourself that you take accountability for your actions and that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand. This is so important for long term maintenance!

February 11, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I had a long and stressful day. I deserve to just relax and eat whatever I want.
Response: While I do deserve comfort after a hard day, I also deserve to feel good about myself, be healthy, feel confident, fit into my clothes, etc., so I just can’t use food as a means to relax. There are other ways to treat myself that come with NO negative consequences.

February 10, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s not fair that I have to work so hard at losing weight,” remind yourself that while it is unfair that some people have to work at this while others don't, the reality is that everyone has unfairnesses in their lives, and this is one of yours. But at least this is one you can do something about!

February 9, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I have so much weight to lose, it will be so long until I feel better,” remind yourself that you'll end up feeling great well before you reach your goal weight because you'll gain control over your eating. Feeling great is not about the actual number on the scale – it’s about feeling in control of the direction the number is moving. Besides, every pound along the way you lose will feel better than being that pound heavier!

February 6, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Weekends, with their numerous opportunities for treats, can be difficult. Having a guideline for yourself like, "No dessert until after dinner" can help limit your intake because it makes it makes it easier to turn down treats offered during the day, knowing you can have one later.

February 5, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Tip: If you have cookies or chips or other tempting food out in plain view, every time you see it you’ll have to decide whether or not to have some. This can be very taxing on your willpower and leaves you with many opportunities to give in. Remember, if it’s not staring you in the face, it’s much easier to resist.

February 4, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: People should love me for what I am and not for how I look.

Response: This is absolutely true, but it doesn't mean I shouldn't work on losing weight. Maintaining a healthy weight is ESSENTIAL for good health and, besides, being in control of my eating feels so much better than being out of control. I'm not losing weight to make people love me, I'm doing it to make MYSELF healthy and happy.

February 3, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Being overly restrictive or rigid about your eating may work for weight loss, but it doesn’t work for long-term weight maintenance. Everyone needs to learn the skills that enable them to eat in a reasonable, maintainable way; otherwise they’ll continue in the cycle of losing and gaining. Remember, eating “nothing” of something and eating “too much” of it are two sides of the same coin! All-or-nothing does not work long term.

February 2, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good Reminder: If you were walking down a flight of stairs and stumbled down a few, would you then say “Well, I’ve blown it” and throw yourself down the rest? No! You would get back up and resume walking. If you stumbled this weekend, immediately pick yourself back up and start eating healthy again.

January 30, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to watch the Super Bowl this weekend, remember: you can’t eat (and drink) everything you want, in whatever quantities you want, and still lose weight. But you CAN plan ahead to have some extra treats, stay in control of your eating, and enjoy them guilt-free.

January 29, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don’t base your decision of whether or not to exercise on how you feel before you start, base it on how you’ll feel when you finish.

January 28, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to weigh myself because I’ll feel terrible if the number goes up.

Response: I’ll only feel terrible if I let my sabotaging thoughts convince me that I’m bad or weak for gaining weight. At worse, gaining weight means I may have made mistakes that I can correct during this coming week.

January 27, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

A very common sabotaging thought is, “Just this one time won’t matter,” but regardless of the situation, every time DOES matter. Every SINGLE time you withstand a craving, resist emotional eating, and say no to unplanned food, you increase the chances you will the next time. Each time you give in, you increase the chances you will give in the next time, too.

January 26, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

All dieters and maintainers go through periods when dieting feels more difficult. The good news: this is completely normal and happens to EVERYONE. Keep doing what you’re doing and dieting WILL get easier again.

January 22, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, you’re only ever one food decision away from being on track. And the sooner you get back on track, the better position you put yourself in. If you get off track, don’t wait until the next day to recover. Make the rest of the day great, and the next day you won’t have to struggle to get back on track – you’ll already be there!

January 21,2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Now that I’ve lost weight I can stop being so careful.

Response: While I may be able to loosen up a little, I have to remember that I lost weight because of the different ways I am now doing things. The moment I return to my old habits is the moment I start to gain weight back.

January 20, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

So much of the discomfort of feeling hunger is psychological, not physical. People get hungry and catastrophize, thinking, “Oh no, this is terrible. I’m hungry and it’s going to get so much worse before I can eat again.” It’s crucial to keep in mind that hunger comes and goes, it does not just get worse and worse until you can’t tolerate it. That’s not how hunger works!

January 19, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Getting off track with dieting can be very discouraging, but it doesn't need to be. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you'll continue improving.

January 16, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, make a concerted effort to give yourself credit for every positive food decision you make. Giving yourself credit in the moment (“Good for me! That’s great. I deserve credit for this. This will help me reach my goals which are so important to me.”) will help you focus on what you’re getting as a result of sticking to your plan, not what you’re giving up.

January 15, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, you don’t have to give in to a craving to make it go away. Cravings are like itches – the more you pay attention to them, the worse they get. If you have a craving, do something to get distracted. The moment you get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away.

January 14, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet.

Response: I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning so I have to make it a top priority it or will not happen, but as it gets easier it will take less and less time. It’s all a matter of priorities.

January 13, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you still have tempting food hanging around leftover from the holidays – get rid of it! It will do nothing but sabotage your healthy eating resolutions. Do everything you can to set yourself up for success, including having a kitchen that is full of healthy, good-for-you food.

January 12, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You wouldn’t expect to be able to run a marathon if you’ve never run a mile. Dieting is the same – don’t set yourself up for failure by trying to take too many big steps all at once. Start with a few small changes, work until you master them, and then institute more. After all, small steps eventually add up to really big ones.

January 9, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, your body does not know or care that it’s a weekend; it processes calories the same regardless of the day of the week. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then weekends are a break from work, NOT a break from healthy eating.

January 8, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Many dieters have a tendency to focus on any mistakes they may have made that day instead of recognizing the multitude of positive things they have done. We always remind dieters that one or two wrong things IN NO WAY negates 20 right things, so make sure you keep a realistic perspective of your day as a whole.

 

January 7, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to diet because then I’ll be burdened with thinking about food and diet all the time.

Response: I’m already burdened by constantly feeling bad about my weight and wanting to do something about it. Either way I’m burdened but at least in the in the first case I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel better about myself.

January 6, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

 If you’re working on healthy eating and losing weight, it probably means you also have to work on putting your own needs first (at least some of the time) and feeling entitled to ask for what you need. Remember – you can’t be good to anyone else if you’re not first good to yourself.

December 26, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to eat this because everyone else is eating it,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what everyone around you is eating. It ONLY knows what you eat, so that is not a valid excuse.

December 24, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: My eating has been so bad lately, I’ll just wait until the New Year to get back on track.

Response: Absolutely not! I will get back on track right now because every minute I eat off track is another minute I feel bad about myself and my eating. It’s worth it to me to get back on track now and start the New Year off right.

December 23, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight (or even maintain your weight), it’s extremely likely you can’t eat treats every time you see them during the holiday season. It’s important to remember that just because it’s the holidays, and just because the treats are there, does NOT mean you’re entitled to eat them each time you have the opportunity to do so.

December 22, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The better you feel about yourself, the better your holiday season will be. While you may think you’ll enjoy it more if you eat with abandon, likely you’ll feel badly and guilty if you do – which significantly diminishes enjoyment. This year, work on staying in control. This will help you feel better about yourself and your eating, and will help you enjoy the holiday season all the more.

December 19, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you go to events this weekend and think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat normally over the holidays,” remind yourself, “Actually, I AM eating normally for someone of my age and gender with my [weight loss/weight maintenance] goals.” Redefine your concept of “normal” eating! You very likely are eating 100% normally for someone who doesn't want to gain a lot of weight over the holidays.

December 18, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Have you ever thought, “I can get away with not practicing some of my diet skills”? In fact you probably can get away with this – but only for a period of time, and at some point it WILL catch up with you. Achieving permanent weight loss means not trying to “get away” with things. It means accepting what you need to do and doing it.

December 17, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The holidays are stressful and I just want to relax and not have one more thing to worry about.

Response: In the past I’ve seen that worrying about my weight and feeling bad about my eating is a huge drain. Maintaining control over my eating will actually make me feel better because it’ll help me feel more in control in general AND it will reduce my stress because I won’t have to worry about gaining weight.

December 16, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat extra now that I’m home because I was so good at the party and didn’t eat lots of food,” remind yourself that extra is still extra. If you take in more calories than your body needs, regardless of how much food you didn’t eat, you’ll gain weight.

December 15, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Chances are excellent that you’ll never go to bed at night regretting having had an on-track day with your eating, and it’s just as likely that you’ll go to bed sorely regretting having lost control. This is still true even during the holidays, when being on track may feel harder. If you have a great eating day, you’ll feel great, no matter what day of the year it is.

December 12, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, being careful with your eating during the week and then getting off track on the weekends might be enough to maintain your weight, but it probably won’t enable weight loss. If you want to lose weight, weekends are a break from work, not a break from healthy eating.

December 11th, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have a tradition of making holiday cookies with family, remember that the taste of the cookies is only one small part of the whole experience. Regardless of how many cookies you do or don’t eat, it doesn’t take away from getting to spend time with family, reminiscing on past holidays, passing down family traditions, and all the other wonderful aspects of the event.

December 10, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I AM eating. If I take in more calories than I had planned, I’ll gain weight

December 9, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing or maintaining weight over the holidays can be difficult, but it is by no means impossible. If you tell yourself, “I just can’t possibly lose weight at this time,” you’re giving yourself an excuse to not even try. Don't check out – any effort you put in will be better than no effort.

December 8, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good reminder: You can’t undo any eating from the past, you can only control what you do eat in the future so there’s no point in berating yourself for past mistakes. Instead, focus on what you can do to make TODAY’s eating a success and you will feel so glad that you did.

December 5, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don’t wait until New Year’s to start working on healthy eating resolutions. Start THIS MINUTE and come January 1st you will be in a much happier and healthier state to begin the new year.

December 4, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Eating mistakes are like hitting wrong notes while playing the piano or missing a ball during a tennis game. They’re normal, expected, and easy to recover from as long as you keep them in perspective and get right back on track. If you view eating mistakes as being in the same realm as, let’s say, hurting a patient in a medical practice, they will be much harder to recover from.

December 3, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I have to eat a lot of [this special holiday food] because I only get it once a year.

Response: There is almost no food that I can’t get, make, or buy 365 days a year. While I may traditionally only make it at this time, it doesn’t mean I can’t at other times, too! It’s simply not true that I have to eat a lot of it now because I can ALWAYS have more, whether it’s because I make it again next week or I wait and have it again next year. There’s always another time coming.

December 2, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have leftover holiday food hanging around that is too tempting, just get rid of it! The cost of getting rid of it (wasting money) is so minimal compared to the cost of keeping it around (trying your willpower, causing you to get off track, shaking your confidence, jeopardizing your weight loss, reinforcing bad habits, etc.).

December 1, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Important reminder: We can’t change what has happened in the past, only what happens now and in the future. No matter what you ate over the weekend or how off track you may be feeling, that doesn’t mean you have to stay off track! You can change (for the better) what happens now and every day moving forward.

November 26, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t limit my food today because I need to taste everything I’m cooking. 

Response: There is a big difference between tasting a little for flavor and tasting just to eat. I actually don’t need to take in too many extra calories, as long as I’m mindful about just tasting little bits (or getting someone else to taste!) and making sure not to graze while I’m cooking. It can be done!

November 25, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

We sometimes ask our dieters, “How do you want to feel when you go to bed Thanksgiving night?” No one ever says, “Stuffed, sick, and mad at myself.” How do they want to feel? Happy, satisfied, and proud of their ability to stay on track. If that’s how you want to feel, too, then you have to make sure your eating is in line with your goals.

November 24, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Thanksgiving is this week! If you start the week off strong by making healthy eating decisions, then by the time Thursday comes it will be SO MUCH EASIER for you to continue making healthy decisions because the ball will already be rolling in the right direction.

November 21, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories NEVER stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain. Getting yourself back in control right away will stop you from gaining weight AND help you feel good about your eating the rest of the weekend.

November 20, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It can be helpful to ask yourself, “At the end of the day, which feels better – a day that I’ve overindulged and allowed myself to get off track with my eating, or a day that I’ve been focused, strong, and stayed completely on track?” We often think we’ll be happier if we eat whatever we want, whenever we want, but really just the opposite is usually true. Don’t forget that!

November 19, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s too hard to eat healthy during the holidays.

Response: It’s hard but it’s doable. It may take some extra work and focus, but as a result of doing so I’ll get to feel confident, in control, comfortable in my clothes, proud of myself, and so much more. It’s worth it!

November 18, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The holidays are a busy time for most people and the reality is that if healthy eating doesn’t remain a top priority during this time, it’s simply not going to happen. Just as you wouldn’t let caring for your kids or pet or getting to necessary medical appointments slide during this time, you also can’t let healthy eating go – not if you want to get through the holidays without gaining weight.

November 17, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Are you already thinking that losing weight/getting healthy will be a New Year’s Resolution? If so, don’t wait! The sooner you start working on it the sooner you will achieve it, so start taking small steps TODAY towards that goal and all the small steps will begin to add up to big ones.

November 14, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Although it can be harder to stay focused on healthy eating throughout the weekend, it’s 100% worth it, if only because it’s such a terrible feeling to wake up Monday morning and be full of eating regrets. If you had an on-track weekend, you get to wake up Monday morning and feel GREAT and STRONG and confident about the week ahead.

November 13, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s often worth it to limit the number of times you need to exert dieting willpower in a day. Whether this means keeping certain foods out of your house (or only bringing in individual-sized portions), putting away leftovers immediately after you serve, or keeping tempting food out of plain sight, the more you cut down the need to use willpower the less you will have to rely on it.

November 12, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because everyone else is.

Response: That’s just simply NOT TRUE! My body doesn’t know or care what anybody around me is eating. It ONLY knows and cares what I eat, so just because other people are eating something doesn’t necessarily mean that I can/should, too.

November 11, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Do you have a general plan for your eating for the week? Do you have the foods available to make that plan a reality? If the answer to either of these questions is no, then you have some work to do! Remember, it’s MUCH easier to stay on track when you have healthy foods available and a plan for eating them (and so, so much harder when you don’t).

November 10, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, it’s so much easier to stay on track than to have to get back on track. If you stumbled this weekend, put in the hard work today to right your eating and the rest of the week will flow so much more easily.

November 7, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re likely to encounter food pushers this weekend, it’s time to start saying no! Remember, if you had a severe nut allergy and someone offered you food with peanuts in it, you would turn it down NO MATTER WHAT! Losing weight, being healthy, and being happier are just as legitimate reasons to say no, so stick to your guns and stand firm.

November 6, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m not going to work on my dieting skills because I don’t want to,” remind yourself that the “I don’t want to/I don’t have to” is just your adolescent rebellion talking. Listening to that voice has NEVER helped you reach your goals so you’re just not going to pay any attention to it.

November 5, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t throw away leftover Halloween candy because it would be a waste.

Response: If possible, I can always donate it or give it away. But if it’s in the house and too immediately tempting, just throw it out. It’s better to waste it in the garbage than in my body. I don’t want to treat my body like a trashcan!

November 4, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Do you ever have the thought,“Just this one time won’t matter"? Remind yourself that regardless of the situation, every time DOES matter. Every SINGLE time you withstand a craving, resist emotional eating, and say no to unplanned food, you increase the chances you will the next time. Each time you give in, you make it more likely you'll give in the next time, too.

November 3, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you were walking down a flight of stairs and stumbled down a few, would you then say “Well, I’ve blown it” and throw yourself down the rest? No! You would get back up and resume walking. If you stumbled this weekend, immediately pick yourself back up and start eating healthy again.

October 31, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Happy Halloween! Remember – candy is available 365 days a year, not just on Halloween, so you don’t need to get your “fill” today. There will ALWAYS be more.

October 30, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, your body processes all calories the same, regardless of what day of the year it is. This is not to say you shouldn’t plan to have a treat on Halloween, but don’t fool yourself into thinking extras don't count “because” it’s Halloween. Your body doesn’t know or care!

October 29, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to have dessert before dinner (even though I’m working on the skill of no dessert before dinner) because I just won’t have it later.
 
Response: Actually it’s NOT okay to have dessert now because if I do, I send myself the message that it’s okay to not do what I say I’m going to do. It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every single time I give in to a craving and have dessert before dinner, I increase the likelihood that I will the next time, and the time after that. Every single time I resist, I make it easier to do so the next time.

October 28, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

There are three options: Rich, calorie-dense food, eating big portions, and losing weight. Pick two. You (along with everyone else!) can’t have all three.

October 27, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The holidays are right around the corner. If you’re feeling strong and in control going into them, it will make staying on track so much easier. What happens this week will set the stage for the rest of the year – so let’s make it a good one!

October 24, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Why start a diet on Monday? Start it TODAY, be focused all weekend, and by Monday you won’t have to gear up for something new. All you’ll have to do is keep doing what you’re doing, which is a much better position to be in.

October 23, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It's not all-or-nothing. It’s not as if your only two options are to eat absolutely no food you really want, or to eat every bite of food you want, every moment you want it. There is SO MUCH middle ground between those two things and successful dieting/healthy eating is about finding a balance that works for you.

October 22, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I’ve had to say “no” to food so many times today. I’m tired of it.
 
Response: Actually what I really did was say “yes” so many times today! I said yes to losing weight, being healthy, feeling good about myself, fitting into my clothes, and so much more. Instead of focusing just on what I’m not eating, I need to focus on everything I’m getting as a result of staying on track.

October 21, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good Reminder: If you’re following the Beck Diet Solution program, it simply doesn’t work to only do the skills you feel like doing. If you had an infection and your doctor prescribed you 10 days of medication, you won’t take 5 and expect it to work. This is the same! You have to take the full dose in order for it to work.

October 20, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Being on track feels GREAT! Leaving an event without overeating feels GREAT! How did you do this weekend? Did you have any successes you feel proud of? Share them below and let us gain some motivation from you!

October 17, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Healthy weekends don’t happen by chance – they happen when you make the decision to put your health and your weight loss goals first. While overindulging might feel good momentarily, being at a healthy weight feels good every second of every day. "Like" our status today if you’re committing to staying on track this weekend! (And report back to us on Monday and let us know how you did.)

October 16, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re trying to overcome the urge to emotionally eat, consider what emotion you’re experiencing when deciding on a distraction technique. If you’re feeling a nervous anxiety, something action-related might help, like walking, climbing stairs, or cleaning. If you’re feeling sad or lonely, something soothing might help, like drinking hot tea, practicing meditation, or listening to calming music.

October 15, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: Counting calories is too inconvenient.
 
Response: What’s my goal? Is it to be as inconvenienced as little as possible, or is it to lose weight and keep it off? Unfortunately, these goals are not compatible, so I have to figure out which is more important to me. On the other hand, the reality is that being overweight is terribly inconvenient, so it’s not as if I avoid inconvenience in not counting calories.

October 14, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When working on losing weight, everyone has weeks when they think they should have lost weight but don't AND weeks when they think the scale should have gone up but are pleasantly surprised that it hasn't. While the latter is much more fun, both are part of the losing weight journey.

October 13, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

In dieting (as in life) everybody makes mistakes. You’re entitled to make mistakes – but you’re not entitled to let the memory of those mistakes get in your way. Wipe your slate clean and get started right this moment!

October 10, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, getting back on track in the middle of a party is so much better than waiting until the end of the party. Getting back on track at the end of the party is better than waiting until the end of the day. Getting back on track at the end of the day is so much better than getting back on track at the end of the next day. This weekend, if you falter, get back on track IMMEDIATELY!
 

October 9, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When we hear dieters say, “I was stressed, I had to eat,” we ask them, “If you were that stressed and there was no food available, would you die?” The answer, of course, is no. At any given moment, the urge to eat may feel like a ‘need’ but it NEVER is. It’s always a ‘want.’ Telling yourself you need to eat is an excuse to give in. Realizing that you just WANT to eat in that moment may help you remind you that just because you want to eat, doesn’t mean you have to or should.

October 8, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m discouraged that I didn’t lose weight this week
 
Response: My weight loss graph is not going to be a straight line down, no matter how much I want it to be that way. There will be days AND weeks that I either stay the same or go up a little bit. That’s how the weight loss process goes. It doesn’t mean that I’m not working hard and it doesn’t mean that what I’m doing isn’t working. Just keep moving forward and the scale will keep moving down.

October 7, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Tuesday Reality Check: "My doctor told me to stop having intimate dinners for four. Unless there are three other people." Orson Welles

October 6, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Good reminder – food tastes so much better when it is not served with a side of guilt or shame. Dieters often think they'll feel dissatisfied if they make healthy choices but usually they actually feel MORE dissatisfied when they end up feeling badly about eating unhealthy food. It may be difficult (in the moment) to decide to eat something healthy, but once you're done eating, you won't regret not having taken in more calories.

October 3, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, great eating days are GREAT days, period. No matter how many tempting eating situations your find yourself in this weekend, if you stay in control, you’ll only feel happy about it at the end of the day. This weekend, treat yourself to feeling great – which means on-track eating.

October 2, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If healthy eating feels really painful to you, you may be giving food a bigger role than it deserves. Food is a pleasure in life, but it’s not the only one. Try building other sources of pleasure and excitement in your life, and in doing so, you’ll rely less on food to be “fun” and healthy eating will be easier.

October 1, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t have time for my dieting skills.
 
Response: It doesn’t take that much time to actually do everything. What does take time is how long I spend struggling beforehand over whether or not I’m going to do it. Once I make the decision to definitively do these things, the struggle will go away and the time I spend will be reduced significantly.

September 30, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is so much harder when you’re not sleeping enough. Lack of sleep increases hunger and cravings and decreases the mental energy you have to overcome them. If you’re not sleeping enough, consider setting an alarm in the evening and enforcing a bedtime. Even if you don’t feel like going to bed at that time, do it anyway! And remember, sleeping burns more calories than sitting on the couch watching TV.

September 29, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One of our clients was feeling discouraged about the number of dieting mistakes she made and about whether or not she she could really learn to eat consistently. We reminded her that she now has the ability to be so much more consistent than she was when she first started, and as long as she keeps working on it, she’ll continue to improve. Making mistakes does NOT mean that you can’t do it, it just means that you’re still in the learning process. Remind yourself of the progress you’ve made, and just keep moving forward. As long as you don’t give up, you’ll continue to improve.

September 26, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, focus more on how eating off plan feels in your head, and less on how it feels in your mouth. Yes, the off-plan food might taste good, but what it does to your head (makes you feel guilty and mad at yourself, knocks you off track, and makes it harder to do what you need to do) is much less palatable.

September 25, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going through a stressful or draining time, it’s critical to take care of yourself and to find ways to let off steam and recharge your batteries. You absolutely DO need to take care of yourself, but you DON’T need to take care of yourself with food.

September 24, 2014 – Wednesday Sabatoge

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: The scale went down so now I can loosen up a bit.
 
Response: It’s 100% not true that it’s okay to loosen up. The scale went down because of all the things I’ve been doing. The moment I stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up.

September 23, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One of the changes we work on with our clients is no eating in the car, because it’s nearly impossible to really eat mindfully while driving. Also, many dieters do secret eating in the car, so eliminating eating while driving curbs that. It’s helpful to remember that, even if you’re hungry, you can ALWAYS wait until you reach your destination to eat. You never HAVE to eat in the car. You may want to, but you never have to.

September 22, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One of the greatest aspects of losing weight is how many good things come as a result. It's not as if you have to work hard, be disciplined, make healthy choices, and get nothing in return. Just the opposite is true – by doing all of these things you get THE MOST IMPORTANT things in return (health, self-confidence, control, pride, reduced physical and emotional pain, etc.)

September 19, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: This weekend, remember: Just because food is free, doesn’t mean you should eat it (after all, it’s not calorie-free). Similarly, just because you've paid for it doesn’t necessarily mean you should eat the whole thing (after all, the money is already gone. Eating it won’t bring it back). If you eat extra food, even if it's free or you’ve paid for it, you’ll gain weight.

September 18, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It can be (very) difficult in the moment to resist eating something, but once the temptation has passed, an hour later, a day later, a week later, you’ll never be sorry you resisted. And DEFINITELY when you get on the scale you won't regret not having eaten more. The hard part is temporary! The great, strong, proud feelings from resisting last so much longer.

September 17, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m so stressed that [my plane is delayed] so I’m going to buy some candy and eat it.
 
Response: All the candy in the world won’t make [my plane come any sooner], it will just make me feel out of control of my eating and mad at myself. Remember, eating doesn’t solve anything and it will just make me feel worse in the long run.

September 16, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If every time you buy a bag of chips you tell yourself, “I’ll be able to stop at one serving,” and then never do, when you’re next tempted to buy a bag, ask yourself, “What’s the evidence I’ll be able to stop when I know I should?” Then buy a single-sized bag instead. Don’t ignore the evidence!

September 15, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re lacking motivation today to do what you need to do – fake it until you make it. Don’t wait to feel motivated to eat healthy and exercise because the initial motivation may not come. Instead, JUST DO IT. Once you start losing weight and feeling better, you’ll have plenty of motivation to keep going.

September 12, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It's okay to eat this extra food because I'll make up for it later,” ask yourself, “When has ‘making up for it later’ EVER really worked?” It’s important to learn how to eat consistently, even on the weekends, so you’re not constantly tempted to eat more. Once you do this, the struggle will go down and dieting will get easier.

September 11, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters wait until right before dinner to decide what to eat, they are often tired, hungry, and their willpower is lower, and so they are more apt to make poor decisions. Deciding in advance what to eat for dinner, when you are fresher and less tired, greatly increases the likelihood of making a healthy choice.

September 10, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I’m so mad at myself for overeating.
 
Response: Get over it! The only thing that beating myself up does is demoralize me further which makes it harder to get back on track. The important thing is not that I never make a mistake, it’s that I recover right away. Stop focusing on what I did do, and start focusing on what I can do to make this day great.

September 9, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It's important to have reasonable expectations when losing weight. It’s very possible that you won’t get down to the weight you were at in college, or the weight of your thinnest friend. But the good news is that you don’t need to lose every pound you’d ideally like to in order to experience all the benefits of losing weight. Even at a higher weight than you’d like, you can still feel so much better about yourself, feel in control, fit into clothes, be healthier, move around and exercise more easily, and more.

September 8, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, it can be helpful to remind yourself, “It’s not about the food.” This time period is not about what you are or are not eating, it’s about getting healthier, feeling better, becoming more confident, fitting into all your clothes, feeling proud of yourself, etc. It’s not about the food, it’s about everything else!

September 5, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend and stay on track, give yourself lots of credit. When you get home, however, make sure you don’t say to yourself, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” because you will undo all your hard work. Your body doesn’t know what you don’t eat, only what you do.

September 4, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Important reminder – if you’re inconsistent with your eating, exercise may help prevent the scale from going up but it likely won’t enable the scale to actually go down. If your goal is to lose weight, then your eating is the key, not your time logged in the gym.

September 3, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I wish I was losing weight more quickly.
 
Response: I have to remember that the faster I lose, the faster I put it back on. Losing weight quickly signals I’m likely doing something more extreme that I can’t keep up with, and therefore are very at risk for regaining. Even though I’m losing slowly, at least I’m still losing (which is so much better than staying the same or going up) and small losses eventually lead up to really big ones. I’ll get there!

September 2, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It's a new month, so it may be time to set some new goals. By the end of September would you like to have lost weight, gained weight, or stayed the same? The number you see reflected on the scale at the end of the month is ultimately up to you, so make a commitment to yourself NOW!

August 29, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, spontaneous decisions about whether or not to eat something are invariably what get dieters into trouble. This holiday weekend, take away the need to exert spur-of-the-moment willpower by having a plan and making decisions in advance.

August 28, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s not fair I have to struggle and limit my eating,” remind yourself that while it’s true it’s not fair, EVERYONE has unfairnesses in their lives, but at least this is one you can do something about.

August 27, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m so upset, I need to eat to make myself feel better.
 
Response: Negative emotions ALWAYS pass and if I was feeling upset and had absolutely no access to food, eventually I would feel better no matter what. So it’s not true that I need to eat right now. Besides, eating ultimately won’t make me feel better anyway because I’ll feel guilty about it, I’ll reinforce bad habits, I’ll jeopardize my weight loss, etc.

August 26, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One bad weekend does NOT have to derail you. One bad weekend does NOT mean you can’t do this. One bad weekend does NOT define you. You can have a terrible weekend, eating-wise, and then go on to have an amazing eating week, and by next weekend be feeling so much better. If you’ve had a bad weekend and are struggling to recover, MOVE ON and make today a great day.

August 25, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Monday Motivation: If you think, “Losing weight is so hard, how will I be able to do it?” remind yourself that you’re capable of doing hard things! Doing things like getting a degree, being successful at a job, or learning a new skill are also difficult and weren’t achieved overnight. You worked at it, made mistakes along the way, and eventually reached your goal. Losing weight is exactly the same.

August 22, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you go to a party this weekend, stick to one dessert, and think, “It’s not fair I can’t have more,” you’re going to feel badly. If you eat one dessert and think, “It’s great that I can eat dessert and still lose weight, good for me for stopping here!” then you’re going to feel much better. This weekend, pay attention to what you say to yourself!

August 21, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to eat something unplanned and tell yourself, “It’s okay, it doesn’t have that many calories,” remind yourself that it’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. It doesn’t matter if the bite of food has 20 calories or 200 calories, it still reinforces the habit of giving in.

August 20, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Losing weight is so hard. Is it really worth it?
 
Response: I need to remember that I only question whether or not it’s ‘worth it’ when I’m in an off-track period. When I’m on track and in control, I never question whether or not it’s worth it because I feel so great. This is just an off-track sabotaging thought and the moment I get back on track, I won’t struggle with it anymore.

August 19, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Tuesday Reality Check: Just because you feel a sensation in your body, it doesn’t mean you’re hungry! It could be stress, boredom, tiredness, thirst, a craving, or more. It can be helpful to ask yourself, “Where am I feeling it?” If it’s in your stomach, that may be hunger. If it’s anywhere else in your body, that’s likely not.

August 18, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Monday Motivation: If you feel daunted by how long it will take to lose the weight you want to, remember that the time will pass anyway! A year from now you’ll be a year older regardless, but do you want to be a year older and stuck at a heavier weight, or a year older and feeling SO MUCH BETTER? Either way, though, the time will pass.

August 15, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If your goal is to lose weight, then your eating on weekends is just as important as during the week. It simply doesn’t work to be careful all week and then overindulge on weekends. Doing so will likely mean you’ll maintain your weight, but it won’t enable you to lose. “Like” our status today if you’re committing to making this a great eating weekend!

August 14, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, avoiding the scale has never gotten you to where you want to be. It’s important to prove to yourself that you face the consequences and get on the scale even when you don’t want to. Doing so may help hold you more accountable because you’ll know that you won’t let yourself stick your head in the sand.

August 13, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting stinks because the food is so boring.
 
Response: First of all, the food doesn’t have to be boring if I take the time to prepare healthy and delicious meals. But, even if the food is more boring for a period of time, that’s ok! Food isn’t my only source of excitement and besides, all the benefits of losing weight will be INCREDIBLY exciting.

August 12, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When you eat because you’re feeling sad or stressed, remind yourself that what you’ll ultimately doing is turning one problem into two – the original one that made you sad or stressed, and now additionally the problem of feeling badly about your eating, getting off track, and jeopardizing your weight loss.

August 11, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you are feeling hopeless about healthy eating and weight loss, it may mean that you’re focusing too much on where you want to be and not enough on the progress you’ve already made. Ask yourself, “Have I lost any weight?” “Are any of my eating habits better than they were?” “Have I made any positive changes?” If the answer is yes, it means you’re on your way!

August 8, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

To help stay on track during the weekend, consider making weekend-specific Response Cards, such as, “My body doesn’t know or care it’s a weekend, it processes calories the same and if I eat too much I’ll gain weight,” or, “It’s not worth undoing all my hard work from the week by overeating on weekends. Besides, if I stay in control of my eating, I will have a BETTER weekend because I'll feel good about myself and my eating.”

August 7, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to eliminate the words, “I’ve blown it for the day,” from your vocabulary. Telling yourself that just gives you an excuse to continue overeating. Instead of thinking, “I’ve blown it,” remind yourself that you made a MISTAKE, but you’ll recover right away and have a great rest of the day.

August 6, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because I exercised.

Response: I have to remember that losing weight is so much more about what I eat, and so much less about how much I exercise. Eating more because I’ve exercised may very well stop me from losing weight so I need to separate my eating from my exercise.

August 5, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight, eating healthfully needs to be a primary focus. It takes less time and energy the more you practice the skills, but at least in the beginning, it needs to be forefront in your mind or it’s likely just not going to happen.

August 4, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Getting of track with dieting can be discouraging, but it doesn't need to be, if you have the right mindset. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you'll continue improving.

August 1, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you're going to a party or event this weekend and think, "There'll be so much good food there I won't be able to resist remind yourself, "If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can."

July 31, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dining with other people, it’s very easy to get distracted by conversation and end up eating a lot of extra food. Immediately portioning off how much you are going to have is helpful because this way, even if you eat it while distracted, you won’t wind up consuming more than you had planned.

July 30, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat whatever I feel like right now because I don’t want to think about dieting.

Response: Actually, the only thing I’ll be doing is POSTPONING when I’ll think about dieting because if I go off track now, guaranteed I’ll spend a lot of time thinking and feeling bad about it later. So either I think about it now, stay on track, and feel great, or I get off track, think about it later, and feel badly. Either way I’ll think about it.

July 29, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to accept the things I have to do for dieting” remind yourself, “I have a choice: I can struggle with what I have to do and feel badly, or I can accept that this is the way it is. It doesn’t mean I have to like it but continuing to fight against acceptance will do NOTHING but make it harder for me to reach my tremendously important goals.”

July 28, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Often dieters say they'll start doing more things once they lose weight. We say DON'T WAIT! Start working on improving your life NOW because doing so will enable you to enrich your life and feel happier, which will bolster your weight-loss efforts.

July 25, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend if you think, “I had a hard week, I deserve to relax,” remind yourself that you DO deserve to relax, but you DON’T deserve to be overweight, so you can’t use food as a means to relax. Work on finding non-food-related ways to reward yourself after a long week. In doing so you can feel good about unwinding AND feel good about your eating and maintaining control.

July 24, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, you’re only one workout away from a good mood. If you’re in a bad mood, instead of eating to make yourself feel better, consider getting some exercise! It will give you the good feelings without the guilt.

July 23, 2014 – Wedneday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting is too hard, it’s just not worth it.

Response: Dieting is hard SOME of the time, but not all the time. If I think back on the past week, it wasn’t hard every single minute of every single day, and I can’t let the memory of the hard times color my perception of the week as a whole. Besides, being overweight is hard, too! Either way it’s hard.

July 22, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to not be overly influenced by the number on the scale. If you see a higher number, you may get demoralized and overeat. If you see a lower number, you may think that it’s okay to loosen up and overeat. Remember – the number on the scale is just one point of information and shouldn’t impact how you eat on any given day.

July 21, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Every time you go to bed after having a good eating day, you will feel great. And every morning you wake up after having had a good eating day the day before, you will feel great. This week, make a commitment to yourself to FEEL GREAT by committing to having a good eating week!

July 11, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieters who go out to eat and stay on track, once they get home, sometimes have thoughts like, “I was so good at dinner that I deserve to treat myself now.” If you have this type of thought, remind yourself, “My body doesn’t know or care about all of the food I resisted eating, it only knows what food I did eat. If I eat more food than my body needs, I will gain weight.”

July 10, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re not great at self-care, you’re likely going to be vulnerable to turning to food when you get stressed or upset because you won’t have other ways of calming down or soothing yourself. It’s important to build other means of comfort and stress-relief into your life so you have other things to turn to besides food.

July 9, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat whatever I want because I’m on vacation.

Response: If my goal is to lose weight, or at least maintain my weight, then vacations can be a break from work and from daily life, but not from healthy eating. Besides, I will enjoy the trip MORE if I stay in control of my eating! Every time I eat off track I feel terrible, and that will not change even though I’m on vacation.

July 8, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re following the Beck Diet Solution program, it doesn’t work to only do the skills you feel like doing. If you had an infection and your doctor prescribed you 10 days of medication, you won’t take 5 and expect it to work. This is the same thing – if you want it to work, you have to take the full dose.

July 7, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re having trouble getting yourself to stop eating something because it tastes really good, remind yourself that stopping comes with some huge benefits – you get to feel in control and on track, you don’t take in too many calories, you enable yourself to lose weight, you don’t ruin the ruin the enjoyment of the eating experience by overeating, etc. Stopping isn't a negative!

July 3, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to barbeques this weekend with lots of food, remember that at such events you have two options: You can eat smaller portions of more things, or bigger portions of fewer things. Most people psychologically find it more satisfying to eat bigger portions of fewer things, but whatever you decide, be deliberate with your choices.

July 2, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I know I already had enough, but I want just one more cookie.

Response: If I have one more, I’ll want another one. And another one after that. The craving won’t go away just because I have "one more." It’s true I’m unsatisfied now, but I’m still going to be unsatisfied after one more, two more, etc., so I might as well just stop now.

July 1, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to keep in mind that emotions aren’t harmful, and nothing bad will happen as a result of experiencing them. If something sad or stressful happens, it’s appropriate to feel sadness or stress! And, you don’t need to do anything (like eat) to make negative emotions go away – they always pass, 100% of the time

June 30, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you feel discouraged thinking about how much weight you have to lose, keep in mind that it’s not as if you have to lose all the weight before you start feeling good. EVERY pound you lose along the way feels better and you can experience significant improvements both physically and psychologically long before the last pound has been lost.

June 27, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Eating your food slowly and mindfully allows you to get so much more enjoyment from it (even if you’re eating less!) then quickly wolfing it down without paying much attention to it. This weekend, take the time to SLOW DOWN and really enjoy every bite you eat.

June 26, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Whenever you’re to stay on track during a challenging food situation (you’re at a party and are able to stick to one dessert), it’s so important to ask yourself, “How did I do it? What did I say to myself to help me stay on track?” If it was effective once, it’s helpful to remember because likely it will be effective again.

June 25, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I gave in to that craving. I can’t do this. I should just give up.

Response: Learning to lose weight and keep it off is a process and it takes time. I’m not going to learn it overnight, and I’m not going to be good at it overnight. Just because I gave in once, doesn’t negate all the other times I didn’t. I need to take an accurate picture of how things are really going and acknowledge that while I’m not perfect, I’m better than I was. As long as I keep working at it, I’ll keep moving forward.

June 24, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is not all plain chicken breast and salad with fat free dressing. There is a huge middle ground between eating everything you want and eating nothing you want, and being able to lose weight AND keep it off is about finding that middle ground. Extremes (in either direction) just don’t work for long!

June 23, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters, “I felt so good when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really bad when I ate way too much.” When dieters finally learn to gain control over their thinking and eating, dieting feels GREAT, not terrible.

June 20, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s likely you’ll encounter lots of food this weekend, and it’s true that if you want to lose weight, you probably can’t eat it all. But remember, when you say “no” to something, you’re saying “yes” to other things. When you say “no” to extra food, you’re saying “yes” to losing weight, being on track, feeling proud of yourself, and so much more.

June 19, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

 If you’re at a restaurant trying to decide between a healthy option and an unhealthy option, remind yourself that either way, once the meal is over, you’ll feel full. If you eat something healthy, you’ll feel full and happy, but if you eat something unhealthy, you’ll feel full and mad at yourself. Either way you’ll be full, but how do you to feel in addition to that?

June 18, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy to work on healthy eating right now.

Response: Just because I’m busy doesn’t mean I can’t make time for it. If I had a severe nut allergy, no matter how busy I was I would make sure all my food didn’t have nuts in it. Telling myself I’m too busy is just an excuse – I can still do it!

June 17, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight takes FOCUS; it doesn’t just happen. If you’re struggling, take a moment to think about whether or not you’ve been putting enough time and energy into it. Remember, if it’s not a top priority, chances are excellent it’s not going to happen.

June 16, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

All dieters and maintainers go through periods when dieting feels more difficult. The good news is that this is 100% normal and happens to EVERYONE. Keep doing what you’re doing and dieting WILL get easier again.

June 13, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

With summer right around the corner, it might be time to start brushing up on some of your skills. Have you been eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully? Reading your Advantages List? Responding to sabotaging thinking? Giving yourself credit? Making time and energy for dieting? If not, make a commitment to work on your basic skills this weekend to help get you in the right mindset.

June 12, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat whatever I want (and other people can),” remind yourself that either way it’s unfair. Either you face unfairness by limiting your eating, or you face all the unfairnesses and hardships that come with being overweight. Besides, it’s a common misconception that other people can eat whatever they want and it’s HIGHLY likely that they’re limiting themselves, too.

June 11, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat and I never get to have it.

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now because I can ALWAYS get it again. Besides, if I overeat, it will ruin the pleasure of having it because I’ll feel guilty.

June 10, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I have to finish this (extra) food because I’ve paid for it,” remind yourself that the money is already gone. Eating the food won’t bring it back, it will only cause you to take in extra calories. It’s not worth it!

June 9, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Do you ever think, “I don’t deserve credit until I reach my weight loss goals,”? If so, remind yourself that this is 100% NOT TRUE because all the small steps along the way are what add up to the big changes. If you’re not already, right this moment start giving yourself credit for all the positive steps you've taken. Pay attention to progress, not perfection.

June 6, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “Weekends should be about fun, not about dieting,” remind yourself that eating healthfully and having fun are not mutually exclusive. Just because you may not eat everything you want doesn’t mean you can’t enjoy what you do eat (and every other non-eating activity you do). Besides, being on track feel so much better than feeling out of control.

June 5, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Cravings are like itches; the more you pay attention to them, the worse they get. The moment you get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away. Make a list of a few short, distracting activities (play a game on your phone, call a friend, check news headlines, etc.). Next time you have a craving, do something from the list. If that doesn’t work, do the next thing. Eventually the craving WILL go away. Stand firm!

June 4, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Life is too short so I’m just going to eat this even though I know I shouldn’t.

Response: Actually, life is too short to be spent overweight, unhappy, and unhealthy. If I want to feel great and really live my life the way I want to, then I need to do what I can to maintain a healthy weight.

June 3, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

What we THINK will lead to a great day is eating whatever we want, in whatever quantity we want, but when we do the opposite – limit our eating and stay on track – that's truly what feels so great.

June 2, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Since there’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting, why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

May 29, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

 If you’re at a point where you can’t easily exercise and worry about that impacting your ability to lose weight, keep in mind that studies show (and we have found this to be true clinically, as well) that exercise is essential for good health and for weight management, but it’s not essential for weight loss. So, regardless of how much you can or can’t exercise, you can still absolutely lose weight.

May 28, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this extra food because it’s healthy.

Response: Even healthy food has calories and people can and do gain weight eating all healthy food. Besides, regardless of its nutrition content, if if I eat extra, unplanned food, it’s still exercising my giving-in muscle which will make it harder to resist unplanned food the next time.

May 27, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t deserve credit for my dieting tasks because I should already be doing them,” remind yourself that no you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things because you didn’t know how. If this was easy, nobody would be overweight (or gain weight back after they lost it). It’s imperative to give yourself credit and recognize your accomplishments so that you can build your confidence and sense of self-efficacy.

May 23, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to a barbeque or a party this weekend, consider adopting this guideline: Only eat it if it’s on your plate. Grabbing handfuls here and there from big bowls makes it extremely difficult to keep track of how much you’re eating. If you’re deliberate about putting everything on a plate and then (sitting down to) have it, you’ll be much more accountable and aware of everything you eat. It helps!

May 22, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I may as well just finish [this food] now because I’m going to eventually, anyway,” just trash it! You can get rid of extra food either by finishing it OR by throwing it away. You never need to eat something to make it go away.

May 21, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I'm exhausted but I'm at work so I can't sleep. I'll eat to give me energy.

Response: Even though I feel exhausted, it doesn’t mean I can’t push through and still get my work done. If I eat every time I feel tired, it’s likely I won’t be able to lose weight. Which would I rather be: Overweight AND tired, or just tired?

May 20, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Don’t expect that you’ll be able to eat like everyone else around you because then you’re likely to feel deprived. It’s important to redefine your definition of "normal" eating and remind yourself that you ARE eating in a completely normal way – for someone who is trying to lose weight and keep it off.

May 19, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You can’t undo any eating from the past, you can only control what you do eat in the future so there’s no point in berating yourself for past mistakes. Instead, focus on what you can do to make TODAY’s eating a success and you will feel so glad that you did.

May 16, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, keep in mind that you won’t regret what you don’t eat (or drink)! It can feel really hard in the moment to decide against a second glass of wine or another piece of cake, but once the situation has passed, you’ll always feel happy that you didn’t give in.

May 15, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to give in and have something unplanned, remind yourself that eating it will taste good for a few moments, and then it will be over. But resisting, and giving yourself a whole lot of credit for doing so, can feel good for SO MUCH LONGER because you get to feel in control and proud of yourself.

May 14, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll start my diet tomorrow.

Response: Waiting for tomorrow just doesn’t work! The longer I put it off, the harder it will be because I’ll only strengthen my giving-in habit. If I wait for the the “right time” to start dieting, or if I wait for “tomorrow,” to start, I may never start! Besides, today is yesterday’s tomorrow, which means I should start RIGHT NOW!

May 13, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

May 12, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One of the greatest aspects of dieting is how many good things come as a result. It's not as if dieters have to work hard and watch their eating and get nothing in return. Just the opposite is true – by doing all of these things they get THE MOST IMPORTANT things in return (health, self-confidence, control, pride, reduced physical and emotional pain, etc.)

May 9, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, losing weight does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all of the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t.

May 8, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

All-or-nothing simply doesn’t work. When dieters are all-or-nothing about being on a diet, believing they are either totally perfect on their diet, or totally off of it, it makes it much more likely that one mistake will spiral into more. When dieters are all-or-nothing about food, believing that there are some foods they should cut out entirely when they’re dieting, it makes it much more likely that once they start eating a “bad” food, they won’t be able to stop, because they’ll have the thought, “I don’t know when I’ll allow myself to eat this food again, so I better eat as much of it as I can right now.”

May 7, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Nothing I do will make a difference.

Response: That’s not true! EVERYTHING I do makes a difference. Every time I overcome a craving, make a plan and stick to it, resist the urge to eat for emotional reasons, etc., I make it easier and more likely I’ll be able to do it again the next time. I need to remember that losing weight is not one big change I make, rather it’s the sum total of all the small changes.

May 6, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Unless you’re doing something like training for a marathon and truly do have different fuel needs, it’s important to separate your exercise from your eating. People tend to overestimate the amount of calories they burn while exercising, and consequently impede themselves from losing weight because they have the sabotaging thought, “It’s okay to eat this [extra food] since I exercised today.”

May 5, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

There’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting, so why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

May 2, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to be able to lose weight (or maintain your weight), it’s critical to watch your alcohol consumption on weekends. Don’t fool yourself – alcohol has a lot of calories and can really sabotage weight loss efforts in a number of ways. Just as you would have a plan for what you would eat an event, it’s important to also have a plan for how much (if any) you’ll drink.

May 1, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

As we know, dieters can’t turn to food every time they get upset and still lose weight and keep it off. Here is list of other pleasurable activities you could try when you want to eat for emotional reasons. Remember, they may not initially be as effective as eating, but they come with no negative consequences for your weight. [P.S. Disregard the few that have to do with eating!]

April 30, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat because I just need to feel better NOW.

Response: While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to EAT to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t cause me to take in extra calories and gain weight. Besides, if I eat to feel better now, the only thing I’ll be doing is signing myself up to feel badly later – when I feel guilty about what I’ve eaten, when I’ve reinforced bad habits, and when I've gain weight. Do something else that will help me feel better now AND later.

April 29, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s too hard to resist this craving,” remind yourself that there is a difference between things that are hard and things that are impossible. Just because it feels really hard to resist eating something, doesn’t mean you can’t. You’ve likely done many other hard things in your life and have resisted many hard cravings. It’s not always easy but it ALWAYS worth it once the craving has passed.

April 28, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters, “I was so happy when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really badly when I ate way too much.” It’s important to keep in mind that no matter how much you may think you want to eat with abandon, it’s really staying on track that leaves you feeling great. It’s worth it!

April 25, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you encounter food pushers this weekend, remind yourself, “It’s NOT my responsibility to make my friends/family feel good about what they eat and drink, but it IS my responsibility to make healthy choices for me that make me feel good. When I give in to a food pusher, I don’t enjoy the food or drink that they push on me anyway because I feel really angry with myself (and them) for giving in–so it’s really not worth it, anyway.”

April 24, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “Dieting is too hard, it’s not worth it,” remind yourself that dieting is hard but the benefits of weight loss make it worth it. Telling yourself "it’s not worth it" is an excuse to give up and not try. Keep working on it! It does get easier over time.

April 23, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m so stressed, I just want to eat to relax.

Response: It’s true eating is relaxing and calming, but only in the short term! Ultimately it only makes me feel worse – if not in the moment, then the next time I get on the scale. Go do something else (drink hot tea, take a walk, listen to music, deep breathing). While these things may not be quite as effective as eating, they don’t come with ANY negative consequences.

April 22, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m going to eat this because I just don’t care,” remind yourself that while it’s true you may not care right at that moment, you are going to care A LOT a few minutes from now (or the next time you get on the scale) if you jeopardize your weight loss. Don’t let one moment of not caring influence how you act!

April 21, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, you can’t change what has happened in the past, you can only control what happens in the future. Whether or not you got off track this weekend, you can start being on track RIGHT NOW and feel good about your eating all week long.

April 18, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have holiday meals coming up this weekend and think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat normally during the holiday,” remind yourself, “Actually, I AM eating normally for someone with my weight loss goals. And while it may be unfair I can’t eat all the food I want, it would be MUCH more unfair if I couldn’t experience the countless benefits of weight loss.”

April 17, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it, I’ve really blown it now” and keep driving in the wrong direction? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track.

April 16, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The scale is down so I can afford to loosen up.

Response: No I can’t! The scale went down because of all the things I’ve been doing. The moment I stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up.

April 15, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

While it’s true that when you’re working on losing weight, there may be a lot of food you’re not having (at least, not in big quantities), there is still lots of food you ARE having. If you’re feeling deprived, ask yourself: Am I focusing too much on what I can’t have, instead of what I can?

April 14, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s helpful to make a list of all the reasons you want to lose weight and read it every single day, and also whenever your motivation lags.  Remind yourself that while losing weight is hard (some of the time), the benefits you’ll get as a result are SO WORTH IT (all of the time). It’s worth it to push past the momentary lack of motivation and not let it stand in the way of reaching your goals.

April 11, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you feel badly about asking for special requests at restaurants, remind yourself, “People make special requests all the time and I’m entitled to do so, too. If I were on a very strict medical diet I wouldn’t even think twice about making requests. Eating differently to lose weight and be healthier is just as legitimate.”

April 10, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Among everything else it’s necessary for, getting enough sleep is also critical in terms of hunger and craving regulation. It is usually so much harder for dieters to stick to their healthy eating plans when they are sleep deprived. If possible, make it a goal tonight to get to bed on time!

April 9, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Getting off track from time to time is okay because at least I get to eat my favorite foods.

Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. As long as I keep thinking that there are foods I can’t eat when I’m on track, I’ll constantly be tempted to get off track. And remember, when I eat on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

April 8, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, likely almost anything you eat at a restaurant has more calories than if you prepared the same thing at home, so when you eat out, even if you order something healthy, it’s critical to watch your portions.

April 4, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you start to get off track this weekend, remember that there is no such thing as “blowing it for the day,” or, “blowing it for the weekend.” There is such a thing, however, as making a mistake on Saturday and continuing to make mistakes on Sunday. But there is also the possibility of making a mistake on Saturday, getting right back on track, and having a GREAT rest of the weekend.

April 3, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s undeniably true that there are disadvantages to losing weight – not eating as much as you want, whenever you want, having to watch portions, not eating or drinking the same things as other people may be, but it’s important to compare those to the advantages of losing weight – better health, improved self-confidence, increased mobility, better quality of life (in so many ways), etc. Ask yourself: which is more important to me?

April 2, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too tired to exercise today.

Response: Being tired is not an acceptable excuse because exercise gives me MORE energy, not less. Don’t think about it – just get up and do it. I won’t regret exercising; I’ll only regret NOT exercising.

April 1, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight,” remind yourself that this is actually when it’s most critical to get on the scale to hold yourself accountable. It’s important need to find out if you’ve gained weight so you can figure out what mistakes you may have made and correct them. Once you face facts, you can start the process of changing them!

March 31, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is not a matter of any one big thing you do, it’s a combination of all of the small changes you make and stick with every day. This week – focus on the small changes. Eventually they add up to really big ones!

March 27, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Just because you think something doesn’t mean it’s true. The thought, "That food looks so good I really want to have some" probably is true, while the thought, "That food looks so good I can't resist" probably isn't. The thought, “My friend will be so disappointed if I turn down her cookies,” MAY be true, but just because you think she will be disappointed doesn’t prove she actually will be.

March 26, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just want to eat and eat.

Response: Overeating NEVER feels as good as thinking about it does. My sabotaging thoughts try to convince me that I’ll love it and feel really happy if I overeat, but in fact, that’s never the case. When I overeat, I end up feeling bad, guilty, and angry with myself.

March 25, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The reality is, when you’re working on healthy eating/losing weight, either way you’re going to be missing out on something. If you’re at a party and there’s lots of tempting food, either you’re going to miss out on eating everything you want OR if you do eat everything you want, you’ll miss out on all the benefits of losing weight. But, if you “miss out” on eating some food, you GET all the benefits of losing weight. Remember, it’s always a trade-off.

March 24, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieting, like any other skill, gets easier the more you practice it. If you think, "this is so hard, there is no way I can keep it up forever," remind yourself that it WON'T be this hard forever so that's not an accurate concern. Even though it's hard now, in 2 months it will be easier and in 2 years it will be MUCH easier.

March 20, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Cravings do not just get worse and worse until you can’t stand it. Cravings are like waves – they swell and then recede. Cravings always go away, even if you never put a bite of food in your mouth. If you wait it out, it will go away! And if you get distracted, it will go away even more quickly.

March 19, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It's okay to eat this extra food because I'll make up for it later.

Response: When has "making up for it later" EVER really worked? I need to learn how to be consistent with my eating so I'm not constantly tempted to eat more. Every time I eat extra, I make it harder to not eat extra the next time. Once I become more consistent, the struggle will go down and dieting will get easier.

March 18, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It tends to only be when dieters are off track and struggling that they wonder, “Is it worth it to keep putting in the effort?” When they’re on track and feeling in control, they don’t struggle with this question. If you’re asking yourself, “Is it worth it?” remind yourself that once you’re back on track and feeling great, the answer is always YES!

March 17, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieting is not all-or-nothing. It’s not as if your only two options are to eat no food you really want, or to eat every bite of food you want. There is so much middle ground between those two things and successful dieting/healthy eating is about finding a balance that works for you.

March 14, 2014 – Friday Weekedn Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It can be harder to resist food when you’re staring at it. If you’re someone who tends to hang out in the kitchen (especially on weekends when you’re home more), consider finding a new place to spend your time. Remember, "Out of sight, out of mind," can be very useful when you’re working on staying on track with your eating!

March 13, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care if no one is watching you eat or if 100 people are watching you eat – it processes all calories the same regardless! Just because you’re alone doesn’t mean you can overeat (and not gain weight).

March 12, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I need to finish my meal [at this restaurant] or it will be a waste of money.

Response: I don’t need to eat everything on my plate! The cost of eating everything (taking in too many calories, reinforcing negative habits, gaining weight) is far greater than the cost of leaving food behind. Besides, the money is already spent— eating the extra food won’t bring it back.

March 11, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Your body doesn’t know or care how you're feeling and it always processes calories in the same way, so just because you're sad/stressed/anxious doesn’t mean you're entitled to eat. If you continue to eat when feeling upset, you'll likely have a very hard time losing weight and keeping it off.

March 10, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

On-track eating days aren't perfect days! In order to lose weight and keep it off, you don't need to be perfect. No one is perfect 100% of the time. What you do need is to accept your mistakes, not beat yourself up, and get right back on track.

March 7, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, remember that when you say "no" to eating something, you're also saying "yes" to even better things: losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more.

March 6, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieting is not all-or-nothing. It's not as if your only two options are to eat absolutely no food you really want, or to eat every bite of food you want, every moment you want it. There is SO MUCH middle ground between those two things and successful dieting/healthy eating is about finding a balance that works for you.

March 5, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The scale was down so it's okay to loosen up today, I can get away with it.

Response: I may be able to get away with eating extra for a short period of time, but guaranteed it will catch up with me at some point and undo my progress. Once I accept the fact that I can't "get away with things" where dieting is concerned, it will be easier for me to just do what I need to do.

March 4, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they often truly forget how good it feels to be in control of their eating. Therefore, the thought of getting back on track usually feels much more daunting and burdensome than it really is. Once they're there, they feel so great about it.

March 3, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you were walking down a flight of stairs and stumbled down a few, would you then say "Well, I've blown it!" and throw yourself down the rest of the stairs? No! You would get back up and resume walking. If you stumbled this weekend, immediately pick yourself back up and start eating in a healthy way again.

February 28, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have highly tempting food in your home (like Girl Scout Cookies!) it’s important to make a plan for when and how much you’ll have. Otherwise, since you’ll likely be home more this weekend and have easier access to them, you may find yourself wandering into the kitchen over and over again and struggling about whether or not to have any.

February 27, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When our dieter have trouble figuring out whether or not what they’re feeling is hunger or something else (a craving, wanting to eat for emotional reasons, etc.) we ask them to take the “tofu test”: if they would eat plain tofu in that moment , then they’re probably hungry. If they’re craving something else, then it’s likely not true hunger underlining the desire to eat.

February 26, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy/rushed/stressed to exercise this week, I’ll start next week.

Response: When has “starting next week” EVER helped me to reach my goals? I need to start doing these things this minute or I never will. Besides, exercise will actually help me calm down and make me less stressed, not more. And being busy is NO excuse because I won’t be able to do all those other things if I’m not healthy.

February 25, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve had a really hard day, I deserve to eat,” remind yourself that you DO deserve to feel better but you DON’T deserve to feel badly about yourself and be overweight, so you can’t use food as a means to comfort yourself.

February 24, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You wouldn’t expect to be able to run a marathon if you’ve never run a mile. Dieting is the same – don’t set yourself up for failure by trying to take too many big steps all at once. Remember, small steps eventually add up to really big ones.  “Like” our status today if you’re committed to taking the first steps this week!

February 21, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you're going to a party or event this weekend and think, "There'll be so much good food there I won't be able to resist,” remind yourself, "If I was a vegetarian and all the food had meat in it, I definitely WOULD resist, no question. I may not want to resist, but I know I can."

February 20, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Important reminder: there is, unfortunately, not a direct correlation between what you ate and what you see on the scale the next day. Even if you are “perfect” on your diet, it’s not a guarantee that the scale will go down every day, or even every week. However, at any point the scale is EXACTLY where it should be, given your eating, your biological and hormonal processes, your salt intake, etc. Keep doing what you’re doing – it will go down again!

February 19, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t feel like having to work on my dieting skills.

Response: That’s okay! I do lots of things every day that I don’t feel like doing but I do them anyway. It’s worth it to me to do them, whether or not I feel like it, because it will help me achieve my goals. Besides, I even MORE don’t feel like staying overweight.

February 18, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy,” remind yourself that people can gain weight eating all healthy food, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories, and if you take in too many calories, you won’t lose weight.

February 17, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter what you did or didn’t eat over the weekend, today is the start of a new week and a fresh chance to have a great eating week!

February 14, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s not fair that I can’t eat as much chocolate as I want on Valentine’s Day,” remind yourself that it’s a two-way street! If you give up eating some chocolate (but not all chocolate), you get all the benefits of weight loss/weight maintenance. It’s not as if you get nothing in return for staying on track!

February 12, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s not fair I can’t eat normally like everyone else.

Response: I have to redefine my definition of “normal” eating. In fact, I am eating 100% normally for someone of my age and my gender with my weight loss goals.

February 11, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have the thought [about practicing a diet skill], “Is this really going to make a difference?” remind yourself that the answer is YES, it does make a difference because every time has consequences for the next time and the time after that. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then it DOES make a difference. You don’t even need to engage with that thought because it will only undermine your efforts. Remind yourself that it does make a difference and then move on.

February 10, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Monday Motivation: We asked one maintainer about her motivation to keep weight down and she said, “Every time I want to quit I remind myself that there is nothing to quit. This is my life. This is what I’m doing. It’s 100% worth it so I don’t even entertain thoughts of not doing it. There’s nothing to quit!”

February 7, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight, staying on track during the weekend is just as important as being on track during the week. There is not a huge difference calorie-wise between losing weight and maintaining your weight, and it’s very easy to cross that line on the weekends. This weekend – don’t cross that line! Stay on track and keep your momentum going.

February 6, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, just because losing weight is hard, it doesn’t mean you can’t do it! Telling yourself, “It’s too hard,” or, “It’s impossible to lose weight,” gives you an excuse to not try. It IS hard, but it also IS doable – it just takes work and practice.

February 5, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat unhealthy foods because I’m sick.

Response: My body processes all calories the same, whether or not I’m feeling sick, so just because I’m sick doesn’t mean I can overeat. Besides, if I’m sick, what my body needs is healthy, nutritious food that it can use.

February 4, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

One of our clients had the experience recently of giving in and eating too many muffins that were in her work kitchen. The next day, she resisted the muffins and didn’t have any. She said, “It felt so great to resist, I’m really happy I did.” What does this show us? That sometimes NOT eating something can actually feel so much better than eating it, especially if we eat it in a way that feels out of control.

February 3, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes when dieters have been off track, they actually forget how great it feels to be in control of their eating. If this has happened to you, take a few moments to think of the multitude of positive experiences and feelings you’ve have had as a result of maintaining control. Then get back on track immediately so that you can start feeling that way again.

January 31, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Just as you’ll likely never leave an event and think, “I wish I had eaten more dessert,” you’ll probably also never leave a party and think, “I wish I had had more to drink.” In fact, just the opposite is true: Once the situation has passed, you’ll feel so great what you didn’t eat and drink, not regretful.

January 30, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters are feeling somewhat off track, they tend to overgeneralize and think that they’re not doing well on all of their dieting skills, when in fact, that’s often not the case. If you feel like you’re having a bad week, ask yourself: Is that an accurate picture of what’s going on? Are there some things that I’m still doing well? Remember that one or two mistakes in no way negates everything I’m doing well and it’s important to give myself credit for all of them.

January 29, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It really stinks that I can’t eat [this food] I’m craving right now.

Response: I need to reframe my thinking about not giving in to cravings. Instead of thinking, ‘This stinks I can’t eat it,’ I need to tell myself, ‘Good for me for resisting this craving. This is really important and it’s going to help me reach my goals. I deserve a lot of credit for this. I’m making my resistance muscle stronger.’

January 28, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You’ll have a much harder time losing weight if you undermine your commitment by thinking things like, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” or “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things.” If you find yourself saying these things, remind yourself, “Yes, I DO want to lose weight and this IS what I have to do. So don’t think about it and just do it.”

January 27, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, most thin people do NOT eat whatever they want, whenever they want. When dieting feels unfair, remind yourself that likely most people around you are also restricting their eating to some degree. If you’re working on dieting, you’re in very good company.

January 23, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m so stressed out I need to eat,” remind yourself that you may WANT to eat, but you don’t NEED to eat. If you were feeling that way and there was no food available, you’d get through it without eating.

January 22, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: When I'm dieting, there are foods that I should eat and other foods that I definitely should not eat.

Response: It’s important to incorporate my favorite foods into my diet (even if it means I lose weight more slowly) or I’ll wind up being too restrictive, and then rebelling, giving up, and gaining weight back. Being overly restrictive never works out long term.

January 21, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t have time for diet and exercise,” remind yourself that you DO make time for the things in life that are most important to you. If the advantages of losing weight and being healthy are of great importance to you, then make dieting and exercise top priorities and you will find the time NO MATTER WHAT.

January 20, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, learning to diet is like learning to play the piano. You start out with easier skills/pieces, practice them, get better and better at them, and then move on to harder ones. If you were learning to play the piano, you would never think that hitting a wrong note was an indication that you couldn't do it or that you should give up, you would simply accept it as part of the learning process. Dieting is no different!

January 17, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It is so much easier to stay in control when you maintain some type of eating schedule, even during the weekend, so that you don’t wind up just grazing all day. This weekend, don’t let unstructured time become unstructured eating.

January 16, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again – being overweight is HARD!! Physically, mentally, financially, it takes a big toll. Working on healthy eating and losing weight can be hard, too, but at least it comes with amazing outcomes. If you think, “it’s too hard to work on healthy eating,” remind yourself that either way it’s hard.

January 15, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll never get good enough at my dieting skills so I might as well give up.

Response: I’m better at them now than I was two months ago, and two months from now I’ll be better than I am today. As long as I keep working, I will keep getting better!

January 14, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t have time for diet and exercise,” remind yourself that you DO make time for the things in life that are most important to you. If the advantages of losing weight and being healthy are of great importance to you, then make dieting and exercise top priorities and you will find the time NO MATTER WHAT.

January 13, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This week, instead of thinking about what you can’t have when you’re working on eating healthfully, focus on what you can – delicious and healthy food, a reasonable amount of treats, good health, better self-confidence, a stable wardrobe, a more peaceful relationship with food, great feelings, etc.

January 10, 2014 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if it seems unfair that you can’t eat something, remind yourself, “It’s true that it’s not fair. But I need to ask myself: which unfairness would I rather have – not being able to eat this or not losing weight?” Then work on accepting it and move on.

January 9, 2014 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to both give yourself credit for the good choices you make and not berate yourself when you make a mistake. When you beat yourself up, the only thing it does is demoralize you further and makes it harder to get back on track. When you give yourself credit, it makes you feel great, helps raise your confidence, makes it easier to keep doing what you're doing, and gives you motivation to stay on track.

January 8, 2014 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I had such a hard day, I deserve to reward myself with food.

Response: If I reward myself with food and overeat, I’ll end up feeling terrible – physically and mentally, which will be the exact opposite of a reward. If I stay on track and control my eating, I will feel great. Food rewards just don’t work once the food is gone!

January 7, 2014 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m going to eat this. It’s okay, it doesn't matter,” remind yourself that that’s not true for two reasons. First, it matters because it impacts your weight loss and your weight loss goals matter! Second, it matters because EVERY time matters. Every time has consequences for the next time, and the time after that.

January 6, 2014 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

We’re back and feeling motivated! A new year is the perfect time for a new start. Remember – big changes don’t happen overnight. It’s a combination of lots of small changes that eventually lead up to big ones. This week – focus on SMALL changes. They will make a difference.

December 26, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Do you have a plan for your Christmas leftovers? Remember – having highly tempting food around with no clear idea of when you’re going to eat it is a recipe for overeating. Decide (in advance) where and when you’ll have them. Doing so will enable you to enjoy the leftovers even more because you’ll feel on track and in control when you eat them.

December 24, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

 If you think, “I wasn't losing weight lately anyway, so why bother during Christmas?” remind yourself that if you stop working on healthy eating during this time, you’re likely to gain weight. Even if you aren’t losing weight, maintaining your weight is so much better than gaining weight! Besides, if you stop working on healthy eating you’ll get off track, and how does being off track feel? For most people it feels TERRIBLE because they feel badly and guilty. Don’t taint your holiday season with guilt!

December 23, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

While staying in control of your eating is harder during the holidays, the good news is that when you manage to do so, it feels extra great! The harder it is to stay on track, the more positive feelings you get as a result of doing so. Remind yourself that staying on track during a normal day feels good, but staying on track during a holiday feels AMAZING!

December 20, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re going to events this weekend with food pushers, remind yourself that either way you’ll feel discomfort. Either you’ll experience the momentary discomfort of saying no to a food pusher, or you’ll feel uncomfortable for so much longer if you give in, take in too many calories, feel guilty and badly about your eating, reinforce negative habits, etc.

December 19, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If are given gifts of holiday food and feel guilty about not eating it, remember that whether or not you actually eat the gift in no way takes away from the nice gesture of receiving it and the meaning behind it.

December 18, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe how much I overate at the holiday parties this weekend. That was so bad.

Response: I have to keep in mind that I can’t change what I ate in the past, only what I eat today and in the future. So instead of ruminating on past mistakes, I need to focus on making today a great day!

December 17, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters say, “I just can’t stick to a diet, I have no discipline,” we remind them that they actually DO have a lot of discipline because they are able to get up with their kids, get to work on time, pay bills, etc. While they may lack consistent dieting discipline, they are clearly capable of great feats of discipline in other areas, so this is not a valid reason to not try.

December 16, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Getting of track with dieting can be very discouraging, but it doesn't need to be. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you'll continue improving.

December 13, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You will likely have lots of opportunities to strengthen your resistance muscle (and simultaneously weaken your giving-in muscle) this weekend.  If you think, “It’s okay to give in because just this one time won’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because every time you’re strengthening one of those two muscles.

December 12, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m going to eat this because I just don’t care,” remind yourself that while it’s true you don’t  care in this moment, it’s not true that you won’t care later on when you feel guilty about your eating, reinforce old habits, and take in too many calories. Don’t let one moment of not caring dictate your actions!

December 11, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care how much I’m NOT eating, it only knows how much I do eat, so just because I turned down holiday treats 4 times doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to give in the 5th time. If I take in more calories than I had planned, I’ll gain weight.

December 10, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight during the holiday season, or even maintain your weight, the simple fact is that you won’t be able to eat all the holiday treats that you want.  Work on eating what treats you do eat slowly and mindfully and keep in mind that one cookie eaten slowly and while enjoying every bite can be more enjoyable than four cookies eaten very quickly without paying much attention to them.

December 9, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Working to stay in control of your eating can be difficult and can sometimes feel not worth it, but ultimately the rewards of losing weight are SO MUCH more important and ALWAYS worth it, no matter how hard dieting may feel at any given moment.

December 6, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend, I just want to relax and not think about healthy eating,” remind yourself that if you get off track and overeat, you’ll think A LOT about it Monday morning when you’re struggling to get back on track and feeling guilty about the weekend. So think about it now, or think about it later, either way you’re going to think about it.

December 5, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Whenever a dieter says something like, “I was so good yesterday, I didn’t have any dessert,” we always remind them that having dessert is an important part of lifetime eating. Cutting out all sweets (or other categories of food that you like) NEVER works out long term because you’ll always end up eating them again and when you do, if you don’t know how to control your portions, you’ll gain weight. "No dessert" is an all-or-nothing diet mentality that (for most people) just doesn't work.

December 4, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I've been working on these dieting skills for a while now and they still don’t really feel like habits. Maybe I should give up.

Response: I’m better at these skills than I was 2 months ago, and in 2 more months I’ll be even better than I am right now. There’s no reason to give because, even though it may seem slow, I AM moving forward and making progress!

December 3, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The time and energy for dieting and exercise will never magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that dieters may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when they will make the time and energy for these things. But remember – it’s 100% it’s worth it!

December 2, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter how much or how little control you were able to exert over the holiday weekend, today is a new day. Make today a good day and you will be SO GLAD you did. Being in control of your eating feels great!

November 27, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I won’t be able to enjoy myself on Thanksgiving if I have to limit myself at all.

Response: It’s not all-or-nothing! There’s a HUGE middle ground between eating everything I want and nothing I want. Besides, if I way overeat and get off track, I’ll wind up tainting the holiday, anyway. No matter what day of the year it is, staying on track feels great!

November 26, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just want to eat spontaneously,” remind yourself that if you make spontaneous decisions and get off track with your eating (and in-the-moment decisions are the hardest ones to make!), the only thing it will do is make you feel badly. Because of this, eating spontaneously will not make you feel good, even if you think it will.

November 25, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Have you been thinking ahead and decided that losing weight/getting healthy will be one of your New Year’s Resolutions? If so, don’t wait! The sooner you begin working on it the sooner you will achieve it, so start taking small steps TODAY towards that goal and all the small steps will begin to add up to big ones. If you do, you could be in a different, better place come January 1.

November 22, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you eat at restaurants and feel bad about asking for special requests, remind yourself, “People make special requests all the time and I’m entitled to do so, too. If I were on a very strict medical diet I wouldn't even think twice about making requests. Eating differently to lose weight and be healthier is just as legitimate.”

November 21, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you felt sick, took your temperature, and saw you had a fever, you would never think, “I can’t believe I let my temperature get this high! I’m such a weak person.” The number on the scale is the same – it’s just INFORMATION about whether or not what you’re doing is working. It says nothing about who you are as a person.

November 20, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to a party tonight but I don’t feel like making a plan. I’ll just do my best.

Response: Making a plan doesn’t take long at all. It’s not a big to make a plan, but it IS a big deal to not make one. Not having a plan exponentially increases the risk of eating too much, getting off track, and then having to struggle to get back in control.

November 19, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

EVERY SINGLE dieting mistake can be turned into a valuable learning opportunity if you take the time to figure out why it happened and what specifically you can do in the future to change the outcome of a similar situation.

November 18, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

The most successful dieters are maintainers are not those who never make mistakes – they are those who make mistakes and get immediately back on track. This week, if you make a mistake, do the opposite of what you've likely been doing: DON'T beat yourself up and DO immediately resume normal eating for the day. Remember, EVERYONE makes mistakes, but not everyone uses those mistakes as an excuse to keep making more.

November 15, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, come Monday morning, you’ll look back at your weekend and feel PROUD of the times you stayed in control, not regretful. You likely won’t think, “I should have had an extra slice of chocolate cake,” or, “I should have had a second glass of wine.” It just doesn’t happen!

November 14, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m so tired, I have to eat,” remind yourself that while eating may be a (very) temporary fix, ultimately sleep is what your body needs, not food, so eating won’t help. Ask yourself: Do I want to be tired and overweight, or just tired?

November 13, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because if I don’t, I’ll disappoint my friend.

Response: If I eat off plan, I’ll disappoint MYSELF. Besides, my friend's disappointment will likely be momentary but the disappointment I’ll feel when I go off plan, shake my confidence, and possibly gain weight will last for so much longer.

November 12, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Most people of normal weight do NOT eat whatever they want, whenever they want. When dieting feels unfair, remind yourself that likely most people around you are also restricting their eating to some degree, too. If you’re working on dieting, you’re in very good company.

November 11, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been on a diet for 20 years. I’m just not the type of person who can lose weight,” remind yourself, “This time is different and I’m different now because I’m learning critical skills I didn’t know before. I CAN lose weight, and I will keep losing weight and keep it off because I will continue to use my skills.”

November 8, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember – if you eat at someone’s house this weekend, you may not have control over what food is served to you but you ALWAYS have control over what you put in your mouth. Paying attention to portion size is key in situations where you’re not in charge of the food.

November 7, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “When I’m upset I have to eat,” remind yourself that if you became upset in a situation where no food was available, you would survive. You may really WANT to eat when you’re upset, but you never need to.

November 6, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I wish I was losing weight more quickly.

Response: When has losing weight quickly EVER helped me to keep it off? The faster I’ve lost it in the past, the faster I’ve gained it back. Besides, what does it matter if it takes an extra month or two to lose the weight in the course of the rest of my life?

November 5, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is ALWAYS another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food!

November 1, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you have leftover Halloween candy hanging around your house but want to stay on track this weekend, you have two options – get rid of it, or plan when you’re going to have it. Having highly tempting food around with no plan of when you’re going to have it leads to giving in and overindulging. You can prevent this from happening!

October 31, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Happy Halloween! Remember – candy is available 365 days a year, not just on Halloween, so you don’t need to get your “fill” today. There will ALWAYS be more.

October 30, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s too hard to resist all the Halloween candy everywhere.

Response: While it’s hard, it’s not impossible. In order to make it easier, I need a plan of when I’m going to eat Halloween candy and how much. That way, when I come in contact with it at a time it’s not on my plan, I can remind myself, ‘You don’t need to have this now, you get to have it later – and I’ll enjoy it more if I wait because I won’t feel guilty about eating it.’

October 29, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight initially takes a LOT of time and energy. If you want it to happen, it means you have to put it FIRST. Remember – you deserve to put yourself first.

October 28, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Make a commitment this week to focus on the things you're doing well, NOT the mistakes you may make. Doing so will help you feel better and more motivated on a daily basis – which will make it easier to keep moving forward.

October 25, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend and have trouble leaving food on your plate, remember: if you eat extra food you don’t need, it will be wasted in your body by turning to fat. In the trashcan or in your body, either way it’s wasted.

October 24, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

There is a difference between what your mind finds significant and what your body finds significant. Although your mind may find it significant that everyone around you is eating something (so it’s feels okay to eat extra, too), or that it’s a special occasion, or that you’re feeling upset, your body doesn't know or care and processes all calories the same.

October 23, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because I’m having a bad day.

Response: It’s not okay to eat extra because although my mind knows I’m having a bad day, my body doesn't. Besides, if I overeat, I’ll feel badly and guilty, which will make me even more unhappy. If I stay on track with my eating it’s highly likely my day will start to feel better, not worse.

October 22, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you find yourself trying to rationalize eating something, “It’s okay because I’ll just have a little; I won’t eat anything later; I had a small lunch, etc.” consider using that as a cue to NOT eat. Remind yourself, “Once the situation has passed, I won’t be sorry I didn't eat it.”

October 21, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

You can't change anything you ate in the past, only what you eat today and into the future. So instead of dwelling on past mistakes, work on making today a great eating day!

October 18, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, staying on track during the weekend is just as important as week days. If you want to lose weight and keep it off, it means your eating can't be all that different on the weekend.

October 17, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you feel stressed and want to eat, remind yourself that eating will ultimately only make you feel MORE stressed, not less. While eating may temporarily distract you from the stress, once the food is gone you'll be left with the original stress plus the stress of having overeaten. Next time you feel stressed, make a commitment to trying something else!

October 16, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It's okay to give in just this one time.

Response: EVERY time matters because every time I give in, I reinforce the habit of giving in and make it easier and more likely I'll give in the next time.

October 15, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you've made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

October 14, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, the more you practice dieting skills the easier they get. So however hard or easy dieting feels today is NOT how hard it will feel in the future when you have more practice and experience under your belt.

October 11, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Dieters are over prone to grazing a lot on the weekend. It’s helpful to remember that you're always better off if you sit down with a defined snack and eat it mindfully. Doing so is ultimately so much more satisfying (physically and psychologically) then grabbing little things here and there – and it also means you'll probably take in fewer calories.

October 10, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If someone tries to push food on you, there are many things you can say in response: No thanks you; I don’t want any; I’ll have some later; I already had some; I’m full right now; I’m not in the mood for it; etc. Standing firm and saying no will help you reach your weight loss goals. Giving in will not!

October 9, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t lose weight because I just like eating and I don’t want to give that up.

Response: The good news is that I’ll NEVER give up eating! If I want to lose weight, I will have to stop overeating, but that’s entirely different. Besides, overeating ultimately makes me feel terrible (physically and psychologically), so it’s not so bad to give it up anyway.

October 8, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When you get off track, you never need to wait even ONE MOMENT LONGER to get back on track. Getting back on track in the middle of a party is better than waiting for the party to be over; getting back on track after the party is better than at the end of the day; getting back on track at the end of the day is better than continuing to be off track the next day. ANY point you get back on track puts you in a better position than if you wait even a moment longer.

October 7, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Unfortunately, even if you’re 100% “perfect” on your diet, it’s not a guarantee that the scale will go down on any given day or week (but, if you overeat, it’s a guarantee that the scale will eventually go up). While you can’t rely on the scale going down as a reliable reward for your hard work, what you can rely on is the great feeling you get from being in control! Being on track feels SO MUCH BETTER than being off track.

October 4, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you come in contact with free food this weekend and think, “It’s okay to have some because it’s free,” remind yourself that just because it’s free in terms of cost doesn’t mean it’s free in terms of calories! Your body doesn’t know or care how much money you spent on something, it processes all calories the same.

October 3, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

There’s a difference between physical satisfaction and psychological satisfaction.  If you’ve eaten a reasonable portion of food and you want more, remind yourself that while you may be experiencing a lack of psychological satisfaction, physically you’ve had enough so it’s time to stop eating.

October 2, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I worked out really hard today so it’s okay to eat extra dessert.

Response: While it may be true that I can eat a little extra because of my hard work out (although it’s not a guarantee), my body needs healthy food it can use, not extra junk food.

October 1, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, ANY exercise is better than no exercise. We help our clients conceptualize exercise as “me time” – time that they spend doing something just for them. In that way, it’s helpful for good health and also for good self-care.

September 30, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Getting of track with dieting can be very discouraging, but it doesn't need to be. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you would never take that as a sign to give up completely. Mistakes happen in ALL areas of life but keep practicing and you'll continue improving.

September 27, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I won’t be able to enjoy myself this weekend unless I can eat whatever I want,” remind yourself that it’s not all-or-nothing! There’s a huge middle ground between eating everything you want and eating nothing you want. This weekend, work on finding the middle ground.

September 26, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Many time a day people put food in their mouths almost without realizing, and often it’s when they’re standing up: cooking, chopping, and serving food, putting away food, grazing in the kitchen, and eating samples at the supermarket. Working on eating everything sitting down can help build awareness of every time that you eat and cut down on this type of extraneous eating.

September 25, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra at dinner tonight because I’ve had a hard day and I deserve it.

Response: I do deserve to calm down after a hard day (although eating isn’t the only way to achieve this). And I do deserve to eat dinner. What I don't deserve is to OVEREAT at dinner and then face the consequences (physical, psychological, and not reaching my weight loss goals).

September 24, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I really need something sweet right now,” remind yourself that at any given moment, it’s NEVER a question of need. Telling yourself, “This is what I need,” can make it seem more legitimate to eat something – even though it may not be. Remind yourself, “I really want something sweet right now, but that doesn’t mean I have to have it.”

September 23, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Monday Motivation: We asked one dieter how she stays motivated in spite of her busy life. She told us, “My life is so hectic and there are so many parts of it I can’t control. Taking control of my eating helps me feel calmer and more grounded on a daily basis – which helps me deal with the chaos more effectively. It’s so worth it!”

September 20, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is not only a matter of sticking to healthy eating during the week, it’s also important to stay on track during the weekend. If not, you’ll continually undo all your hard work which will stop you from losing weight – and cause major frustrations. If you’re not losing weight, ask yourself, “Am I being too loose on the weekends?”

September 19, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s helpful to view your eating day as a whole, and not just as individual meals. That way, if you don’t have bread at one meal, you’re less likely to feel deprived because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “Yes, I’m not having bread at lunch now, but that’s because I had toast for breakfast and I’m having a roll with dinner.”

September 18, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because I’ve been running around all day.

Response: If it were true that it was okay to eat extra every time I’d been running around (and tired myself out) then I wouldn’t have gained weight. Most of the time when I think, “It’s okay to eat extra because…” it’s probably actually NOT okay, not if I want to lose weight.

September 17, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

In dieting, everyone goes through hard times.  Sometimes we can pinpoint the reason (e.g. something stressful happening in our work or family life) and sometimes we can’t. But regardless, it’s important to remember that hard times are normal, they happen to everyone, and as long as you keep pushing through, they ALWAYS pass. Don’t give up – there’s no reason to!

September 16, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This week, instead of focusing on any mistake you may make, take the time to really notice and give yourself credit for all the great things you’re doing. Guaranteed doing so will help you have a more accurate perception of how you’re really doing and help you feel better and more motivated to keep doing what you’re doing.

September 13, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you eat out and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit.  If you then get home and think, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” remind yourself that doing so will undo all your hard work and cause you to feel guilty and badly – which is the exact OPPOSITE of a treat.

September 12, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been doing really well and the scale is down. I can afford to loosen up,” it’s critical to remind yourself that that is NOT TRUE! The scale is down because of everything you’ve been doing, and the moment you stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up.

September 11, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat more because I don’t know when I’ll have [this food] again.

Response: I need to get away from this ‘last meal mentality.’ It’s NEVER my last time to eat a certain food and there will always be opportunities to have it again.

September 10, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes we ask dieters, “If every time in the past you made a dieting mistake but got immediately back on track, where do you think your weight would be?” The answer is: probably a lot less. Mistakes are never a problem. What IS a problem is when dieters make one mistake and use it as an excuse to keep making more.

September 9, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, it’s a give and take. In giving up some food, some of the time, you’re getting all the benefits of losing weight. It’s not as if you’re limiting your food for nothing or to punish yourself – it’s just the opposite. It’s important to continually remind yourself of everything you get in return!

September 5, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When you weigh yourself, only get on the scale ONCE! Getting on more frequently means you're probably putting too much emphasis on the number and not enough on practicing healthy habits throughout the day.

September 4, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.

Response: It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to go find something healthy and satisfying that will make me feel good now AND later.

September 3, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s never too late to put healthy habits in place, but the start of a new school year is a particularly good time. Think about some healthy changes you may be able to make this year for yourself and your family. Remember, your weight won’t change unless you do.

August 30, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This holiday weekend, go into whatever events you have with a PLAN! Spontaneous decisions are invariably what get dieters into trouble, so take away the need to use spur-of-the-moment willpower by making decisions in advance. Once the events are over, you’ll never regret that you did.

August 29, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

We have found that many of our dieters find themselves in front of the refrigerator at night, wanting to just eat anything, mostly because they’re TIRED. Instead of eating at night to help you stay awake, just go to bed! Sleep is what your body needs, not food.

August 28, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat 3 pieces of pizza because everyone else is.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care what anyone else around me is eating. It doesn’t know if everyone is eating 10 pieces of pizza or 0 pieces. It only knows what I eat, so just because everyone else is eating that much doesn’t necessarily mean that I can. Just because it feels okay doesn’t mean it is.

August 27, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly.

August 26, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting RIGHT NOW, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

August 23, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s so much easier to make good food choices when you have healthy options readily available, and so much harder when unhealthy options are more accessible. This weekend, consider doing whatever prep work is necessary to set yourself up for a great week ahead.

August 22, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Most dieters get to the point where they leave events and feel good about what they didn’t eat, not deprived. Because of this, it’s important to remind yourself that you don’t have to worry about feeling deprived in the future because it’s very likely that you won’t.

August 21, 2013 – Wednesdsay Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: If I can’t exercise for at least half an hour, it’s not worth doing anything.

Response: ANY exercise is better than no exercise! Five minutes is better than zero minutes. It’s important for me to prove to myself that I can stay in the exercise habit even when I have limited time.

August 20, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Old habits are hard to break and easy to slip back into. This is why in dieting every single time DOES matter because every single time you’re either reinforcing the old, adverse habit or the new, helpful habit. Don’t be fooled – this time matters!

August 19, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember – no matter how hard or easy dieting feels today is NOT how hard it will feel tomorrow and in the future. The more you practice your skills and the more habitual they get, the easier and easier it becomes to keep doing them.

August 16, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to have a slice and a half of pie – they’re kind of small slices so an extra half is still probably one portion,” remind yourself that while you may be able to fool your mind into thinking it’s not extra, you’re never able to fool your body.

August 15, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a dieting mistake and start to catastrophize, ask yourself, “What would I say to my best friend if she told me about a mistake she made?” Chances are you’d be more compassionate to a friend than you would be to yourself. In dieting, you’ll make many, many mistakes. It’s important to be compassionate to yourself so that you're able to learn from them and move on.

August 14, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s not fair I can’t eat whatever I want (and other people can).

Response: Either way it’s unfair. Either I face unfairness by limiting my eating, or I face all the unfairnesses and hardships that come with being overweight. Besides, it’s a common misconception that other people can eat whatever they want and it’s HIGHLY likely that they’re limiting themselves, too.

August 13, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Skipping meals backfires! Often when dieters skip a meal, they then think, “Since I didn’t eat lunch I can afford to eat extra now,” and then wind up taking in many more calories than they would have if they had just eaten a reasonable lunch and dinner.

August 12, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been on a diet for 20 years. I’m just not the type of person who can lose weight,” remind yourself, “I’m different now because I’m learning critical skills I didn’t know before. I CAN lose weight, and I will keep losing weight AND keep it off because I will continue to use my skills.”

August 2, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “When I eat out this weekend, I won’t have any control over my food. How will I stay in control?” Remind yourself that while you may not always have control over what food is served to you, you ALWAYS have control over what you put in your mouth!

August 1, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just ate dinner an hour ago but now I’m hungry for something else,” remind yourself that if you ate a satisfying dinner, it’s not hunger you’re feeling. You may WANT to eat in that moment, but that doesn’t mean your body needs any more food.

July 31, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I just ate that! I’ve really blown it for the day. I might as well keep eating and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: If I were driving on the highway and missed my exit, would I think, “I’ve really blown it now!” and drive 5 more hours in the wrong direction? No! I’d get off at the next exit and immediately turn around. That’s exactly what I need to do now, too.

July 30, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you buy bags of chips and each time tell yourself, “I’ll limit it to one portion this time,” but then never do – stop fooling yourself! Evidence shows that right now you can’t handle big bags of chips so, at least temporarily, stop buying them. Work on getting used to the the portion in individual-sized bags and then work your way back up.

July 29, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Initially dieters often feel a sense of unfairness about what they’re not eating. However, along the way as they learn new skills and start to feel in control of their eating, they start to feel proud of what they don’t eat – not deprived. If you feel deprived, keep in mind that it’s HIGHLY likely this won’t always be the case. Stick with it!

July 26, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

ANY exercise is better than no exercise. Often making the decision to do it and getting started are actually the hardest parts. This weekend, don’t think about whether or not you feel like exercising, just do it anyway. Guaranteed you won’t regret it.

July 25, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re out to eat and want to eat something you hadn’t planned to, remind yourself, “I’ve had [this food] before. I know what it tastes like. I’ll have it again so I don’t need to eat it every time the opportunity arises.”

July 24, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this food I hadn’t planned, it’s just a little bit.

Response: It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit! Whether the unplanned food has 20 calories or 2,000 calories, it’s still reinforcing my giving-in habit.

July 23, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is a combination of every small food decision you make in a day. If you think, “This one time doesn’t matter,” remind yourself that it ALL matters because it all is part of the bigger picture. One bad decision leads to another, while one positive decision leads to another.

July 22, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

When clients tell us, “It’s so hard to lose weight because I just like eating. I don’t want to give that up,” we remind them that there’s a huge difference between eating and overeating. They will NEVER give up eating – but in ending overeating, they get to enjoy food and lose weight.

July 19, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Just because your time over the weekend may be unstructured, doesn’t mean your eating has to be. Keeping up a consistent eating schedule, even on the weekends, can help guard against all-day grazing and lack of real meals (which often leads to feelings of dissatisfaction despite taking in a lot of calories).

July 18, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m really stressed out, I need to eat,” remind yourself that WANT and NEED are two different things. If you were stressed and in a situation where no food was available, you’d get through it. This proves that you may want to eat when stressed, but you don’t ever need to.

July 17, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy.

Response: I can gain weight eating all healthy foods, too. Just because it’s healthy doesn’t mean it doesn’t have calories. Eating healthy foods is a great thing to strive for, but I have to make sure that whatever I eat (healthy or not) fits in with my overall day.

July 16, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Eating healthy is hard some of the time, but being overweight is hard ALL of the time and in so many more ways. If you think, “I’m just going to take the easy way out and eat whatever I want,” remind yourself that that is actually the much, much harder way.

July 15, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s never a situation in and of itself that you gets you off track, it’s always your thinking about that situation. This means that there is NO SINGLE food situation you can’t handle as long as you figure out what your sabotaging thoughts might be and come up with good responses to them!

July 12, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember – you deserve to relax on weekends and you also deserve to lose weight and keep it off (and all the major advantages that come with that). This weekend, work on finding ways to relax that don’t have to do with food. There are many!

July 5, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a mistake this weekend and think, “How could I have eaten that? I can’t do this, I should just give up,” remind yourself that one mistake in no way ruins your diet, but falling back into old patterns definitely will. Then recommit yourself and get right back on track.

June 28, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If go somewhere this weekend that has free food, remember: it’s free in terms of money but it’s NOT free in terms of calories. Your body doesn’t know or care if you spent $100 on a food item or $0, it processes all calories the same.

June 27, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re hungry and debating between two options – one healthy and one not healthy – remind yourself that either way at the end of the meal you’ll be full. If you eat the healthy meal, you’ll likely end up feeling good about yourself and your eating, and if you eat something unhealthy, you’ll likely end up feeling somewhat guilty (and possibly sick).

June 26, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: This food tastes really good. Even though I’ve had enough, it’s okay to eat more.

Response: It’s not okay because eating more will mean strengthening my giving-in muscle AND taking in extra calories. Besides, at the end of the day my mouth won’t remember if I had 10 more bites, but my body definitely will.

June 25, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re in a bad mood and think, “I don’t care, I’m just going to eat,” remind yourself that overeating will only ultimately cause you to feel even worse because you’ll compound the situation by adding feeling guilty and badly about your eating. Ask yourself, “Do I want one cause of my bad mood, or two?”

June 24, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

It’s never a situation in and of itself that causes you to overeat, it’s always your (sabotaging) thinking about that situation. This means that if you have life stressors that you’re overeating in response to, your eating can get completely back on track even if your stressors aren’t resolved once you figure out what your sabotaging thinking is and start responding to it.

June 21, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 14, 2017/beckadmin

Remember – you DO deserve to relax on weekends but you DON’T deserve to be overweight and feel badly about yourself, so you have to find other ways to relax that don’t have to do with food.

July 13, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

July 13, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters have thoughts like, “I’ve exercised enough; it’s okay to eat extra.” It’s so critical to separate exercise from eating for so many reasons, including:

1. Losing weight is so much more about what you eat and don’t eat, and so much less about what you do in the gym. Many people vastly overestimate the number of calories they burn while exercising and then eat too much to lose weight.

2. When eating and exercise are linked, then eating becomes the “reward” for exercising, and, even worse, exercise can become the “punishment” for eating. Exercise is something you do for your health and your mental health, not as a punishment for eating. When exercise is punishment, it becomes hugely unenjoyable and turns a really great thing into a really terrible thing.

July 12, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 12, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t/don’t want to work on healthy eating while on vacation this summer.

Response: When I let my eating get out of control on vacation, it makes the vacation worse, not better, because I end up feeling guilty and bad. Staying in control makes the whole trip better because I feel so much better. And, doing so means I won’t have to worry about getting back on track or facing the scale once I get home.

July 11, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 11, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I should lose a lot of weight really quickly,” remind yourself that if you’re losing too quickly it may mean that your diet isn’t healthy enough (and you’re being too restrictive either in the number of calories you eat or in the types of food you eat). Being too restrictive works for short-term weight loss but almost NEVER works for long term weight maintenance.

July 10, 2017 – Monday Motivation

July 10, 2017/beckadmin

One of our dieters is going through a really hard time in her life. She said that in the past she would have thought, “I’ll just worry about my eating when things calm down.” 

Instead of giving in to this thought, she’s been working really hard at staying in control of her eating because she knows that feeling out of control of her eating will make her feel more out of control in general. She said to us, “Even though it’s difficult, it’s so important that I’m putting in the effort to stay on track so at least, if nothing else, I can feel good about my eating and in control of the one thing I can control. Besides, I’d rather be lower in weight once this is over instead of either the same or higher!”

July 7, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 7, 2017/beckadmin

Do you have any extra food hanging around the house from July 4th that could potentially sabotage your healthy eating efforts? If so, get rid of it today and set yourself up to have a great weekend, instead of a weekend where you’re continually fighting off cravings.

July 6, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

July 6, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re tracking calories or points, it’s critical that you don’t get in the habit of eating something today and entering it into the calories/points for tomorrow. Doing so majorly exercises your giving-in muscle and making staying on track on any given day so much harder because you’ll constantly be tempted to do something today and worry about the consequences tomorrow. Losing/maintaining weight all comes down to making each decision a good one and facing the consequences AS they happen, not putting it off.

July 5, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 5, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Why should I do this instead of loving myself and my body and eat whatever I want, and not caring about those who call me overweight?

Response: It’s absolutely true that I shouldn’t care what other people call me and I shouldn’t lose weight for other people. It’s also absolutely true that I should love myself at any size and not base my worth on my weight. BUT, these things don’t mean that I shouldn’t work on losing weight, not if my weight is getting in the way of some of MY goals for MYSELF (being healthier, having the ability to take part in any physical or recreational activity I choose, etc.)

 

July 4, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 4, 2017/beckadmin

To those of us celebrating it, Happy 4th of July! If you got to barbeques today, remember – you can still eat reasonable portions of food AND lose weight and keep it off. You just can’t OVEREAT and lose weight. It’s not all-or-nothing!

July 3, 2017 – Monday Motivation

July 3, 2017/beckadmin

Tomorrow is the 4th of July! Do you have a plan for what you’ll eat and/or drink? If not, stop everything, and make one right NOW! Plan ahead and set yourself up to have a great week.

June 30, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 30, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you have the thought, “I’m going to eat this because I just don’t care,” remind yourself that actually, you DO care. If you truly didn’t care, you wouldn’t be working on losing weight/healthy eating at all. If you truly didn’t care, you wouldn’t have an Advantages List full of reasons why this is incredibly important to you.

“I don’t care” is just an excuse to give in – remind yourself over and over again why you DO care and why it’s worth it to work on overcoming this momentary temptation in order to move you towards goals that are so amazing.

June 29, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

June 29, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re feeling bored with the foods you’re eating, it’s critical that you start introducing more variety. If you put yourself into the trap of thinking you have to keep eating what you’ve been eating, eventually you’ll end up rebelling against it and getting off track.

June 28, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 28, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s so hard to resist the candy at work. Everyone else is eating it, so why can’t I?

Response: Very unfortunately, my body doesn’t know or care what anybody around me is eating, it ONLY cares what I eat, so just because others are eating something doesn’t mean I can or should, too. That being said, if I really want to eat the candy at work (and it’s worth the calories), then maybe I should plan in advance when and how much to have. One piece a day? One piece on Friday? 

There is a huge middle ground between eating no candy and work and eating too much – it may be worth working towards a compromise.

June 27, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 27, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters have a hard time accepting the (healthy and maintainable) changes they need to make in order to lose weight. We remind them that nonacceptance leads to struggle, which then puts them in danger of giving up and regaining the weight they have lost. It’s important to work towards acceptance of what you have to do instead of struggling against it.

June 26, 2017 – Monday Motivation

June 26, 2017/beckadmin

This week, if nothing else, pick ONE thing to start working on (or one thing to refocus on). Trying to do too much at once is overwhelming and leads to spinning your wheels and never really getting anywhere. 
What ONE thing are you going to focus on this week? 
(Some examples: eating mindfully, eating everything sitting down, giving yourself credit, planning in advance, limiting dessert to one time per day, eating a set number of meals and snacks, tracking calories or points, adding more fruits and vegetables to meals and snacks.)

June 23, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 23, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care what anybody around you is eating. When others are eating a lot, it normalizes overeating and makes it feel like it’s okay but it’s not! It’s irrelevant to your body how much others are eating. This weekend, make sure what you’re eating is the right amount for YOU.

June 22, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

June 22, 2017/beckadmin

If you come in contact with unplanned food and get a craving for it, remind yourself, “I’ve had [this food] before. I know what it tastes like. I’ll have it again so I don’t need to eat it every time the opportunity arises.” Then make a plan for when you will eat it (tomorrow? Over the weekend?) so that not eating it in the moment doesn’t feel as hard

June 21, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 21, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I want to watch TV and TV is so much better when you eat while watching.

Response: TV IS so much better when I’m eating, but every part of life is so much better when I’m thinner, healthier, and feeling good about myself. Likely I want to eat while I watch TV because TV alone is not quite entertaining enough – but food is not the only enhancement to TV! I can try other things while I watch TV that have no negative consequences, like playing a game on my phone, knitting, coloring, painting my nails, putting pictures in an album, doing a puzzle, etc.

June 20, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 20, 2017/beckadmin

Don’t legitimize overeating food just because it’s “healthy.” Overeating is overeating and if you take in too many calories, regardless of where they’re coming from, you’ll either gain weight or won’t be able to lose weight.

June 19, 2017 – Monday Motivation

June 19, 2017/beckadmin

One of our dieters recently got back on track after a period of overeating. She said to us, “THIS FEELS SO GREAT! For the first time in weeks my mind is at peace because I know I’m making decisions that are healthy for me. Getting back on track was hard but it’s so worth it because of how good it feels. I can’t believe I forgot that!”

June 16, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 16, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a mistake this weekend and think, “How could I have eaten that? I can’t do this, I should just give up,” remind yourself that one mistake in no way ruins your diet, but falling back into old patterns definitely will. Then recommit yourself and get right back on track.

June 15, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

June 15, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I wish I were losing weight more quickly like I have in the past,” remind yourself, “I lost weight quickly in the past because I was doing things in a more extreme way (which I wasn’t able to keep up and consequently gained weight back). I’m doing things in a moderate way now so it makes sense that my weight loss is more moderate. But it doesn’t matter if it takes extra time to lose the weight because it’s not coming back!

June 14, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 14, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: "Ugh, I should track today, but it takes so much time and is overwhelming! I will track tomorrow.”

Response: If it’s truly overwhelming, then I need to break it down into steps and work up to tracking everything (like just do breakfast for a few days, then over the course of the next few days and weeks add in lunch, then dinner, then snacks). It’s crucial that I set goals that are achievable! If I really can track but am feeling too much inertia to get myself to do it, I need to make a list of all the reasons it’s worth it to me to track and start reading it multiple times a day. Also, it would help to get myself to track everything today and really count up the number of minutes it actually takes. Then when I start thinking it takes too long, I can remind myself, “Although it does take 10 minutes/20 minutes/50 minutes (etc.) a day, it’s worth it if this is the one step that will help me reach my goals.”

June 13, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 13, 2017/beckadmin

While exercising, you can make your experience much worse by constantly telling yourself things like, “This stinks. I wish I didn’t have to do this, I’d much rather be on my couch,” etc., OR you can make it much better by telling yourself things like, “It’s so great that I’m doing this. I deserve so much credit. I’m going to feel so much better when I’m done.” 
Remember, it’s not only what you do, it’s what you say to yourself while you’re doing it.

June 12, 2017 – Monday Motivation

June 12, 2017/beckadmin

It’s so, so important to remember that it’s never a situation in and of itself that you gets you off track, it’s always your thinking about that situation. This means that there is NO SINGLE food situation you can’t handle as long as you figure out what your sabotaging thoughts might be and come up with good responses to them!

This week, work on thinking through difficult situations in advance.

June 9, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 9, 2017/beckadmin

Unfortunately there are no ‘healthy food fairies’ that will drop off food for you, so if you want to have healthy foods available, it means you have to make it happen. This weekend, take some time to think about what healthy foods you’d like to eat during the week and go out and buy them! Then make a plan for how and when you’ll eat them.

June 8, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

June 8, 2017/beckadmin

The more uncluttered your eating environment, the more you’ll be able to enjoy your meal. While eating, if you’re looking at all the bills or the emails you have to take care of, it will make mealtimes more stressful.

Take a few moments to make your eating environment more serene, and you'll likely find the whole experience becomes more satisfying, too

June 7, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 7, 2017/beckadmin

We want to hear from you this week! What are your most common sabotaging thoughts? What thoughts are the hardest for you to overcome? Email slicata@beckinstitute.org with your answers. We’ll help give some responses in days to come.

June 6, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 6, 2017/beckadmin

You can eat a slice of pie in 5 bites or in 25 bites. Either way it's the same amount of food, but if you eat it in 25 bites, you get to enjoy it 20 more times.

June 5, 2017 – Monday Motivation

June 5, 2017/beckadmin

You can make the decision to get back on track right this MINUTE. Don’t wait for the next month, week, day, or hour. Do it right NOW. Prove to yourself that you never have to wait to get back on track!

June 2, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 2, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, whatever the food decisions is that’s right in front of you that moment, focus on making it a good one. A successful weekend is good decision after good decision, but you don’t have to make them all at once. Concentrate on one at a time this weekend, and by Sunday night you can feel great about all you’ve accomplished.

June 1, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

June 1, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re worried about turning down food that someone is offering you, ask yourself:

Compared to other disappointments in that person’s life, how disappointed will s/he really be if I don’t eat this food right now? On the other hand, if I reinforce the tendency to give in, go off my diet, and jeopardize my weight loss, how disappointed will I be?

Wednesday Sabotage – May 31, 2017

May 31, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: If I can’t exercise for at least half an hour, it’s not worth doing anything.

Response: ANY exercise is better than no exercise! Five minutes is better than zero minutes. It’s important for me to prove to myself that I can stay in the exercise habit even when I have limited time.

Tuesday Reality Check – May 30, 2017

May 30, 2017/beckadmin

Skipping meals backfires! Often when dieters skip a meal, they then think, “Since I didn’t eat lunch I can afford to eat extra now,” and then wind up taking in many more calories than they would have if they had just eaten a reasonable lunch and dinner.

May 29, 2017 – Monday Motivation

May 29, 2017/beckadmin

Remember – no matter how hard or easy dieting feels today is NOT how hard it will feel tomorrow and in the future. The more you practice your skills and the more habitual they get, the easier and easier it becomes to keep doing them.

May 26, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 26, 2017/beckadmin

Make sure you have a PLAN for how you’ll handle your eating this weekend. If you think, “I’d rather just see how things go, instead of planning,” ask yourself, “How often does that work out well for me?”

What are the chances of success with a plan vs. without a plan? Consider the evidence and act accordingly!

May 25, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

May 25, 2017/beckadmin

Most dieters get to the point where they leave events and feel good about what they didn’t eat, not deprived. Because of this, it’s important to remind yourself that you don’t have to worry about feeling deprived in the future because it’s very likely that you won’t.

May 24, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 24, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra at dinner tonight because I’ve had a hard day and I deserve it.

Response: I do deserve to calm down after a hard day (although eating isn’t the only way to achieve this). And I do deserve to eat dinner. What I don't deserve is to OVEREAT at dinner and then face the consequences (physical, psychological, and not reaching my weight loss goals).

May 23, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 23, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m going to try to eat extra to see what I can get away with,” remind yourself that the only thing you’ll really ‘get away with’ is either not losing weight or losing it much more slowly.

May 22, 2017 – Monday Motivation

May 22, 2017/beckadmin

When you feel like quitting, think about why you started. Keep yourself motivated this week by really taking to think reflect on what you’re hoping to get out of working on healthy eating/weight loss and how important those things are to you. They’re worth working for!

May 19, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 19, 2017/beckadmin

For many people, staying in control of their eating is harder on weekends because their days are less structured. But remember, just because your time is less structured doesn’t mean your eating has to be!

Sticking to a schedule (like continuing to have regular meals and snacks) can make staying on track throughout the weekends so much easier.

May 18, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

May 18, 2017/beckadmin

When you eat out and stay in control, give yourself a lot of credit. If you then get home and think, “I was so good, now I deserve to treat myself,” remind yourself that doing so will undo all your hard work and cause you to feel guilty and badly – which is the exact OPPOSITE of a treat.

May 17, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 17, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because I’ve been running around all day.

Response: If it were true that it was okay to eat extra every time I’d been running around (and tired myself out) then I wouldn’t have gained weight. Most of the time when I think, “It’s okay to eat extra because…” it’s probably actually NOT okay, not if I want to lose weight.

May 16, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 16, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you have to be committed to the process. Dieters who undermine their commitment by saying things to themselves like, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” or “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things,” will have a much, much harder time getting themselves to just do what they need to do.

May 15, 2017 – Monday Motivation

May 15, 2017/beckadmin

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again (over and over) – you can’t change what has happened in the past, you can only change what happens today and in the future. No matter what happened with your eating over the weekend, today is a new day so make it a good eating day and start the week off feeling great!

May 12, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 12, 2017/beckadmin

If you get off track this weekend, remind yourself that the VERY NEXT food decision you make that day is an opportunity to turn things around and have a great rest of the day. You can’t always control getting off track, but you can control whether or not you stay off track.

May 11, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

May 11, 2017/beckadmin

When you weigh yourself, only get on the scale ONCE! Getting on more frequently means you're probably putting too much emphasis on the number and not enough on practicing healthy habits throughout the day.

May 10, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 10, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because it’s just a little bit.

Response: It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every time I give in and eat unplanned food, I make it more likely I will the next time because I’ll be able to say to myself, “I gave in last time, so it’s okay to do it again this time.” Whether the food has 20 calories or 200 calories, it still reinforces the habit of giving in.

May 9, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 9, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to not be overly influenced by the number on the scale. If dieters see a higher number, they may get demoralized and overeat. If they see a lower number, they may think that it’s okay to loosen up and eat more. Remember – the number on the scale is just one point of information and shouldn’t impact how you eat on any given day.

May 8, 2017 – Monday Motivation

May 8, 2017/beckadmin

What you do today can improve all of your tomorrows. It’s time to take control!

May 5, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 5, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, get in some exercise. Remember that ANYTHING is better than nothing. Finishing last is better than not finishing which is better than not starting.

May 4, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

May 4, 2017/beckadmin

Eating is not automatic, so eating (or not eating) something is 100% a product of your thinking. If you have sabotaging thoughts that you don’t respond to, then you WILL give in and eat something that you know you shouldn’t. If you work hard on responding to your thinking, then you won’t. The power is in your mind!

May 3, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 3, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve blown my diet for the day so I might as well keep eating and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: It’s not as if, at a certain point, the calories stop adding up. If I go on to eat 2,000 more calories, my body will count them. If I go on to eat 4,000 more calories, my body will count those, too. It makes NO SENSE to continue eating off track because the more I eat, the more weight I may gain. Get back on track RIGHT NOW!

May 2, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 2, 2017/beckadmin

Remember that losing weight is much more about what you do and don’t eat, and much less about how much your burn off in the gym. Even if you can’t exercise at all, you can still lose weight. No excuses!

May 1, 2017 – Monday Motivation

May 1, 2017/beckadmin

It’s a new month and a great time to get a fresh start (if you need one) or tighten up on some healthy habits that might have gotten loose. What are you committed to working on this week?

April 28, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 28, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend, I’ve worked hard all week so I deserve to unwind,” remind yourself, “Yes, it’s true I do deserve to relax and unwind this weekend, but I also deserve to achieve everything on my Advantages List, so I have to go about doing that without turning to food.”

April 27, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

April 27, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been doing really well and the scale is down. I can afford to loosen up,” it’s critical to remind yourself that that is NOT TRUE! The scale is down because of everything you’ve been doing, and the moment you stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up

April 26, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 26, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s not fair that I have to watch what I eat and other people don’t.

Response: While it’s true that some people are naturally thinner with naturally smaller appetites, it’s probably a MUCH smaller percentage than I think. In reality, chances are very high that they’re watching what they eat, too!

April 25, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 25, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters have trouble turning down food when people make comments like, “Oh, you’re not going to have any? Then I guess I won’t, either.” Remember – it’s NOT your responsibility to make others feel better about their eating choices. It IS your responsibility to make good choices for yourself so that you can be a healthier (and happier) person.

April 24, 2017 – Monday Motivation

April 24, 2017/beckadmin

If you change the focus of your goal from “losing weight” to “getting healthy” then the number on the scale on any given day or week won’t hold as much importance. Ultimately the number doesn’t matter anyway, what matters is your health, how you feel physically, your sense of control, etc. Instead of focusing on the number, focus on the actions you take in a day!

April 21, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 21, 2017/beckadmin

It’s so much easier to make good food choices when you have healthy options readily available, and so much harder when unhealthy options are more accessible. This weekend, consider doing whatever prep work is necessary to set yourself up for a great week ahead.

April 20, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 20, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to continue eating normally for the rest of the day. If you tell yourself, “I just ate too much so I’m not going to eat anything else today,” you may feel anxious or panicky when you get hungry later in the day and wind up eating way more than you would have if you had just decided to eat normally.

April 19, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 19, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.

Response: It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to go find something healthy and satisfying that will make me feel good now AND later.

April 18, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 18, 2017/beckadmin

Boredom and hunger red not the same thing. Stress and hunger are not the same thing. Tiredness and hunger are not the same thing. If hunger is not the problem, then food is not the answer!

April 17, 2017 – Monday Motivation

April 17, 2017/beckadmin

This week, instead of thinking about how far you have to go, think about how much progress you’ve already made. Chances are you’re doing so many things better and more consistently then you were before you started. The more you keep working, the better you’ll continue to get. Be grateful for where you are and feel excited about where you’re going!

April 14, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 14, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think something along the lines of, “It’s okay to have a slice and a half of pie – they’re kind of small slices so an extra half is still probably one portion,” remind yourself that while you may be able to fool your mind into thinking it’s not extra, you’re never able to fool your body.

April 13, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

April 13, 2017/beckadmin

Any time you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to ask yourself, “Why did that happen? What can I do the next time to change the outcome?” Once you figure these two things out, move on!

April 12, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 12, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The healthy food on my diet plan costs more than the food I really want to eat. I can’t justify spending the extra money.

Response: It’s worth it and I’m worth it! What a great way to spend money – toward a goal that I really, really want to achieve. Besides, think of the money I’ll save once I lose weight and get healthy (steady wardrobe, maybe less medication and/or doctor visits, etc.)

April 11, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 11, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, losing weight/eating healthy doesn’t mean cutting out your favorite foods. It might mean eating them less frequently, or in smaller portions, but it doesn’t mean cutting them out entirely. All-or-nothing never works out long-term, so NOW is the time to find the balance between eating too little of a favorite food and eating too much.

April 10, 2017 – Monday Motivation

April 10, 2017/beckadmin

Weight loss doesn’t happen overnight, but it does happen one small good decision after another. This week, focus on feeling good about the small food decisions you make in a day. Make all of them important, and doing so will eventually add up to really big change.

 

April 7, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 7, 2017/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake this weekend and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories never stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain.

Getting back on track right away will stop you from gaining weight and help you feel good about your eating for the rest of the weekend (and make Monday morning more pleasant).

April 5, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 5, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because it’s a rare treat and I never get to have it.

Response: Just because I don’t come in contact with this food often, doesn’t mean I couldn’t seek it out; there is almost no food that I couldn’t buy or make 365 days a year. I don’t need to overdo it now because I can ALWAYS get it again. Besides, if I overeat, it will ruin the pleasure of having it because I’ll feel guilty.

April 4, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 4, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m not going to work on my dieting skills because I don’t want to,” remind yourself that the “I don’t want to/I don’t have to” is just your adolescent rebellion talking. Listening to that voice has NEVER helped you reach your goals so you’re just not going to pay any attention to it.

April 3, 2017 – Monday Motivation

April 3, 2017/beckadmin

The more you practice dieting skills, the more ingrained they become, which means that dieting gets EASIER! However difficult dieting may feel right now is NOT how hard it will feel in the future, as long as you keep practicing and working on making these things habits.

This is why every time matters – because every time you make it more and more of a habit (either for the positive or the negative). If you’re not consistent, then these skills will not become a habit and they’ll never get the chance to get easier. This week, work on consistency and making every time count.

March 31, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 31, 2017/beckadmin

Why start a diet on Monday? Start it TODAY, be focused all weekend, and by Monday you won’t have to gear up for something new. All you’ll have to do is keep doing what you’re doing, which is a much better position to be in.

March 30, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

March 30, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re at a restaurant trying to decide between a healthy option and an unhealthy option, remind yourself that either way, once the meal is over, you’ll feel full. If you eat something healthy, you’ll feel full and happy, but if you eat something unhealthy, you’ll feel full and mad at yourself. Either way you’ll be full, but how do you to feel in addition to that?

March 29, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 29, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I might as well just eat this food I’m craving because I’m going to give in eventually anyway.

Response: That’s not true! That’s my old way of thinking. Now I know that cravings always pass, and that if I get distracted, they go away more quickly. I have proven to myself that I can withstand cravings, so it’s no longer a foregone conclusion that I’ll give in. I need to think about all the other cravings I’ve overcome and how good that felt. I can do it now, too!

March 28, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 28, 2017/beckadmin

Good reminder – if you’re feeling deprived about your eating day to day, ask yourself: am I being too restrictive? Maybe you actually ARE depriving yourself too much and you need to build more variety into your diet. If you don’t, eventually you’ll start rebelling against what you’re doing and will get off track.

March 27, 2017 – Monday Motivation

March 27, 2017/beckadmin

No matter what you did or didn’t eat over the weekend, today is a new day and a fresh chance to have a great eating week!

March 24, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 24, 2017/beckadmin

If you go out to eat this weekend with a friend who then expresses disappointment when you order something healthy, remind yourself that it is not your responsibility to make others feel better about what they eat. It is your responsibility to be healthy and make eating choices that work for you.

March 23, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

March 23, 2017/beckadmin

When dieting, you’ll probably be eating less food than you have been so it’s important for you to see all of it spread out in front of you at meal or snack time. This will help you feel more physically AND psychologically satisfied.

March 22, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 22, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t deserve credit for my dieting tasks because I should already be doing them.

Response: No, I SHOULDN’T already be doing these things because I didn’t know how. If this was easy, if this was intuitively obvious, nobody would be overweight. Thinking “I should already be doing them” is not a view that’s in line with reality because the data shows that most people can’t/aren’t doing these things. It’s imperative that I give myself credit and recognize my accomplishments so that I can build my confidence and my sense of self-efficacy.

March 21, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 21, 2017/beckadmin

Today is the tomorrow you talked about yesterday. DO IT TODAY!

March 20, 2017 – Monday Motivation

March 20, 2017/beckadmin

Many dieters find that once they gain control over their eating, it helps them feel better, and more in control, in general. Feeling in control and on track can have a positive spillover effect into so many other areas of your life!

March 17, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 17, 2017/beckadmin

If you make a mistake this weekend, remember that you’re allowed to make dieting mistakes. What you’re not allowed to do is use one mistake as an excuse to keep making more. Recover right that moment and make the rest of the weekend great.

March 16, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

March 16, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat [this food] because I don’t know how many calories are in it. It’s probably not that bad, anyway,” remind yourself, “Just because I don’t know how many calories are in it, doesn’t mean it doesn’t have a lot! My lack of knowledge doesn’t change the reality of what this food is made of.” Then make an educated guess and count the calories.

March 15, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 15, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters are counting calories, they often stop counting if they’re not happy with how the day is going. This is when it’s most important to keep counting because it’s critical to prove to yourself that you take accountability for your actions. If you stop counting, you’ll prove to yourself that you let yourself off the hook when things aren’t going well, and you exponentially increase the chances of having more off-track days in the future. Keep counting, no matter what!

March 14, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 14, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters are counting calories, they often stop counting if they’re not happy with how the day is going. This is when it’s MOST important to keep counting because it’s critical to prove to yourself that you take accountability for your actions. If you stop counting, you’ll prove to yourself that you let yourself off the hook when things aren’t going well, and you exponentially increase the chances of having more off-track days in the future. Keep counting, no matter what!

March 13, 2017 – Monday Motivation

March 13, 2017/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters, “I was so happy when I stayed in control,” and “I felt really badly when I ate way too much.”

It’s important to keep in mind that no matter how much you may think you want to eat with abandon, it’s really staying on track that leaves you feeling great. It’s worth it!

March 10, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 10, 2017/beckadmin

If you eat out often, chances are you can’t indulge every time and still lose weight. However, remember that the experience of eating out is always a treat (no cooking, no dishes, being served), even if the food isn’t. This weekend, when you eat out, work on enjoying the non-food elements of the experience (as well as the food itself).

March 9, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

March 9, 2017/beckadmin

While it’s probably not a realistic goal to cut out all sugar, it is reasonable to have the goal to cut back. Most of our clients work on the skill of one dessert a day. That’s such a great middle ground between too much dessert and none at all.

March 8, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 8, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s sad that I can’t eat everything I want, whenever I want.

Response: Actually, it’s so GREAT that I can stick with my plan and lose weight. It would be so much sadder if I was stuck at an unhealthy weight where I didn’t feel good about myself.

March 7, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 7, 2017/beckadmin

You can’t exercise off a bad diet. Even if you spend hours in the gym, if you’re eating is out of control, chances are very high that you either won’t be able to lose weight, or that you’ll actually gain. Focus on making good choices in the kitchen, not just in the gym!

March 6, 2017 – Monday Motivation

March 6, 2017/beckadmin

There is no one giant step that leads to lasting weight loss. Rather, there are just lots and lots of little steps. What little steps are you working on this week?

March 3, 2017

March 3, 2017/beckadmin

If you’re likely to encounter food pushers this weekend, it’s time to start saying no!

Remember, if you had a severe nut allergy and someone offered you food with peanuts in it, you would turn it down NO MATTER WHAT! Losing weight, being healthy, and being happier are just as legitimate reasons to say no, so stick to your guns and stand firm.

March 2, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

March 2, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat because I just need to feel better NOW,” remind yourself:

“While it may be true that I need to feel better, it’s not true that I need to eat to feel better. There are other things I can do to help myself feel better that won’t cause me to take in extra calories and gain weight. Besides, if I eat to feel better now, the only thing I’ll be doing is signing myself up to feel badly later – when I feel guilty about what I’ve eaten, when I’ve reinforced bad habits, and when I've gain weight. Do something else that will help me feel better now and later.”

March 1, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 1, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Losing weight is so hard. Is it really worth it?

Response: I only question whether or not it’s ‘worth it’ when I’m in an off-track period. When I’m on track, in control, and feeling great, I never question whether or not it’s worth it. So is it worth it? 100% yes!

February 28, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 28, 2017/beckadmin

Remember: eat crappy, feel crappy. Eat healthy, feel healthy! It’s that simple (and that complex….).

February 27, 2017 – Monday Motivation

February 27, 2017/beckadmin

One dieter recently said to us, “I was going through a really stressful time but for the first time EVER I didn’t use it as an excuse to overeat. Instead, continuing to take control over my eating helped me feel better every single day and actually made it easier to deal with my stress. I never knew this before!”

February 24, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 24, 2017/beckadmin

The more you focus on your mistakes, the worse you feel. The more you give yourself credit for all the great things you’re doing, the better you feel, the more momentum you build, and the easier it gets to continue doing well. This weekend, make a commitment to CREDIT.

February 23, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

February 23, 2017/beckadmin

When dieters say, “Dieting was so hard this week,” we always question them further and often find out that, in actuality, it was really hard a few times during the week but these experiences were coloring their perception of the week as a whole. In dieting, it’s important to maintain an accurate sense of reality so that you don’t psych yourself out by thinking it’s always harder than it is.

February 22, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 22, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s too hard to get myself back on track because it’s too much of a burden to do all the things I used to do.

Response: Actually, it feels terrible to be off track. When I was doing my dieting tasks before it really DIDN’T feel all that burdensome because I was in control of my eating and it felt GREAT. Once I make myself start doing them again, I’ll be reminded of how much better I feel.

 

February 21, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 21, 2017/beckadmin

There is a difference between hunger and boredom. Don’t use food for entertainment, that’s not its purpose. The next time you’re bored, find something else to do!

February 20, 2017 – Monday Motivation

February 20, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes people confuse not knowing how to diet with not wanting it enough. What we have found with our clients is that it’s rarely, if ever, a question of them not wanting it. It’s all a matter of them lacking the knowledge to get there. So, if you’ve had trouble in the past, stop blaming yourself! Instead, focus your energy on learning what you need to be successful.

February 17, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 17, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to deprive myself of food this weekend,” remind yourself, “Either way I’ll be deprived. I’ll be deprived of some food, some of the time (but not all food all the time), or I’ll be deprived of everything on my Advantages List. Which deprivation do I want?

February 16, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

February 16, 2017/beckadmin

When you make a dieting mistake, it’s helpful to NOT use the word “cheat” because “cheating” can have very negative, sometimes moralistic undertones. If you make a mistake in dieting, it doesn’t make you a bad person, it makes you a NORMAL person.

February 15, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 15, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat this unplanned food because I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true I don’t care right now, it’s NOT true that I won’t care later – I definitely, definitely will. I can’t let this one moment of not caring dictate my actions.

February 14, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 14, 2017/beckadmin

If you’ve been feeling off track and are waiting to have a good eating week before getting on the scale, remind yourself that it usually doesn’t work out that way. Avoiding the scale begets more avoiding the scale, and chances are you’ll still be avoiding it next week. Just get on it today and you’ll increase your chances of actually having a good eating week.

February 13, 2017 – Monday Motivation

February 13, 2017/beckadmin

You’re already one day closer to your goal. Do what you need to do today and tomorrow you’ll be another day closer. You can do it!

February 10, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 10, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I just don’t want the burden of thinking about dieting this weekend,” remind yourself:

Eating right is a burden, but being overweight is a burden too (physically, psychologically, financially, etc.) either way I'm burdened, but at least in one way I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel good about myself.

February 9, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

February 9, 2017/beckadmin

Make sure you have a list of distractions you can use the next time you have a craving. Get your mind off the food and onto something else, and the craving WILL go away. 

February 8, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 8, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m worried about how I’m going to keep up with all my dieting skills in the future.

Response: I don’t have to worry about how I’ll be able to stay in control in the future because by the time the future comes, I’ll have had so much more practice and be so much better at staying on track. The stronger my resistance muscle gets, the easier all of this will continue to get.

 

February 7, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 7, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, what you eat in private you will wear in public. Just because nobody’s watching doesn’t mean the calories don’t count.

February 6, 2017 – Monday Motivation

February 6, 2017/beckadmin

Losing weight is not instant gratification. You won’t immediately see the positive results of your hard work, but remember that every good decision you make is strengthening your resistance muscle and making you stronger. Even if you can’t instantly see the benefits, they’re there!

February 3, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 3, 2017/beckadmin

There’s simply no magic bullet that will enable easy, fast, and LASTING weight loss (at least not yet…).

Instead of fighting against what you need to do, use that time and energy to just get started. Every journey starts with a single step – so commit to taking at least one specific step this weekend.

February 2, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

February 2, 2017/beckadmin

Eating every bite of food sitting down can be a relatively painless way of eliminating many calories from your diet because you probably don’t even notice much of what you eat standing up and it likely doesn’t factor into your overall level of satiety.

February 1, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 1, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I hit a plateau. I knew this would happen. I’ll never lose the rest of the weight I want to.

Response: I will continue to lose if I eat less and/or exercise more. If it’s not realistic or healthy for me to do that, I will need to work on being proud of the weight I’ve lost so far and to accept that if I lose more (by doing things that aren’t maintainable), I’ll likely just gain it back anyway.

January 31, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 31, 2017/beckadmin

When people feel anxious about starting to diet, they may tell themselves that they’ll start tomorrow. This makes them feel less anxious because it means they have a plan – but far too often they never put that plan in place. Instead, make it your plan to start RIGHT NOW and guarantee that it will happen.

January 30, 2017 – Monday Motivation

January 30, 2017/beckadmin

It’s important to start working on enriching your life NOW, even if you’re not yet where you want to be in terms of weight loss. The more pleasurable things you have going on, the less and less you’ll turn to food to fulfill that role.

January 27, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 27, 2017/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to have this extra cookie because there’s so many other desserts [at this party] that I’m not eating,” remind yourself, “My body doesn’t know or care what I don’t eat, it only knows what I DO eat.”

Just because you turn down food 10 times, doesn’t necessarily mean it’s okay to eat it the 11th time. Your body doesn’t know or care about those 10 times!

January 26, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

January 26, 2017/beckadmin

Are you ever hesitant to give yourself credit because you’re worried that if you think it might really be working, you’ll jinx yourself? If so, remind yourself, “Believing in myself can’t lead to bad luck. In fact, reminding myself of all the skills I’ve developed will help me get through the harder times.”

January 25, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 25, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too tired/stressed/busy to exercise today.

Response: Exercise will actually help with these things, not make them worse! If I’m tired, it will give me more energy, if I’m stressed, it will provide a productive outlet, if I’m busy, it will be a necessary break to focus on myself and my needs.

January 24, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 24, 2017/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

January 23, 2017 – Monday Motivation

January 23, 2017/beckadmin

Action precedes motivation! Often dieters say, “Once the scale starts going down I’ll feel more motivated” – but the scale won’t start going down until you do what you need to do. Action first, motivation second.

January 20, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 20, 2017/beckadmin

If you go out to eat this weekend and think, “I need to get my money’s worth by eating everything on my plate,” remind yourself that cost of doing so (weight gain, not fitting into clothes, reinforcing bad habits, feeling overly full, getting off track, etc.) is MUCH greater than the cost of leaving food behind.

January 19, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

January 19, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, it’s a combination of all of the “little” things – like not eating a cookie from the cafeteria, making it a priority to eat sitting down, walking by the candy dish and not dipping in– that will make you lose weight. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG weight loss!

January 18, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 18, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Healthy eating/losing weight should already be easy for me so I don’t deserve credit for it.

Response: No, this shouldn’t already be easy. If it were easy, nobody would be overweight. It were easy, no one who ever lose weight on a diet would gain it back. I need to give myself credit EVERY step of the way, and in doing so, I'll build my confidence and then dieting will become easier.

January 17, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 17, 2017/beckadmin

Remember, while working on healthy eating is hard some of the time, being overweight is hard ALL of the time, and in so many more ways.

January 16, 2017 – Monday Motivation

January 16, 2017/beckadmin

You don’t have to go fast, you just have to go. Losing weight, if you’re being reasonable with your eating, often isn’t very fast but eventually you’ll get where you want to be. And keep in mind that every pound you lose feels better than being that pound heavier, so there is so much to appreciate along the way.

January 13, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 13, 2017/beckadmin

It’s easier to stay on track than get back on track. When you have positive momentum built up from the week, don’t let the weekend stop it! Stay on track, keep the momentum going, and Monday morning you won’t have to put forth the effort to get back in control.

January 12, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

January 12, 2017/beckadmin

A dieter was recently struggling with caring about her weight loss skills because she was mourning her mother’s death and was having a lot of trouble controlling her emotional eating. She made the following Response Card:

Even though the grief I’m feeling is really strong, it’s still worth it to me to work on using alternate coping strategies because my long-term health is at stake.”

January 11, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 11, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I should be able to enjoy myself at special occasions.

Response: Eating differently doesn’t mean I can’t enjoy other aspects of this occasion. But I have to face the fact that I may not get as much enjoyment from food as I used to. Since I’ll be faced with many special occasions in my lifetime, I have a choice: I can either eat whatever I want OR I can lose weight. But I can’t have it both ways.

January 10, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 10, 2017/beckadmin

For many people, eating is a powerful coping mechanism for negative emotions because they give it power. They tell themselves, “Eating will help me feel better,” and then it does (in the short term).

Instead, remind yourself that eating will ultimately ALWAYS make the situation worse (because it doesn’t solve the first problem and just creates more), and then try giving something else power, like drinking hot tea or taking a walk.

January 9, 2017 – Monday Motivation

January 9, 2017/beckadmin

Dieting and losing weight can be very hard, no doubt about that. BUT, it’s important to keep in mind all of the overwhelmingly positive things that will come as a result. It’s hard but it’s undoubtedly worth it. Important things are worth working for!

January 6, 2017 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 6, 2017/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m discouraged by the weight I gained this holiday season,” remind yourself that this weekend is a GREAT time to get back on track and recommit yourself to healthy eating. It doesn’t matter what you did or didn’t eat over the past few weeks. What matters now is what you eat today and every day going forward.

January 5, 2017 – Think Thin Thursday

January 5, 2017/beckadmin

Now is a great time to institute a reasonable exercise routine! If you think, “I’m too busy to exercise,” consider cutting out OTHER activities to make room for exercise. Likely exercise is way more important (physically and psychologically) than some of the other ways you’re spending your time.

January 4, 2017 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 4, 2017/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Since I’m so ready to start my diet and drop holiday weight, I should be pretty restrictive with my eating to make it happen more quickly.

Response: When has using extreme measures EVER helped me to lose weight and keep it off? I’m going to make this year the year that I learn to find the middle ground between overeating and undereating. The middle ground is the only path that will help me lose weight and maintain that weight loss.

January 3, 2017 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 3, 2017/beckadmin

Sometimes when dieters go through a stressful eating situation (like the holidays or a demanding work situation), they do extraordinarily well because they are extra vigilant, knowing it’s 100% necessary. When the stressful time passes, they relax and can stray off track because their guard has gone down. Remember, successful weight loss and maintenance isn’t only a matter of how well you do during hard times, it’s also about every day in between.

January 2, 2017 – Monday Motivation

January 2, 2017/beckadmin

Happy New Year’s! Do you have goals or resolutions for the year ahead? If so, remember that it’s important to break big goals down into smaller, more manageable ones. If your goal is to eat more healthfully, perhaps your first step can be something like, “add vegetables to every lunch and dinner,” or “have fruit for at least one snack instead of something else.

December 30, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 30, 2016/beckadmin

Happy (almost) New Years! Our plan is to enjoy New Year’s Eve, but also to stay in control of our eating and drinking so that we can feel good every minute of 2016 and start 2017 in a great place. What’s your plan?

December 29, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

December 29, 2016/beckadmin

Some dieters tend to consistently eat until they’re overly full – often saying something like, “I just like to eat.” We remind them that if they work on portion control, they’re not giving up eating, they’re only giving up OVEReating and the uncomfortable sensation of having eaten too much.

December 28, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 28, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t throw away this leftover holiday food, it would be a waste of food and money.

Response: If I eat food my body doesn’t need, it will be wasted in my body by turning to fat. Wasted in the trashcan or in my body, either way it’s wasted. Also, the money is already gone, eating the food won’t bring the money back, but what it may do is cause me to gain weight.

December 27, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 27, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re surrounded by tempting holiday food, it’s critical that you have a list of distracting activities you can do once a craving hits. Remember that cravings only last as long as we pay attention to them, and the moment you get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away. You don’t have to power through a craving on your own (although you can!). Use distractions – they will help!

December 26, 2016 – Monday Motivation

December 26, 2016/beckadmin

Over and over again we hear from dieters how gaining control of their eating has positively impacted their lives in so many ways beyond weight loss and how, as they go, they discover so many new advantages that they hadn’t foreseen at the beginning. Why wait even one more week to start working towards such an important life change? Make healthy choices TODAY and that way, at least you can look back and say you really turned things around by the end of the year.

December 23, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 23, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care that it's Christmas weekend. While it may be perfectly reasonable to have extra calories over the next few days, do it in a deliberate and planned way, instead of just allowing yourself to eat more and telling yourself that it doesn’t count. Also, if you eat extra in a planned way, you’ll enjoy it more because you’ll know that it’s part of your plan for the day, and you’ll be on track the whole time so you’ll have nothing to recover from.

December 22, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

December 22, 2016/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight during the holiday season, or even maintain your weight, the simple fact is that you won’t be able to eat all the holiday treats that you want. Work on eating the treats you plan to eat slowly and mindfully and keep in mind that one cookie eaten slowly and while enjoying every bite can be more enjoyable than four cookies eaten very quickly without paying much attention to them.

December 21, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 21, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: My eating has been so bad lately, I’ll just wait until the New Year to get back on track.

Response: Absolutely not! I will get back on track right now because every minute I eat off track is another minute I feel bad about myself and my eating. It’s worth it to me to get back on track now and start the New Year off right.

December 20, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 20, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “The holidays are stressful and I just want to relax and not have one more thing to worry about,” remind yourself, “In the past I’ve seen that worrying about my weight and feeling bad about my eating is a huge drain. Maintaining control over my eating will actually make me feel better because it’ll help me feel more in control in general AND it will reduce my stress because I won’t have to worry about gaining weight.”

December 19, 2016 – Monday Motivation

December 19, 2016/beckadmin

Working to stay in control of your eating can be difficult and can sometimes feel not worth it, but ultimately the rewards of losing weight are SO MUCH more important and ALWAYS worth it, no matter how hard dieting may feel at any given moment. This is true, maybe even more so, during the holiday season when staying in control can feel so much harder but doing so feels so much more empowering.

December 16, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 16, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I won’t be able to enjoy myself at holiday gatherings if I have to limit myself at all,” remind yourself, “It’s not all-or-nothing! There’s a HUGE middle ground between eating everything I want and nothing I want. Besides, if I way overeat and get off track, I’ll wind up tainting the holiday gathering, anyway. No matter what day of the year it is, staying on track feels great.”

December 15, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

December 15, 2016/beckadmin

A major sabotaging thought we hear during this holidays is, “It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating.” When faced with all the extra food you’re not eating, eating extra really can seem legitimate. Remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care how much you’re NOT eating, it only knows what you do eat. If you take in more calories than you’ve planned, you’ll gain weight.

December 14, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 14, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I had such a hard day, I deserve to reward myself with food.

Response: If I reward myself with food and overeat, I’ll end up feeling terrible – physically and mentally, which will be the exact opposite of a reward. If I stay on track and control my eating, I will feel great. Food rewards just don’t work once the food is gone!

December 13, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 13, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat normally over the holidays,” remind yourself, “Actually, I AM eating normally for someone with my weight loss goals. And while it may be unfair I can’t eat all the food I want, it would be MUCH more unfair if I couldn’t experience the countless benefits of weight loss.”

December 12, 2016 – Monday Motivation

December 12, 2016/beckadmin

Whenever a dieter says something like, “I was so good yesterday, I didn’t have any dessert,” we always remind them that having dessert is an important part of lifetime eating. Cutting out all sweets (or other categories of food that you like) never works out long term because you’ll always end up eating them again and when you do, if you don’t know how to control your portions, you’ll gain weight. Your plan for the holiday season doesn’t have to be “no dessert” but it also can’t be, “dessert as much and as often as I want.” If your plan is too restrictive (“no dessert at all”) likely you’ll end up rebelling against it. This week, look for the middle ground.

December 9, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 9, 2016/beckadmin

We talk about this a lot during the holidays -don’t wait to start working on weight loss goals! Don’t wait until January 1st. Don’t even wait until Monday. Start right now. Start TODAY and by Monday you’ll be feeling in better place then you may be feeling now. What is one healthy commitment you’re making for this weekend?

December 8, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

December 8, 2016/beckadmin

Likely you can think of a time when you gave in and ate something unplanned, and a time when you resisted eating something that you were tempted to. Which felt better? 

Remember, once the temptation to eat something unplanned has passed, you won’t regret not having eaten it. Remind yourself, “I won’t regret the food I don’t eat (holiday food, treats at the office), but I definitely will regret the extra, unplanned food I do eat.”

December 7, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 7, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’

December 6, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 6, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

December 5, 2016 – Monday Motivation

December 5, 2016/beckadmin

Many, many people gain weight during the holidays. Even if you maintain your weight during the next month, you should be extremely proud of yourself. Make sure you have goals that are reasonable but don’t let yourself off the hook too much. You want to stay accountable and in control, but you also want to be reasonable and realistic. Maintenance might be that middle ground!

December 2, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 2, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, a successful weekend does not mean a weekend where you never made mistakes. Tennis players miss balls and still go on to win the match. This weekend, if you do make a mistake, recover immediately!

December 1, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

December 1, 2016/beckadmin

Today is the start of a new month and the opportunity end the year on a high note. If you’re already thinking that losing weight/getting healthy will be a New Year’s Resolution, don’t wait! The sooner you start working on it the sooner you will achieve it, so start taking small steps TODAY towards that goal and all the small steps will begin to add up to big ones.

November 30, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 30, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s too hard to eat healthy during the holidays.

Response: It’s hard but it’s doable. It may take some extra work and focus, but as a result of doing so I’ll get to feel confident, in control, comfortable in my clothes, proud of myself, and so much more. It’s worth it!

November 29, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 29, 2016/beckadmin

The time and energy for dieting and exercise will never magically appear, and especially not during the busy holiday season. This means that you may need to be more deliberate in figuring out how and when you will make the time and energy for these things. 

Today: Schedule in your healthy eating/exercise tasks for the week. Doing so greatly increases the chances it will happen.

November 28, 2016 – Monday Motivation

November 28, 2016/beckadmin

No matter how much or how little control you were able to exert over the holiday weekend, today is a new day. Make today a good day and you will be so glad you did. Being in control of your eating feels great!

November 25, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 25, 2016/beckadmin

Do you have lots of tempting leftovers hanging around the house? We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again: MAKE A PLAN for how much/when you eat them. Without one, you’ll constantly be taxing your resistance muscle by trying to resist.

November 24, 2016 – Think Thin Thanksgiving

November 24, 2016/beckadmin

It can be helpful to ask yourself, “At the end of the day, which feels better – a day that I’ve overindulged and allowed myself to get off track with my eating, or a day that I’ve been focused, strong, and stayed completely on track?” We often think we’ll be happier if we eat whatever we want, whenever we want, but really just the opposite is usually true. Don’t forget that!

November 23, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 23, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Thanksgiving will be so hard because my family will push food on me.

Response: It’s not my family’s job to stop pushing food on me. They’re food pushers; that’s what they do. It is MY job to stop giving in. I have to be the one to change.

November 22, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 22, 2016/beckadmin

This week on Thanksgiving, while it may be perfectly reasonable to plan to eat extra in advance, remind yourself that you don’t need to eat every single bite that you want to in order to enjoy the experience. Eat what you do choose to eat slowly and mindfully and you’ll be amazed at home much more satisfying even smaller quantities of food can be.

November 21, 2016 – Monday Motivation

November 21, 2016/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they sometimes forget how much better it feels to be in control and feeling good about themselves and their eating. If you’ve been off track (especially if you’re thinking of waiting until after Thanksgiving to recover), remind yourself how great getting back on track will feel and start right this moment!

November 18, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 18, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “Everyone else will be eating whatever they want,” it’s important to remember that it’s highly likely that other people are limiting themselves, too (if they’re on a medical diet, watching their weight, trying to be healthy etc.). Regardless, though, what other people are eating isn’t relevant to the goals YOU have for YOURSELF.

November 17, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

November 17, 2016/beckadmin

If you have made the guideline of no junk food while at work that we discussed on Tuesday, consider making this Response Card to help you stick to it: 
“It’s worth it not to eat junk food at work. I don’t want to be plagued by cravings and I don’t want to gain weight and I don’t want to feel guilty afterward. If I see treats in the office that I want, remember: I can have them, just not right now. I”ll enjoy the treat so much more at home when I’ve planned to have it because I’ll eat it guilt-free."

November 16, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 16, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I've been working on these dieting skills for a while now and they still don’t really feel like habits. Maybe I should give up.

Response: I’m better at these skills than I was 2 months ago, and in 2 more months I’ll be even better than I am right now. There’s no reason to give because, even though it may seem slow, I AM moving forward and making progress!

November 15, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 15, 2016/beckadmin

If you struggle with junk food at work, particularly this time of year, consider making a guideline that you don’t eat junk food while at work – but if it’s something you really want you can bring it home and have a portion after dinner.

That way you’ll have a much more struggle-free time at work, and when you do eat the treat, you’ll only have one portion with you so you won’t have to worry about giving in to cravings to eat more.

November 14, 2016 – Monday Motivation

November 14, 2016/beckadmin

Thanksgiving is right around the corner! Remember that it’s much easier to stay on track than try to get back on track, so this week: get on track, build up some positive momentum, and next week will go so much more smoothly.

November 11, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 11, 2016/beckadmin

Remember – if you eat at someone’s house this weekend, you may not have control over what food is served to you but you ALWAYS have control over what you put in your mouth. Paying attention to portion size is key in situations where you’re not in charge of the food.

November 10, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

November 10, 2016/beckadmin

It’s helpful to view your eating day as a whole, and not just as individual meals. That way, if you don’t have bread at one meal, you’re less likely to feel deprived because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “Yes, I’m not having bread at lunch now, but that’s because I had toast for breakfast and I’m having a roll with dinner."

November 9, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 9, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I wish I was losing weight more quickly.

Response: When has losing weight quickly ever helped me to keep it off? The faster I’ve lost it in the past, the faster I’ve gained it back. What does it matter if it takes an extra month or two to lose the weight in the course of the rest of my life?

November 8, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 8, 2016/beckadmin

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is always another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food!

November 7, 2016 – Monday Motivation

November 7, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, even just maintaining your weight during the holiday season is a major achievement (studies show that most people gain). Over the next two months, keep your expectations reasonable. If the weight isn’t coming off as fast as you’d like, but isn’t coming back on either, you should be hugely proud of yourself.

November 4, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 4, 2016/beckadmin

If you have leftover Halloween candy hanging around your house but want to stay on track this weekend, you have two options – get rid of it, or plan when you’re going to have it. Having highly tempting food around with no plan of when you’re going to have it leads to giving in and overindulging. You can prevent this from happening!

November 3, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

November 3, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m so tired, I have to eat,” remind yourself that while eating may be a (very) temporary fix, ultimately sleep is what your body needs, not food, so eating won’t help.

Ask yourself: Do I want to be tired and overweight, or just tired?

November 2, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 2, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because if I don’t, I’ll disappoint my friend.

Response: If I eat off plan, I’ll disappoint MYSELF. Besides, my friend's disappointment will likely be momentary but the disappointment I’ll feel when I go off plan, shake my confidence, and possibly gain weight will last for so much longer. During the holiday season I might have to temporarily disappoint other people often in order to not more majorly disappoint myself.

November 1, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 1, 2016/beckadmin

Do you have lots of Halloween candy hanging around your house? If so, MAKE A PLAN!! Decide how much and when you get to have it. Not having a plan makes it too difficult to overcome cravings. For many people it works best to just get rid of the candy (donate it, toss it, give it away) but if that’s not possible then make sure you have a plan.

October 31, 2016 – Monday Motivation

October 31, 2016/beckadmin

Happy Halloween! You can eat all the Halloween candy you want OR you can be thinner, healthier, and more confident. You can’t have it both ways. Take a look at your goals and make a decision for how you will handle the influx of treats at this time.

October 28, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warmup

October 28, 2016/beckadmin

If you have Halloween parties this weekend, make a plan! Too often we’ll hear from dieters that they added up the calories/points once they got home and were dismayed to see how high the number was. This largely can be avoided if you plan and look up food items in advance. Plan to succeed this weekend!

October 27, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

October 27, 2016/beckadmin

Dieters make mistakes most often when they unexpectedly face a hard eating situation. You can limit this by thinking through your day as a whole and taking the time to figure out when dieting might be difficult that day. This way, if it does become difficult, you’ll be in a much better position to handle it because you’ll be prepared mentally.

October 26, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 26, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to go off my plan this one time; it won’t really matter.

Response: Actually, it does matter because every time I go off my plan, I make it harder to stick to my plan other times because I open the door to exceptions. Once the door to exceptions is closed, dieting is so much easier!

October 25, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 25, 2016/beckadmin

10 minutes of exercise is so much better than 0 minutes. 
Walking for 10 minutes won’t necessarily burn many calories but it has so many other benefits: the act of making yourself do it exercises your resistance muscle, you’ll be proving to yourself that healthy habits are a priority, you’ll get stress relief and mental health benefits, and 10 minutes might over time turn into more.  

 

October 24, 2016 – Monday Motivation

October 24, 2016/beckadmin

Losing weight will likely affect so many different areas of your life for the better and, as you start losing, you’re undoubtedly discover additional benefits along the way. While dieting can feel hard at times, there’s no end to what you’ll get in return.

October 21, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 21, 2016/beckadmin

Don’t use the weekend as an excuse to give up working on your goals. They’re too important for that! This weekend, stay focused on what you’re working on, why you’re working on it, and the steps you need to take to achieve it. It’s not always easy but it’s always worth it.

October 20, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

October 20, 2016/beckadmin

Don’t buy Halloween candy until right before the 31st! Buying it in advance will only mean that you’ll have to use more willpower to resist it. Even if it means all the “good stuff” is gone by the time you buy it, even better! The less you like the candy the easier it will be to stay on track.

October 19, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 19, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve messed up with eating and exercise today. Maybe I can’t do this.

Response: So I messed up. So what?! I haven’t ruined everything. One day is just one day. There are thousands of other days that can go exceptionally well. Just get back on track and this one day won’t mean anything.

October 18, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 18, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re feeling stressed, anxious, tired, bored, lonely, or angry, your body is not hungry so food is not the answer. Look for other ways to help you deal with these things. Since hunger is not the problem, food is not the only solution.

October 17, 2016 – Monday Motivation

October 17, 2016/beckadmin

Eating something unplanned tastes good for a few moments, but feeling in control of your eating and being at a healthy weight feels good every second of every day. Hang in there, you can do it today!

October 14, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 14, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend, I just want to relax and not think about healthy eating,” remind yourself that if you get off track and overeat, you’ll think a lot about it Monday morning when you’re struggling to get back on track and feeling guilty about the weekend. So think about it now, or think about it later, either way you’re going to think about it.

October 13, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

October 13, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, you’re only one workout away from a good mood. If you’re in a bad mood, instead of eating to make yourself feel better, consider getting some exercise! It will give you the good feelings without the guilt.

October 12, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 12, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll start my diet tomorrow.

Response: Waiting for tomorrow just doesn’t work! The longer I put it off, the harder it will be because I’ll only strengthen my giving-in habit. If I wait for the the “right time” to start dieting, or if I wait for “tomorrow,” to start, I may never start! Besides, today is yesterday’s tomorrow, which means I should start RIGHT NOW!

October 11, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 11, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight,” remind yourself that this is actually when it’s most critical to get on the scale to hold yourself accountable. It’s important need to find out if you’ve gained weight so you can figure out what mistakes you may have made and correct them. Once you face facts, you can start the process of changing them!

October 10, 2016 – Monday Motivation

October 10, 2016/beckadmin

Every time you go to bed after having a good eating day, you will feel great. And every morning you wake up after having had a good eating day the day before, you will feel great. This week, make a commitment to yourself to feel great by committing to having a good eating week!

October 7, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 7, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, losing weight does entail turning down some food some of the time, but not all food all of the time! This weekend, focus on the food that you WILL be eating, not on the food you won’t.

October 6, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

October 6, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t feel like having to work on my dieting skills,” remind yourself, “That’s okay! I do lots of things every day that I don’t feel like doing but I do them anyway. It’s worth it to me to do them, whether or not I feel like it, because it will help me achieve my goals. Besides, I even MORE don’t feel like staying overweight.”

October 5, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 5, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just want to eat and eat.

Response: Overeating NEVER feels as good as thinking about it does. My sabotaging thoughts try to convince me that I’ll love it and feel really happy if I overeat, but in fact, that’s never the case. When I overeat, I end up feeling bad, guilty, and angry with myself.

October 4, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 4, 2016/beckadmin

It tends to only be when dieters are off track and struggling that they wonder, “Is it worth it to keep putting in the effort?” When they’re on track and feeling in control, they don’t struggle with this question. If you’re asking yourself, “Is it worth it?” remind yourself that once you’re back on track and feeling great, the answer is always YES!

October 3, 2016 – Monday Motivation

October 3, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re not doing as well with healthy eating as you’d like and think, “I can’t even do it now, how will I ever be able to do it?” remind yourself that not being totally on track is NOT an indication that you can’t do it (now or in the future), it’s simply a sign that you need more practice. But like any skill, the more you practice, the better you’ll get. This is no different!

September 30, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 30, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, your body does not know or care that it’s a weekend; it processes calories the same regardless of the day of the week. If your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then weekends are a break from work, NOT a break from healthy eating.

September 29, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 29, 2016/beckadmin

When you make a dieting mistake, what do you usually say to yourself? How does that compare to what you would say to your best friend if she told you she made a mistake? Very likely you’d be a lot nicer (and more constructive) to your friend than you are to yourself, which isn’t fair! When you make a mistake, be kind to yourself. It will help you recover more quickly and feel better in general.

September 28, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 28, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to practice all of these skills before starting my diet because that will take too long.

Response: When has jumping right into a diet EVER helped me to lose weight and, more importantly, keep it off? Now I’m doing things differently by FIRST learning skills that will enable me to actually stick to my diet before making major changes in my eating. Besides, if it takes an extra two months in the beginning, what does that matter in the course of the rest of my life?

September 27, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 27, 2016/beckadmin

It’s much easier to decide before you start eating how much you’re going to have. If you’re trying to decide how many more to eat as you’re eating, it’s much harder to make a good decision. 

Here’s a great Response Card one of our dieters made about this issue:
Toss excess portion of whatever (ie-pasta) before I cook. When it comes to dipping crackers/such, create portion of crackers/dip before I eat. Eating is more enjoyable when I'm not worrying/obsessing about how many more I’m going to have.

September 26, 2016 – Monday Motivation

September 26, 2016/beckadmin

Good reminder: Instead of thinking about having to eat healthfully and exercise as burdens, remember that you’re fortunate enough to be able to do them. How lucky are you to have healthy food available? How lucky are you to be able to exercise? These things are not burdens, they’re blessings, and it’s helpful to conceptualize them as such.

September 23, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 23, 2016/beckadmin

Successful dieters and maintainers stay successful because they don’t eat whatever they want, whenever they want. 
Remember – your body doesn’t know or care what day it is, so if you want to be successful (or stay successful) you have to stay in control of your eating, even though it’s the weekend.

September 22, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

September 22, 2016/beckadmin

You can eat a slice of pie in 5 bites or in 25 bites. Either way it's the same amount of food, but if you eat it in 25 bites, you get to enjoy it 20 more times.

September 21, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 21, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m not going to do my dieting tasks because I don’t want to.

Response: ‘I don’t want to’ is just my adolescent rebellion talking. Listening to that voice has never helped me reach my goals so I’m not going to pay any attention to it.

September 20, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 20, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been good all day so I can eat this [extra food] now,” remind yourself, “Just because I’ve been good all day DOESN'T mean I can eat extra now. It’s the ‘extra’ that will stop me from losing weight.”

September 19, 2016 – Monday Motivation

September 19, 2016/beckadmin

We know it’s not here yet, but holiday season is right around the corner. It’s imperative that you get your eating in a good place now, so that you have some positive momentum built up before things get harder. Now is the time to take control!

 

September 16, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 16, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re eating at a restaurant this weekend, chances are the portions they serve you will be too big. Deciding in advance how much you’re going to eat (before you put a bite of food in your mouth) and saving the rest to bring home for another meal the next day is such a win/win/win. Doing so means you get to eat a reasonable amount of calories and stay on track, it means you get to enjoy the good restaurant food twice, and it means you get to save money because you get two meals for the price of one.

 

September 15, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 15, 2016/beckadmin

Two of our clients recently did the hunger experiment (where they went from breakfast to dinner without eating to prove to themselves that hunger comes and goes and that, compared to other physically uncomfortable things they’ve been through, hunger is barely even on the same scale). One came to the conclusion that hunger is an irritation and the other that hunger is an inconvenience. We love both of these words because they put hunger in its place and illustrate perfectly that hunger is not the most pleasant sensation in the world, but it’s not the worst thing, either. Not by a long shot.

September 14, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 14, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: When I’m counting calories, I have to make sure I’m counting everything perfectly and exactly.

Response: This is impossible! If I put the burden on myself to be perfect and exact when counting, then I’ll spend way too long trying to figure out what I’m eating, counting calories will feel like a huge burden, and I’m likely to give up. There are many times when being exact is impossible (like when I eat at a restaurant) so I need to give up the idea that perfection is achievable. Instead, I need to spend a short amount of time and come up with a reasonable guess and then move on! Chances are sometimes I’ll overestimate and sometimes I’ll underestimate and it will even out.

September 13, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 13, 2016/beckadmin

Initially dieters often think they can get away with not practicing some of the dieting skills. The truth is that yes, for a while you probably can get away with this but if your goal is PERMANENT weight loss then at some point (whether it's 2 months or 2 years from now) it WILL catch up with you.

September 12, 2016 – Monday Motivation

September 12, 2016/beckadmin

If you don’t want to work on losing weight forever, then do what you need to do NOW! Make this the day/week/month/year that you finally achieve your goals and spend the next decades enjoying being at a lower weight, instead of struggling to get there. Do it now!

September 9, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 9, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, being on track does not necessarily mean you’re perfect. It means that if you make mistakes, you recover right away and don’t let yourself keep making more. This weekend, instead of thinking you need to be perfect (and then getting off track and deciding to wait until Monday to recover), focus first and foremost on recovering immediately from mistakes and on continuing to stay on track and move forward. Guaranteed this approach will help you have a much better weekend overall!

September 8, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

September 8, 2016/beckadmin

Here is a great Response Card that one of our clients recently made about emotional eating:

“Eating doesn't solve the problem. It temporarily distracts from the problem and it is effective in the short term, but it never solves the problem and only ultimately gives me two problems. Do I want one problem or two? One cause of stress or two? One cause of my bad mood or two?”

September 7, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 7, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Counting calories is too inconvenient.

Response: What’s my goal? Is it to be as inconvenienced as little as possible, or is it to lose weight and keep it off? Unfortunately, these goals are not compatible, so I have to figure out which is more important to me. On the other hand, the reality is that being overweight is terribly inconvenient, so it’s not as if I avoid inconvenience in not counting calories. Plus, it gets easier the more I do it.

September 6, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 6, 2016/beckadmin

If you give into a craving because you think, “I just don’t want to have to think about dieting right now,” remind yourself that there’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’ Either you can think about it now, and put in the effort to stay on track (and feel really proud of yourself!), or you can give in, and then think about it later when you’re feeling mad at yourself, when you’ve reinforced bad habits, and when you’re struggling to get back on track. All you’ll be doing in the latter is postponing thinking about it and in doing so, bring on many negative consequences.

September 5, 2016 – Monday Motivation

September 5, 2016/beckadmin

(For many people) today is a day off from work, NOT a day off from practicing good eating behaviors. Labor Day, along with 20 other holidays, happens every year so it's not a reasonable excuse to overeat. Stay in control and guaranteed Tuesday morning you'll be so happy you did.

September 2, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 2, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re going to be eating around other people this weekend and think, “Everyone will think negatively of me if I eat differently,” remind yourself, “First of all, it’s likely that some people will be pleased that I’m losing weight and others won’t notice or care what I’m eating. But even if people do notice and even if they do think something negative, SO WHAT?!”

September 1, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

September 1, 2016/beckadmin

When you want to eat something that’s not on your plan, tell yourself, “Oh, well.” Oh, well means: I don’t like this situation [that I can’t at this moment eat this food I want] but there’s nothing I can do to change it, not if I want to reach my goals. So I have to accept it, stop struggling against it, and move on.

August 31, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 31, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I won’t be able to resist the desserts at the party.

Response: No once will force me to eat. If I prepare myself in advance and use the skills I’ve learned, I’ll be able to stay on track. Telling myself I won’t be able to resist is giving myself an excuse not to try. That’s not okay!

August 30, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 30, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to buy the whole box of cookies. I’ll be able to stop at one,” remind yourself that, most likely, history shows that it’s incredibly difficult to stop at one and you’re likely to end up eating more than you had planned. Set yourself up for success by only buying a single serving, or throwing away all but one serving before you start eating. While you may be able to stop at one, why take the risk when you don’t have to?

August 29, 2016 – Monday Motivation

August 29, 2016/beckadmin

We’ve asked you to do it before and we’re going to ask you to do it again. This week, focus on giving yourself credit. Give yourself credit for each diet skill you practice, every sabotaging thought you respond to, every craving you overcome, every good eating decisions you make, and every bit of exercise you do. You’re doing so much good stuff, it’s time to start paying attention to it.

August 26, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 26, 2016/beckadmin

If you know that you’re going to a dinner or event this weekend that will be difficult to manage:

1. Write out a plan (a mental plan is too easy to change)

2. Write out Response Cards that might be helpful.

Set an alarm so that you don’t forget and read your plan, your Response Cards, and your Advantages List before going to the event. As you’re reading your Advantages List, remind yourself, “The reason I’m going to stick to my plan is that I can achieve all these things. It’s worth it!

August 25, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

August 25, 2016/beckadmin

Unless you have medical condition that makes getting hungry dangerous, it’s important to keep in mind that hunger is an irritation, nothing worse! It’s not the most pleasant sensation in the world, but not the most unpleasant one, either. Most people who don’t have a weight problem get (at least mildly) hungry before meals and snacks. It’s normal!

August 24, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 24, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I really want to eat [this food] right now, even though it’s not on my plan.

Response: If I really want this food, I can always plan to have it tomorrow. It’s not that I’m depriving myself of this food, I’m just depriving myself of it in this moment. I absolutely can have it, I’ll just put it in my plan for tomorrow.

 

August 23, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 23, 2016/beckadmin

Celebrate the scale going down in non-food ways. If you celebrate it with (extra) food, the only thing you’re doing is sending the scale right back up.

August 22, 2016 – Monday Motivation

August 22, 2016/beckadmin

Today is a new day and the start of a new week. Whatever you did or didn’t eat this weekend is now in the past. Put all your energy into making today go exactly as you want it to!

August 19, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 19, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, if you make a mistake and think, “Oh no, I’ve eaten something I shouldn’t! I’ve really blown it for the day so I might as well just get back on track on Monday,” remind yourself that if you were washing your nice china and dropped a plate and it broke, would you say, “Well, I’ve blown it now!” and then throw the rest to the floor? Of course not! Making an eating mistake is like dropping a plate. You can stop the damage after one and be fine, but the more you go on to eat off track, the more plates you throw to the ground. Don’t keep throwing plates on the floor until Monday!

August 18, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

August 18, 2016/beckadmin

If you crave something sweet after a meal and are trying to break the habit, do this: after you finish eating, set a timer for 20 minutes and immediately engage in a (planned in advance) distracting activity. Tell yourself that you’re not allowed to consider eating something sweet until the timer goes off. By the time it does, it’s very likely that the craving will have passed completely because cravings don’t last forever, and they go away much more quickly the moment we get really distracted.

 

August 17, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 17, 2016/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I don’t feel like eating my planned dinner so I’m going to stop on the way home and get something else, instead.
 
Response: If I stop and get something else, it’s a lose/lose. It’ll be spending extra money AND extra calories. If I eat what I have at home, which is still something that I like, it’s a win/win. I save money AND I eat something healthy that I can feel good about

August 16, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 16, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re looking at your plate of food and think, “This isn’t going to fill me up,” make sure you let your STOMACH be the judge, not your eyes. Eat what’s on your plate slowly and mindfully and then think about whether or not you still really feel hungry. Chances are it was enough food because our stomachs often need less than our eyes/mouths want to eat.

August 15, 2016 – Monday Motivation

August 15, 2016/beckadmin

Important reminder: losing weight is hard at times, but it’s so incredibly worth it. It’s not as if you have to put in all the time and energy to stick to your diet, resist cravings, exercise, etc. and get nothing in return. When you do these things, you get the MOST IMPORTANT things in return! Losing weight is hard but the advantages of doing it are profound and life changing.

August 12, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 12, 2016/beckadmin

When dining with other people, you’re much more likely to get distracted by conversation and end up eating a lot more than you had planned. To help guard against that, try immediately portioning off how much you’re going to eat, before you take a single bite, so that way even if you eat while distracted, at least you won’t eat extra. What other eating strategies do you use?

August 11, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 11, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “Either I'm totally perfect on my diet or I'm not on it at all,” remind yourself, “Dieting is NOT all-or-nothing and treating it this way has NEVER helped me reach my goals. I have to stop allowing a mistake be an excuse for giving up because, like everyone else, I'm not perfect and am definitely going to slip up sometimes.

August 10, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 10, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: My life is so busy, I just don’t have the time to diet correctly.

Response: I don’t have time because I’m not making time. If I had to get dialysis every morning I would make the time for it NO MATTER WHAT. Dieting takes a lot of time in the beginning so I have to make it a top priority it or will not happen, but as it gets easier it will take less and less time. It’s all a matter of priorities.

August 9, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 9, 2016/beckadmin

When you impulsively eat standing up, you’re telling yourself that it doesn’t really matter and that there won’t be any consequences. But there will be because EVERY bite of food you eat has calories. Even if you’re only eating vegetables standing up today, tomorrow it might be chocolate.

August 8, 2016 – Monday Motivation

August 8, 2016/beckadmin

Often dieters think, “I wish I could eat whatever I want and as much as I want.” However, when dieters eat in an unrestricted way, while they may enjoy the food while they’re eating it, usually the whole rest of the time they feel bad, out of control, worried about their weight, at the mercy of their cravings, etc. When they control and limit their eating, they feel GREAT most of the time. Remember – what you may think you want in terms of eating may not be what actually feels good.

August 5, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 5, 2016/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake this weekend, don’t buy into the idea that you shouldn’t eat anything else for the rest of the day to make up for it. Telling yourself you can’t eat is like punishing yourself and you DON’T deserve punishment for making a mistake. Instead, remind yourself that you made a mistake because you’re human, but you can recover right from that moment and continue to eat reasonably for the rest of the day.

August 4, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

August 4, 2016/beckadmin

Some dieters tend to consistently eat until they’re overly full – often saying something like, “I just like to eat.” We remind them that if they work on portion control, they’re not giving up eating, they’re only giving up OVEReating and the uncomfortable sensation of having eaten too much.

August 3, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 3, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I want to get off track so I can eat the foods I really want to eat.

Response: There is no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. And, when I eat it on track, I enjoy it much more because I don’t feel guilty about eating it.

August 2, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 2, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re feeling deprived about what you’re eating (or not eating) because you’re comparing yourself to what others are doing, remember that your needs are unique and different from everyone else’s. No one else is exactly your age, your weight, with your metabolism and your weight loss goals. You have to eat what’s right for YOU, not what’s right for anyone else.

August 1, 2016 – Monday Motivation

August 1, 2016/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, there are a lot of hard moments.  Moments at parties, at events, when you’re having a craving, when you’re feeling stressed or anxious and want to eat. But there are also so, so many great moments. When you bend over and your stomach doesn’t get in the way. When you get a compliment. When you feel great at the end of the day. When you get on the scale stress-free. When you overcome a craving and feel really proud.  Make sure you pay attention to the great moments! What are some of yours?

July 29, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 29, 2016/beckadmin

The sabotaging thought, “I’m going to eat this because I don’t care,” can be especially strong on weekends. If this comes up for you, remind yourself that while it’s true you may not care right in that moment, you absolutely will care later on (like when you get on scale Monday morning!), so you can’t let this one moment of not caring stand in your way.

July 28, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

July 28, 2016/beckadmin

We’ve reminded you of this before and we’ll remind you again: Make sure you’re drinking enough water, especially as the temperature continues to rise!

July 27, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 27, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t/don’t want to work on healthy eating while on vacation this summer.

Response: When I let my eating get out of control on vacation, it makes the vacation worse, not better, because I end up feeling guilty and bad. Staying in control makes the whole trip better because I feel so much better. And, doing so means I won’t have to worry about getting back on track or facing the scale once I get home.

July 26, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 26, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care what anybody around you is eating. When others are eating a lot, it normalizes overeating and makes it feel like it’s okay but it’s not! It’s irrelevant to your body how much others are eating so make sure what you’re eating is the right amount for YOU.

July 25, 2016 – Monday Motivation

July 25, 2016/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, keep in mind that the number on the scale is not the only thing that counts; it’s also about how you feel about yourself and your eating. When you gain control over your eating and know that you’re no longer at the mercy of your hunger, cravings, and emotions, you’ll feel GREAT, regardless of whether the number on the scale is what you ultimately hope to see.

July 22, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 22, 2016/beckadmin

If you have trouble with grazing during on weekends, remember that likely a lot of that extraneous eating is about being bored or at loose ends, not about hunger, so eating is not the answer. Go find something else to do!

July 21, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 21, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve always been an emotional eater; I can’t change,” it’s important to remember that somewhere along the line you learned to eat when you were feeling bad, and now you can unlearn it. Habits can always be changed with consistent work and practice. Just because you’ve always done something a certain way doesn’t mean it has to be that way forever.

June 21, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 21, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, if you’re stressed and you want to eat, what your body doesn’t need is food (because it’s not about hunger), what it does need is a means to calm down.

When you’re stressed, make sure you give yourself other alternatives (like taking a walk, talking to a friend, reading a blog post, doing some deep breathing) so that you aren’t constantly at risk for eating.

July 20, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 20, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t ask my family to make changes just because I need to lose weight.

Response: My needs are more important than my family’s wants. I’m entitled to institute changes so that I can reach important goals. Not making changes hasn’t worked.

July 19, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 19, 2016/beckadmin

When you encounter food pushers, remind yourself, “It’s not my responsibility to make others feel good about what they eat and drink, but it IS my responsibility to make healthy choices that make me feel good.” Turning down food doesn’t mean you’re telling food pushers not to eat or drink something, so it’s not your responsibility if they then ultimately decide to change their eating as a result of you saying no.

July 18, 2016 – Monday Motivation

July 18, 2016/beckadmin

You can’t undo any eating from the past, you can only control what you do eat in the future (so there’s no point in berating yourself for past mistakes). Instead, focus on what you can do to make TODAY’s eating a success!

July 15, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 15, 2016/beckadmin

If you have trouble fitting in necessary tasks during the weekend, like exercising, food shopping, or meal prep, then before the weekend begins make sure you schedule them in and write it down. Doing so will increase your commitment and exponentially increase the chances that it’ll actually happen.

July 14, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

July 14, 2016/beckadmin

If you eat one cookie and think, “I’m dissatisfied, I want to eat more,” remind yourself that you’ll likely still be dissatisfied after two cookies, or three, or four, so you might as well just stop here!

July 13, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 13, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought:Things in my life are really hard right now and I just want to eat to make them better.

Response: Actually, when I get off track with my eating, I feel so much worse because I feel out of control and badly about myself. Don’t make a hard situation harder by getting off track. Instead, even though it’s difficult, it’s so important that I put in the effort to stay on track so at least, if nothing else, I can feel good about my eating and I can feel in control of the one thing I can control.

July 12, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 12, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re having a hard time throwing something away because you think it will be a waste of money, remind yourself that the money is already gone. Eating the extra food won’t bring it back; the only thing it will do is cause you to take in too many calories and exercise your giving-in muscle.

July 11, 2016 – Monday Motivation

July 11, 2016/beckadmin

We asked one dieter: What’s one advantage you’ve gotten from losing weight? She said, “Now, when I hear about an event coming up, my first thought isn’t, ‘I need to lose weight before that’ and ‘Oh no, what will I wear?’ Now, my first thought is, ‘that sounds great, I can’t wait!’” Now you: What is one of your advantages?

July 8, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 8, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, spend time focusing on eating slowly and mindfully. Really taste the food you’re eating and enjoy every bite. Doing will help you be satisfied with less because it enables you to reach physical AND psychological satisfaction at the same time, which is impossible to do when eating too quickly or mindlessly.

July 7, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

July 7, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re feeling bored with the foods you’re eating, it’s critical that you start introducing more variety. If you put yourself into the trap of thinking you have to keep eating what you’ve been eating, eventually you’ll end up rebelling against it and getting off track.

July 6, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 6, 2016/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage: I just want to treat myself with extra food today.

Response: Extra food that sabotages my diet is ultimately not treat. Putting on a dress and zipping it up easily, going biking with more stamina than you’ve had in a long time, feeling in control and proud of your eating when you go to bed at night – these things are real treats.

July 5, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 5, 2016/beckadmin

It’s important to keep reminding yourself that if your weight is up one day or one week, it’s not a catastrophe and it doesn’t mean you did anything wrong. It happens to everyone. Keep doing what you’re doing and the scale will go down again.

July 1, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 1, 2016/beckadmin

It’s July 4th Weekend! This weekend, if you think “It’s not fair that I can’t eat like everyone else on the 4th of July,” remind yourself, “My body doesn’t know or care that it’s a holiday. It also doesn’t know or care what everyone around me is eating, it only knows what I eat. But it’s not all or nothing! If I stay in control, I can still enjoy some food AND enjoy all the benefits of losing weight.”

June 30, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

June 30, 2016/beckadmin

If dieting is feeling really hard and you’re feeling a lot of deprivation, it may be because you’re being too restrictive.  Make sure you don’t fall back into old dieting notions of thinking you have to cut out certain foods entirely. Doing so always ultimately backfires because you’ll start rebelling against what you’re doing and go too far the other way.

June 29, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 29, 2016/beckadmin

Wednesday Sabotage:  I’m going to just give in and eat [this unplanned food] because I don’t want to think about dieting right now.

Response:  There’s no such thing as not thinking about it, just delaying thinking about it. If I choose to ‘not think about it’ now and eat off my plan, I’ll definitely think about it later when I’m regretting it. If I choose to think about it now and put in the effort to resist, I get to feel really proud of myself later.  But either way I’m going to think about it.

 

 

June 28, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 28, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to overeat something because it tastes really good, remind yourself, “This is not my last chance to have this food! I can always plan to have it again so I don’t need to load up on it now. There will always be an opportunity to have more.”

June 27, 2016 – Monday Motivation

June 27, 2016/beckadmin

We asked one maintainer how she stays motivated and she told us, “I feel happy in my body every day and I love not worrying about what to wear. I try to never take these things for granted and constantly remind myself how worth it this is.”

June 24, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 24, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, work on giving yourself CREDIT! Really focus on and point out to yourself all the great things you’re doing each day. Doing so will make you feel good about what you’re doing and help you to stay on track during these tough weekend days.

June 23, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

June 23, 2016/beckadmin

If dieting is feeling really hard and you’re feeling a lot of deprivation, it may be because you’re being too restrictive. Make sure you don’t fall back into old dieting notions of thinking you have to cut out certain foods entirely. Doing so always ultimately backfires because you’ll start rebelling against what you’re doing and go too far the other way.

June 22, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 22, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I really want to eat a second piece of cake, even though I only planned to have one.

Response: While I might enjoy it for a few minutes (although chances are I won’t enjoy it as much as the first piece because the whole time I’m eating it I’m going to know I shouldn’t be doing this), I’ll ultimately end up regretting getting off track for so much longer. It’s not worth it.

June 20, 2016 – Monday Motivation

June 20, 2016/beckadmin

This week, instead of having a number goal in mind (meaning, a number you’ll see on the scale), have a habit goal in mind. Commit to something like eating everything sitting down, or eating just one dessert a day, or going for a 30-minute walk 5 times a week, or eating more vegetables with meals. Doing so will give you something concrete to work on, instead of just stressing about the number.

June 17, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 17, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I can get back on track after the weekend,” remind yourself, “How many times have I ‘started my diet’ on a Monday? I could have lose weight and kept it off for years now if I didn’t use that excuse.”

June 16, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

June 16, 2016/beckadmin

If you have tempting leftovers in your house, it’s critical to make a plan for exactly when and how much you’re going to have. That way, it will be much easier to resist them at any given moment because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “I don’t need to have this now, I get to have some for dinner tonight.” If you have no plan, resisting will be much more difficult.

June 15, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 15, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve worked really hard. If I don’t lose a lot of weight this week I’ll be too discouraged to keep dieting.

Response: It’s very unlikely I’ll lose a lot of weight in one week (because I’m not doing anything drastic). I need to adjust my expectations. If I wanted to become a body builder and put in a lot of hard work one week, I wouldn’t expect to see huge muscle growth immediately. This is the same thing. Weight loss will come but it likely won’t be as quickly or immediate as I’d like. As long as I stick with it, I’ll get there.

June 14, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 14, 2016/beckadmin

It’s important for you to send yourself the message that there’s no food that you can eat when you’re off track that you can’t also eat when you’re on track. If you have foods that seem like “off limits” when you’re “being good” then you’ll always be at risk for getting off track because you’ll want to eat those foods you’re forbidding yourself.

June 13, 2016 – Monday Motivation

June 13, 2016/beckadmin

Some dieters think, “I don’t deserve credit until I reach my weight loss goals.” This is 100% NOT TRUE because all the small steps along the way are what add up to the big changes. If you’re not already, right this moment start giving yourself credit for all the progress you’ve made and all the good things you’re doing.

June 10, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 10, 2016/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend, it’s important to remember that you don’t always have control over what is being served, but you always can control how much you actually eat.

June 9, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

June 9, 2016/beckadmin

Want to know something you can do to make controlling your eating so much easier? GO TO BED!! Getting enough sleep is so critical to help regulate hunger and cravings. Being sleep deprived makes everything harder, and eating is no exception. If you’re tempted to say up late, think about how much harder it will make your day tomorrow vs. how much better it will be if you get enough sleep. Losing weight is hard enough, don’t make it unnecessarily harder for yourself.

June 8, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 8, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I want to eat more dessert, if I don’t I’ll be depriving myself.

Response: It’s true that by not eating more, I’m depriving myself of extra dessert. But when I don’t deprive myself of extra dessert, I DO then deprive myself of losing weight and reaching my important goals. It’s not that I can't have any dessert, but when I have extra I then lose out on other (more important) things.

June 7, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 7, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to skip meals or snacks, thinking that it will help you lose weight faster, don’t do it! It doesn’t work. When people skip meals/snacks, it tends to make them much hungrier later, and therefore much harder to control their eating. Also, they then often say to themselves, “Well I didn’t eat lunch so it’s okay to have more dinner,” and then wind up taking in way more calories than they would have if they had just had a reasonable lunch.

 

June 3, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 3, 2016/beckadmin

We’ve said it once and we’ll say it a thousand more times: it just doesn’t work to be consistent and controlled during the week and then overeat on weekends. This might enable you to maintain your weight (although it’s likely at some point it will cause you to gain) but it likely won’t enable you to actually lose weight. When working on weight loss, weekend eating is just as important as weekday eating.

June 2, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

June 2, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, hunger and cravings ALWAYS come and go, they never get worse and worse and worse until you can’t stand them. If you feel hunger or craving and give it enough time, it will pass entirely. If you don’t eat, the hunger will come back, but then it will go away again. You can handle it!

June 1, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 1, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just want to eat and eat and eat [pizza].

Response: While it’s true overeating [pizza] feels good in the moment, ultimately it makes me feel physically AND psychologically sick because my stomach hurts and I feel so regretful and mad at myself. It’s not worth it!

May 31, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 31, 2016/beckadmin

A dieter recently said to us, “Working on losing weight is like having a second job.” Especially in the beginning, that’s absolutely right! It does take an enormous amount of time and energy in the beginning, BUT it gets easier and the advantages that come from gaining control and losing weight are so enormous.

May 30, 2016 – Monday Motivation

May 30, 2016/beckadmin

If you have barbecues or parties to go to today, make sure you think about your eating in advance and make a plan. And when you get there, practice good eating habits: eat every bite sitting down, slowly, and mindfully. Doing so will help you cut out hundreds of calories you could easily eat while grazing standing up, will hold you more accountable for what you do eat, and will help you to enjoy your food so much more.

May 27, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 27, 2016/beckadmin

This Memorial Day weekend, if you’re at events and think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat normally like everyone else,” remind yourself that you are eating 100% normally for someone (of your age and gender) with your weight loss/weight maintenance goals.

May 26, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

May 26, 2016/beckadmin

If you have highly tempting food in your house, it’s necessary to have a plan for exactly when you’re going to eat it. That way, it’ll be easier to resist at any one moment because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “I’m not having it right now, but that’s okay because I know I’ll get to enjoy it tomorrow.”

May 25, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 25, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: If I don’t have enough time for a long workout, it’s not worth doing anything.

Response: ANY amount of time spent exercising is better than no amount of time. It’s important to sometimes work out for smaller amounts of time so that I prove to myself that exercising doesn’t have to be ALL or NOTHING, it’s somewhere in the middle.

May 24, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 24, 2016/beckadmin

Just because food is free, doesn’t mean you should eat it (after all, it’s not calorie-free). Similarly, just because you've paid for it doesn’t necessarily mean you should eat the whole thing. If you eat extra food, whether it's free or you paid for it, you’ll gain weight.

May 23, 2016 – Monday Motivation

May 23, 2016/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they sometimes forget how much better it feels to be in control of their eating and to be feeling good about themselves and their eating. If you’ve been off track, remind yourself how great getting back on track will feel and start right this moment!

May 18, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 18, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting is too overwhelming so I might as well give up.

Response: Dieting does NOT have to be overwhelming. All I have to do is work on one small change at a time, master it, and then move on to the next one. Soon enough, all the small changes will add up to really big ones.

May 17, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 17, 2016/beckadmin

If you use food as a reward, then dieting can feel like punishment. Food is something to be enjoyed, but it’s critical that you find other ways to reward yourself so that maintaining healthy eating doesn’t feel as if you are depriving yourself.

May 13, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 13, 2016/beckadmin

Do you have a plan for how you’ll handle your eating this weekend? If not, make one now! Dieters consistently have a much easier time staying on track when they think through the weekend ahead of time and make decisions in advance. It’s worth it!

May 12, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

May 12, 2016/beckadmin

We’ve mentioned this before, but when you’re working on losing weight, it’s important that you work on things besides just what you eat. How are you doing with exercise, with sleep, and with drinking water? Don’t drop the focus on these things, too. They’re important for weight loss and for general health.

May 11, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 11, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to practice my diet skills right now. I just don’t feel like it.

Response: I don’t always want to practice my dieting skills but I ALWAYS want to be thinner/healthier/happier, so I have to do them anyway.

May 10, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 10, 2016/beckadmin

Often dieters say things like, “I had such a hard week.” In many cases, however, it was really only hard for a few hours on a few days, but they tend to let the memory of one or two hard times color their perception of the week as a whole. It’s important to maintain a clear perspective so you don’t get discouraged by circumstances that aren’t an accurate reflection of reality.

May 9, 2016 – Monday Motivation

May 9, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re feeling discouraged today, DON’T GIVE UP! Whenever you’re working on something really difficult, there will be bumps along the way and it won’t always run smoothly – but that’s okay. The most important thing is to not give up and keep working on moving forward. You will get better at it!

May 6, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 6, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, there’s nothing magical about losing weight. If you take in more calories than your body needs (even though it’s the weekend) you’ll gain weight. This weekend, work on finding ways to relax and treat yourself that don’t involve food. While doing so may not initially feel as pleasurable, remind yourself that it doesn't come with the hugely negative consequence of gaining weight.

May 5, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

May 5, 2016/beckadmin

In dieting, like in many things in life, it’s rarely all-or-nothing. It’s not as if you either can eat as much as you want, whenever you want or you can’t eat any food you enjoy. There is a huge middle ground! You can definitely have some favorite foods, some of the time while also enjoying all the benefits of weight loss. 
Remember: it’s NOT all-or-nothing.

May 4, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 4, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The healthy food on my diet plan costs more than the food I really want to eat. I can’t justify spending the extra money.

Response: It’s worth it and I’m worth it! What a great way to spend money – toward a goal that I really, really want to achieve.

May 3, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 3, 2016/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you have to be committed to the process. Dieters who undermine their commitment by saying things to themselves like, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” or “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things,” will have a much, much harder time getting themselves to just do what they need to do.

May 2, 2016 – Monday Motivation

May 2, 2016/beckadmin

It’s a new month and the perfect time to commit to working on a healthy eating plan. Instead of saying, “I’ll start tomorrow/next week/next month,” start RIGHT NOW and if you do, imagine how much better you’ll be feeling by the end of the month!

April 29, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 29, 2016/beckadmin

No matter how smart, successful, and disciplined you are in every other area of life, this does not automatically guarantee that you will be good at losing and maintaining weight, because doing so takes learning and practice of specific skills. So cut yourself a break and instead start working on what you need to do today!

April 28, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

April 28, 2016/beckadmin

When you eat because you’re feeling sad or stressed, remind yourself that what you’ll ultimately do is turn one problem into two – the original one that made you sad or stressed, and now additionally the problem of feeling badly about your eating, getting off track, and potentially jeopardizing your weight loss.

April 27, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 27, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just ate something I wasn’t supposed to. I’ve really blown it! I might as well keep eating whatever I want and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: If I was washing my nice china and accidentally broke a plate, I wouldn’t go to my china cabinet and smash all the rest of it. Dieting is the same – it makes NO SENSE to compound one mistake with more!

April 26, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 26, 2016/beckadmin

Just because food is free, doesn’t mean you should eat it (after all, it’s not calorie-free). Similarly, just because you've paid for it doesn’t necessarily mean you need to eat the whole thing.

 

April 22, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 22, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m so structured during the week, I just want to relax on the weekends,” remind yourself, “Not eating in a planned, structured way will mean I will continually take in too many calories so I have a choice: I can continue to not eat in a structured, planned way on the weekend or I can lose weight. I can’t have it both ways. Which would I rather?”

April 21, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

April 21, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re going on vacation this summer, remind yourself, “If I want to lose weight and keep it off, vacations are a break from work, not a break from healthy eating.”

April 20, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 20, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll make it for [overeating now] later by eating less during the week.

Response: “Making up for it later” just doesn’t work because there’s no guarantee that I’ll actually be able to get myself to eat less later on. It also doesn’t work because if I overeat, I reinforce my giving-in muscle and make it more likely I’ll overeat the next time, and the time after that. It’s important to continually reinforce the habit of eating consistently. It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit.

April 19, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 19, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “Everyone else is eating a lot, why can’t I?” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what anybody around you is eating, it only knows what you eat. So just because everyone else is eating (and drinking) a lot, doesn’t mean that you can. Your body simply doesn’t care what they’re doing.

April 18, 2016 – Monday Motivation

April 18, 2016/beckadmin

There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat.

Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward.

April 15, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 15, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I shouldn’t have control my eating on the weekend,” remind yourself, “Yes, I should, if I want to lose weight! Weekend eating is just as important as weekday eating, and if I keep overeating on the weekends, I’ll keep undoing all my hard work from the week.”

April 14, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 14, 2016/beckadmin

If you would feel entitled to turn down eating something because you were allergic to it, then you should feel entitled to turn down food because it wouldn’t help you reach your weight loss goals. Losing weight and being happy and healthier are just as legitimate reasons to say no as an allergy!

April 13, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 13, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to get on the scale because I think I’ve gained weight on my trip.

Response: By avoiding the scale, I’ll be exercising my giving-in muscle and proving to myself that I don’t have to take accountability for my actions. Even if I’ve gained weight, it’s much better to face it now and start getting back on track, than avoiding the scale, likely going on the have a bad eating day, and gaining even more. Getting on the scale right now is the first step on the road to getting back on track and feeling good.

April 12, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 12, 2016/beckadmin

When you’re working on losing weight, you’re entitled to ask your family members to make changes to help you reach your goals. Likely, most any food that you ask to keep out of the house (temporarily, until your resistance muscle gets stronger) doesn’t have much nutritional value, anyway!

April 11, 2016 – Monday Motivation

April 11, 2016/beckadmin

Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This week, commit to one or two smaller goals, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually the small goals lead up to big ones!

April 8, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 8, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “Weekends are for fun, not dieting,” remind yourself, “These two things are not mutually exclusive! I can have some fun with food and still maintain control, and I can have fun in so many ways that have nothing at all to do with eating.”

April 7, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

April 7, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re tempted to give in and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ll make up for it later by eating less,” remind yourself, “Making up for it later just doesn’t work because there’s no guarantee that I’ll actually be able to get myself to eat less later on. It also doesn’t work because if I overeat, I reinforce my giving-in muscle and make it more likely I’ll overeat the next time, and the time after that. It’s important to continually reinforce the habit of eating consistently. It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit.”

April 6, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 6, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I should be able to indulge every time I eat out.

Response: I can’t indulge every time I eat out AND lose weight because I’ll consistently be taking in too many calories. I might be able to indulge once a week or little less frequently, but I shouldn’t be able to indulge every time. It doesn’t work that way.

April 5, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 5, 2016/beckadmin

In order to lose weight and keep it off, it’s imperative that you’re committed to the process. Thoughts like, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” and, “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things,” will undermine your commitment and make it much harder for you to do what you need to do.

April 4, 2016 – Monday Motivation

April 4, 2016/beckadmin

Whether or not you feel good about your eating from the weekend, it’s over and done. Every day is a new opportunity to have a great eating day and start working towards achieving important goals. Start today, right this minute!

March 31, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

March 31, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re at a restaurant trying to decide between a healthy option and an unhealthy option, remind yourself that either way, once the meal is over, you’ll feel full. If you eat something healthy, you’ll feel full and happy, but if you eat something unhealthy, you’ll feel full and mad at yourself. Either way you’ll be full, but how do you to feel in addition to that?

March 30, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 30, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat whatever I feel like right now because I don’t want to think about dieting.

Response: Actually, the only thing I’ll be doing is postponing when I’ll think about dieting because if I go off track now, guaranteed I’ll spend a lot of time thinking and feeling bad about it later. So either I think about it now, stay on track, and feel great, or I get off track, think about it later, and feel badly. Either way I’ll think about it.

March 29, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 29, 2016/beckadmin

Eliminate the words, “I’ve blown it for the day,” from your vocabulary. Telling yourself that just gives you an excuse to continue overeating. Instead of thinking, “I’ve blown it,” remind yourself that you made a MISTAKE, but you’ll recover right away and have a great rest of the day.

March 28, 2016 – Monday Motivation

March 28, 2016/beckadmin

If you are feeling hopeless about healthy eating and weight loss, it may mean that you’re focusing too much on where you want to be and not enough on the progress you’ve already made. Ask yourself, “Have I lost any weight?” “Are any of my eating habits better than they were?” “Have I made any positive changes?” If the answer is yes, it means you’re on your way!

March 25, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 25, 2016/beckadmin

Weekends are often harder because we have unstructured time, which way too easily leads to unstructured eating. Even if you don’t plan the rest of your day, make sure you keep on a consist eating schedule this weekend. Doing so will enable you to stay on top of and in control of your eating, and ultimately will make you feel GOOD!

March 24, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

March 24, 2016/beckadmin

On track eating days aren’t perfect days! In order to lose weight and keep it off, you don’t need to be perfect because nobody is perfect. What you do need is to accept your mistakes, not beat yourself up, and get right back on track.

March 23, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 23, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m not happy with what I’m eating today so I’m going to stop recording/counting it.

Response: It’s critical for me to keep counting what I eat, even when I’m not happy with it. If I allow myself to stop recording my eating, then I’ll be sending myself the message that I won’t make myself take accountability for my eating and it makes it much more likely I’ll overeat the next time I’m tempted to. Continuing to write down my eating today will prove to myself that I face what I’m doing no matter what, and will make it much more likely I’ll stay on track the next time.

March 22, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 22, 2016/beckadmin

When you’re counting calories, make sure you don’t get bogged down in trying to be 100% accurate, especially when you’re eating something (like at a restaurant) that’s impossible to be sure of all the ingredients. If you get too perfectionistic, you’ll likely get frustrated and ultimately give up, telling yourself, “Since I can’t know what’s in it, I can’t count it.” Spend no more than 5 minutes and choose a calorie count that seems reasonable. That’s the best you can do!

March 21, 2016 – Monday Motivation

March 21, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things: losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more.

March 18, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 18, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat whatever I want (and other people can),” remind yourself, “Either way it’s unfair. Either I face unfairness by limiting my eating, or I face all the unfairnesses and hardships that come with being overweight. Besides, it’s a common misconception that other people can eat whatever they want and it’s highly likely that they’re limiting themselves, too.”

March 17, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

March 17, 2016/beckadmin

If you find yourself in front of the refrigerator at night, wanting to just eat anything, it’s likely that you’re TIRED. Instead of eating at night to help you stay awake, just go to bed! Sleep is what your body needs, not food.

March 16, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 16, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat 3 pieces of pizza because everyone else is.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care what anyone else around me is eating. It doesn’t know if everyone is eating 10 pieces of pizza or 0 pieces. It only knows what I eat, so just because everyone else is eating that much doesn’t necessarily mean that I can. Just because it feels okay doesn’t mean it is.

March 15, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 15, 2016/beckadmin

Old habits are hard to break and easy to slip back into. This is why, in dieting, every single time DOES matter because every single time you’re either reinforcing the old, adverse habit or the new, helpful habit. Don’t be fooled – this time matters!

March 14, 2016 – Monday Motivation

March 14, 2016/beckadmin

No matter how the weekend went, Monday is always an opportunity for a fresh start. Starting right now, give yourself credit for every positive thing you do towards meeting your weight loss goals. It will help you feel better, raise your confidence, and give you motivation to keep going.

March 11, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 11, 2016/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend and have trouble leaving food on your plate, remember: if you eat extra food you don’t need, it will be wasted in your body by turning to fat. In the trashcan or in your body, either way it’s wasted.

March 10, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

March 10, 2016/beckadmin

It takes less willpower to stick to an eating decision that you've made ahead of time than it does to try to use willpower in the moment to make a good decision. Plan in advance!

March 9, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 9, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat this because I really want some comfort food right now.

Response: It may be comfort now, but it won’t be comfort later when I’m feeling badly and guilty about it. Instead of overindulging, I need to go find something healthy and satisfying to do that will make me feel good now AND later.

March 8, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 8, 2016/beckadmin

If you tend to overeat at meals, worrying that you’ll get too hungry if you don’t, remember – there is always another meal or snack coming. There will always be more food!

March 7, 2016 – Monday Motivation

March 7, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been on a diet for 20 years. I’m just not the type of person who can lose weight,” remind yourself, “This time is different and I’m different now because I’m learning critical skills I didn’t know before. I can lose weight, and I will keep losing weight and keep it off because I will continue to use my skills.”

March 4, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 4, 2016/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters struggle with making an eating plan for the weekend because they have the thought, “I just want to be spontaneous.” It can be helpful to remind yourself, “Eating spontaneously has never helped me to lose weight and keep it off. Besides, I can be spontaneous in other ways so I don’t have to give up spontaneity completely.” This weekend, look for ways BESIDES eating to be spontaneous!

March 3, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

March 3, 2016/beckadmin

If you have a craving, remind yourself, “This is time limited. I will not be feeling this craving forever.” Set a timer for 20 minutes and get involved in something else. After the timer goes off, reassess if the craving is still as strong. Likely, it will have receded to a level that you can overcome, especially if you spent the 20 minutes doing something engrossing.

March 2, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 2, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t have time to eat everything slowly and mindfully. That’s just too inefficient.

Response: Which would be the greater inefficiency? Taking time (but not that much time) to sit and eat meals or all the inefficiencies that come from being overweight (time spent worrying about weight and feeling guilty about my eating, money and time spent on weight-related illnesses, how much longer it takes me to move around and walk places, etc.)?

March 1, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 1, 2016/beckadmin

Dieters get discouraged when the scale doesn’t go down, but it can also sabotage them if they think, “The scale is down, I can loosen up.” 
If you have this thought, remind yourself, “The scale went down because of all the things I’ve been doing. The moment I stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up.”

February 29, 2016 – Monday Motivation

February 29, 2016/beckadmin

If you feel discouraged when the scale either doesn’t go down or doesn’t go down as much as you think it should, remember that the scale is like a 3 year-old. It’s unpredictable, it’s not always rational, and it rarely does what we think it should or want it to. Over time the scale shows your hard work, but it won’t do so every day or every week. Just as you wouldn’t put your sense of wellbeing in a toddler’s hands, don’t put your sense of wellbeing in the hands of the scale! It’s just as unreliable.

February 26, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 26, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend and I want to have fun” remind yourself of two things:

1. Having an on track weekend and having a fun weekend are not mutually exclusive. There are many, many sources of fun that do not come from food.

2. There is a huge difference between having no fun with food and having all fun with food. This weekend, work on finding the middle ground and work on finding other ways to have fun!

February 25, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

February 25, 2016/beckadmin

The thought, “I’ve lost enough weight, this is good enough,” may be true or it may not be true, it’s important for you to make that determination. If you’re at a weight that is still stopping you from fully reaching important goals or preventing you from having better health, remind yourself of these things and keep moving forward.

February 24, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 24, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m in such a good mood, it’s okay to have a treat to keep my good mood going.
 

Response: While having a treat might feel good right now, when I get on the scale see that I’ve gained weight it definitely won’t feel good. I need to remember that staying on track with my eating, especially when I’m giving myself a lot of credit for doing so, feels great. So although eating a treat might be one temporary way of keeping my good mood going, staying on track and feeling SO GOOD about my eating is another, much more longer-lasting way to keep feeling good.

February 23, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 23, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat extra, I’ll work it off tomorrow,” remind yourself that what you’ll be doing in that moment is exercising your giving-in muscle, and once you start giving in, it’s highly likely you’ll continue to give in, in so many different ways. Staying on track RIGHT THIS MOMENT really matters because it’s critical to constantly reinforce your resistance muscle so that you can continue resisting.

February 22, 2016 – Monday Motivation

February 22, 2016/beckadmin

The most successful dieters and maintainers are not those who never make mistakes – rather they are those who make mistakes and then get right back on track. You do not have to be perfect in order to lose weight and keep it off. What you do need is to be willing to accept mistakes and recover from them right away.

February 19, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 19, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “it’s not fair that I have to work on losing weight and can’t eat whatever I want on weekends,” remind yourself that while it’s true this is unfair, focusing on the unfairness will just make you feel worse. Working on accepting it and doing what you need to do will make you feel better – and make losing weight easier. Nothing will take away the unfairness, but in one case you can feel much worse about it and in the other, you can feel much better. Which would you rather?

February 18, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

February 18, 2016/beckadmin

If you’ve struggled to lose weight in the past, or if you’ve lost weight and then gained it back, it’s important to remember that what you’ve done before just doesn’t work – if it did, you'd be at the weight you want. Being very restrictive DOES work for fast weight loss, but it DOES NOT work for weight maintenance. If you want this time to be different, you have to do things differently, even if it means you lose weight more slowly.

February 17, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 17, 2016/beckadmin

We want to hear from you this week! What are your most common sabotaging thoughts? What thoughts are the hardest for you to overcome? We’ll help give some responses in days to come.

Email your sabotaging thoughts to communications@beckinstitute.org

February 16, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 16, 2016/beckadmin

We heard this from a dieter last week: Exercise for it’s own sake. Exercise to make you feel strong and healthy. When we view exercise as something only to burn calories, it’s much, MUCH less pleasant and tends not to work anyway because we then eat the calories we think we burned.

February 15, 2016 – Monday Motivation

February 15, 2016/beckadmin

How did you do last week with writing down 5 credits every night? Did it help you focus on the positive (and have a more realistic perspective on how things are going)? If you didn’t actually do it last week, we wholeheartedly recommend that you start this week. If you started last week – CREDIT for doing it! Try it for another week and see how much of a difference it makes.

February 12, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up:

February 12, 2016/beckadmin

This weekend, make sure you continue to read your Advantages List and Response Cards to help you stay on track. The weekend is a time use EXTRA skills, not drop ones that help.

February 11, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

February 11, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, dieting is not all-or-nothing. You are not either 100% perfect on your diet or totally off of it. You are entitled to make mistakes but you are NOT entitled to use those mistakes as an excuse to throw in the towel.

February 10, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 10, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy to work on healthy eating right now.

Response: Just because I’m busy doesn’t mean I can’t make time for it. If I had a severe nut allergy, no matter how busy I was I would make sure all my food didn’t have nuts in it. Telling myself I’m too busy is just an excuse – I can still do it!

February 9, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 9, 2016/beckadmin

No matter how much you exercise, if your eating is out of control, you likely won’t be able to lose weight. Don’t spend all your energy getting yourself to the gym, make sure you save enough of it for healthy eating.

February 8, 2016 – Monday Motivation

February 8, 2016/beckadmin

Make it a goal this week to, every night, write down at least 5 things from that day that you deserve credit for. Doing so will help you realize that you’re doing a lot of things right and the more we see what we’re doing well, the better we feel. The better we feel, the more motivated we are, and then dieting gets easier. This week, choose to put your focus on what you’re doing well.

February 5, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 5, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re going to watch the Super Bowl this weekend, remember: you can’t eat (and drink) everything you want, in whatever quantities you want, and still lose weight. But you CAN plan ahead to have some extra treats, stay in control of your eating, and enjoy them guilt-free.

February 4, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

February 4, 2016/beckadmin

Cravings always pass. Even if you do nothing, the craving will go away eventually on its own. Cravings do NOT just get worse and worse until you eventually give in. And, you can make cravings go away much more quickly by getting distracted. The moment your attention is fully engaged in something else is the moment the cravings passes entirely.

February 3, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 3, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Losing weight (or keeping it off) shouldn’t be so hard.

Response: Yes, it should! This is a really hard thing I’m doing. If it were easy, everyone would be at a healthy weight. But I have to keep in mind two things:

     1. It’s not hard all the time.

     2. Even though it’s hard some of the time, it’s SO WORTH IT!

February 2, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 2, 2016/beckadmin

Many of the clients we’ve worked with initially didn’t have very good coping strategies for negative emotions, other than eating. It’s critical to deliberately build up an arsenal of things to try when negative emotions strike so you don’t fall into the trap of thinking that eating is the only thing that you can do.

February 1, 2016 – Monday Motivation

February 1, 2016/beckadmin

Repeat after us: Progress, not perfection.  This week, work on looking for signs of PROGRESS, not signs that you’re not perfect.  

January 29, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 29, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care what anyone else is eating; it only knows what you eat. So this weekend, work on eating 100% entirely what works for you, and not letting your food choices be influenced by what others around you are eating.

January 28, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

January 28, 2016/beckadmin

One pound at a time. You didn’t gain weight overnight and you won’t lose it overnight, either. Even if it feels like you have a long way to go, as long as you keep working at it you’ll get there. Every pound you lose will feel better than being that pound heavier. One pound at a time!

January 27, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 27, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll start eating healthy tomorrow.

Response: Today is yesterday’s tomorrow so start RIGHT NOW!

January 26, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 26, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t want to accept the things I have to do for dieting” remind yourself, “I have a choice: I can struggle with what I have to do and feel bad, or I can accept that this is the way it is. It doesn’t mean I have to like it but continuing to fight against acceptance will do NOTHING but make it harder for me to reach my tremendously important goals.”

January 25, 2016 – Monday Motivation

January 25, 2016/beckadmin

“At first they’ll ask WHY you’re doing it. Later they’ll ask HOW you did it.”

January 22, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm Up

January 22, 2016/beckadmin

“The road to success is dotted with many tempting parking places.” ~Unknown.
This weekend, work on staying on the road!

January 21, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

January 21, 2016/beckadmin

“Whenever you do a thing, act as if all the world were watching.” ~Thomas Jefferson.

If you tend to be a secret eater, remember that your body doesn’t care if no one is watching you eat or if 100 people are. It can be helpful to ask yourself, “Would I eat this if someone were watching?” If the answer is no, then maybe it’s worth working on resisting.

January 20, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 20, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I made this dieting mistake. I’m such a failure.

Response:You don’t drown by falling in the water. You drown by staying there.” ~Unknown

One mistake does not mean I can’t do this and it does not mean I’m failing. The most important thing is that I don’t stay down, but rather that I pick myself back up right this moment keep moving forward.

 

January 19, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 19, 2016/beckadmin

“Habit is habit and not to be flung out of the window by any man, but coaxed downstairs a step at a time.” ~Mark Twain. 

Habits, especially long-standing ones, don’t change overnight! It’s critical to have realistic expectations for change and recognize that any step forward is a step in the right direction.

 

January 18, 2016 – Monday Motivation

January 18, 2016/beckadmin

“Faith is taking the first step even when you can't see the whole staircase.” – Martin Luther King, Jr. 

Right now you may not be able to see where your weight loss journey will end, but that’s okay. Work today on taking the first step.

January 15, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 15, 2016/beckadmin

Healthy eating is so much easier when we have the foods that we need available and ready (and SO much harder when we don’t). Even though it means sacrificing a bit of your weekend time, consider spending some time this weekend prepping for the week ahead. Isn’t it worth it if it means you’ll be able to stay on track and reach your goals?!

January 14, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 14, 2016/beckadmin

In dieting (as in life) everybody makes mistakes. You’re entitled to make mistakes – but you’re not entitled to let the memory of those mistakes get in your way. Wipe your slate clean and get started right this moment!

January 13, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 13, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because if I don’t, I’ll disappoint [my friend].

Response: If I eat off plan, I’ll disappoint myself. Besides, my friend's disappointment will likely be momentary, but the disappointment I’ll feel when I go off plan, shake my confidence, and possibly gain weight will last for so much longer.

January 12, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 12, 2016/beckadmin

If you’re working on healthy eating and losing weight, it probably means you also have to work on putting your own needs first (at least some of the time) and feeling entitled to ask for what you need. Remember – you can’t be good to anyone else if you’re not first good to yourself.

January 11, 2016 – Monday Motivation

January 11, 2016/beckadmin

It's important to remember that a major benefit of healthy eating and weight loss is significantly improved quality of life. Our dieters find that once they gain control over their eating, they feel so much better (mentally and physically) in ways they hadn’t even imagined.

 

January 8, 2016 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 8, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I worked hard all week, I just want to relax,” remind yourself that if your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then you can’t use food as a means to relax. But that doesn’t mean there aren’t plenty of other ways to treat yourself and relaxing things to do this weekend!

January 7, 2016 – Think Thin Thursday

January 7, 2016/beckadmin

Remember, in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

January 6, 2016 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 6, 2016/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to diet because then I’ll be burdened with thinking about food and diet all the time.

Response: I’m already burdened by constantly feeling bad about my weight and wanting to do something about it. Either way I’m burdened but at least in the in the first case I get to be thinner, healthier, and feel better about myself.

January 5, 2016 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 5, 2016/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m discouraged by the weight I gained this holiday season,” remind yourself right now is the perfect time to get back on track and recommit yourself to healthy eating. It doesn’t matter what you did or didn’t eat over the past few weeks. What matters now is what you eat today and every day going forward.

December 31, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 31, 2015/beckadmin

We talked to someone who started his weight loss journey on January 1st, 2014 and today he has lost 58 pounds (and is feeling better than he ever imagined). Regardless of where your weight is today, a new year is ALWAYS a great time to start fresh. Commit to a healthy eating plan and by this time next year who knows where you’ll be and how great you’ll be feeling!

December 30, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 30, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t throw away this leftover holiday food, it would be a waste of food and money.

Response: If I eat food my body doesn’t need, it will be wasted in my body by turning to fat. Wasted in the trashcan or in my body, either way it’s wasted. Also, the money is already gone, eating the food won’t bring the money back, but what it may do is cause me to gain weight

December 29, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 29, 2015/beckadmin

You didn’t gain weight overnight and you won’t lose it overnight, either. Losing weight (if done in a measured and reasonable way) takes time but every pound you lose feels better than being that pound heavier. Losing weight takes time, but the time will pass anyway.

December 28, 2015 – Monday Motivation

December 28, 2015/beckadmin

Less than one week left in December! Make this week the best eating week you possibly can and you’ll get to start the New Year feeling great, not feeling like you have something major to recover from.

December 25, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 25, 2015/beckadmin

To those who celebrate it, Merry Christmas! How do you want to feel when you go to bed tonight? Likely the answer is not “stuffed, sick, or mad at myself.” If your goal is to go to bed feeling great, then let that guide your eating today.

December 24, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 24, 2015/beckadmin

It’s perfectly reasonable to plan in advance to eat extra on certain days. Think now about whether or not you’d like to do that for tomorrow and make a plan. Planning in advance to eat extra is a win/win. It means we take in fewer calories overall than we would if we were eating off track, and we get to enjoy the food so much more because we don’t have to feel guilty about a single bite.

December 23, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 23, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy, I just don’t have time for healthy eating right now.

Response: Even if I don’t have time to do all the things I was doing before (shopping, meal prep, etc.) there are still ways I can make healthy eating work. Whether that means I rely on premade food, frozen food, or healthy options from restaurants, there are still so many ways to stay on track during this busy time.

December 22, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 22, 2015/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight, it’s likely you can’t eat every time you feel sad, stressed, anxious, etc. If you think, “Eating is the only thing that really helps,” remind yourself that while doing other things might not help as much as eating, they may still make you feel at least somewhat better and are therefore worth trying. Even if it’s true that you’re not going to do the thing that makes you feel 100% better (temporarily!), even feeling 30% better is better than nothing.

December 21, 2015 – Monday Motivation

December 21, 2015/beckadmin

Have you fallen into the trap of getting off track and deciding you’ll wait until January to recover? DON’T WAIT!!! Get back on track RIGHT NOW and make all the days until January feel even better. Eating in an off track way may feel good in the moment, but feeling strong, confident, and in control of our eating feels good all the time. It’s hard but it’s so worth it.

December 18, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 18, 2015/beckadmin

If you have holiday parties this weekend, MAKE A PLAN!!! We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again, “winging it” rarely, if ever, works. It is just so much harder to make good spontaneous decisions than it is to make good decisions in advance. Save yourself a lot of trouble and effort by making decisions ahead of time.

December 17, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

December 17, 2015/beckadmin

How are you doing with sleep? With drinking water? With exercise? With self-care and taking moments to de-stress? Don’t let these things slide during the holidays. They’re even more important now with all of the extra stressors and temptations we face during this time.

December 16, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 16, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I shouldn’t have to control my eating during the holidays.

Response: If my goal is to gain weight during the holidays, then it’s true, I absolutely don’t have to control my eating. But if my goal is to lose weight or even maintain my weight, then I do. Not working on healthy eating and maintaining my weight are, unfortunately, pretty mutually exclusive goals during the holidays so I need to figure out what is most important to me

December 15, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 15, 2015/beckadmin

Unfortunately our bodies don’t know what we don’t eat, they only know what we do. So just because we were ‘so good’ and turned down cookies 10 times, doesn’t necessarily mean we can have them the 11th time. Extra food is extra food, even if you’ve been resisting it all day.

December 14, 2015 – Monday Motivation

December 14, 2015/beckadmin

We’re right in the thick of the holiday season, so now is a good time to take a few minutes and take stock of how things are going. What have you been doing well so far? What could you improve upon?  It’s important to give ourselves credit for our successes and make a plan for how we’ll handle our difficulties.  Make a few goals for this week so that this can be your strongest week yet!

December 11, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 11, 2015/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories never stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain. Getting yourself back in control right away will stop you from gaining weight and help you feel good about your eating for the rest of the weekend.

December 10, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

December 10, 2015/beckadmin

If, during the holiday season, you feel sad that you can’t eat “normally” like everyone else, remind yourself that you ARE eating normally for someone with your weight loss/weight maintenance goals. Studies show that most people gain weight during the holidays, so if you don’t want to gain weight, then you definitely don’t want to eat like everyone else!

December 9, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 9, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this without counting it because I don’t know how many calories are in it.

Response: Even if I don’t know the calories, it still HAS calories, so of course it counts. Estimating the calories is so much better than not counting at all because at least I’m still being accountable for everything I eat.

December 8, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 8, 2015/beckadmin

If you have the thought, “It’s okay to eat this because I just don’t care right now,” remind yourself that you definitely WILL care later, once the situation has passed and you’re feeling guilty and worried about jeopardizing your weight loss. Don’t let temporary moments of not caring be an excuse to eat off track.

December 7, 2015 – Monday Motivation

December 7, 2015/beckadmin

Dieters often think, “I wish I could eat whatever I want and as much as I want.” However, when they eat in this unrestricted way, they ultimately feel bad and out of control (and worry about gaining weight). By contrast, when they control and limit their eating, they feel GREAT. Remember – what you may think you want in terms of eating may not be what actually feels good.

 

December 4, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 4, 2015/beckadmin

What are you doing this weekend to enhance your weight loss/weight maintenance efforts? Here are some examples: exercising; catch up on sleep; planning for the week; food shopping; food prep; de-stressing in healthy ways; reading Response Cards, etc.

December 3, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

December 3, 2015/beckadmin

If you get busy, it may also mean that you get stressed. If this happens, even though you’re busy it’s essential that you keep up with self-care activities (like exercising and talking to friends) so that you don’t turn to food to help you unwind.

December 2, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 2, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Oh, no, I’ve messed up on my diet. This is really terrible!

Response: No, it’s not terrible, it’s just a mistake. It’s not a catastrophe, it’s just a mistake. Telling myself that it’s terrible will demoralize me and make it seem like a much bigger deal, and these things will make it harder to get back on track. I just need to label this a mistake and move on.

December 1, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 1, 2015/beckadmin

Sometimes in dieting (and in life), you just have to say, “Oh, well.” To us, this means: I don’t like this situation, but there’s nothing I can do to change it (not if I want to achieve my goal) so I just have to accept it, stop fighting against it, and move on.

November 30, 2015 – Monday Motivation

November 30, 2015/beckadmin

Whatever you did or didn’t eat over the past weekend is irrelevant now. What is relevant is what you eat from this point moving forward. No matter what, today is an new opportunity to have a great eating day.

November 27, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 27, 2015/beckadmin

Do you have lots of tempting leftovers hanging around your house? If so, make a plan for when you’re going to have them and/or get rid of them. Doing so will help you resist cravings and stay on track, because you’ll know exactly when you get to eat it.

November 26, 2015 – Think Thin Thanksgiving

November 26, 2015/beckadmin

Happy Thanksgiving! Today is a day to focus on being thankful for what you do have, and not focus on what you don’t. And, if you stay on track with your eating, you’ll be able to add “Feeling great about my day” to that list of gratitudes!

November 25, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 25, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I shouldn’t have to work on healthy eating during Thanksgiving.

Response: If my goal is to gain weight over Thanksgiving, then it’s true I absolutely don’t have to work on healthy eating. But if my goal is to either maintain or lose, then it means I have to stay mindful. While working on healthy eating might not be what I most want to do on Thanksgiving, guaranteed I’ll be grateful I did when I get on the scale Friday morning.

November 24, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 24, 2015/beckadmin

If you’re cooking for Thanksgiving this year, be mindful of how much you eat while cooking. It’s easy to take in hundreds of extra calories, eaten standing up, without really paying attention. This year, work on having planned snacks while cooking and only eating sitting down. It will help cut out that extraneous and mindless eating.

November 23, 2015 – Monday Motivation

November 23, 2015/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they sometimes forget how much better it feels to be in control and feeling good about themselves and their eating. If you’ve been off track (especially if you’re thinking of waiting until after Thanksgiving to recover), remind yourself how great getting back on track will feel and start right this moment!

November 20, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 20, 2015/beckadmin

To help stay in control, consider making a weekend-specific Response Card, such as, “It’s worth it to me to stay on track this weekend so that I can continue to feel great about myself and my eating and keep my positive momentum going.” Read it every day, and probably extra times on the weekends.

November 19, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

November 19, 2015/beckadmin

The holidays are a busy time for most people, but also a stressful time. When dieters get busy, they sometimes drop their stress-relieving activities (like exercise, meditation, talking to friends, etc.) and so they’re much more likely to turn to food to alleviate stress. This holiday season, make sure you have built-in stress relievers!

November 18, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 18, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The healthy food on my diet plan costs more than the food I really want to eat. I can’t justify spending the extra money.

Response: It’s worth it and I’m worth it! What a great way to spend money – toward a goal that I really, really want to achieve.

November 17, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 17, 2015/beckadmin

Good reminder – you won’t lose weight every day or even every week. That’s just the way it is. The scale failing to go down one day or one week is not a sign that you’re doing anything wrong or that it’s never going to work.

Keep pushing through, it will go down again.

November 16, 2015 – Monday Motivation

November 16, 2015/beckadmin

Thanksgiving is right around the corner! Remember that it’s much easier to stay on track than try to get back on track, so this week: get on track, build up some positive momentum, and next week will go so much more smoothly.

November 13, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 13, 2015/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to eat this because everyone else is eating it,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what everyone around you is eating. It ONLY knows what you eat, so that is not a valid excuse.

November 12, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

November 12, 2015/beckadmin

Do you tend to grab snacks here and there and eat them standing up? Working on eating every bite of food sitting down can help cut out on that mindless eating that we do and never remember by the end of the day.

November 11, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 11, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m really stressed out, I need to eat!

Response: I may want to eat, but I don’t need to. If I had been in a stressful situation where food wasn’t available, I’d get through it without eating. It’s worth working on finding other ways to de-stress because doing so will help me reach my weight loss goals.

November 10, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 10, 2015/beckadmin

If secret eating is a problem for you, it can be helpful to ask yourself, “Would I eat this if someone were with me right now?” If the answer is no, then it may be worth working on overcoming the craving to eat it.

November 9, 2015 – Monday Motivation

November 9, 2015/beckadmin

Will losing weight/getting healthier be one of your New Year’s Resolutions? If so, why not get started on it today? Start making some small changes, master them, and then make a few more small changes. If you start today, imagine what a better place you can be in come January 1st.

November 6, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 6, 2015/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake and have the sabotaging thought, “I’ve blown it for the weekend, I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that the calories never stop adding up, and the more you eat the more you will gain.

Getting yourself back in control right away will stop you from gaining weight and help you feel good about your eating for the rest of the weekend.

November 5, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

November 5, 2015/beckadmin

If you’re feeling upset or stressed – even if it’s time to eat, don’t eat! It’s important to prove to yourself that you can calm down without eating and besides, if you’re worked up you won’t really be able to enjoy the food anyway.

November 4, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 4, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I feel so deprived that I can’t have this extra dessert that I want.

Response: Feeling deprived is all a matter of where I put my focus. I can focus on what I’m not getting – extras dessert – and feel badly, OR I can focus on what I am getting in resisting extra dessert – all the benefits of weight loss – and feel great. If I’m feeling deprived, it’s probably because I’m putting my focus in the wrong place.

November 3, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 3, 2015/beckadmin

If you think, “I was ‘good’ and turned down [unplanned food] five times, so it’s okay to have some extra now,” remind yourself that if you had a terrible peanut allergy you would NEVER think, “I was ‘good’ and turned down the peanut butter cookies five times so it’s okay to have one now.” No matter how many times you turn down unplanned food, it doesn’t legitimize eventually giving in.

November 2, 2015 – Monday Motivation

November 2, 2015/beckadmin

Since there’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting, why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

October 30, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

October 30, 2015/beckadmin

Do you have a plan for Halloween?? Remember, it’s reasonable to eat some candy, just not all the candy. Having a plan and working in a reasonable amount will allow you to enjoy it without guilt. The best of both worlds!

October 29, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

October 29, 2015/beckadmin

When dieting feels hard, it’s important to remind yourself that it hasn’t always been this hard (it’s helpful to think about specific examples of when it felt easier and you were feeling great) and it won’t always be this hard. As long as you keep pushing through, dieting will get easier again.

October 28, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 28, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It will be a waste of money if I go to a restaurant and don’t finish my meal.

Response: The money is spent whether I eat the food or not. I should focus on the experience of enjoying a night out and enjoying the company, not eating every bite on my plate. Besides, if I bring some home I’ll save money because I’ll have food for another meal.

October 27, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 27, 2015/beckadmin

The holidays will be here before we know it. It’s important to get ourselves in a strong and on track place now, so we can maintain it if/when things get harder.

October 26, 2015 – Monday Motivation

October 26, 2015/beckadmin

Focus on what you can do today. If you think, “I can’t keep this up for a month, a year, or longer” remind yourself, “Forget the long term. I know I can continue to do what I need to do today. If it’s hard tomorrow I’ll deal with it then.”

Besides – a year from now you’ll have a year’s worth of practice under your belt.

October 23, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 23, 2015/beckadmin

Don’t buy Halloween candy early! Having it around will only tax your willpower. If you’ve bought some and it’s tempting you, it’s worth getting rid of it, especially going into the weekend when you’ll be home and around it more. It’s not worth it!

October 22, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

October 22, 2015/beckadmin

It’s not always easy to exert dieting willpower, so it’s worth it to limit the number of times you need to do so. Whether this means keeping certain foods out of your house, only bringing in individual-sized portions, or putting away leftovers immediately after you serve, the more you cut down the need to use willpower the less you will have to rely on it.

October 21, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 21, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ll just eat [this unplanned food] and make up for it later.

Response: When has “making up for it later” ever really had the results I want? Besides, every time I eat unplanned food, I make it more likely I’ll do so the next time, and the next time, and will make it harder to stick to my plan. It’s worth it to stay on plan now so that I make my life EASIER!

October 20, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 20, 2015/beckadmin

Cravings are about want, NOT need. When you think, “I really need this food right now,” remind yourself, “Actually, I really want this food right now, but I also really, really, really want all the benefits of weight loss so much more. It’s worth it to resist because it will get me to my goals.”

October 19, 2015 – Monday Motivation

October 19, 2015/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they often truly forget how good it feels to be in control of their eating. Therefore, the thought of getting back on track usually feels much more daunting and burdensome than it really is – because once they’re there, they feel so great about it.

October 16, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 16, 2015/beckadmin

The weekend is a great time to fit in exercise. Remember – 5 minutes is always better than 0 minutes. Likely the hardest part is just getting started and once you’re done you definitely won’t regret it.

October 15, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

October 15, 2015/beckadmin

It’s important to have enough variety in your diet so you don’t get bored of the food you’re eating (which may cause you to want to rebel). Making a commitment to trying at least one new recipe will help ensure you’re not always eating the same things.

October 14, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 14, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too stressed to diet right now.

Response: There will always be life stressors, so now might be as good a time as any to start working on healthy eating. Besides, stress never needs to go away for me to lose weight, what needs to change is my response to stress and the way I deal with it.

October 13, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 13, 2015/beckadmin

When dieting, look out for sabotaging thoughts that start with the phrase, “I’m entitled to eat this because…” (I'm sad, stressed, bored, upset, etc.). If you have to justify to yourself why it’s okay to eat something, it often means you shouldn’t.

October 9, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 9, 2015/beckadmin

If you think, “Weekends should be about fun, not about dieting,” remind yourself, “Eating healthfully and having fun are not mutually exclusive. Just because I may not eat everything I want doesn’t mean I can’t enjoy what I do eat. And besides, staying in control of my eating always feels so much better than being out of control.”

October 8, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

October 8, 2015/beckadmin

You can eat a slice of cake in 5 bites or in 25 bites. Either way it’s the same amount of food, but if you eat it in 25 bites, it means you get to enjoy it 20 more times.

October 7, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 7, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The scale is down, I can afford to loosen up.

Response: The moment I start loosening up is the moment the scale starts going up. If I want the scale to stay down, I have to keep doing what I’m doing.

October 6, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 6, 2015/beckadmin

Yesterday you said you’d do it tomorrow. Today is tomorrow. DO IT TODAY!!

October 5, 2015 – Monday Motivation

October 5, 2015/beckadmin

If you’ve been off track, remember that it only takes a few good days to get back in the groove. These first few days back are the hardest and then it will get easier again. Remind yourself that this hard part is temporary but there’s a world of good waiting at the other end.

October 2, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 2, 2015/beckadmin

If you were driving on the highway and missed your exit, would you say, “Forget it” and keep driving? No! You’d get off at the very next exit and turn around. If you make a mistake this weekend, immediately turn yourself around and get right back on track.

October 1, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

October 1, 2015/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat this one unplanned food, it won’t matter,” remind yourself that slip-ups usually have a more lasting effect on the rest of your day. If you allow yourself to get off track in the morning or afternoon, you’re much more likely to continue making off-track food decisions later in the day. It matters!

September 30, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 30, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy to eat healthfully right now.

Response: That’s just an excuse to eat unhealthy food. In this day and age, there are almost always healthy options available. It may not be what you most feel like eating, but it may also be what will help you reach your goals.

September 29, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 29, 2015/beckadmin

Remember, cutting out entire categories of food may work for weight loss, but it doesn’t work for weight maintenance. If it’s something you like, guaranteed you’ll eat it again in the future. It’s critical figure out now how you’ll handle that so you don’t go overboard when you do.

September 28, 2015 – Monday Motivation

September 28, 2015/beckadmin

The most successful dieters and maintainers are NOT those who never make mistakes – rather they are those who make mistakes and then get right back on track. You do not have to be perfect in order to lose weight and keep it off. What you do need is to be willing to accept mistakes and recover from them right away.

September 24, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

September 24, 2015/beckadmin

Even if you get off track during the day, make every effort to bounce back and end the day on a strong note. Doing so will mean you get to start the next day already back on track, instead of having to gear up and recover from the day before. It’s a much, much stronger position to be in.

September 23, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 23, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just don’t have time for healthy eating and exercise.

Response: If I don’t make time for those things now, it’s likely that at some point I’ll have to make time for an illness. Either way I’m going to have to make time.

 

September 22, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 22, 2015/beckadmin

If you want something you’ve never had (permanent weight loss) you’re going to have to do things you’ve never done. Doing it the same was as before will yield the same results.

September 21, 2015 – Monday Motivation

September 21, 2015/beckadmin

Whenever a dieter asks us, “Dieting is so hard, why I am I doing this?” We always respond, “Great question! Why ARE you doing this?” Keeping in mind at all times exactly why weight loss/weight maintenance is worth it to you will help you stay motivated to keep doing what you need to do.

September 18, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 18, 2015/beckadmin

You do deserve to relax on weekends, but you don’t deserve to be overweight and feel badly about yourself. Fortunately are many, many ways to relax that don’t have to do with food. This weekend, be deliberate about working some other relaxation options in.

September 17, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

September 17, 2015/beckadmin

Make sure you have the healthy foods you need available and convenient. If you have junk food in your house, you’ll eat junk food. If you have healthy food, you’ll eat that.

September 16, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 16, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m so mad about the dieting mistakes I made this week. 

Response: It’s about progress, NOT perfection! If I expect perfection, then mistakes will be much more painful and seem like a much bigger deal. Once I accept that mistakes are part of the process, I’ll be able to recover from them more quickly.

September 15, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 15, 2015/beckadmin

There is a difference between boredom and hunger, between stress and hunger, between loneliness and hunger. Eat when you’re hungry, not when you’re something else!

September 14, 2015 – Monday Motivation

September 14, 2015/beckadmin

The most important quality a dieter can have is the ability to stick with it. Giving up means you definitely won’t reach your goals. Continuing to work at it, even when it feels hard and when you’re not seeing immediate results, means you likely will get there.

September 11, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 11, 2015/beckadmin

If you’re going to events this weekend, remember that you can’t necessarily expect to eat in the same way other people do because they are not of your age, of your gender, with your weight loss goals. It only works to compare your eating to people in the exact same circumstances as you!

September 10, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

September 10, 2015/beckadmin

Instead of viewing it as being on a diet, conceptualize what you’re doing as eating according to your goals. Doing so will help remind you exactly why you’re doing this.

September 9, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 9, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to throw away [this tempting food] because it would be a waste of money.

Response: The cost of keeping this food (taxing my willpower, potentially getting off track, taking in too many calories, jeopardizing weight loss, reinforcing bad habits) is so much greater than the cost of getting rid of it.

September 8, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 8, 2015/beckadmin

Losing weight is hard. It’s supposed to be hard. If it were easy, no one would be overweight. But just because it’s hard doesn’t mean you can’t do it. And it is so, incredibly, 100%, WORTH IT!

September 7, 2015 – Monday Motivation

September 7, 2015/beckadmin

Any one weigh-in on the scale doesn’t tell you ANYTHING because the number is influenced by dozens of different factors. And sometimes, the scale won’t go down for a period of time and then suddenly drop. It’s important to not get discouraged if the scale doesn’t immediately move. Remember – if you stay on track, the scale will go down again.

September 4, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 4, 2015/beckadmin

Nobody (who is working on losing or maintaining weight) EVER goes to bed on Sunday night thinking, “I wish I had eaten more this weekend.” Once the weekend is over, you’ll be so grateful for the things you didn’t eat, not regretful.

September 3, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

September 3, 2015/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to have this extra food, it’s not that much compared to what I could be eating,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what you don’t eat, it only knows what you do eat. If you take in extra calories, regardless of how many more you could be taking in, you’ll gain weight.

September 2, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 2, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Since I’m eating pizza, I need to eat as much as possible because I don’t know when I can have it again.

Response: Actually, I can plan to eat pizza EVERY SINGLE day if I want. This is not like other “diets” because I am not depriving myself of foods I like; instead I’m just planning in advance when to have them. I don’t need to be in a “last meal” mindset because there is NOTHING I can’t ever eat again.

September 1, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 1, 2015/beckadmin

If you think, “I really need something sweet right now,” remind yourself that at any given moment, it’s never a question of need. Telling yourself, “This is what I need,” can make it seem more legitimate to eat something – even though it may not be. Remind yourself, “I really want something sweet right now, but that doesn’t mean I have to have it.”

August 31, 2015 – Monday Motivation

August 31, 2015/beckadmin

Tomorrow is a new month, but today is an opportunity to end this month on a good note, which means you get to begin September with a good eating day and a strong start already under your belt.  

August 28, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-Up

August 28, 2015/beckadmin

This weekend, plan in advance what you’re going to eat at events/when you eat out. Doing so takes away the need to make spontaneous eating decisions and highly increases the likelihood that you won’t go overboard.

August 24, 2015 – Monday Motivation

August 24, 2015/beckadmin

Often we hear dieters say, “It’s hard for me to lose weight because I just like eating.” It’s so important to remember that you’ll NEVER give up eating! You will, likely, have to give up overeating but you’ll never stop eating. That is a pleasure you can and will continue to have. 

August 10, 2015

August 10, 2015/beckadmin

Daily Diet Solutions will be on a brief, two-week hiatus while author Deborah Beck Busis gets married AND moves to Atlanta! We’ll resume daily posting on Monday, August 24th.

August 7, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 7, 2015/beckadmin

This weekend, work on other healthy habits that help promote weight loss, like getting enough sleep, exercising, and hydrating properly. Being healthy and losing weight is not just about the food!

August 6, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

August 6, 2015/beckadmin

When you want to eat, ask yourself “Am I really hungry, or is this about something else?” A lot of the eating we do is motivated by other things – stress, boredom, anxiety, wanting to procrastinate. If you can identify that you’re not hungry, then you can work on finding other things to do to fulfill that need.

August 5, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 5, 2015/beckadmin

I can’t resist [those cookies] – they look too good. Response: It’s true that it’s hard to resist but it’s not true that I can’t. There is a difference between things that are impossible and things that are hard. Telling myself I ‘can’t’ resist is really just an excuse to give in. I’ve resisted plenty of cravings before, and I know I can now, too. Besides, when I give in I feel mad at myself and when I resist I feel great.

August 4, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 4, 2015/beckadmin

If food is one of the only sources of excitement and pleasure in your life, then dieting may feel much more painful. Work on building other sources of pleasure into your life. In doing so, you’ll rely on food less for fun and will likely find it easier to cut back.

August 3, 2015 – Monday Motivation

August 3, 2015/beckadmin

Focus on what you can do today. If you think, “I can’t keep this up for a month, a year, or longer” remind yourself, “Forget the long term. I know I can continue to do what I need to do today. If it’s hard tomorrow I’ll deal with it then.” Besides – a year from now you’ll have a year’s worth of more practice under your belt.

July 31, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 31, 2015/beckadmin

This weekend, work on saying NO to food pushers! Remember – it’s not their job to stop pushing food on you. They’re food pushers, that’s what they do. It is, however, your job to start saying no. Put the burden of change on yourself, not on them.

July 30, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 30, 2015/beckadmin

How long do your cravings usually last? It can be helpful to time them and see that they only usually last 3 minutes, or 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Then, when you have a craving, remind yourself, “I’m only x minutes away from success!”

July 29, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 29, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting is too hard, it’s not worth it.

Response: Dieting IS but it also IS worth it. Telling myself "it’s not worth it" is just an excuse to give up and I have to pay no attention to that thought. The advantages of losing weight and the positive impact it will have on every area of my life makes it unquestionably worth it. Being overweight is NOT worth it.

July 28, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 28, 2015/beckadmin

You wouldn’t expect to run a marathon if you’ve never run a mile. Commit to a few small changes this week, work just on those, and once you master them, add in more. Remember, small changes eventually add up to really big ones.

July 27, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 27, 2015/beckadmin

This week, focus on things you have in your life, not the things you don’t. Working on gratitude will elevate your mood and make it easier to do what you need to do. You’ve got so many blessings, it’s time to start recognizing them!

July 24, 2015 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 24, 2015/beckadmin

It is so exhausting getting off track every weekend and having to recover Monday morning. This weekend, commit to not doing that to yourself! No matter how hard it feels in the moment, staying on track throughout the weekend and having a great Sunday night and a great Monday morning will be SO WORTH IT!

July 22, 2015 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 22, 2015/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I should be able to eat whatever I want when I'm on vacation.

Response: If my goal is to gain lots of weight while on vacation, then that's absolutely what I can do. If, however, my goal is to lose weight, or at least maintain my weight, then vacations can be a break from work and from daily life, but not from healthy eating.

July 21, 2015 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 21, 2015/beckadmin

Which do you want more – the food you'll crave for 5 minutes or the body/health you've craved for your whole life?

July 20, 2015 – Monday Motivation

July 20, 2015/beckadmin

Since there’s probably never a “good” time to start dieting, why not just start today? Think about how much better you’ll feel next Monday morning if you have a whole week of healthy eating and feeling good about yourself under your belt!

July 16, 2015 – Think Thin Thursday

July 16, 2015/beckadmin

Three things (that aren’t food-related) that make a huge difference in terms of weight loss and health are sleep, exercise, and drinking enough water. How are you doing with the non-food aspects of weight loss?

June 6, 2015 – Monday Motivation

June 6, 2015/beckadmin

There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat. Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward.

September 22nd, 2014 Monday Motivation

September 22, 2014/beckadmin

One of the greatest aspects of losing weight is how many good things come as a result. It’s not as if you have to work hard, be disciplined, make healthy choices, and get nothing in return. Just the opposite is true – by doing all of these things you get THE MOST IMPORTANT things in return (health, self-confidence, control, pride, reduced physical and emotional pain, etc.)

April 29, 2013 – Monday Motivation

April 29, 2014/beckadmin

The more you practice dieting skills, the more ingrained they become, which means that dieting gets EASIER! However difficult dieting may feel right now is NOT how hard it will feel in the future, as long as you keep practicing and working on making these things habits. Like any skill, the more you practice, the better you get, so don't give up!

May 20, 2013 – Monday Motivation

August 20, 2013/beckadmin

One dieter we’re working with recently got back from a trip and said, “Every part of the trip was different and better than previous ones. I didn’t have anxiety about my eating going in, I was able to maintain my control during the trip and didn’t feel at all worried or guilty about what I ate, and, most surprisingly, I even felt great when I got home from trip, knowing I hadn’t gained weight! That’s never happened before.”

July 11, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 11, 2013/beckadmin

Feeling deprived is a state of mind. You can limit yourself to one cookie and think, “This is so unfair, I wish I could eat more, this really stinks,” OR you could limit yourself to one cookie and think, “It’s not all-or-nothing. I can still have one cookie and lose weight. Good for me for stopping here, this will really help me reach my goals.”

July 10, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 10, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I just ate that. I’ve really blown it for the day so I might as well keep eating and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: There is no such thing as “blowing it for the day.” Every single bite of food I eat today will continue to add up. Get back on track right this moment!

July 9, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 9, 2013/beckadmin

Remember – you can’t change what you’ve eaten in the past, you can only change what you eat today, tomorrow, and in the future. Instead of dwelling on mistakes you may have made previously, focus on how you can make TODAY a great eating day.

July 8, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 8, 2013/beckadmin

When you think, “If I start to think this is really working, I might jinx myself,” remind yourself that believing in yourself can’t lead to bad luck. In fact, reminding yourself of all the skills you’ve developed and the progress you’ve made will help you keep moving forward. Believe it!

July 4, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 4, 2013/beckadmin

To those of us celebrating it, Happy 4th of July! If you got to barbeques today, remember – you can still eat reasonable portions of food AND lose weight and keep it off. You just can’t OVEREAT and lose weight. It’s not all-or-nothing!

July 3, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 3, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I wish I were losing weight more quickly like I have in the past.

Response: I lost weight quickly in the past because I was doing things in a more extreme way (which I wasn’t able to keep up and consequently gained weight back). I’m doing things in a moderate way now so it makes sense that my weight loss is more moderate. But, in the course of the rest of my life, it doesn’t matter if it takes extra time to lose the weight because it’s not coming back!

July 2, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 2, 2013/beckadmin

While exercising, you can make your experience much worse by constantly telling yourself things like, “This stinks. I wish I didn’t have to do this, I’d much rather be on my couch,” etc., OR you can make it much better by telling yourself things like, “It’s so great that I’m doing this. I deserve so much credit. I’m going to feel so much better when I’m done.” Remember, it’s not only what you do, it’s what you say to yourself while you’re doing it.

July 1, 2013 – Monday Motivation

July 1, 2013/beckadmin

When dieters get off track, they sometimes actually forget how truly great it feels to be in control of their eating. If you’re off track and are thinking, “It’s too burdensome to work on healthy eating,” remember that being on track feels SO MUCH BETTER, and once you have positive momentum built up, it’s gets easier and easier to stay on track.

June 20, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

June 20, 2013/beckadmin

Sometimes, when eating something they really like, dieters get into what we call the “Last Meal Mentality,” where they think they need to eat as much of it as they can right then. It’s important to remember that it’s not your last meal, and if it’s something you like, you can ALWAYS have it again.

June 19, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 19, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I want to have an off track day so I can eat all the foods I can’t while dieting.

Response: There’s no food I can eat when I’m off track that I can’t also eat when I’m on track. And, when I plan it and eat it on track, I enjoy what I’m eating more because I don’t feel guilty about it. Guilt tastes bad!

June 18, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 18, 2013/beckadmin

We often hear the sabotaging thought, “I’ve lost weight this week so I can afford to loosen up.” It’s important to remember that you lost weight because of all the things you’ve been doing, and the moment you stop doing them is the moment the scale goes back up.

June 17, 2013 – Monday Motivation

June 17, 2013/beckadmin

If, after you lose weight, you think, “I’d like to lose a little more but I don’t think I can eat less or exercise more,” ask yourself: would my life really be so different if I were a few pounds lighter? Yes, I’d like it, but it’s likely I’d have to work so hard to stay there that I wouldn’t be able to enjoy it anyway. In the scheme of things, your life probably won’t be drastically improved if you lose a few more pounds, so instead of thinking about where you’d like to be, think about how much better your life is where you are now.

June 14, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 14, 2013/beckadmin

If you feel frustrated by the food pushers in your life, remember that you can’t control anyone else’s actions, you can only control your reactions. So it’s not their job to stop offering, it’s YOUR job to start saying no. This weekend, if someone tries to push food on you, practice saying no (over and over again if necessary!).

June 13, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

June 13, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I can’t say no when [my friend] offers me food because I’ll disappoint her,” remind yourself, “If I give in, I’ll disappoint MYSELF! Besides – how disappointed will my friend really be? Will she think about it the rest of the day/week/month? Versus how disappointed will I be if I give in? Chances are it’s a whole lot more.”

June 12, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 12, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t believe I cheated on my diet, that’s so terrible.

Response: I didn’t cheat, I just made a mistake. If I cheated on my taxes or on a test – that would be bad. Making a mistake on my diet doesn’t say anything about my moral character; it only says I’m HUMAN. Mistakes aren’t terrible and they won’t impact my overall day or week as long as I recover right away.

June 11, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 11, 2013/beckadmin

Sometimes in dieting (and in life), you just have to say, “Oh, well.” To us, this means: I don’t like this situation, but there’s nothing I can do to change it (not if I want to achieve my goal) so I just have to accept it, stop fighting against it, and move on.

June 10, 2013 – Monday Motivation

June 10, 2013/beckadmin

Any one weigh-in on the scale doesn’t tell you anything because the number is influenced by dozens of different factors. And for some, the scale won’t go down for a period of time and then suddenly drop. It’s important to not get discouraged if the scale doesn’t immediately move. Remember – if you stay on track, the scale will go down again.

June 7, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

June 7, 2013/beckadmin

Remember – ANY exercise is better than no exercise. If you’ve been off your exercise plan, it’s important to stop putting it off and start moving. One you get started, you’ll be so glad you did. “Like” our status today if you’re committing to some type of physical activity this weekend!

June 6, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

June 6, 2013/beckadmin

If you eat one portion of dessert and are tempted to go overboard by having another, remind yourself, “I’ve already had one portion and I really enjoyed it. If I have a second, it won’t taste nearly as good as I’m thinking it will because I’ll be feeling guilty the whole time I’m eating it. Besides, I don’t have to have more now, I can have it again tomorrow.”

June 5, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

June 5, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just can’t seem to find the time for healthy eating and exercise.

Response: It’s not about finding the time, it’s about MAKING the time. I’m always able to somehow make the time for my top priorities. If I keep using "not having time" as an excuse, I'll never be able to lose weight and keep it off.

June 4, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

June 4, 2013/beckadmin

Remember – it’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every time you eat unplanned food, whether it has 5 calories or 500 calories, you make it both more likely you’ll give in AND harder to stand firm the next time.

June 3, 2013 – Monday Motivation

June 3, 2013/beckadmin

One dieter recently said to us, “I was going through a really stressful time but for the first time EVER I didn’t use it as an excuse to overeat. Instead, continuing to take control over my eating helped me feel better every single day and actually made it easier to deal with my stress. I never knew this before!”

May 31, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 31, 2013/beckadmin

No matter what your sabotaging thoughts try to tell you, you will feel better and so proud and happy Monday morning if you stay in control and don’t go overboard this weekend. Remember, thoughts like, “I’ll feel better if I indulge,” or, “it’s okay to eat extra because it’s the weekend,” are just there to SABOTAGE you. Don’t listen!

May 30, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

May 30, 2013/beckadmin

Don’t put more on your plate than you intend to eat. If you think, “I’ll put three kinds of cookies on my plate but only try a bite of each,” you’ll be making the situation unnecessarily difficult and causing yourself a lot of potential struggle when you try to stick to just a bite each. If you don’t want to eat it, don’t put it on your plate!

May 29, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 29, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I need to cut out certain foods [carbs/dairy/sweets, etc.] from my diet in order to lose weight.

Response: When has cutting out certain foods EVER helped me to lose weight and keep it off? While doing so many enable faster weight loss, it doesn’t enable permanent weight loss. If I lose weight eating or exercising in a way I can’t maintain, I’ll just gain it back so there’s no point.

May 28, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 28, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I have to give in to this craving. My body wants what it wants and if I don’t give in, it will just come back,” remind yourself that your body does want what it wants, but ultimately your mind can overcome it. The more you practice resisting cravings and prove to yourself you don't give in, the easier it becomes to keep doing so. So even if the craving comes back, each time you'll be in a better and better position to withstand it.

May 24, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 24, 2013/beckadmin

This Memorial Day weekend, if you’re at events and think, “It’s not fair I can’t eat normally like everyone else,” remind yourself that you are eating 100% normally for someone (of your age and gender) with your weight loss/weight maintenance goals.

May 23, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

May 23, 2013/beckadmin

Each small eating decision counts. It’s a combination of all those little things that enables weight loss, not only because they eventually add up, but because forgetting about them strengthens bad habits and makes it easy to continually make more and more unhealthy eating decisions.

May 22, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 22, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to practice my diet skills right now. I just don’t feel like it.

Response: I don’t always want to practice my dieting skills but I ALWAYS want to be thinner/healthier/happier, so I have to do them anyway.

May 21, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 21, 2013/beckadmin

You can’t eat every time you feel stressed, upset, or sad AND lose weight and keep it off. But, there are other things you can do to make yourself feel better. They may not initially be as effective as eating, but they won’t come with any negative consequences. What are some of the things you do to help you calm down without turning to food?

May 17, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 17, 2013/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: If you think, “Having to work on healthy eating will ruin my weekend,” remind yourself that since being in control makes you feel great and being out of control makes you feel badly and guilty, working on healthy eating will make your weekend BETTER, not worse. (And remember – our definition of ‘healthy eating’ includes treats.)

May 16, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

May 16, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s too hard to think about practicing my diet skills forever,” remind yourself that some of them you won’t have to do forever, and others will start to be become more and more automatic.

May 15, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 15, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat [this food I hadn’t planned]. It doesn’t matter.

Response: EVERY time matters because it always has an impact on the next time and the time after that. Every time I resist, I make my resistance habit stronger, but every time I give in, I make my giving-in habit stronger. This time matters!

May 14, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 14, 2013/beckadmin

The sooner you accept that there is no easy way out for lasting weight loss, the sooner you’ll be able to get yourself to do what you need to do. Stop looking for the magic bullet and start working on healthy eating – it will bring you results (although probably not as quickly or easily as you’d like).

May 13, 2013 – Monday Motivation

May 13, 2013/beckadmin

If you’re feeling discouraged today, DON’T GIVE UP! Whenever you’re working on something really difficult, there will be bumps along the way and it won’t always run smoothly – but that’s okay. The most important thing is to not give up and keep working on moving forward. You will get better at it!

May 10, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 10, 2013/beckadmin

If you make an eating mistake this weekend, remember that you always have the choice to get back on track right after. One mistake doesn’t mean you’re out of control and should wait until Monday to work on regaining it. Make the decision to rebound immediately and keep having a great weekend.

May 9, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

May 9, 2013/beckadmin

You can gain weight eating all healthy food. If you think, “It’s okay to eat this because it’s healthy,” remind yourself that if you take in more calories than your body needs, no matter where those calories come from, you’ll gain weight.

May 8, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 8, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too tired to exercise.

Response: Being tired is not an excuse because exercise gives me MORE energy, not less. Don’t think about it – just get up and do it. I won’t regret exercising; I’ll only regret NOT exercising.

May 7, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

May 7, 2013/beckadmin

Time for healthy eating and exercise won’t magically appear, especially if your life is already busy. Making time for these things often requires realizing where NOT making time has gotten you and then some reprioritizing. Not only do you DESERVE to put yourself first, but it’s necessary!

May 6, 2013 – Monday Motivation

May 6, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I have so much weight to lose, it will be so long until I feel better,” remind yourself that dieters end up feeling great WELL before they reach their goal weight because they gain control over their eating. Feeling great is not about the actual number on the scale – it’s a matter of feeling in control of the direction the number is moving.

May 3, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

May 3, 2013/beckadmin

If you eat out often, chances are you can’t indulge every time and still lose weight. However, remember that the experience of eating out is ALWAYS a treat (no cooking, no dishes, being served), even if the food isn’t.

May 2, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

May 2, 2013/beckadmin

If you go out to eat with a friend who then expresses disappointment when you order something healthy, remind yourself that it is not your responsibility to make others feel better about what they eat. It is your responsibility to be healthy and make eating choices that work for you.

May 1, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

May 1, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too busy to eat healthfully right now.

Response: That’s just an excuse to make unhealthy choices. In this day and age, there are almost always healthy options available that are as easy and convenient as not healthy ones.

April 30, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 30, 2013/beckadmin

Remember – your body doesn’t know how good you’ve been. Your body doesn’t know all the things you didn’t eat. It ONLY knows what you do eat, so just because you’ve been “good” all days doesn’t mean you can eat extra at night.

April 26, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 26, 2013/beckadmin

This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to eat extra because everyone else is,” remind yourself that your body doesn’t know or care what everyone around you is eating, it only knows what YOU eat. What everyone around you is (or isn’t) eating is 100% irrelevant to your body, which means you can't base your eating on others.

April 25, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 25, 2013/beckadmin

If you’ve struggled to lose weight in the past, or if you’ve lost weight and then gained it back, it’s important to remember that what you’ve done before just doesn’t work – if it did, you'd be at the weight you want. If you want this time to be different, you have to do things differently, even if it means you lose weight more slowly.

April 24, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 24, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I have to eat whenever I feel hungry.

Response: In reality, I really WANT to eat when I’m hungry, but I don’t need to eat [because I don’t have any medical problems]. While experiencing hunger may not be pleasant, it’s not so uncomfortable that I can’t keep doing what I’m doing. I can handle it!

April 23, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 23, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s okay to eat this one unplanned food, it won’t matter,” remind yourself that slip-ups usually have a more lasting effect on the rest of your day. If you allow yourself to get off track in the morning or afternoon, you’re much more likely to continue making off-track food decisions later in the day. It does matter!

April 22, 2013 – Monday Motivation

April 22, 2013/beckadmin

Many dieters find that once they gain control over their eating, it helps them feel better, and more in control, in general. Feeling in control and on track can have a positive spillover effect into so many other areas of your life!

April 19, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 19, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend, I don’t want to think about healthy eating. I just want to relax and enjoy,” remind yourself that if you choose to not ‘think’ about it now, you’ll definitely think about it Monday morning when the scale has gone up and your clothes don’t fit as well. So think about it now, or think about it later, either way you’re going to think about it.

April 18, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 18, 2013/beckadmin

Remember, cravings are like itches. The more you pay attention to them, the worse they get but the moment you get really distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away. You NEVER need to eat to make a craving go away. Turning your attention completely to something else is just as effective.

April 17, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 17, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: When I’m dieting, there are good foods that I should eat and bad foods that I should stay away from.

Response: There are no good foods and bad foods, just foods that I should eat more of and foods that I should eat less of.

April 16, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 16, 2013/beckadmin

Often dieters say things like, “I had such a hard week.” In many cases, however, it was really only hard for a few hours on a few days, but they tend to let the memory of one or two hard times color their perception of the week as a whole. It’s important to maintain a clear perspective so you don’t get discouraged by circumstances that aren’t an accurate reflection of reality!

April 15, 2013 – Monday Motivation

April 15, 2013/beckadmin

Cutting out all desserts never works for the long term because you’ll eventually eat them again and, when you do, go way overboard. Because of this, it’s actually IMPORTANT that you work treats into your diet to prove to yourself that you can eat them in reasonable portions. Desserts are a necessary part of rest-of-your-life eating!

April 12, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 12, 2013/beckadmin

If you eat out this weekend, go in with a plan! And, remind yourself that you don’t need to eat everything on your plate (because eating it won’t bring the money back), and that just because everyone else is having something doesn’t mean you should (because your body doesn’t know or care what anyone else is eating).

April 11, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 11, 2013/beckadmin

In dieting, what we think will make us feel better (like eating when stressed), actually makes us feel worse, and what we think will make us feel worse (like planning our meals in advance), actually makes us feel better!

April 10, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 10, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: “It’s okay to eat [this food] because I don’t know how many calories are in it. It’s probably not that bad, anyway.”

Response: Just because I don’t KNOW how many calories are in it, doesn’t mean it doesn’t have a lot! My lack of knowledge doesn’t change the reality of what this food is made of.

April 9, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 9, 2013/beckadmin

Mistakes are an unavoidable part of the learning process. You can’t learn to diet successfully without making mistakes along the way, just as you can’t learn to play tennis without missing a few shots. If you have the unreasonable expectation that you won’t make mistakes, it will only make you feel worse, and make it seem like a much bigger deal, when you inevitably do.

April 8, 2013 – Monday Motivation

April 8, 2013/beckadmin

You’re entitled to make mistakes, but you’re not entitled to use one mistake as an excuse to keep making more. No matter how many or how few mistakes you make this week, what matters most is what you do right after. Learning to recover IMMEDIATELY from mistakes is a skill that will help you lose weight and keep it off for good.

April 5, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

April 5, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ll wait until Monday to start my diet,” remind yourself that waiting until Monday has NEVER gotten you where you want to be. Instead, break that bad habit and get started RIGHT NOW! By Monday morning you’ll be so glad to already have experienced a few days of healthy eating and feeling better.

April 4, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

April 4, 2013/beckadmin

The more preplanning you do (which means the fewer decisions you’ll have to make on the fly), the better easier and better your day will be. It is so much easier to make good decisions ahead of time, rather than have to struggle to use willpower in the moment to make healthy choices.

April 3, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

April 3, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m just going to eat this because I don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Even if I decide to eat and ‘not think about it,’ I’ll definitely still think about it when I get on the scale, when my clothes don't fit, and when I’m feeling angry with myself because I'm stuck at a higher weight. No matter what I’m going to think about it, either now (by making healthy choices) or later when I’m facing the consequences.

April 2, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

April 2, 2013/beckadmin

Once you have positive momentum built up, it becomes so much easier to keep doing what you’re doing. You’ll be less likely to give in to unplanned eating because you’ll be able to say to yourself, “I’m doing so well, it’s not worth knocking myself off track.”

April 1, 2013 – Monday Motivation

April 1, 2013/beckadmin

We asked one dieter: What’s one advantage you’ve gotten from losing weight? She said, “Now, when I hear about an event coming up, my first thought isn’t, ‘I need to lose weight before that’ and ‘Oh no, what will I wear?’ Now, my first thought is, ‘that sounds great, I can’t wait!’” Now you: What is one of your advantages?

March 29, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 29, 2013/beckadmin

Not getting enough sleep makes everything seem harder, including (or maybe especially) sticking to healthy eating. This weekend, catch up on your sleep! You’ll have more mental and physical energy to do what you need to do.

March 28, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

March 28, 2013/beckadmin

If you’re working through the Beck Diet Solution book(s), it’s CRITICALLY important to go at your own pace and take the time to master each skill before you move on to the next one. In our work with clients, we usually spend a minimum of one week on each skill, not just one day, so never be afraid to move slowly and at your own pace.

March 27, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 27, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to give in and have this one cookie.

Response: One cookie won’t satisfy me, and if I have it, the ONLY thing it will do is cause me to have an even stronger craving for a second cookie. If I have one, I’ll want two. If I have two, I’ll want three. Don’t get started!

March 26, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 26, 2013/beckadmin

Staying on track when your life gets stressful is hard but by no means impossible. And, staying in control of your eating during stressful times will help you feel better and more in control in general. It has a positive spillover effect!

March 25, 2013 – Monday Motivation

March 25, 2013/beckadmin

Important reminder – you can’t change what has happened in the past, only what you do today and in the future. No matter how you feel about your eating from the weekend, TODAY is an opportunity for a fresh start so focus on what you can do to make it a great eating day.

March 22, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 22, 2013/beckadmin

Just because your time may be unstructured over the weekend doesn’t mean your eating has to be. If you want to feel in control and have a good weekend –have an eating plan!

March 21, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

March 21, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I can’t believe I haven’t exercised in so long, it’s too demoralizing to start now,” remind yourself, “It doesn’t matter why or when I stopped. What matters is NOW. It doesn’t matter if the last time I exercised was a day ago or a year ago, what matters is whether or not I do it today, and in the days going forward.”

March 20, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 20, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to give in to this craving. One time won’t matter.

Response: EVERY time matters because every time has an impact on the next time, and the time after that. Every time I give in, I make it more likely I’ll keep giving in. Every time I resist, I make it more likely (and easier) to resist the next time. So this time absolutely, 100% DOES matter!

March 19, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 19, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “This craving is so uncomfortable, I’m just going to give in so I don’t feel it anymore,” remind yourself that while overcoming a craving is uncomfortable in the moment, giving in is uncomfortable for SO MUCH LONGER when you feel badly and guilty about it long after.

March 18, 2013 – Monday Motivation

March 18, 2013/beckadmin

We asked one maintainer to tell us the biggest advantage she has achieved as a result of losing weight and she said, “The greatest advantage is being able to more effectively deal with everything in my life. I have more energy, both mental and physical, and I just feel like I’m able to live BETTER on a daily basis!”

March 15, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 15, 2013/beckadmin

A mistake is just a mistake and every time you make one, you ALWAYS have the option to turn yourself around immediately. This weekend, if you get off track, make the decision to put it behind you and get right back on track. Monday morning you will be so happy you did!

March 14, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

March 14, 2013/beckadmin

Don’t sit down with a big bag or container of ANYTHING. Portion off ahead of time how much you’re going to have and then sit down and eat it. Doing so will ensure that you don’t go overboard and will help you enjoy each bite more because you won’t be constantly asking yourself, “Should I have another one? Is this my last one? Should I have one more?”

March 13, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 13, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Dieting is so hard! Why am I doing this?

Response: Good question! Why AM I doing this? It’s important for me to keep in mind at all times exactly why I’m working on losing weight and what I hope to get out of it. Reading a list, every day, of all these reasons will help me remember that dieting is hard, but the advantages make it worth it.

March 12, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 12, 2013/beckadmin

Many dieters imagine they’ll be happier eating off track but when they actually do, they feel just the opposite: sick, badly, guilty. Remember – the things you think you’ll feel as a result of eating off track might, in fact, just be a fantasy, and the reality of being off track may not feel nearly as good.

March 11, 2013 – Monday Motivation

March 11, 2013/beckadmin

So often we hear from dieters sabotaging thoughts like, “I don’t deserve credit [for my weight loss efforts] because I should already be doing these things.” Here’s what we want them (and you!) to know: No you SHOULDN’T already be doing these things. If it was easy, nobody would be overweight. If it was easy, nobody who ever lost weight on a diet would gain it back. It’s really hard, but you’re learning and making progress, and you deserve credit EVERY step of the way.”

March 8, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 8, 2013/beckadmin

Being accountable for your actions is a critical part of successful weight loss because it enables you to recognize mistakes, which then allows you to learn from them for the future.

March 7, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

March 7, 2013/beckadmin

It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every time you give in to a craving and eat something unplanned (whether the food has 50 calories or 500 calories), you reinforce the habit of giving in, making it more likely you’ll give in the next time, and the time after that.

March 6, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

March 6, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: If I don’t have enough time for a long workout, it’s not worth doing anything.

Response: ANY amount of time spent exercising is better than no amount of time. It’s important to sometimes work out for smaller amounts of time so that I prove to myself that exercising doesn’t have to be ALL or NOTHING, it’s somewhere in the middle.

March 5, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

March 5, 2013/beckadmin

Because humans can go days without eating (barring any medical issues!), at any given time you never actually NEED to eat something. At that moment you may really WANT to eat, but that’s not the same as needing to eat.

March 4, 2013 – Monday Motivation

March 4, 2013/beckadmin

Repeat after us: Losing weight is hard but with practice, it gets EASIER! It’s hard but by no means impossible. It’s hard but the benefits and advantages of doing so are enormous. Every time I eat I have the opportunity to strengthen good habits and make it even easier the next time. It’s hard, but it’s not always hard, and it GETS EASIER!

March 1, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

March 1, 2013/beckadmin

If you get off track this weekend, remember that there is NO SUCH THING as “blowing it for the whole weekend,” because if you stay off track, you’ll continue to take in more calories. There IS such a thing as making a mistake and then continuing to make mistakes, but it’s impossible to ‘blow it’ definitively because at any point you get yourself back on track puts you in a better position.

February 28, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

February 28, 2013/beckadmin

At the end of the day, most people forget some (or all) of the food they ate standing up because food eaten standing up just doesn’t seem to register in the mind or body the same way as food eaten while deliberately sitting down. Working on eating every bite sitting down (and slowly and mindfully) is a comfortable way of cutting many calories from your diet because, at the end of the day, you likely won’t miss that food or feel any less satisfied.

February 27, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 27, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I did lose a little weight this week but I’m disappointed it’s not more.

Response: Real life weight loss has NOTHING to do with shows like the Biggest Loser. In real life, losing between ½ a pound and 2 pounds a week is exactly in the right range. Although I wish I was losing weight more quickly, I have to remember that doing so has never enabled me to keep it off. Every pound lost is a victory and ultimately adds up to major weight loss.

February 26, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 26, 2013/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, it means you’ll have to learn to tolerate feeling hunger and cravings. While they can be uncomfortable, nothing bad will happen as a result of experiencing them. They’re a normal part of life!

February 25, 2013 – Monday Motivation

February 25, 2013/beckadmin

Remember, when you say “no” to eating something, you’re also saying “yes” to even better things: losing weight, better health, increased self-confidence, feeling proud of yourself, and more.

February 22, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 22, 2013/beckadmin

If you get off track this weekend, remind yourself, “There’s no such thing as blowing it for the whole weekend because the calories will keep adding up. Get back on track RIGHT NOW and make the rest of the weekend great.”

February 21, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

February 21, 2013/beckadmin

It’s important to remember that you’re not doing things like working on healthy eating, resisting cravings, and limiting junk food to punish yourself. Rather, you’re doing them so that you can achieve critically important and life-changing goals.

February 20, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 20, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I need to eat to make this craving go away.

Response: I NEVER need to eat to make a craving go away. Cravings are like itches – the more I focus on them, the worse they get. The moment I start to get distracted is the moment the craving starts to go away.

February 19, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 19, 2013/beckadmin

On track eating days aren’t perfect days! In order to lose weight and keep it off, you don’t need to be perfect because nobody is perfect. What you do need is to accept your mistakes, not beat yourself up, and get right back on track.

February 18, 2013 – Monday Motivation

February 18, 2013/beckadmin

We asked one dieter what helps keep her motivated to stay on track and she said, “I remind myself that when I’m off track, I feel TERRIBLE. When I’m on track, I feel great. Staying on track feels hard some of the time, but being off track feels hard ALL of the time, physically and psychologically.”

February 15, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 15, 2013/beckadmin

It’s easier to stay on track than get back on track. When you have positive momentum built up from the week, don’t let the weekend stop it! Stay on track, keep the momentum going, and Monday morning you won’t have to put forth the effort to get back in control.

February 14, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

February 14, 2013/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, whether or not you “feel” like doing something (e.g. resisting a craving, taking time to eat breakfast, grocery shopping for healthy food) just isn’t relevant. Ask yourself, “Which do I MORE not feel like: working on healthy eating, or remaining overweight?”

February 13, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 13, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too tired/stressed/busy to exercise today.

Response: Exercise will actually help with these things, not make them worse! If I’m tired, it will give me more energy, if I’m stressed, it will provide a productive outlet, if I’m busy, it will be a necessary break to focus on myself and my needs.

February 12, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 12, 2013/beckadmin

Remember – it's not enough to read these Daily Diet Solutions once and expect them to make a difference. Take the time to copy down the ones that are particularly resonant to you onto cards and read them every day. The more you read these helpful ideas, the more they’ll pop into your head when you really need them!

February 11, 2013 – Monday Motivation

February 11, 2013/beckadmin

Successful dieting is a matter of learning specific skills and like any other skills, the more you practice them, the easier they get. However difficult dieting may feel today is not how difficult it will feel in the future. If you keep doing what you're doing, it WILL get easier.

February 8, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 8, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “it’s not fair that I have to work on losing weight and can’t eat whatever I want on weekends,” remind yourself that everyone has unfairnesses in their lives and this happens to be one of yours. But at least this is one you can do something about!

February 7, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

February 7, 2013/beckadmin

Successful weight loss and maintenance is a combination of all the small things you do in a day, not a result of any one big thing. That’s why it’s important to give yourself credit for every big AND small thing you do well!

February 6, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

February 6, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to have this extra cookie because there’s so many other desserts [at this party] that I’m not eating.

Response: My body doesn’t know or care what I don’t eat, it only knows what I DO eat.

February 5, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

February 5, 2013/beckadmin

There’s simply no magic bullet that will enable easy, fast, and LASTING weight loss. Instead of fighting against what you need to do, use that time and energy to just get started. Every journey starts with a single step – so commit to taking at least one step today.

February 4, 2013 – Monday Motivation

February 4, 2013/beckadmin

Instead of feeling burdened by having to eat healthfully and exercise, it’s important to remember how LUCKY you are to be able to do these things.

February 1, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

February 1, 2013/beckadmin

The Super Bowl is this weekend! Remember, it’s not all-or-nothing. It’s not as if you can eat everything you want or you can’t eat anything you want. Besides, staying in control of your eating during the game will ensure that you are able to enjoy eating without feeling guilty, enjoy watching the game, AND enjoy all the benefits of continuing to lose/maintain weight.

January 31, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 31, 2013/beckadmin

Eating half of your (presumably much too big) meal at a restaurant and bringing the other half home is a win/win/win situation: you get to enjoy the meal twice, you pay only once for two meals, AND you get to continue working on healthy eating and healthy habits!

January 30, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 30, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Since I didn't lose weight this week, I must be doing something wrong. This isn't working.

Response: Even if I was perfect on my diet, it’s not a guarantee that the scale will go down on any given week. It’s 100% normal for the scale to stay the same or even go up some weeks. I need to keep doing what I’m doing, and the scale WILL go down again.

January 29, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 29, 2013/beckadmin

Even without getting to weight you were at in college or the weight of your thinnest friend, you can still be happy with you are and experience major benefits of weight loss (improved self-confidence, better health, fewer aches and pains, a stable wardrobe, etc.). Remember – it’s so much more than just the number on the scale.

January 28, 2013 – Monday Motivation

January 28, 2013/beckadmin

It’s important to start working on enriching your life NOW, even if you’re not yet where you want to be in terms of weight loss. The more pleasurable things you have going on, the less and less you’ll turn to food to fulfill that role.

January 25, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 25, 2013/beckadmin

Staying in control of your eating during the weekend is just as important as during the work week. Getting off track every weekend is a recipe for frustration – it will cause you to lose and then gain the same few pounds over and over again. It’s worth it to stay in control if it means seeing real progress!

January 24, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 24, 2013/beckadmin

Eating every bite of food sitting down can be a relatively painless way of eliminating many calories from your diet because you probably don’t even notice much of what you eat standing up and it likely doesn’t factor into your overall level of satiety.

January 23, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 23, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Healthy eating/losing weight should already be easy for me so I don’t deserve credit for it.

Response: No, this shouldn’t already be easy. If it were easy, nobody would be overweight. It were easy, no one who ever lose weight on a diet would gain it back. I need to give myself credit EVERY step of the way, and in doing so, I'll build my confidence and then dieting will become easier.

January 22, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 22, 2013/beckadmin

If you’re working on healthy eating and losing weight, it probably means you also have to work on putting your own needs first (at least some of the time) and feeling entitled to ask for what you need. Remember – you can’t be good to anyone else if you’re not first good to yourself.

January 21, 2013 – Monday Motivation

January 21, 2013/beckadmin

It's important to remember that a major benefit of healthy eating and weight loss is SIGNIFICANTLY improved quality of life. Our dieters find that once they gain control over their eating, they feel so much better (mentally and physically) in ways they hadn’t even imagined.

January 18, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 18, 2013/beckadmin

If you go out to eat this weekend and think, “I need to get my money’s worth by eating everything on my plate,” remind yourself that cost of doing so (weight gain, not fitting into clothes, reinforcing bad habits, feeling overly full, getting off track, etc.) is MUCH greater than the cost of leaving food behind.

January 17, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 17, 2013/beckadmin

For many people, eating is a powerful coping mechanism for negative emotions because they give it power. They tell themselves, “Eating will help me feel better,” and then it does (in the short term). Instead, remind yourself that eating will ultimately ALWAYS make you feel worse, and then try giving something else power, like drinking hot tea or taking a walk.

January 16, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 16, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: “It’s okay to eat whatever I want because I’m sick.”

Response: My body doesn’t know or care that I’m sick, it will process all calories the same. There are comfort foods that I can eat when I’m not feeling well that are healthy, like soup. Besides, if I eat unhealthy foods to feel better when I’m sick, when I’m healthy again I won’t feel good because I’ll feel badly about having gone off my diet and gaining weight.

January 15, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 15, 2013/beckadmin

Remember, while working on healthy eating is hard some of the time, being overweight is hard ALL of the time, and in so many more ways.

January 14, 2013 – Monday Motivation

January 14, 2013/beckadmin

Feeling comfortable in your own body, being able to move around more easily and do more things, and significantly improving your health are just 3 of some of the life-altering benefits that can come as a result of weight loss. Yes, it can be hard, but the payoff can also be enormous and profound.

January 11, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 11, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I worked hard all week, I just want to relax,” remind yourself that if your goal is to lose weight and keep it off, then you can’t use food as a means to relax. But that doesn’t mean there aren’t plenty of other ways to treat yourself and relaxing things to do this weekend!

January 10, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 10, 2013/beckadmin

Remember, it’s a combination of all of the “little” things – like not eating a cookie from the cafeteria, making it a priority to eat sitting down, walking by the candy dish and not dipping in– that will make you lose weight. It’s all the daily things that lead up to BIG weight loss!

January 9, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 9, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to work on healthy eating right now because I just don’t feel like thinking about it.

Response: Either way I’m going to think about it. When I’m off track, I spend time thinking about needing to get back on track and feeling guilty about my eating. There’s no such thing as ‘not thinking about it.’

January 8, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 8, 2013/beckadmin

Sometimes when dieters go through a stressful eating situation (like the holidays or a demanding work situation), they do extraordinarily well because they are extra vigilant, knowing it’s 100% necessary. When the stressful time passes, they relax and can stray off track because their guard has gone down. Remember, successful weight loss and maintenance isn’t only a matter of how well you do during hard times, it’s also about every day in between.

January 7, 2013 – Monday Motivation

January 7, 2013/beckadmin

Dieting and losing weight can be very hard, no doubt about that. BUT, it’s important to keep in mind all of the overwhelmingly positive things that will come as a result. It’s hard but it’s undoubtedly worth it. Important things are worth working for!

January 4, 2013 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

January 4, 2013/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m discouraged by the weight I gained this holiday season,” remind yourself that this weekend is a GREAT time to get back on track and recommit yourself to healthy eating. It doesn’t matter what you did or didn’t eat over the past few weeks. What matters now is what you eat today and every day going forward.

January 3, 2013 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

January 3, 2013/beckadmin

Remember, in terms of your eating, you only have to answer to yourself. Don’t let comments or predicted reactions from others influence how you eat. You’re working on healthy eating because it’s an important goal for YOU. You don’t need to explain or answer to anybody else about this!

January 2, 2013 – Wednesday Sabotage

January 2, 2013/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m going to eat [this food] because I just don’t care.

Response: While it’s true I may not care right now, I am DEFINITELY going to care later on when I’m feeling guilty about my eating, when I’ve sabotaged myself, and when I step on the scale. I can’t let this one moment of not caring get in the way of reaching my goals. It’s not worth it!

January 1, 2013 – Tuesday Reality Check

January 1, 2013/beckadmin

Happy New Year’s! Do you have goals or resolutions for the year ahead? If so, remember that it’s important to break big goals down into smaller, more manageable ones. If your goal is to eat more healthfully, perhaps your first step can be something like, “add vegetables to every lunch and dinner,” or “have fruit for at least one snack instead of something else."

December 31, 2012 – Monday Motivation

December 31, 2012/beckadmin

We talked to someone who started her weight loss journey on January 1st, 2012 and today she is down over 50 pounds (and is loving life more than she ever thought). Regardless of where your weight is today, a new year is ALWAYS a great time to start fresh. Commit to a healthy eating plan and by this time next year who knows where you’ll be and how great you’ll be feeling!

December 28, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 28, 2012/beckadmin

Dieters often find it easier to stay in control of their eating during the week because their days are more structured. Remember – just because weekends may have unstructured time, doesn’t mean they have to have unstructured eating. This weekend, work on keeping your eating consistent and you’ll feel great on Monday morning as a result of doing so.

December 27, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 27, 2012/beckadmin

Some dieters tend to consistently eat until they’re overly full – often saying something like, “I just like to eat.” We remind them that if they work on portion control, they’re not giving up eating, they’re only giving up OVEReating and the uncomfortable sensation of having eaten too much.

December 26, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 26, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I can’t throw away this leftover holiday food, it would be a waste of food and money.

Response: If I eat food my body doesn’t need, it will be wasted in my body by turning to fat. Wasted in the trashcan or in my body, either way it’s wasted. Also, the money is already gone, eating the food won’t bring the money back, but what it may do is cause me to gain weight.

December 25, 2012 – Tueseday Reality Check

December 25, 2012/beckadmin

Remember, your body doesn’t know or care that it's Christmas. While it may be perfectly reasonable to have extra calories today, do it in a deliberate and planned way, instead of just allowing yourself to eat more, telling yourself that it doesn’t count. Also, if you eat extra in a planned way, you’ll enjoy it more because you’ll know that it’s part of your plan for the day!

December 24, 2012 – Monday Motivation

December 24, 2012/beckadmin

If you get off track with healthy eating, remind yourself that it’s never too late to get back on track. You can make the decision to get back on track right this MINUTE. Don’t wait for the next month, week, day, or hour. Do it right NOW. Prove to yourself that you never have to wait to get back on track, and you can always make the rest of the day/week/month better than it has been.

December 21, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 21, 2012/beckadmin

There is NOT ONE single food that you can eat while you’re off track that you can’t also eat when you’re on track. When you’re working on healthy eating, it’s true that you probably can’t eat as much of it as you want, but certainly any food can be worked into your diet in reasonable portions. This weekend, work on eating your favorite food in a reasonable way.

December 20, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 20, 2012/beckadmin

Whether you plan to have one, two, or three cookies at a holiday party, the most important part is that you stick to your plan. It’s critical to always stick to your plan, whatever that plan may be. The more you do so, the easier and easier it will be to continue doing so and the less effort and energy it will take because you’ll just know, “I always stick to my plan, no matter what.”

December 19, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 19, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought The holiday season is so busy, I don’t want to worry about my eating, too.

Response: It’s true, the holidays can be stressful. But guaranteed I’ll actually feel MORE stress if my eating gets out of control because I’ll feel guilty about it and be worried about gaining weight. Continuing to work on staying in control of my eating will help me to feel less stress during the holidays, not more.

December 18, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 18, 2012/beckadmin

It's helpful to have a guideline (especially this time of year) like, “No treats until after dinner.” That way, you’ll be more easily able to turn down sweets all day, knowing you get to have some later. If you want dessert during the day, remind yourself, “I don’t need to eat this now, I know I get to have a treat after dinner. I can wait.”

December 14, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 14, 2012/beckadmin

Achieving a really big goal (like losing and maintaining weight) is really a matter of achieving many smaller goals along the way. This weekend, commit to a smaller goal, like eating everything sitting down or deciding in advance when and how many treats you’ll have. Eventually the small goals lead up to big ones!

December 13, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 13, 2012/beckadmin

If you’ve lost weight and then gained it back in the past, remember that if you want different results, you have to do things differently. Cutting out favorite foods and slashing calories to lose weight quickly ultimately won’t lead to permanent weight loss because it's not maintainable. This time, focus on making changes that you CAN maintain – which makes weight loss maintainable, too.

December 12, 2012 – Monday Motivation

December 12, 2012/beckadmin

The better you feel about yourself, the better your holiday season will be. While you may think you’ll enjoy it more if you eat with abandon, likely you’ll feel badly and guilty if you do – which significantly diminishes enjoyment. This year, work on staying in control. This will help you feel better about yourself and your eating, and will help you enjoy the holiday season all the more.

December 12, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 12, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat right now because I’m stressed and need a break.

Response: If I’m stressed, I deserve to relax and take a break. But since I also deserve to lose weight, have improved health, feel better about myself, etc. I need to find other ways to relax without turning to food. Eating in order to relax and losing weight are mutually exclusive goals. I can’t have both!

December 11, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 11, 2012/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight, it’s extremely likely you can’t eat treats every time you see them during the holiday season. It’s important to remember that just because it’s the holidays, and just because the treats are there, does NOT mean you’re entitled to eat them each time you have the opportunity to do so.

December 10, 2012 – Monday Motivation

December 10, 2012/beckadmin

The most successful dieters and maintainers are NOT those who never make mistakes – rather they are those who make mistakes and then get right back on track. You do not have to be perfect in order to lose weight and keep it off. What you do need is to be willing to accept mistakes and recover from them right away.

December 7, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

December 7, 2012/beckadmin

If you have the thought, “It’s okay to eat this because this one time doesn’t matter,” remind yourself that EVERY time matters because you’re either strengthening your resistance muscle or your giving-in muscle. Every time you’re either getting closer to or farther away from your goals. This weekend, work on making every time count in your favor!

December 6, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

December 6, 2012/beckadmin

Have you ever thought, “I can get away with not practicing some of my diet skills”? In fact you probably can get away with this – but only for a period of time, and at some point it WILL catch up with you. Achieving permanent weight loss means not trying to “get away” with things. It means accepting what you need to do and doing it.

December 5, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

December 5, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m too stressed right now to work on healthy eating.

Response: Even during times of stress, I brush my teeth, put on my seatbelt, take care of my kids, etc. Since I don’t let stress be an excuse to stop doing these things, I also can’t let it be an excuse to stop practicing my dieting skills.

December 4, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

December 4, 2012/beckadmin

A cookie has the same number of calories regardless of what day of the year it is, how you’re feeling, what everyone around you is eating, how many other cookies you’ve passed up that day, if no one is watching you eat it, it's free, etc.

December 3, 2012 – Monday Motivation

December 3, 2012/beckadmin

There is a big difference between things that are really hard and things that are impossible. If you feel daunted by the prospect of losing and maintaining weight, remind yourself that it is a matter of learning and practicing (over and over again) necessary skills, not an impossible feat. Telling yourself it’s impossible is an excuse to give up. Telling yourself it’s hard but worth working on is a motivation to keep moving forward.

November 30, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 30, 2012/beckadmin

It’s important to remember that just because you THINK something doesn’t mean it’s true. This weekend, if you think, “It’s okay to eat this because everyone else is /it’s just a small piece/it won’t matter/I’ll start again on Monday,” remind yourself that these are just sabotaging thoughts and not true reflections of reality.

November 29, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

November 29, 2012/beckadmin

If you go into the break room at work and see some unexpected treat, walk right out! Remind yourself that you’re not really missing out on anything because if you had never seen it, you would never have wanted it. Then remind yourself why it’s worth it to resist and all the good things that will come as a result.

November 28, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 28, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s better to just not have any treats during the holiday season.

Response: I need to get away from all-or-nothing thinking and remember to look for the middle ground. Cutting out all treats never works because I eventually end up eating them, and then usually go overboard. While it may not be reasonable to have extra holiday treats every day, it’s important plan to have reasonable amounts all throughout the holiday season.

November 27, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 27, 2012/beckadmin

There is NOTHING magical about losing weight and/or maintaining your weight – no one perfect combination of foods that will enable immediate and permanent weight loss, no magic bullet pill or patch. Once dieters accept this and stop looking for a quick fix, it allows them to just do what they need to do – exercise and eat in a consistent and healthy way.

November 26, 2012 – Monday Motivation

November 26, 2012/beckadmin

The holiday season is upon us! This year, think about all the ways in which you can experience the spirit and joy of the holidays that have nothing to do with eating. Remember, there are many ways to feed your soul without feeding your mouth.

November 23, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 23, 2012/beckadmin

Remember – eating extra one day won’t necessarily make you gain weight, but continuing to eat extra definitely will. If you ate extra on Thanksgiving, make sure to return to normal eating today and this weekend to ensure you stay on track and feel great.

November 22, 2012 – Think Thin Thanksgiving Tip

November 22, 2012/beckadmin

This year, consider the strategy of deciding in advance to not take seconds. This way, you won’t have to struggle after you finish eating about whether or not to get more, and you’ll likely avoid the very uncomfortable sensation of feeling overly full.

November 21, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 21, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because I need to taste everything I’m cooking [for Thanksgiving].

Response: There is a big difference between tasting a little for flavor and tasting just to eat. Every bite matters because every bite has calories. I can’t fool myself into thinking it doesn’t count!

November 20, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 20, 2012/beckadmin

If you’re thinking about going into Thanksgiving without a plan, ask yourself, “When has not having a plan EVER helped me reach my goals?” In our experience, having any type of plan (even if it’s a loose one) is so much better than not having one at all. If you want this year to be different – you have to do things differently!

November 19, 2012 – Monday Motivation

November 19, 2012/beckadmin

Important reminder: We can’t change what has happened in the past, only what happens now and in the future. No matter what you ate over the weekend or how off track you may be feeling, that doesn’t mean you have to stay off track! You can change (for the better) what happens now and every day moving forward.

November 16, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 16, 2012/beckadmin

The more you prepare in advance, the less stress you’ll have during holidays. This weekend, think about what you can do in advance to get ready for Thanksgiving (if you celebrate it). If not – think about what you can do to prepare for the upcoming week. Then, use the time you’ll free up for de-stressing and self-care activities, like exercise or meditation.

November 15, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

November 15, 2012/beckadmin

If you have a hard day and then eat in response to it, the only thing you’ll do is make your day harder because you’ll then feel badly and guilty about it. And, you'll likely make the next day harder, too, because once you get off track, it’s more difficult to get back to and stay on plan.

November 14, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 14, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m worried I won’t be able to control my weight during the upcoming holiday season.

Response: While it is certainly harder to stay in control during the holidays, it’s by no means impossible. I am ultimately in charge of every bite of food I put in my mouth, which means I am ultimately in charge of whether I gain weight, lose weight, or stay the same.

November 13, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 13, 2012/beckadmin

People usually start dieting when they're highly motivated and so sticking to their plans is fairly easy. However, this initial motivation (which we call the “Honeymoon Stage”) always wears off and then dieting gets harder. This is 100% normal, it happens to everyone, and as long as you keep doing what you’re doing, dieting WILL get easier again.

November 12, 2012 – Monday Motivation

November 12, 2012/beckadmin

Even though the prospect of continuing to work on healthy eating during times of stress may seem daunting, many dieters find that when they feel in control of their eating, it helps them feel more in control in general. So what they think might make them feel more stressed actually does the exact opposite.

November 9, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 9, 2012/beckadmin

This weekend, remember that it’s not all-or-nothing. It’s not as if you can eat every bite of food you want, whenever you want it, or you can’t ever eat anything you want. There is a huge middle ground between these two extremes, and working on finding it allows you to enjoy reasonable amounts of food AND enjoy all the benefits of weight loss.

November 8, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

November 8, 2012/beckadmin

It’s not enough to read these Daily Diet Solutions once and expect them to make a big difference. What will make a difference is if you copy the ones that resonate with you onto Response Cards and read them every day. The more you read them, the more the ideas will get into your brain!

November 7, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

November 7, 2012/beckadmin

Sabogating Thought: I messed up a bit on my diet, so I might as well mess some more for the rest of the day.

Response: If I were drinking water and “messed up a bit” by spilling some on my shirt, would I keep messing up and dump the rest of the glass on myself? Making a mistake (in any situation) is NEVER a reasonable excuse to continue making more.

November 6, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

November 6, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I’m upset so I deserve to eat this comfort food to make myself feel better,” remind yourself, “It’s comfort food now but it won’t be comfort food later because I’ll feel badly and guilty about giving in ad eating it, in addition to feeling badly about situation that initially made me upset.”

November 5, 2012 – Monday Motivation

November 5, 2012/beckadmin

We asked a dieter what was one of the best advantages of losing weight for her, and she said, “When I hear about upcoming events like parties, weddings, and family gatherings, my first thought is no longer, ‘I need to lose weight before that event.’ Now the only thing I feel is excited. It’s the best feeling in the world.”

November 2, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

November 2, 2012/beckadmin

When dieters go through a rough patch they may think, “This isn’t worth it.” It’s important to remember that while dieting is hard some of the time, being overweight is hard ALL of the time, and in so many more ways. This weekend, even if dieting feels difficult, remind yourself that it’s hard but it’s worth it.

November 1, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

November 1, 2012/beckadmin

If you have leftover Halloween candy, it’s important to plan exactly what you’re going to do with it. How much are you going to get rid of? How much are you going to keep? And, for the candy that you do keep, how much and when are you going to eat it? Making these types of plans can go a long way towards ensuring that you stay on track and keep your eating under control.

October 31, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 31, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s Halloween so I can eat as much candy as I want.

Response: No matter what day of the year it is, if I overeat candy, it will have negative consequences. While it’s reasonable to plan to have some candy today, it’s also reasonable to ensure that I eat it in a controlled way so that this day doesn’t throw me off track. It's not worth it!

October 30, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 30, 2012/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters think, “I’ll never achieve and maintain my ideal weight.” We remind them that we don’t even know what their ideal weight is in the beginning because, in our definition, it is the weight they get down to when they are eating and exercising in a healthy and consistent manner. We also remind them that getting there and staying there is purely a matter of learning specific skills and practicing them over and over again until they get better and better.

October 29, 2012 – Monday Motivation

October 29, 2012/beckadmin

Important reminder: Although dieting may feel really difficult at times, so many great things come as a result of pushing through. Remember, it’s not as if you have to work hard to be disciplined and control your eating and get nothing in return – actually just the opposite is true. By doing all these things you’ll get the MOST IMPORANT things in return (improved health, self-confidence, pride, reduced physical and emotional pain, etc.).

October 26, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 26, 2012/beckadmin

Unfortunately there are no ‘healthy food fairies’ that will drop off food for you, so if you want to have healthy foods available, it means you have to make it happen. This weekend, take some time to think about what healthy foods you’d like to eat during the week and go out and buy them! Then make a plan for how and when you’ll eat them.

October 25, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

October 25, 2012/beckadmin

Dieters make mistakes most often when they unexpectedly face a hard eating situation. You can limit this by thinking through your day as a whole and taking the time to figure out when dieting might be difficult that day. This way, if it does become difficult, you’ll be in a much better position to handle it because you’ll be prepared mentally.

October 24, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 24, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because I’m working out later and will burn it off.

Response: I can’t rely on “burning it off later” as an effective way to reduce calories because not only is it possible I’ll end up skipping my workout, but likely I also overestimate the number of calories I burn while exercising, anyway. If I want to lose weight and keep it off, I can’t use the prospect of future exercise as a reasonable excuse to eat something.

October 23, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 23, 2012/beckadmin

In dieting, you can’t always stop sabotaging thoughts from occurring (after all, most of them are pretty automatic), but you can 100% control whether or not you give in and let them derail you. Remember, just because you think it doesn’t mean it’s true.

October 22, 2012 – Monday Motivation

October 22, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “Everyone else gets to eat normally, why can’t I?” Remind yourself that you ARE eating normally for someone trying to lose weight (or keep it off)! It’s important to change your definition of ‘normal’ eating and remember that your eating is 100% normal for someone with your goals.

October 19, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 19, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ll just eat whatever I want this weekend and start again on Monday,” remind yourself that getting off track every weekend is a prescription for gaining weight or staying at a higher weight. If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you have to be consistent with your eating, and practice your skills consistently, 7 days a week. We wish it were different but it’s not!

October 18, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

October 18, 2012/beckadmin

Dieters often go off track because they think they’ll enjoy themselves more if they’re not restricting their eating. We ask them to really think about how it feels when they’re off track and many find that they actually spend more time feeling badly about themselves and guilty about their eating than they do feeling good. Remember, being off track might not actually make you feel the way you think it will.

October 17, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 17, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s just one/one little bit. It won’t hurt!

Response: Consider the evidence from past experiences. When has “just one” EVER really stayed at just one? When has having “just one” EVER helped me to lose weight and keep it off? Just one actually will hurt because it'll likely turn in to more and it also reinforces my habit of giving in. Remember, it’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit!

October 16, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 16, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ve been good all day so I can eat this [extra food] now,” remind yourself, “Just because I’ve been good all day DOESN'T mean I can eat extra now. It’s the ‘extra’ that will stop me from losing weight.”

October 15, 2012 – Monday Motivation

October 15, 2012/beckadmin

We asked one maintainer how she is able to get herself to do what she needs to do to maintain her weight, day in and day out. She responded, “When I’m in control of my eating and my weight, I feel more like my natural self. When I’m out of control, I feel badly and it shows. It’s worth it to me to do what I need to do because it enables me to feel like me.”

October 12, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

October 12, 2012/beckadmin

Successful dieters and maintainers stay successful because they don’t eat whatever they want, whenever they want. Remember – your body doesn’t know or care what day it is, so if you want to be successful (or stay successful) you have to stay in control of your eating, even though it’s the weekend.

October 11, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

October 11, 2012/beckadmin

The more uncluttered your eating environment, the more you’ll be able to enjoy your meal. While eating, if you’re looking at all the bills or the emails you have to take care of, it will make mealtimes more stressful. Take a few moments to make your eating environment more serene, and you'll likely find the whole experience becomes more satisfying, too.

October 10, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 10, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t deserve credit for my efforts along the way, I only deserve credit once I reach my weight loss goals.

Response: If I were teaching a child to read, would I give him credit for each new word he learned, or would I think, “He’s got so much more to go. He only deserves credit once he can read chapter books”? It’s crucial to give myself credit each and every step of the way so that I can gain the confidence to know I can keep moving forward and learning new things.

October 9, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 9, 2012/beckadmin

You can eat a slice of pumpkin pie in 5 bites or in 25 bites. Either way it's the same amount of food, but if you eat it in 25 bites, you get to enjoy it 20 more times.

October 8, 2012 – Monday Motivation

October 8, 2012/beckadmin

Important reminder: If you think, “It’s not fair that I have to work hard and struggle with my weight,” remember that EVERYONE has unfairnesses in their lives and this is one of yours. However, unlike many unfairnesses, this is one that you can actually take control over and make better by learning and practicing specific skills. Although it may be true it’s unfair you have to work hard to lose weight, at least there are things you can do!

October 4, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

October 4, 2012/beckadmin

If you want to eat something but it’s not on your plan for that day, remember – you can always plan to eat it the next day. Even if what you’ve planned isn’t the thing you most feel like eating at that moment, that’s okay! You’ll survive! What you have planned is likely still something that you like and will enjoy.

October 3, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

October 3, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Since I’m not feeling well, I deserve to take care of myself by eating whatever I want.

Response: The real way to “take care of myself” is to fill my body with healthy foods that will help me feel better – physically and psychologically. Besides, my body doesn’t know or care that I’m sick so it’s not okay to eat a lot of unhealthy foods just because I don’t feel well.

October 2, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

October 2, 2012/beckadmin

Often dieters say things like, “Once I lose weight, I’ll try new sports/start dating/join activities, etc.” But the truth is you shouldn’t wait! It’s important to start enriching your life now because doing so will help you to lead a busier, happier life, which will support your weight-loss efforts.

October 1, 2012 – Monday Motivation

October 1, 2012/beckadmin

Food never tastes as good when you’re feeling guilty about eating it (or know you will in the future). Dieters often think they'll be dissatisfied if they make healthy choices, but often the opposite is actually true: When they eat healthfully, enjoy what they’re eating without guilt, and feel good about themselves, they wind up feeling MUCH more satisfied.

September 28, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 28, 2012/beckadmin

If you eat out and/or at other people’s houses this weekend, remember – you don’t always have control over what is served but you ALWAYS have control over how much of it you choose to eat.

September 27, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 27, 2012/beckadmin

It can be helpful to have an “Eating Out Protocol” that you follow each time you eat out, like looking at the menu ahead of time and deciding what to order, planning in advance whether or not to have bread/alcohol/dessert, reading your Advantages List and Response Cards before you go, and as soon as you get your food, physically or mentally mark off how much you’re going to eat.

September 26, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 26, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat extra because I’m at a restaurant.

Response: If my goal is to lose weight and keep it off, I can’t eat extra every time I eat out. How many times per week (or month) do I eat out? What about eating extra on weekends, holidays, special occasions, birthdays, etc.? The opportunities to eat extra are endless, so I need to figure out in advance when and where it’s reasonable to do so – it can’t just be a given.

September 25, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 25, 2012/beckadmin

Many people tend to vastly overestimate the number of calories they burn while exercising. Unless they have a very intense workout, our dieters eat about the same amount of food regardless of whether or not they’ve exercised that day. This is a helpful mindset to have because it combats against the sabotaging thought, “It’s okay to eat this [unplanned food] since I exercised today.”

September 24, 2012 – Monday Motivation

September 24, 2012/beckadmin

Successful dieting is really a matter of learning a series of necessary skills. And, like any other skill, the more you practice them, the better you get and the easier it becomes to keep doing them. However difficult dieting may be at any given time is NOT how difficult it will be a month, a year, or five years down the line because you’ll have that much more practice by then.

September 21, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 21, 2012/beckadmin

You likely won’t be able to reach your weight loss goals if you keep thinking, “I’ll eat whatever I want this weekend and start dieting again on Monday.” Waiting until Monday doesn’t work because you’ll consistently undo all your hard work from the week. This weekend, DON’T wait until Monday – just keep doing what you’re doing! Guaranteed you will be so glad you did.

September 20, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 20, 2012/beckadmin

It’s important to remember that good eating days are not necessarily perfect eating days. Dieters may very well make eating mistakes on good eating days – but when they do, they get immediately back on track and don’t lose their sense of control, so the mistakes are very minor. You don’t have to be perfect to have a 'perfect' day!

September 19, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 19, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’m not going to do my dieting tasks because I don’t want to.

Response: ‘I don’t want to’ is just my adolescent rebellion talking. Listening to that voice has NEVER helped me reach my goals so I’m not going to pay any attention to it.

September 18, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 18, 2012/beckadmin

Dieters can learn just as much from successes as they can from challenges. When dieters face difficult situations and stay in control, they can think about what enabled them to be successful and how to replicate it in the future. But, just as importantly, when dieters make mistakes it’s critical to use them as learning experiences and figure out why it happened and what they can do (or say to themselves) differently the next time.

September 17, 2012 – Monday Motivation

September 17, 2012/beckadmin

In dieting, the number on the scale is not the only thing that counts; it’s also about how dieters feel about themselves and their eating. When dieters gain control over the eating and know that they aren’t at the mercy of their hunger, cravings, and emotions, they feel GREAT, regardless of whether or not the number on the scale is what they ultimately want to see.

September 14, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 14, 2012/beckadmin

Remember, there’s nothing magical about losing weight. If you take in more calories than your body needs (even though it’s the weekend) you’ll gain weight. This weekend, work on finding ways to relax and treat yourself that don’t involve food. While doing so may not initially feel as pleasurable, remind yourself that it doesn't come with the hugely negative consequence of gaining weight.

September 13, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 13, 2012/beckadmin

When you make a dieting mistake, what do you usually say to yourself? How does that compare to what you would say to your best friend if she told you she made a mistake? Very likely you’d be a lot nicer (and more constructive) to your friend than you are to yourself, which isn’t fair! When you make a mistake, be kind to yourself. It will help you recover more quickly and feel better in general.

September 12, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 12, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to practice all of these skills before starting my diet because that will take too long.

Response: When has jumping right into a diet EVER helped me to lose weight and, more importantly, keep it off? Now I’m doing things differently by FIRST learning skills that will enable me to actually stick to my diet before making major changes in my eating. Besides, if it takes an extra two months in the beginning, what does that matter in the course of the rest of my life?

September 11, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 11, 2012/beckadmin

People who have never fasted for a religious or medical reason often don’t know the following: hunger comes and goes, it doesn’t just get worse and worse until it becomes intolerable, and it doesn’t even begin to approach the level of physical discomfort caused by other things (like surgery, labor, migraines, etc.). Hunger is not something that needs to be feared!

September 10, 2012 – Monday Motivation

September 10, 2012/beckadmin

Instead of thinking about having to eat healthfully and exercise as burdens, remember that you’re fortunate enough to be able to do them. How lucky are you to have healthy food available? How lucky are you to be able to exercise? These things are not burdens, they’re blessings, and it’s helpful to conceptualize them as such.

September 7, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

September 7, 2012/beckadmin

This weekend, focus on what you CAN eat, not what you can’t. While it’s true you probably can’t eat (and drink) everything you want and lose weight, you can still enjoy reasonable portions of lots of foods AND reach your weight loss goals.

September 6, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

September 6, 2012/beckadmin

Think Thin Thursday Tip: When you eat because you’re feeling sad or stressed, remind yourself that what you’ll ultimately do is turn one problem into two – the original one that made you sad or stressed, and now additionally the problem of feeling badly about your eating, getting off track, and potentially jeopardizing your weight loss.

September 5, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

September 5, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Oh no, I’ve eaten something I shouldn’t! I’ve really blown it for the day so I might as well just get back on track tomorrow.

Response: If you were washing your nice china and dropped a plate and it broke, would you say, “Well, I’ve blown it now!” and then throw the rest to the floor? Of course not! Making an eating mistake is like dropping a plate. You can stop the damage after one and be fine, but the more you go on to eat off track, the more plates you throw to the ground.

September 4, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

September 4, 2012/beckadmin

Eliminating certain foods from your diet is a recipe for gaining weight back. If, for example, you decide to cut out pasta, but you really like pasta, in back of your mind you probably know that you’re going to eat it again – and when you do, you may go way overboard. It’s critical to not cut out ANY foods from your diet entirely but instead learn how to eat them in reasonable portions. This is the only way to ensure that you’ll be able to maintain the changes you make and keep off the weight you lost.

September 3, 2012 – Monday Motivation

September 3, 2012/beckadmin

Especially on days when controlling your eating might be more difficult (like holidays), it’s extra important to have a plan. Think about it: have you ever made a plan and regretting doing so? Having a plan takes away the burden (and struggle) of having to continually make spontaneous eating decisions, enables you to feel good about what you’re eating, and allows you to have a great day that isn’t tarnished by feeling bad about your eating.

August 31, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 31, 2012/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: In our work with dieters, we don’t use the word “cheat” because it often has a negative and moralistic undertone. Instead, we use the word “mistake” and remind dieters that when they make dieting mistakes, the only thing it says is about them is that they’re normal and human. This weekend, if you make a dieting mistake, remind yourself that it’s not a catastrophe and that it doesn’t mean you’re bad or weak person. Then get right back on track and continue having a good eating weekend.

August 30, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 30, 2012/beckadmin

Cravings go away either when you decide to definitely give in OR when you decide to definitely NOT give in. It's important to remember that often the uncomfortable part of a craving is really the anxiety of wondering whether or not you’re going to give in. Once you firmly decide to not give and instead do something to distract yourself, the craving starts to go away.

August 29, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 29, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I don’t want to do things like eat slowly and mindfully because I like eating while zoning out in front of the television

Response: It’s true that there are some real disadvantages of trying to lose weight, and not eating in front of the television is one of them. But I can either continue eating while zoning out OR I can get everything on my Advantages List. Which is more important to me?

August 28, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 28, 2012/beckadmin

You are ENTITLED to do what you need to do in order to lose weight and be healthy, as long as you're not purposely hurting other people. To be a healthier and happier person, it’s necessary to prioritize your own needs and not always put them last. Remember, you can’t be good to anyone else if you’re not good to yourself, first.

August 27, 2012 – Monday Motivation

August 27, 2012/beckadmin

Just because losing weight is hard, doesn’t mean you can’t do it. Just because starting a healthy eating plan can be scary, doesn’t mean you shouldn’t try. We often have to work hard and face fears to accomplish our most important goals in life – and dieting/losing weight is no different!

August 24, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 24, 2012/beckadmin

In healthy eating and dieting, portion size is the key. It’s reasonable to enjoy your favorite foods, just not in huge quantities. Remember, especially if you eat out in restaurants this weekend, you likely can’t eat everything on your plate (and still lose weight) because the portions are too big. “Like” our status today if you’re committing to NOT be part of the Clean Plate Club this weekend!

August 23, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 23, 2012/beckadmin

In dieting, like in many things in life, it’s rarely all-or-nothing. It’s not as if you either can eat as much as you want, whenever you want or you can’t eat any food you enjoy. There is a huge middle ground! You can definitely have some favorite foods, some of the time while also enjoying all the benefits of weight loss. Remember: it’s NOT all-or-nothing.

August 22, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 22, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve made a mistake on my diet, that’s so terrible! I’ve really blown it for the day.

Response: I haven’t blown it for the day because I’m entitled to make mistakes. I’m human, it’s going to happen. What I’m NOT entitled to do is let one mistake be an excuse to continue making more. Get back on track right now!

August 21, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 21, 2012/beckadmin

You wouldn’t expect to instantly learn to play the piano or become a skilled tennis player in one day. Dieting is no different – no one masters it immediately. Start by making small changes, practice them, get better, then make more changes, practice them, and get better. Eventually you’ll become more and more successful at staying in control of your eating, but it never happens overnight!

August 20, 2012 – Monday Motivation

August 20, 2012/beckadmin

We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again – you can’t change what has happened in the past, you can only change what happens today and in the future. No matter what happened with your eating over the weekend, today is a new day so make it a good eating day and start the week off feeling great!

August 17, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 17, 2012/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: It’s never the absolutely perfect time to start dieting, so instead of waiting for the “right” time, or even waiting until Monday, start right now! Make this weekend a good eating weekend and prove to yourself that you never have to WAIT for the right time – you CREATE the right time.

August 16, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 16, 2012/beckadmin

Sometimes when we ask dieters what (sabotaging) thoughts led them to overeat, they say, “I wasn’t thinking anything, it just happened.” However, unlike digestion or the beating of your heart, eating is NOT automatic. Ultimately you are in charge of every bite of food you eat – which is good news! This means that you can learn to control your eating by really taking time to figure out what sabotaging thoughts you were having and coming up with strong responses to them.

August 15, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 15, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: The healthy food on my diet plan costs more than the food I really want to eat. I can’t justify spending the extra money.

Response: It’s worth it and I’m worth it! What a great way to spend money – toward a goal that I really, really want to achieve.

August 14, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 14, 2012/beckadmin

Sometimes dieters have trouble turning down food when people make comments like, “Oh, you’re not going to have any? Then I guess I won’t, either.” Remember – it’s NOT your responsibility to make others feel better about their eating choices. It IS your responsibility to make good choices for yourself so that you can be a healthier (and happier) person.

August 13, 2012 – Monday Motivation

August 13, 2012/beckadmin

It’s unhelpful to worry about whether or not you’ll be able to keep up with your diet a year from now because by the time a year has passed, you’ll have that much more practice and experience under your belt. Instead, ask yourself: Can I do it today? If the answer is yes, then do it! The rest will take care of itself.

August 10, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 10, 2012/beckadmin

Friday Weekend Warm-up: The more you focus on your mistakes, the worse you feel. The more you give yourself credit for all the great things you’re doing, the better you feel, the more momentum you build, and the easier it gets to continue doing well. This weekend, make a commitment to CREDIT.

August 9, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 9, 2012/beckadmin

One of the hardest parts of dieting is the struggle – the “should I eat this? It’s not on my plan…but it looks really good…but you’ll regret it later…but this one time won’t matter,” etc. The reason dieters struggle is because they give themselves a CHOICE. We don’t struggle to take showers, get up with our kids, or put on our seatbelts because we don’t give ourselves a choice about it. Once dieters accept that these are the things they just have to do, dieting gets EASIER.

August 8, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 8, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I’ve blown my diet for the day so I might as well keep eating and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: It’s not as if, at a certain point, the calories stop adding up. If I go on to eat 2,000 more calories, my body will count them. If I go on to eat 4,000 more calories, my body will count those, too. It makes NO SENSE to continue eating off track because the more I eat, the more weight I may gain. Get back on track RIGHT NOW!

August 7, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

August 7, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t have time to exercise now, I’ll do it later,” ask yourself, “When has ‘doing it later’ ever gotten me the results I want?” It’s so helpful to PLAN IN ADVANCE when you’re going to exercise and then just do it – no excuses!

August 6, 2012 – Monday Motivation

August 6, 2012/beckadmin

When dieters say to us, “Dieting is so hard! Why am I doing this?” we answer, “That’s a great question. Why ARE you doing it?” and then we have them review their list of all the reasons they have for wanting to lose weight. When dieting gets tough, it’s crucially important to remind yourself of exactly why you’re doing it and exactly what you hope to get out of it.

August 3, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

August 3, 2012/beckadmin

Overeating during the weekend will likely cause you to feel guilty and badly about yourself – no matter how much your sabotaging thoughts try to convince you otherwise. On the other hand, maintaining control of your eating during the weekends will help you continue losing/maintaining weight AND feel good about yourself and your eating. It’s a win/win!

August 2, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

August 2, 2012/beckadmin

If you make a dieting mistake, it’s important to continue eating normally for the rest of the day. If you tell yourself, “I just ate too much so I’m not going to eat anything else today,” you may feel anxious or panicky when you get hungry later in the day and wind up eating way more than you would have if you had just decided to eat normally.

August 1, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

August 1, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s okay to eat this because it’s just a little bit.

Response: It’s not about the calories, it’s about the habit. Every time I give in and eat unplanned food, I make it more likely I will the next time because I’ll be able to say to myself, “I gave in last time, so it’s okay to do it again this time.” Whether the food has 20 calories or 200 calories, it still reinforces the habit of giving in.

July 31, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 31, 2012/beckadmin

Food simply isn’t as enjoyable when you know you’re going to feel guilty about it later. When you’re making food decisions, remind yourself that the eating experience isn’t limited to just when the food is in your mouth – it also includes how you feel about it after.

July 30, 2012 – Monday Motivation

July 30, 2012/beckadmin

In dieting, like everything else in life, you WILL make mistakes. If you were learning to play the piano and hit a wrong key, you wouldn’t think, “This is so terrible! I should just give up right now.” Of course not! You’d know that with practice you’ll get better. Dieting is no different – mistakes are just mistakes and not an indication that you should give up.

July 27, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 27, 2012/beckadmin

No matter what the event is, our dieters find that they have a much easier time staying in control of their eating when they have some type of plan. Spend a few minutes today thinking about all of the potentially difficult situations you may encounter this weekend and begin to formulate plans. Guaranteed the time investment now will pay off later!

July 26, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 26, 2012/beckadmin

If you’re worried about turning down food that someone is offering you, ask yourself: Compared to other disappointments in that person’s life, how disappointed will s/he really be if I don’t eat this food right now? On the other hand, if I reinforce the tendency to give in, go off my diet, and jeopardize my weight loss, how disappointed will I be?

July 25, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 25, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: Sooner or later I'm going to eat the whole box of chocolates so I might as well eat them all now.

Response: This doesn’t have to become a self-fulfilling prophesy! There are things I can do to make sure this doesn't happen, like IMMEDIATELY either throw away the leftovers or get some distance from them. If I can't get to them, I can't eat them.

July 24, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 24, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I don’t have time to eat healthy so I’ll just eat whatever is available,” remind yourself that, especially if you spend time over the weekend preparing healthy ingredients, it probably won’t take ALL that much longer. And think about how much time and money you’ll save in the long term when you don’t have health problems as a result of carrying around extra weight!

July 23, 2012 – Monday Motivation

July 23, 2012/beckadmin

No matter how smart, successful, and disciplined you are in every other area of life, this does not automatically guarantee that you will be good at losing and maintaining weight, because doing so takes learning and practice of specific skills. So cut yourself a break and instead start working on what you need to do today!

July 20, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 20, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “It’s the weekend, I’ve worked hard all week so I deserve to unwind,” remind yourself, “Yes, it’s true I do deserve to relax and unwind this weekend, but I also deserve to achieve everything on my Advantages List, so I have to go about doing that without turning to food.”

July 19, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 19, 2012/beckadmin

If you think, “I’ll start working on my diet tomorrow,” remind yourself that today is yesterday’s tomorrow, which means that tomorrow is today and it’s time to get started RIGHT NOW!

January 19, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 19, 2012/beckadmin

Cravings are about want, NOT need. When you think, “I really need this food right now,” remind yourself, “Actually, I really want this food right now, but I want all the benefits of weight loss so much more. It’s worth it to resist because it will get me to my goals.”

July 18, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 18, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: It’s not fair that I have to watch what I eat and other people don’t.

Response: While it’s true that some people are naturally thinner with naturally smallerr appetites, it’s probably a MUCH smaller percentage than I think. In reality, chances are very high that they’re watching what they eat, too!

July 17, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 17, 2012/beckadmin

It’s important to not be overly influenced by the number on the scale. If dieters see a higher number, they may get demoralized and overeat. If they see a lower number, they may think that it’s okay to loosen up and eat more. Remember – the number on the scale is just one point of information and shouldn’t impact how you eat on any given day.

July 16, 2012 – Monday Motivation

July 16, 2012/beckadmin

We asked a maintainer how she finds the motivation to keep up with her healthy eating and exercise and she said, “For me, it’s not a choice. I feel better in every single way now that I’m at a normal weight and I would never go back there. I don’t give myself a choice.”

July 13, 2012 – Friday Weekend Warm-up

July 13, 2012/beckadmin

Over the weekend, it can be helpful to have a few specific goals in mind that you’re committed to following through on, like having dessert just once a day, limiting snacks, and eating everything sitting down, slowly, and mindfully. This way, you’ll know exactly what it is you’re focusing on and have a much better chance of feeling great about the weekend as a whole.

July 12, 2012 – Think Thin Thursday Tip

July 12, 2012/beckadmin

When dieters say, “Dieting was so hard this week,” we always question them further and often find out that, in actuality, it was really hard a few times during the week but these experiences were coloring their perception of the week as a whole. In dieting, it’s important to maintain an accurate sense of reality so that you don’t psych yourself out by thinking it’s always harder than it is.

July 11, 2012 – Wednesday Sabotage

July 11, 2012/beckadmin

Sabotaging Thought: I just ate something I wasn’t supposed to. I’ve really blown it! I might as well keep eating whatever I want and get back on track tomorrow.

Response: If I was washing my nice china and accidently broke a plate, I wouldn’t go to my china cabinet and smash all the rest of it. Dieting is the same – it makes NO SENSE to compound one mistake with more!

July 10, 2012 – Tuesday Reality Check

July 10, 2012/beckadmin

If you want to lose weight and keep it off, you have to be committed to the process. Dieters who undermine their commitment by saying things to themselves like, “Maybe I don’t really need/want to lose weight,” or “Maybe I don’t actually have to do these things,” will have a much, much harder time getting themselves to just do what they need to do.